project title page 1 - northland assoc...e101 electrical removal plans e102 electrical plans e103...

PROJECT TITLE PAGE 1

SU SADLER HALL ELEVATOR MODERNIZATION

SU PROJECT Number 102671-20125

SYRACUSE UNIVERSITY

SYRACUSE, NEW YORK

Campus Planning, Design, and Construction1320 Jamesville Avenue

Syracuse UniversitySyracuse NY 13244-5140

JANUARY 24, 2020

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Bidding RequirementsInvitation to BidInstructions to BiddersForm of Proposal

Form of ContractStandard Form of Agreement Between

Owner and Contractor [AIA, A 101 - 2017 Edition, as amended]

General ConditionsGeneral Conditions of the Contract for Construction

[AIA, A201 - 2017 Edition, as amended]

Contractor Insurance Requirements

Project Number: 102671-20125 Date: January 24, 2020Project Name: SU Sadler Hall Elevator Modernization 2020

TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 2

Specifications

Division 1 - General Requirements01 01 00 - SUMMARY OF WORK01 01 05 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS01 21 00 - ALLOWANCES01 22 00 - UNIT PRICES01 23 00 - ALTERNATES01 26 00 - MODIFICATION PROCEDURES01 31 00 - PROJECT COORDINATION01 31 50 - PROJECT MEETINGS01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES01 40 00 - QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES01 42 00 - REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES01 51 00 - INDOOR AIR QUALITY DURING CONSTRUCTION01 60 00 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT01 63 10 - PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING01 74 00 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS01 77 00 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT01 77 10 - FINAL CLEANING01 78 23 - OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

Division 4 - Masonry04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY

Division 5 - Miscellaneous Metals05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS

Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING

Division 9 - Finishes09 20 00 - METAL FRAMING & DRYWALL09 91 00 - PAINTING

Division 14 - Conveying Equipment14 21 00 - TRACTION ELEVATORS14 21 50 - GC/TRADE SUPPORT FOR ELEVATOR INSTALLATION14 28 00 - ELEVATOR SYSTEM STARTUP & WITNESSED TESTING



Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning23 00 00 - HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS23 05 00 - HVAC BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS23 07 00 - HVAC INSULATION23 31 00 - HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS23 37 00 - HVAC AIR INLETS & OUTLETS23 62 00 - SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS23 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING FOR HVAC SYSTEMS

Division 26 - Electrical26 00 00 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS26 05 00 - ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS26 05 15 - TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION ELECTRICAL SERVICES26 05 26 - GROUNDING26 05 53 - ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION26 09 23 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES26 24 00 - PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS26 29 13 - MOTOR STARTERS & DISCONNECTS26 50 00 - LIGHTING26 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS

Division 27 - Communications27 00 01 - AUDIO-VISUAL AND COMMUNICATIONS RACEWAY SYSTEM

Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security28 05 28 - FIRE ALARM RACEWAY SYSTEM AND CONDUCTORS28 08 00 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM STARTUP & WITNESSED TESTING28 31 00 - FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEM28 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING FOR ELECTRONIC

SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEMS



List of Drawings

Sheet SheetNumber TitleT100 TITLE SHEETV101 ELEVATOR REMOVAL PLANS – PHASE 1V102 ELEVATOR PLANS – PHASE 1V103 ELEVATOR REMOVAL PLANS – PHASE 2V104 ELEVATOR PLANS – PHASE 2V105 HOISTWAY SECTIONSV500 ELEVATOR DETAILSA101 ARCHITECTURAL PLANS, SCHEDULES, AND DETAILSM101 MECHANICAL AND IAC PLANS AND SCHEDULESE100 ELECTRICAL NOTES, SCHEDULE, AND DETAILSE101 ELECTRICAL REMOVAL PLANSE102 ELECTRICAL PLANSE103 FIRE ALARM PLANS AND DETAILS


INVITATION TO BID PAGE 1

Project No. 102671-20125

Syracuse University(Owner)

Single Sealed Bids for the SU Sadler Hall Elevator Modernization 2020 project, at SyracuseUniversity, Syracuse, New York will be received by Syracuse University at the office ofCampus Planning, Design and Construction, Attn: Karla Salmonsen, 1320 Jamesville Ave.,Syracuse, New York 13244, until Friday, February 14, 2020 at 3:00 p.m.

The Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Form of Proposal, Form of Contract [AIA, A 101,2017 Edition as amended], General Conditions [AIA, A 201, 2017 Edition as am ended], Plans,Specifications and Contract Documents may be examined and copies obtained at thefollowing office

Campus Planning, Design, and ConstructionSyracuse University1320 Jamesville AvenueSyracuse New York 13244-5140

Bidders will be issued one (1) set of Drawings and Specifications in electronic format.

Additional drawings will be issued at the cost of printing.

The Owner reserves the right to waive any informalities or to reject any or all bids.

Prime Contractors are advised to attend a Pre-Bid Walk Through to be held on Monday,February 3, 2020 at 9:00 a.m at the site. The contact for all technical questions regardingdocuments is Marc Peterson at Peterson Guadagnolo Consulting Engineers PC at (315) 476-8311. The contact for questions regarding permissible subcontractors, contractual issues orOwner items is the SU Project Manager, Mike Haggerty, phone (315) 416-1731, [email protected].

Each bidder must deposit with their bid, security in the amount specified, subject to theconditions provided in the Instructions to Bidders.

No bidder may withdraw their bid after the actual time and date of the opening thereof.

Bidders are advised that it is Syracuse University’s intent to achieve the following levels ofparticipation on the project by disadvantaged constituencies:

5% of the Contract Sum on a cumulative basis subcontracted to (3%), or spent with suppliers(2%) which are, certified minority owned businesses having their principal place of businesswithin the County of Onondaga, New York.


mailto:[email protected]

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PAGE 1

A. RECEIPT OF OPENING OF BIDS:

1. Bids will be opened at the time and place set forth in the Invitation to Bid.2. The Owner may consider informal any bid not prepared and submitted in

accordance with the provisions hereof and may waive any informalities or rejectany and all bids. Any bid may be withdrawn prior to the above scheduled timefor the opening of bids or authorized postponement thereof. Any bid receivedafter the time and date specified shall not be considered. No bidder maywithdraw a bid after the actual time and date of the opening thereof.

B. PREPARATION OF BID:

1. Each bid must be submitted on the prescribed form. All blank spaces mustbe filled in, in ink or typewritten in both words and figures. Failure tocomply may cause the bid to be declared informal.

2. Each bid must be submitted in a sealed envelope bearing on the outside thename of the bidder, his address and the name of the project and branch of thework for which the bid is submitted. If forwarded by mail, the sealed envelopecontaining the bid must be enclosed in another envelope as specified in theForm of Proposal.

3. This project is to be bid, the contracts drawn and payment made in such amanner that Sales and Compensating Use Taxes of the State of New York andof cities and counties will not apply to purchases and sales of materials andsupplies. (See Article O. Assessments and Taxes).

4. It is mandatory that all proposal figures be divided into separate bids covering (a)materials and supplies only, (b) all work except materials and supplies and (c)total proposal, total of (a) plus (b) wherever it is indicated on the proposal form.

5. All Subcontractors shall follow the procedure indicated in submitting theirproposal to the Prime Contractor.

C. SUBCONTRACTS:

1. The bidder is specifically advised that any person, firm or other party to whom itis proposed to award a subcontract under the Contract must be acceptable tothe Owner.

D. METHOD OF BIDDING:

1. The Owner invites a single bid for the Complete Project as shown on thedrawings and specified herein.

2. Informative bids, when requested, shall be submitted with the proposal whereindicated on the Form of Proposal.



E. LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS:

1. Each bidder shall list on the Form of Proposal in the space indicated theproposed major Subcontractors for the portions of the work as indicated.

2. Prior to Award, the lowest bidder shall submit a list of proposed Subcontractorsfor the remaining portions of the work.

3. Failure to submit such lists will cause the bid to be declared informal.

F. MATERIAL LISTS:

1. Within seventy-two (72) hours after Notice of Award, the Contractor shall submita material list, indicating the manufacturer or supplier as applicable.

G. BID SECURITY:

1. Each bid must be accompanied by bid bond, certified check, or treasurer’s checkin the amount of 5% of the bid. Checks will be returned to all but the two lowestbidders within three (3) days after the formal opening of the proposals. The twolowest bidders security will be returned within forty-eight (48) hours after theOwner and the accepted bidder have executed the Contract, or if no Contracthas been so executed, within 30 days after the formal bid opening

2. If after notice of acceptance of his proposal, the successful bidder fails orrefuses to execute and deliver the Contract, bonds and insurance within 5 workdays, he shall forfeit to the Owner the security deposited with his proposal asliquidated damages, not as a penalty.

H. PERFORMANCE BOND & LABOR & MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND:

1. The successful bidder shall deliver to the Owner, an executed performance andpayment bond in the amount of one hundred percentum (100%) of the Contractamount. The premium for said bonds shall be included in the Contractor’s Bid. The bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than the dateof his execution of the Contract, or if the Work is commenced prior thereto inresponse to a letter of intent, the bidder shall, prior to commencement of theWork, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be issued

I. TIME OF COMPLETION:

1. Bidder must agree to commence work immediately upon receipt of an executedContract or a Letter of Intent of the Owner and to fully complete the project byAugust 24, 2020.



J. ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS:

1. No interpretation of the meaning of the plans, specifications or other biddingdocuments will be made to any invited bidder orally. Every request for suchinterpretation to be given consideration must be received at least one day prior tothe date fixed for the opening of Bids.

2. Any and all such interpretations and any supplemental instructions will be in theform of confirming written addenda to the specifications or revised drawings.

K. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT:

1. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Document No. A201 ofthe American Institute of Architects, 2017 Edition as amended by SyracuseUniversity, is hereby made a part of this Specification, to the same extent as ifherein written out in full.

L. NOTICE OF SPECIAL CONDITIONS:

1. Attention is particularly called to those parts of the Contract Documents andspecifications which deal with the following:

a. Informative Pricesb. List of Subcontractorsc. Schedules and Procedure of Workd. Tax Exemptione. Equal Opportunity Clausef. Insurance Requirementsg. Multi-Employer Workplace Program

<http://ehss.syr.edu/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/SU-Written-Hazard-Communication-Program-Version-November-9-2017.pdf >

h. Lead Management Program<http://ehss.syr.edu/wp-content/uploads/2017/08/Lead-Management-Program-Final.pdf >

h. Equipment List Requiring Completed Inventory Audit Sheeti. Minority and Women Owned Business Monthly Utilization Report Form Bj. Monthly Minority and Women Work Force Utilization Report Form Ck. Interim Waiver of Claims and Liens and Release of Rights (General

Contractor)l. Interim Waiver of Claims and Liens and Release of Rights (Subcontractor)

M. METHOD OF AWARD:

1. If the bid is within the amount of funds available to finance the project, award ofthe Contract may be made to the lowest qualified bidder by method as follows:



a. If the award is to be made on the basis of base bid only, it may be madeto that responsible bidder whose base bid, therefore, is the lowest.

b. If the award is to be made on the basis of a combination of base bid withalternates, it may be made to that responsible bidder whose net bid onsuch combination is the lowest, using alternates in the order elected bythe Owner.

c. The ability of the bidder to complete the work on the schedule statedherein will be given a high degree of consideration in awarding theContract.

d. The award may also be made on the basis of an evaluation of the relativecost and overall quality and appropriateness of each proposal.

2. The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids.3. In determining who is the lowest bidder, the Owner shall compare the total base

bid (the aggregate in each case of the total of (a) the bid for materials andsupplies and (b) the bid for all work except materials and supplies).

N. OBLIGATION OF BIDDER:

1. At the time of the opening of bids, each bidder will be presumed to haveinspected the site, to have familiarized himself with local conditions, and to haveread, and to be thoroughly familiar with the Bidding documents (including alladdenda). The failure or omission of any bidder to examine any form,instruments, or document shall in no way relieve any bidder from any obligationin respect of his bid.

O. ASSESSMENTS AND TAXES:

1. Exemptions from Sales Tax - The Sales and Compensating Use Taxes of theState of New York and of cities and counties do not apply to purchases andsales of materials and supplies pursuant to the provisions of this Contract. Thesetaxes are not to be included in bids. This exemption does not, however, apply totools, machinery equipment or other property leased by or to the Contractor orSubcontractor or to materials and supplies of a kind which will not beincorporated into the completed project (See “Tax Exemption”, See Article X.).

2. Other Assessments and Taxes - Each bidder shall include in his base bidproposal all other costs and liabilities other than excluded in O.1. above for theamounts assessed under any sales, consumer, use or other similar tax, anyassessment or taxes upon the wages or salaries paid to employees of theContractor and his Subcontractors under the Contract or any other taxesassessed by the Federal, State or Local Governments.

P. DISCRIMINATION:

1. Each Contractor agrees, in accordance with the applicable provisions of theLabor Law of the State of New York, to the following:



2. That in the hiring of employees for the performance of work under this Contractor any Subcontractor hereunder, no Contractor or Subcontractor nor any personacting on behalf of such Contractor or Subcontractor, shall by reason of race,creed, color, sex or national origin discriminate against any citizen of the State ofNew York who is qualified and available to perform the work to which theemployment relates.

3. That no Contractor, Subcontractor, nor any person on his behalf, shall, in anymanner, discriminate against or intimidate any employee hired for theperformance of work under this Contract on account of race, creed, color, sex ornational origin.

4. Employment practices to be in accordance with affirmative action plan asoutlined by Building Industry Minorities Employment Program of Central NewYork, Inc.

Q. LABOR LAWS:

1. All Contractors and Subcontractors performing work at the sites of these projectsshall comply with the applicable provisions of the “Labor Law”, as amended, ofthe State of New York.

2. Each Contractor and Subcontractor is herein notif ied that all occupationsemployed directly on the site of the work of this Contract shall be paid hourlywage rates not less than that determined by the Industrial Commission of theNew York State Department of Labor in accordance with the applicableprovisions of the “Labor Law”.

3. Notices of Compliance with Workmen’s Compensation Law and DisabilityBenefits Law, as amended, shall be displayed in a prominent place.

R. QUALIFICATIONS:

1. Bidders must be skilled and regularly engaged in the class of work bid for.

S. CONDITIONS OF WORK:

1. Each bidder shall inform himself of all conditions relating to the construction andlabor under which the work will be performed. Failure to do so will not relieve asuccessful bidder of his obligation to furnish all material and labor necessary tocarry out the provisions of the Contract documents and to complete thecontemplated work for the consideration set forth in his bid. The Contractor in thecarrying out of his work must employ such methods or means as will not causeany interruption or interference with the work of any other Contractor, or theoperations of the Owner.

2. The Owner is exempt from payment of sales and compensating use taxes of theState of New York and of cities and counties on all materials and supplies sold tothe Owner pursuant to the provisions of this Contract (See Articles B. and O.).



T. LAWS AND REGULATIONS:

1. Contractor at all times shall observe and comply with all Federal, State, and locallaws, by-laws, ordinances, codes and regulations, in any manner affecting theconduct of the work or applying to any employees on the Project, as well as allorders or decrees which have been promulgated or enacted, or which may bepromulgated or enacted during the progress of the work by any legal bodies ortribunals having authority or jurisdiction over the work, materials, employees, orthe Contract. The Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner andall its officers, employees, and agents, from all suits, actions or claims of anycharacter or description brought for, made on account of, or arising from theviolation of any law, by-law, ordinance, regulation, order or decree. Comply withthe Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).

U. PERMITS:

1. The Contractor shall give requisite notices, obtain and pay for the building permitand all other permits, and pay for all deposits and fees necessary for theinstallation, tests, and inspection of all work provided under this specificationexcept for Owner provided testing services described in Section 01 40 00. Provide testing as required by the regulations of the local and/or stateauthorities.

V. EXAMINATION OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC.:

1. Before Submitting Proposal

a. Examine all drawings and specifications relating to all trades to determinescope and relation to other work.

b. Examine all existing conditions affecting compliance with plans andspecifications by visiting site and/or building.

c. Ascertain access to site, available storage and delivery facilities.

2. Before Commencing Work

a. Verify all governing dimensions at building.b. Inspect all adjacent work.

W. INSURANCE - The Contractor shall provide and deliver, and maintain during the termof this Agreement the following insurance with at least the minimum coverages andlimits indicated below:

1. Worker’s Compensation Insurance - Worker’s Compensation and Employers’Liability Insurance as required under the laws of the State of New York.

2. Disability Insurance - Disability insurance as required under the laws of the Stateof New York.



3. Commercial General Liability and Property Damage Insurance - CommercialGeneral Liability and Property Damage insurance written on an occurrence basisand a commercial form which shall specifically include contingent liability arisingout of operations performed by Subcontractors, contractual liability with a specificendorsement referring to the University’s project name and number, completedoperations and products liability, with limits as follows:

Commercial General Liability including contractual liability for bodily injury andproperty damage $1,000,000 per occurrence, $2,000,000 aggregate per project.

The policy shall contain no labor law exclusion.

4. Automobile Liability Insurance - Automobile liability insurance covering owned,non-owned, and hired vehicles, with limits as follows:

$1,000,000 combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage.

5. Umbrella Liability Insurance - Umbrella liability policy to increase the limits of theinsurance required under paragraph 3 and 4 above to not less than $5,000,000per occurrence and in the aggregate per project.

The policies required by paragraph 3 above and the umbrella policy, shall namethe University as an additional insured with respect to the University’s projectname and number to which these Insurance Requirements pertain. The abovepolicies shall be primary and non-contributory insurance ahead of any insurancecarried by the University with respect to the Project, and the Contractor shallfurnish the written consent of the insurers to the primacy of the policies.

This insurance shall be placed with insurance companies authorized to dobusiness in New York State and rated at least A-minus by Best’s Key RatingGuide, with a financial category of VIII or higher. The insurance provided by theContractor shall incorporate a provision requiring the giving of written notice atleast 30 days prior to the cancellation, non-renewal, or material modification ofany such policies.

The Contractor shall file with the University certificates, evidencing the requiredinsurance. The certificate will not be acceptable to the University if there is adisclaimer to the validity of this coverage unless a copy of the actual policyendorsement accompanies the certificate. Acceptable policy endorsements areas follows: ISO Form Additional Insured Endorsement CG 20 10 11 85, or thecarrier’s manuscript equivalent that covers completed operations, naming theUniversity and the Architect and Architect’s consultants as an additional insuredwith respect to the University’s project name and number and stating that thepolicies shall be primary and non-contributory ahead of any other insurancecarried by the University. If any of the insurance policies required in paragraph 1-5 include deductibles or self insured retentions, satisfaction of the deductibles orself-insured retentions shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.



A Certificate of Insurance which states “ATIMA” or “As Their Interests MayAppear” will not be accepted.

6. Property Insurance - In accordance with (a) or (b) below, whichever is applicable,Property Insurance shall be maintained upon the entire work to the full insurablevalue of the construction cost thereof as more fully described in Sub-Paragraph11.3.1 of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, as amended.This insurance shall specifically insure against the risk of fire and extendcoverage and shall include “all risk” insurance for physical loss or damageincluding, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism and maliciousmischief.

a. In projects where there is no Construction Manager, the Contractor shallprovide and maintain the Property Insurance in accordance with therequirements of Article 11 of the General Conditions of the Contract forConstruction.

b. In projects where there is a Construction Manager, the ConstructionManager shall provide and maintain the Property Insurance in accordancewith the requirements of Article 11 of the General Conditions of theContract for Construction.

[ T ] If checked in the preceding box, the Contractor shall also provide a PropertyInsurance Policy providing coverage as detailed below.

( T) Builder’s Risk Insurance: Contractor shall provide an “All Risk” builders riskinsurance policy for fire, flood, earthquake, terrorism, testing of mechanical orelectrical devices and extended coverages, on all the Premises andImprovements. The policy shall include Contractor and Subcontractors asnamed insureds and Owner, as its interest may appear. The amount ofinsurance shall be 100% of full replacement cost. The policy shall contain aConsent of Occupancy endorsement, a waiver of subrogation clause in the formrequired by Section 11.3.7.

( ) Installation Floater: Contractor shall provide an “All Risk” installation floaterpolicy, on a replacement cost basis and shall include coverage for flood andearth movement as well as coverage for losses that may occur during equipmenttesting. The Installation Floater must provide coverage from the time theequipment/material becomes the responsibility of the Contractor and shallcontinue without interruption during the installation, including any time duringwhich the equipment/material is being transported to the installation site, orawaiting installation, whether on or off site. The policy shall be in an amountequal to the initial Contract Amount plus additional coverage equal to contractamount for all subsequent change orders. The policy shall include Contractorand Subcontractors as named insureds and Owner, as its interest may appear.The policy shall contain a Consent of Occupancy endorsement, a waiver ofsubrogation clause in the form required by Section 11.3.7.



X. TAX EXEMPTION:

1. The Owner is exempt from payment of Federal, State, Local taxes, and Salesand Compensating Use Taxes under Article 28 of the State of New York tax lawand of cities and counties on all materials and supplies sold to the Ownerpursuant to the provisions of the Contract. These taxes are not to be included inbids. This exemption does not, however, apply to tools, machinery, equipment,or other property leased by or to the Contractor or a Subcontractor, and theContractor and his Subcontractors shall be responsible for and pay any and allapplicable taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes, on such leasedtools, machinery, equipment, or other property. Title to all materials shall pass tothe Owner upon delivery to the job site and each Contractor’s subcontracts andall purchase orders must so provide.

2. The Contractor agrees to sell and the Owner agrees to purchase all the suppliesand materials required, necessary or proper for or incidental to the constructionof the Project covered by the Agreement.

a. The sum paid under the Agreement shall be deemed to be in fullconsideration for the performance by the Contractor of all his duties andobligations under this Agreement in connection with said sale.

b. The Contractor agrees to construct the Project and to furnish and performall work and labor required, necessary or proper for or incidental thereto,except that the supplies and materials sold to the Owner, under thepreceding paragraph, shall be furnished by the Owner to the Contractorfor use in their performance of said work and labor, and shall be deemedto be in full consideration for their performance by the Contractor of all hisduties and obligations under his Agreement in connection with said workand labor. The purchase by the Contractor of supplies and materials soldhereunder will be a purchase or procurement for resale and therefore notsubject to the New York State Sales or Compensating Use Taxes or anysuch taxes of cities or counties. The sale of such supplies and materialsby the Contractor to the Owner will not be subject to the aforesaid sales orcompensating use taxes.

c. With respect to such supplies and materials sold hereunder, theContractor, at the request of the Owner, shall furnish to the Owner suchbills of sale and other instruments as may be required by it, properlyexecuted, acknowledged and delivered, assuring to it title to such suppliesand materials free of encumbrances and the Contractor shall mark orotherwise identify all such supplies and materials at the property of theOwner.



d. The purchase by Subcontractors of supplies and materials to be soldhereunder will also be a purchase procurement for resale to theContractor (either directly or through other Subcontractors) and thereforenot subject to the aforesaid sales or compensating use taxes, providedthat the subcontract agreements provide for the re-resale of such suppliesand materials prior to and separate and apart from the incorporation ofsuch supplies and materials into the permanent construction and thatsubcontract agreements are in a form similar to the Contract with respectto the separation of the sale of supplies and materials from the work andlabor to be provided.

3. If as a result of such sale of supplies and materials, (a) any claim is madeagainst the Contractor by the State of New York or any city or county for sales orcompensating use taxes on the aforementioned supplies and materials, or (b)any claim is made against the Contractor by a material man or a Subcontractoron account of a claim against such material man or Subcontractor by the State ofNew York or any city or county for sales or compensating use taxes on theaforementioned supplies and materials, then, if the Contractor andSubcontractors have complied with the provisions of the Contract relatingthereto, the Owner will reimburse the Contractor for an amount equal to theamount of such tax required to be paid in accordance with the requirements oflaw, provided that:

a. 1) The subcontract agreements in connection with the Contractprovide for the resale of such supplies and materials prior to andseparate and apart from the incorporation of such supplies andmaterials into the permanent construction; and

2) Such subcontract agreements are in a form similar to the Contractwith respect to the separation of the sale of supplies and materialsfrom the other work and labor to be provided; and

3) Such separation is actually followed in practice including theseparation payment for supplies and materials from the paymentsfor other work and labor.

b. The Contractor and his Subcontractors and material-men obtain any andall necessary resale exemption certified from the appropriategovernmental agency or agencies, and furnish a resale certificate to allpersons, firms or corporations from which they purchase supplies andmaterials for the performance of the work covered by this Contract.

c. The Contractor and all Subcontractors maintain and keep, for a period ofsix years after the date of the final payment, for the sale or, if a claim forsale or compensating use tax is pending or is finally settled, recordswhich, in the judgment of the Department of Taxation and Finance,adequately show (a) all materials and supplies purchased by them forresale pursuant to the provisions of the Contract and (b) all materials andsupplies sold to the Owner pursuant to the provisions of the Contract.



d. The Owner is afforded the opportunity, before any payment of tax ismade, to contest said claim in the manner and to the extent that theOwner may choose and to settle or satisfy said claims, and such attorneyas the Owner may designate is authorized to act for the purpose ofcontesting settling and satisfying said claim.

e. The Contractor and the Subcontractor give immediate notice to the Ownerof any such claim, cooperate with the Owner and its designated attorneyin contesting said claim and furnish promptly to the Owner and saidattorney all information and documents necessary or convenient forcontesting said claim, said information and documents to be preserved forsix (6) years after the date of final payment for the sale or, if such a claimis pending or threatened at the end of such six (6) years, until such claimis finally settled. If the Owner elects to contest any such claim, it will bearthe expense of such contest.

f. Nothing in this Article is intended or shall be construed as relieving theContractor from his obligations under the Agreement and the Contractorshall have the full continuing responsibility to install the materials andsupplies purchased in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, toprotect the same, to maintain them in proper condition and to forthwithrepair, replace and make good any damage thereto without cost to theOwner until such time as the work covered by the Contract is fullyaccepted by the Owner; and Title to all supplies and materials to be soldby the Contractor to the Owner pursuant to the provisions of the Contractshall immediately vest in and become the sole property of the Owner upondelivery of such supplies and materials to the site.

Notwithstanding such transfer of title, the Contractor shall have the fullcontinuing responsibility to install such materials and supplies, protectthem, maintain them in proper condition and forthwith repair, replace andmake good any damage thereto without cost to the Owner until such timeas the work covered by the Contract is fully accepted by the Owner. Suchtransfer of title shall in no way affect any of the Contractor’s obligationshereunder. In the event that after title has passed to the Owner, any ofsuch supplies and materials are rejected as being defective or otherwiseunsatisfactory, title to all such supplies and materials shall be deemed tohave been transferred back to the Contractor.



Y. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY/AFFIRMATIVE ACTION:

1. It is agreed that affirmative action shall be intended to afford equal employmentopportunity to all qualified persons without regard to race, creed, color, age, sex,religion, ancestry or national origin. This shall be applicable to but not limited to,all matters relating to hiring, training, promotion, transfer or termination ofemployment. Furthermore, the parties agree to cooperate to the fullest extentwith the intent and purposes of the applicable statutes, regulations and ExecutiveOrders, including, as applicable, Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964,Executive Order No. 11246, Executive Order 11375, the Civil Rights Law of theState of New York, Sections 11375, the Civil Rights Law of the State of NewYork, Sections 291-299 of the Executive Law of New York State, ExecutiveOrder No. 21 and any successive Executive Orders of the State of New York.

Z. PARTICIPATION BY MINORITY AND WOMEN OWNED BUSINESSES- BIDDERS:

1. Bidders are advised that it is Syracuse University’s intent to achieve the followinglevels of participation on the project by disadvantaged constituencies:

a. 5% of the Contract Sum on a cumulative basis subcontracted to (3%), orspent with suppliers (2%) which are, certified minority owned businesseshaving their principal place of business within the County of Onondaga,New York.

b. 5% of the Contract Sum on a cumulative basis subcontracted to (3%), orspent with suppliers (2%) which are, certified women owned businesseshaving their principal place of business within the County of Onondaga,New York.

c. Each bidder will be required to submit a completed FORM A, “Schedule ofMinority and Women Owned Business Participation” with the bid. Thisinformation must be submitted with the bid. ANY BIDS WHICH OMITTHE REQUIRED INFORMATION ON MINORITY AND WOMEN OWNEDBUSINESS PARTICIPATION WILL BE CONSIDERED INFORMAL ANDMAY BE REJECTED.

d. The successful bidder must submit the required records that documentthe efforts expended to solicit bids and quotations from minority andwomen owned subcontractors and material suppliers, and the resultsachieved by this solicitation. Success in these efforts will be consideredwhen inviting firms to bid on future projects.

e. Certification of minority or women owned business status may be madeby any authorized governmental divisions of the State of New York or theCity of Syracuse.



AA. DIVERSITY IN THE WORKFORCE:

1. Each bidder will be required to submit a completed FORM A, “Schedule ofMinority and Women Owned Business Participation” with the bid. Thisinformation must be submitted with the bid. ANY BIDS WHICH OMIT THEREQUIRED INFORMATION ON MINORITY AND WOMEN OWNED BUSINESSPARTICIPATION WILL BE CONSIDERED INFORMAL AND MAY BEREJECTED.

2. Bidders are expected to employ 5% minority and 5% women in their workforceon this project. Bidders are also expected to emphasize the same workforcegoals to Subcontractors employed on the project, but results will be measuredcumulatively by prime contract.

3. Utilization results will be required to be reported on a regular basis as follows:

Until Final Completion of the Work has been achieved, the Contractor shallsubmit for the Owner’s records, together with its monthly Applications forPayment, an updated Form B, “Minority and Women Owned Business MonthlyUtilization Report”, showing any additions or changes in status on the Project,and an updated Form C, “Monthly Minority and Women Work Force UtilizationReport”. The Owner’s approval of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment willbe conditioned on Owner’s receipt of these documents. Failure to submit thisdocumentation will cause an Application for Payment to be rejected.

4. Achievement of the participation goals and submission of the required reportswill be an important factor in determining whether Syracuse University continuesto invite the bidder to bid on future projects.

BB. BID DOCUMENTS - Bid documents are furnished to prospective bidders without cost. In recognition of this and to remain on the University list of pre-qualified bidders, allunsuccessful bidders shall return their bid documents to the Engineer’s office within 5working days of bid opening, so that those items can be used for construction sets.

CC. LIST OF PRE-QUALIFIED CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS - Attachedherein is the following list :

A. List of Pre-qualified Prime ContractorsB. List of Pre-qualified Elevator ContractorsC. List of Pre-qualified Mechanical SubcontractorsD. List of Pre-qualified Electrical Subcontractors

Bids for the project are invited from the Prime Contractors identified on List “A”.

Bidders will be issued one (1) sets of drawings electronically. The University reservesthe right to invite additional Prime Contractors.



Minority and Women Business Enterprises are encouraged to submit proposals asPrime Contractors or as Subcontractors. See Page 1, Information for Bidders.

END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS



List “A”

SU SADLER HALL ELEVATOR MODERNIZATION 2020

LIST OF PRE-QUALIFIED PRIME CONTRACTORS

1. Bellows Construction Specialties, LLC213 West Adams StreetSyracuse, NY 13202Attn: Ms. Karen BellowsPhone: 315-476-4718Email: [email protected]

2. Hayner Hoyt Corporation625 Erie Blvd. WestSyracuse, NY 13204Attn: Mr. Sam DossPhone: 315-455-5941Email: [email protected]

3. LeChase Construction609 Erie Boulevard WestSyracuse, NY 13204Attn: Mr. Marc MacroPhone: 315-423-0015Email: [email protected]

4. Northland Associates, Inc.4701 Buckley RoadLiverpool, NY 13088Attn: Mr. Ron BurlinPhone: 315-451-3722Email: [email protected]

5. V.I.P. StructuresArchitectural AssociatesOne Webster’s LandingSyracuse, NY 13202Phone: 315-471-5338Email: [email protected]

All Bidders are reminded of the University’s intent to achieve participation on the project bydisadvantaged constituencies. See Specification Section 01 01 50. The University reservesthe right to invite additional Prime Contractors.



List “B”


LIST OF PRE-QUALIFIED ELEVATOR CONTRACTORS

1. Otis Elevator Company6304 Carrier ParkwayBuilding TR-7East Syracuse, NY 13057Attn: Ms. Maria BauderPhone: 315-299-2810Email: [email protected]




List “C”


LIST OF PRE-QUALIFIED MECHANICAL SUBCONTRACTORS

1. Burns Brothers Contractors400 Leavenworth Ave.Syracuse, NY 13204Attn: Mr. Jeff HornerPhone: 315-425-5834Email: [email protected]

2. Century Heating & Air Conditioning220 Boss RoadSyracuse, NY 13211Attn: Mr. Jason IorioPhone: 315-414-0060Email: [email protected]

3. H.J. Brandeles Corporation300 LaFayette St., P.O. Box 529Utica, NY 13503Attn: Mr. Louis FalvoPhone: 315-733-7565Email: [email protected]

4. Woodcock & Armani Mechanical Contractors6500 New Venture Gear DriveEast Syracuse, NY 13057Attn: Mr. Doug CaldwellPhone: 315-701-2043 Email: [email protected]




List “D”


LIST OF PRE-QUALIFIED ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTORS

1. Emerald Electric116 Game RoadSyracuse, NY 13210Attn: Mr. Larry BeckerPhone: 315-475-9607Email: [email protected]

2. Huen New York, Inc.6695 Old Collamer RoadEast Syracuse, NY 13057Attn: Mr. Tony ClementePhone: 315-432-5060Email: [email protected]

3. O’Connell Electric Co., IncHancock Air Park7001 Performance DriveNorth Syracuse, NY 13212Attn: Mr. Don CoonPhone: 315-437-1453Email: [email protected]



FORM OF PROPOSAL PAGE 1

Project No. 102671-20125

Gentlemen:

The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the SU Sadler Hall ElevatorModernization 2020, Syracuse University, Syracuse, New York, having examined the plansand specifications and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all of theconditions surrounding the construction of the project including the availability of materials andlabor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials and supplies, and to perform all theWORK of the project in accordance with the Contract Documents, within the time set forththerein, and at the prices stated below. These prices are to cover all expenses incurred inperforming the work required under the Contract Documents, of which the Proposal is a part.

Bidder hereby agrees to commence work under this Contract immediately upon receipt of anexecuted Contract or a Letter of Intent of the Owner and to fully complete the project on orprior to the date specified in Specification Section 01 01 00 - Summary of Work.

THE OWNER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REJECT ANY AND ALL BIDS.

The Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda to the plans and/or specif ications:

Addendum Number Date ________________________




The undersigned,

Contractor: ___________________________________________________________

Address: ___________________________________________________________

hereby certifies that he has examined and fully comprehends the requirements and intent ofthe plans and specifications as prepared by Syracuse University and offers to furnish all labor,materials, supplies, plant and equipment and other facilities necessary and proper for orincidental to the work for the sum set forth as follows:



The amounts for the Base Bid Proposal and the Bond shall be shown in typing orwritten in ink, in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown inwords will govern.

BASE BID PROPOSAL - [FIXED SUM]

(a) Bid for all materials and supplies

________________________________ Dollars $_________________________(in words)

(b) Bid for all labor and work, excluding materials/supplies

________________________________ Dollars $_________________________(in words)

(c) TOTAL BASE BID - total of (a) plus (b)

________________________________ Dollars $_________________________(in words)

BOND

This Contractor, _____________________________________ hereby indicates that he canprovide the Performance Bond and the Labor and Material Payment Bond for this project inthe amount of 100% of the Contract Amount. The total cost of these Bonds, in addition to theabove Base Bid is

_______________________________ Dollars $_________________________(in words)



The amounts for Informative Prices shall be shown in typing or written in ink, in bothwords and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words will govern.

INFORMATIVE PRICES FOR BASE BID

The undersigned bidder submits the following informative prices, the total of which is the BaseBid. Such informative prices shall include material and labor and all other costs.

1. The work of ELEVATOR, EXCLUDING GENERAL CONSTRUCTION


__________________________________ Dollars $_________________________ (in words)


___________________________________ Dollars $_________________________(in words)


___________________________________ Dollars $_________________________(in words)

2. The work of HVAC


__________________________________ Dollars $_________________________ (in words)


___________________________________ Dollars $_________________________(in words)


___________________________________ Dollars $_________________________(in words)



3. The work of ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING


__________________________________ Dollars $_________________________ (in words)


___________________________________ Dollars $_________________________(in words)


___________________________________ Dollars $_________________________(in words)



MAJOR SUBCONTRACTORS

The major subcontractors proposed for use on this project for the work indicated are asfollows:

1. : ______________________________________________________

2. : ______________________________________________________

3. : ______________________________________________________

4. : ______________________________________________________

Minority and Women Owned Business Participation

See Form A, page 13 of the Form of Proposal. Form A must be signed and submitted with thebid.

Respectfully Submitted:

_________________________________________ Dated:_______________________

By: ___________________________________(Signature)

_________________________________________ (Title)

_________________________________________

_________________________________________ (Business Address)

Note: If Bidder is a corporation, corporate seal must be affixed to the bid.



NON-COLLUSIVE BIDDING CERTIFICATION

By submission of this bid, each bidder and each person signing on behalf of any biddercertifies, and in the case of a joint bid each party thereto certifies as to its own organization,under penalty of perjury, that to the best of his knowledge and belief:

(1) The prices in the bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation,communication, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to anymatter relating to such prices with any other bidder or with any competitor;

(2) Unless otherwise required by law, the prices which have been quoted in this bid havenot been knowingly disclosed by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by thebidder, prior to opening, directly or indirectly to any other bidder or to any competitor;and

(3) No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other person, partnership or corporation to submit or not to submit a bid for the purpose of restrictingcompetition.

(Signed)________________________________________________ ________________________________________________

Title

RESOLUTION - for corporate bidders only

RESOLVED that _________________________________________________________ be(individual)

authorized to sign and submit the bid or proposal of this corporation for the following project

SU Sadler Hall Elevator Modernization 2020 and to include in such bid or proposal the certif icate as to non-collusion required by sectionone hundred three-d of the General Municipal Law as the act and deed of such corporation,and for any inaccuracies or misstatements in such certificate this corporate bidder shall beliable under the penalties of perjury._________________________________________________________The foregoing is a true and correct copy of the resolution adoptedby_______________________ corporation at a meeting of its Board of Directors held on the_____ day of, 20_____, and is in full force and effect on this ______ day of ____________,20_____.

(SEAL OF THE CORPORATION)_________________________________________________

Secretary



CONFLICTS QUESTIONNAIRE FOR VENDORS

Vendor Name: _______________________________________________

SU Project # and Name________________________________________

Vendor Document Reference: __________________________________

1. Does the submitter* of this form have an existing or potential financial relationship**with any of the following individuals or entities?

a) Member(s) of Syracuse University’s Board of Trustees, its officers, or other keyemployees***?

R Yes R No

b) A relative**** of a Trustee, officer, or key employee?

R Yes R No

c) An entity in which a Trustee, officer, key employee or any of their relatives has amore than a 35% ownership or beneficial interest, or in the case of a partnershipor professional corporation, a direct or indirect ownership interest greater than5%?

R Yes R No

If yes to any of the above, please describe the relationship in the space provided.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

*For purposes of this inquiry, a submitter includes the primary vendor/contractor, any parent company, affiliate, orsubsidiary entity and their respective officers, directors, trustees, employees, representatives, agents and familymembers thereof.** For purposes of this inquiry, a financial relationship means a direct or indirect interest (including an interestthrough a business, investment, or a relative) constituting: (i) a legal or beneficial interest in any entity; (ii) acompensation arrangement; or (iii) any investment interest in any entity. *** For purposes of this inquiry, key employees include University employees who exercise substantial influenceover the affairs of the institution and decision-making authority, including, for example, certain athletic coaches,deans, or directors. **** For purposes of this inquiry, relative means a spouse, domestic partner, ancestor, brother, sister, child,grandchild, or great-grandchild of University personnel.



By the signature below, the submitter certifies that the information contained on thisquestionnaire is true and accurate to the best of its know ledge.

____________________________ __________________________By: Date

____________________________Vendor Name



PARTIAL RELEASE, LIEN WAIVER AND CERTIFICATIONOF PAYMENT OF DEBTS AND CLAIMS

IN CONSIDERATION of the payment by Syracuse University of $_________________ forInvoice # _________ (“Partial Payment”), submitted to the undersigned, in connection withSyracuse University Project known as _____________________________________(“Project”), Project #_________________, receipt f rom Syracuse University being herebyacknowledged, the undersigned: Releases Syracuse University, and its officers, affiliates, subsidiaries, divisions, directors,employees and the like (“Syracuse University”) from, and waives all liens and claims of anynature which the undersigned may have against Syracuse University, relating to the workperformed regarding said Partial Payment; The undersigned further certifies that all amounts due from the undersigned to itssubcontractors, material suppliers and laborers and/or unions, for labor, material andequipment furnished in connection with the items of work for which Partial Payment was paidby Syracuse University, have been or will be fully paid from the proceeds of this payment, andthat there are no amounts for which the undersigned is responsible in connection with saidwork; In addition to the requirements of the undersigned’s contract with Syracuse University, theundersigned further agrees to reimburse and does hold harmless and fully indemnify SyracuseUniversity for any losses, costs, expenses and attorneys’ fees incurred should any liens orclaims be asserted by the undersigned or by any person or entity acting for or claiming throughor under the undersigned relating to the work covered by and up to and including thispayment; and

The undersigned also certifies that all other terms of the relevant subcontract withSyracuse University pertaining to the work for which the undersigned has been paid havebeen fully complied with by the undersigned.

Date:

By:

Title:

State of )

County of )

Sworn and subscribed before me this day of , 20

Notary PublicMy Commission Expires:



FINAL RELEASE AND WAIVER OF LIENS AND CLAIMS

Certificate and Affidavit made this _____ day of _____________, by a contractor to Sy racuse University under acontract dated the ______ day of ________________, 20____, with respect to work on aProject known as ProjectNumber .

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:

The undersigned hereby certifies that there is due and payable under the above-referencedcontract and duly approved change orders thereto and modifications thereof the undisputedbalance of $______________ and agrees that this is the last payment due.

The undersigned further certifies that all work required under this contract, including allwork required under change orders thereto, has been performed in accordance with the termsthereof, and that there are no claims of laborers or mechanics for unpaid wages arising out of theperformance of this contract and the wages paid by the contractor and all of its subcontractorswere in conformity with the contract in all respects, including but not limited to provisions relatingto said wages.

Except for the amount stated in paragraph 1 hereof, the undersigned has received fromSyracuse University all sums of money payable to the undersigned under or pursuant to theaforementioned contract, including any changes or modifications thereof.

That in consideration of the payment of the amount stated in paragraph 1 hereof, theundersigned does hereby release Syracuse University from any and all claims arising under orby reason of this contract and does for itself and its successors and assigns hereby waive, releaseand relinquish any and all right of liens against and claims for said work performed or materialsfurnished, including all manner of action and actions, cause and causes of action, suits, debts,dues, sums of money, accounts, reckoning, bonds, bills, specialties, covenants, contracts,controversies, agreements, promises, variances, trespasses, damages, judgments, extents,executions, claims and demands whatsoever, in law or in equity, which against the said Projector improvements thereto and/or Syracuse University it ever had, now has or which it or itssuccessors or assigns, hereafter can, shall or may have for, upon or by reason of any matter,cause or thing whatsoever from the beginning of the world to the day of the date of thesepresents; provided, however, that if for any reason Syracuse University does not pay in full theamount stated in paragraph 1 hereof, said deduction shall not affect the validity of this Releasebut the amount so deducted shall be released upon payment thereof.

That as additional consideration for this full and final payment, the undersigned agrees thatshould any subcontractor, material man, laborer or anyone performing any service by or throughthe undersigned file any lien or make any claim for any additional payment after the date hereof,the undersigned shall bond or otherwise discharge any liens so filed and shall indemnify and holdSyracuse University harmless from any and all claims raised by any such person subsequent tothe date hereof.



The undersigned hereby grants Syracuse University the right to review and audit any andall books and records of the undersigned at any time for verification.

The undersigned hereby represents that it has properly applied all funds received for validtrust purposes before using funds for any other purposes. In addition, the undersigned representsthat if the undersigned has collective bargaining agreements with any union, all fringe benefits thatare required to be paid on the project have been paid.

This Release and Waiver may not be changed orally.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned has signed and sealed this Instrument the________ day of _________________, 20_____.

(company seal)

By:

STATE OF ___________________ ) ) ss.:

COUNTY OF _________________ )

On the day of __________________, 20____, before me, the subscriber,came , to me known, who being by me dulysworn on oath, did depose and say that: he resides in ;and that he is the _____________________________[title] of______________________________________, the com pany described in and whichexecuted the foregoing Final Release and Waiver of Liens and Claims and that he signed hisname thereto, and that he has read the foregoing Final Receipt and Waiver of Liens andClaims by him subscribed.

Under penalties and pains of perjury, affiant further states that the matters and thingsstated therein are, to the best of his knowledge and belief, true.

(Signature of Affiant)

Subscribed and sworn to me this ______ dayof _________________, 20____.

Notary Public



This page intentionally left blank



FORM A

List all minority and women owned Subcontractors and suppliers from whom bids weresolicited,from whom bids were received, and note those whose bids were used in the compilation ofthis bid and who are intended to be used on this project.

SCHEDULE OF MINORITY AND WOMEN OWNED BUSINESS PARTICIPATION____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Name of Bidding Contractor

Name /Address/ Phone ofWomen/Minorityowned business

W B Eor

M B ESubcontractor or supplier

Scope of Work to be performed

% of proposed subcontract or purchaseamount inrelation to bid

Date Bidder’s Sig nature

Form A must be signed and submitted with bid.



FORM B

MINORITY AND WOMEN OWNED BUSINESS MONTHLY UTILIZATION REPORT

COMPANY NAME: ______________________ PROJECT: ___________________________

ADDRESS: _____________________________ PROJECT NO.:_______________________

PERIOD COVERED: FROM: ______________ TO: ________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Sub Name &Classification

WBE [X]

MBE [X]

Contract Amount

Dollar Amount - Work Complete

% of Contract Amount

WBE Total

MBE Total

NOTE: Form B must be submitted monthly in accordance with Articles 9.5.1.8 and 9.6.8of the A 201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, 2017 Edition asamended. This form can be found online at http://cpdc.syr.edu//html/forms.html



FORM C

MONTHLY MINORITY AND WOMEN WORKFORCE UTILIZATION REPORT


ADDRESS: _____________________________ PROJECT NO.: _______________________

PERIOD COVERED: FROM: ______________ TO: _________________________________

WORK HOURS OF EMPLOYMENT

_____________________________________________________________________________

CONSTRUCTION TRADE MALE FEMALE_____________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________TOTALS

NOTE: Form C must be submitted monthly in accordance with Articles 9.5.1.8 and 9.6.8 of the A 201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, 2017 Edition asamended. This form can be found online at http://cpdc.syr.edu/html/forms.html


Document A201TM

– 2017General Conditions of the Contract for Construction

Init.

/

AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 15:27:33 ET on 01/28/2019 under Order No.7066598837 which expires on 10/02/2019, and is not for resale.User Notes: (1182282809)

1

ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text.

This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification.

For guidance in modifying this document to include supplementary conditions, see AIA Document A503™, Guide for Supplementary Conditions.

for the following PROJECT:(Name and location or address)

Syracuse UniversityProject Name:Project Number:

THE OWNER:(Name, legal status and address)

Syracuse University, a not-for-profit institution for higher education, organized and existing under the laws of the State of New York Skytop Office Building640 Skytop RoadSyracuse, New York 13244-5300

THE ARCHITECT:(Name, legal status and address)

TABLE OF ARTICLES

1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

2 OWNER

3 CONTRACTOR

4 ARCHITECT

5 SUBCONTRACTORS

6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

7 CHANGES IN THE WORK

8 TIME

9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

11 INSURANCE AND BONDS

12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK

13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

Init.

/


2

14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT

15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES

Init.

/


3

INDEX(Topics and numbers in bold are Section headings.)

Acceptance of Nonconforming Work9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3Acceptance of Work9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3Access to Work3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1Accident Prevention10Acts and Omissions3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 10.2.5, 10.2.8, 13.3.2, 14.1, 15.1.2, 15.2Addenda1.1.1Additional Costs, Claims for3.7.4, 3.7.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5Additional Inspections and Testing9.4.2, 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.4Additional Time, Claims for3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 8.3.2, 15.1.6Administration of the Contract3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5Advertisement or Invitation to Bid1.1.1Aesthetic Effect4.2.13Allowances3.8Applications for Payment4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.5.4, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.10Approvals2.1.1, 2.3.1, 2.5, 3.1.3, 3.10.2, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 3.12.10.1, 4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.4.1Arbitration8.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.4 ARCHITECT4Architect, Definition of4.1.1Architect, Extent of Authority2.5, 3.12.7, 4.1.2, 4.2, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.4, 7.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.4, 15.2.1Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility2.1.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.6.4, 15.1.4, 15.2Architect’s Additional Services and Expenses2.5, 12.2.1, 13.4.2, 13.4.3, 14.2.4Architect’s Administration of the Contract3.1.3, 3.7.4, 15.2, 9.4.1, 9.5Architect’s Approvals2.5, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 4.2.7

Architect’s Authority to Reject Work3.5, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1Architect’s Copyright1.1.7, 1.5Architect’s Decisions3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.2.14, 6.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.4.2, 15.2Architect’s Inspections3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4Architect’s Instructions3.2.4, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 13.4.2Architect’s Interpretations4.2.11, 4.2.12Architect’s Project Representative4.2.10Architect’s Relationship with Contractor1.1.2, 1.5, 2.3.3, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.3.2, 13.4, 15.2Architect’s Relationship with Subcontractors1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3Architect’s Representations9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1Architect’s Site Visits3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4Asbestos10.3.1Attorneys’ Fees3.18.1, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.3Award of Separate Contracts6.1.1, 6.1.2Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work5.2Basic Definitions1.1Bidding Requirements1.1.1Binding Dispute Resolution8.3.1, 9.7, 11.5, 13.1, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.3.3, 15.4.1Bonds, Lien7.3.4.4, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Bonds, Performance, and Payment7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.5Building Information Models Use and Reliance1.8Building Permit3.7.1Capitalization1.3Certificate of Substantial Completion9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5

Init.

/


4

Certificates for Payment4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.4Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval13.4.4Certificates of Insurance9.10.2Change Orders1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.8.2.3, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 5.2.3, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 7.3.10, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.2, 11.5, 12.1.2Change Orders, Definition of7.2.1CHANGES IN THE WORK2.2.2, 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 11.5Claims, Definition of15.1.1Claims, Notice of1.6.2, 15.1.3CLAIMS AND DISPUTES3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims15.4.1Claims for Additional Cost3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 7.3.9, 9.5.2, 10.2.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5Claims for Additional Time3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 8.3.2, 9.5.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.6Concealed or Unknown Conditions, Claims for3.7.4Claims for Damages3.2.4, 3.18, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3, 11.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7Claims Subject to Arbitration15.4.1Cleaning Up3.15, 6.3Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to2.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.2, 15.1.5Commencement of the Work, Definition of8.1.2Communications3.9.1, 4.2.4Completion, Conditions Relating to3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10, 12.2, 14.1.2, 15.1.2COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND9Completion, Substantial3.10.1, 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2Compliance with Laws2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3

Concealed or Unknown Conditions3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3Conditions of the Contract1.1.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.4Consent, Written3.4.2, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 13.2, 15.4.4.2Consolidation or Joinder15.4.4CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS1.1.4, 6Construction Change Directive, Definition of7.3.1Construction Change Directives1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3, 9.3.1.1Construction Schedules, Contractor’s3.10, 3.11, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts5.4, 14.2.2.2Continuing Contract Performance15.1.4Contract, Definition of1.1.2CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE5.4.1.1, 5.4.2, 11.5, 14Contract Administration3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of1.5.2, 2.3.6, 5.3Contract Documents, Definition of1.1.1Contract Sum2.2.2, 2.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.8, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.2, 9.4.2, 9.5.1.4, 9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.1.2, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5Contract Sum, Definition of9.1Contract Time1.1.4, 2.2.1, 2.2.2, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 6.1.5, 7.2.1.3, 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.3.6, 7, 7, 7.3.10, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2.1, 8.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 12.1.2, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.6.1, 15.2.5Contract Time, Definition of8.1.1CONTRACTOR3Contractor, Definition of3.1, 6.1.2Contractor’s Construction and Submittal Schedules3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 4.2.3, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2

Init.

/


5

Contractor’s Employees2.2.4, 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1Contractor’s Liability Insurance11.1Contractor’s Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner’s Forces3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.3, 12.2.4Contractor’s Relationship with Subcontractors1.2.2, 2.2.4, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 4.2.4, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4Contractor’s Relationship with the Architect1.1.2, 1.5, 2.3.3, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1, 3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1Contractor’s Representations3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2Contractor’s Responsibility for Those Performing the Work3.3.2, 3.18, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, 10.2.8Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents3.2Contractor’s Right to Stop the Work2.2.2, 9.7Contractor’s Right to Terminate the Contract14.1Contractor’s Submittals3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Contractor’s Superintendent3.9, 10.2.6Contractor’s Supervision and Construction Procedures1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.6, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4Coordination and Correlation1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications1.5, 2.3.6, 3.11Copyrights1.5, 3.17Correction of Work2.5, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2, 12.3, 15.1.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents1.2Cost, Definition of7.3.4Costs2.5, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 7.3.3.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6, 11.2, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.4, 14Cutting and Patching3.14, 6.2.5

Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors3.14.2, 6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4Damage to the Work3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4Damages, Claims for3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.3.2, 11.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.7Damages for Delay6.2.3, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2, 14.3.2Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of8.1.2Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of8.1.3Day, Definition of8.1.4Decisions of the Architect3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 6.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2Decisions to Withhold Certification9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of2.5, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.3, 9.5.1, 9.5.3, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1Definitions1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.5, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1, 15.1.1Delays and Extensions of Time3.2, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5Digital Data Use and Transmission1.7Disputes6.3, 7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2Documents and Samples at the Site3.11Drawings, Definition of1.1.5Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of3.11Effective Date of Insurance8.2.2Emergencies10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.5Employees, Contractor’s3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1Equipment, Labor, or Materials1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2Execution and Progress of the Work1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.3.4, 2.3.6, 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.6, 8.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.1, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.4

Init.

/


6

Extensions of Time3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3, 15.1.6, 15.2.5Failure of Payment9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2Faulty Work(See Defective or Nonconforming Work)Final Completion and Final Payment4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3Financial Arrangements, Owner’s2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4GENERAL PROVISIONS1Governing Law13.1Guarantees (See Warranty)Hazardous Materials and Substances10.2.4, 10.3Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers5.2.1Indemnification3.17, 3.18, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3Information and Services Required of the Owner2.1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.12.10.1, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.6.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4Initial Decision15.2Initial Decision Maker, Definition of1.1.8Initial Decision Maker, Decisions14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5Injury or Damage to Person or Property10.2.8, 10.4Inspections3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.4Instructions to Bidders1.1.1Instructions to the Contractor3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.1, 7, 8.2.2, 12, 13.4.2Instruments of Service, Definition of1.1.7Insurance6.1.1, 7.3.4, 8.2.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.2.5, 11Insurance, Notice of Cancellation or Expiration11.1.4, 11.2.3Insurance, Contractor’s Liability11.1Insurance, Effective Date of8.2.2, 14.4.2Insurance, Owner’s Liability11.2Insurance, Property10.2.5, 11.2, 11.4, 11.5

Insurance, Stored Materials9.3.2INSURANCE AND BONDS11Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy9.9.1Insured loss, Adjustment and Settlement of11.5Intent of the Contract Documents1.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13Interest13.5Interpretation1.1.8, 1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 15.1.1Interpretations, Written4.2.11, 4.2.12Judgment on Final Award15.4.2Labor and Materials, Equipment1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2Labor Disputes8.3.1Laws and Regulations1.5, 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4Liens2.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8Limitations, Statutes of12.2.5, 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1Limitations of Liability3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.10, 3.12.10.1, 3.17, 3.18.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.6.8, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3, 12.2.5, 13.3.1Limitations of Time2.1.2, 2.2, 2.5, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5Materials, Hazardous10.2.4, 10.3Materials, Labor, Equipment and1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2Mechanic’s Lien2.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8Mediation8.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3, 15.4.1, 15.4.1.1Minor Changes in the Work1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4

Init.

/


7

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS13Modifications, Definition of1.1.1Modifications to the Contract1.1.1, 1.1.2, 2.5, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7, 10.3.2Mutual Responsibility6.2Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of2.4, 2.5, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2Notice1.6, 1.6.1, 1.6.2, 2.1.2, 2.2.2., 2.2.3, 2.2.4, 2.5, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 7.4, 8.2.2 9.6.8, 9.7, 9.10.1, 10.2.8, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1, 14.2.2, 14.4.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, 15.1.6, 15.4.1Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Insurance11.1.4, 11.2.3Notice of Claims1.6.2, 2.1.2, 3.7.4, 9.6.8, 10.2.8, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, 15.1.6, 15.2.8, 15.3.2, 15.4.1Notice of Testing and Inspections13.4.1, 13.4.2Observations, Contractor’s3.2, 3.7.4Occupancy2.3.1, 9.6.6, 9.8Orders, Written1.1.1, 2.4, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, 11.5, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.3.1OWNER2Owner, Definition of2.1.1Owner, Evidence of Financial Arrangements2.2, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4Owner, Information and Services Required of the2.1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4Owner’s Authority1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3.32.4, 2.5, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 15.2.7Owner’s Insurance11.2Owner’s Relationship with Subcontractors1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work2.5, 14.2.2

Owner’s Right to Clean Up6.3Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts6.1Owner’s Right to Stop the Work2.4Owner’s Right to Suspend the Work14.3Owner’s Right to Terminate the Contract14.2, 14.4Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other Instruments of Service1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.2.2, 3.11, 3.17, 4.2.12, 5.3Partial Occupancy or Use9.6.6, 9.9Patching, Cutting and3.14, 6.2.5Patents3.17Payment, Applications for4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5, 9.10.1, 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3Payment, Certificates for4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4Payment, Failure of9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2Payment, Final4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3Payment Bond, Performance Bond and7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2Payments, Progress9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION9Payments to Subcontractors5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 14.2.1.2PCB10.3.1Performance Bond and Payment Bond7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws2.3.1, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.4.4, 10.2.2PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF10Polychlorinated Biphenyl10.3.1Product Data, Definition of3.12.2Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7Progress and Completion4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.4Progress Payments9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4

Init.

/


8

Project, Definition of1.1.4Project Representatives4.2.10Property Insurance10.2.5, 11.2Proposal Requirements1.1.1PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY10Regulations and Laws1.5, 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4Rejection of Work4.2.6, 12.2.1Releases and Waivers of Liens9.3.1, 9.10.2Representations3.2.1, 3.5, 3.12.6, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1Representatives2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.10, 13.2.1Responsibility for Those Performing the Work3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10Retainage9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor3.2, 3.12.7, 6.1.3Review of Contractor’s Submittals by Owner and Architect3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor3.12Rights and Remedies1.1.2, 2.4, 2.5, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14, 15.4Royalties, Patents and Copyrights3.17Rules and Notices for Arbitration15.4.1Safety of Persons and Property10.2, 10.4Safety Precautions and Programs3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4Samples, Definition of3.12.3Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7Samples at the Site, Documents and3.11Schedule of Values9.2, 9.3.1Schedules, Construction3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2

Separate Contracts and Contractors1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6, 8.3.1, 12.1.2Separate Contractors, Definition of6.1.1Shop Drawings, Definition of3.12.1Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7Site, Use of3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1Site Inspections3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.9.2, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.4Site Visits, Architect’s3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4Special Inspections and Testing4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.4Specifications, Definition of1.1.6Specifications1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.12.10, 3.17, 4.2.14Statute of Limitations15.1.2, 15.4.1.1Stopping the Work2.2.2, 2.4, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1Stored Materials6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4Subcontractor, Definition of5.1.1SUBCONTRACTORS5Subcontractors, Work by1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 3.18, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6.7Subcontractual Relations5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1Submittals3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.4, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Submittal Schedule3.10.2, 3.12.5, 4.2.7Subrogation, Waivers of6.1.1, 11.3Substances, Hazardous10.3Substantial Completion4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2Substantial Completion, Definition of9.8.1Substitution of Subcontractors5.2.3, 5.2.4Substitution of Architect2.3.3Substitutions of Materials3.4.2, 3.5, 7.3.8Sub-subcontractor, Definition of5.1.2

Init.

/


9

Subsurface Conditions3.7.4Successors and Assigns13.2Superintendent3.9, 10.2.6Supervision and Construction Procedures1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4Suppliers1.5, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.6, 9.10.5, 14.2.1Surety5.4.1.2, 9.6.8, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.2, 14.2.2, 15.2.7Surety, Consent of9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Surveys1.1.7, 2.3.4Suspension by the Owner for Convenience14.3Suspension of the Work3.7.5, 5.4.2, 14.3Suspension or Termination of the Contract5.4.1.1, 14Taxes3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.4.4Termination by the Contractor14.1, 15.1.7Termination by the Owner for Cause5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.7Termination by the Owner for Convenience14.4Termination of the Architect2.3.3Termination of the Contractor Employment14.2.2TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT14Tests and Inspections3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 12.2.1, 13.4TIME8Time, Delays and Extensions of3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5

Time Limits2.1.2, 2.2, 2.5, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.4Time Limits on Claims3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.1.3Title to Work9.3.2, 9.3.3UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK12Uncovering of Work12.1Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3Unit Prices7.3.3.2, 9.1.2Use of Documents1.1.1, 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.12.6, 5.3Use of Site3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1Values, Schedule of9.2, 9.3.1Waiver of Claims by the Architect13.3.2Waiver of Claims by the Contractor9.10.5, 13.3.2, 15.1.7Waiver of Claims by the Owner9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7Waiver of Consequential Damages14.2.4, 15.1.7Waiver of Liens9.3, 9.10.2, 9.10.4Waivers of Subrogation6.1.1, 11.3Warranty3.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 15.1.2Weather Delays8.3, 15.1.6.2Work, Definition of1.1.3Written Consent1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.10.3, 13.2, 13.3.2, 15.4.4.2Written Interpretations4.2.11, 4.2.12Written Orders1.1.1, 2.4, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.4.2, 14.3.1

Init.

/


10

ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS§ 1.1 Basic Definitions§ 1.1.1 The Contract DocumentsThe Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement, and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive, or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, the Contractor’s bid or proposal, or portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements. In interpreting the Contract Documents, the Agreement and these General Conditions shall take priority over any supplementary or other conditions, drawings, specifications and other Contract Documents, unless expressly stated to the contrary in those other documents.

§ 1.1.2 The ContractThe Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants, or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations of the Contractor under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect’s duties.

§ 1.1.3 The WorkThe term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment, and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.

§ 1.1.4 The ProjectThe Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by Separate Contractors.

§ 1.1.5 The DrawingsThe Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams.

§ 1.1.6 The SpecificationsThe Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services.

§ 1.1.7 Instruments of ServiceInstruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants under their respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials.

§ 1.1.8 Initial Decision MakerThe Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in accordance with Section 15.2. The Initial Decision Maker shall not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and shall not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith.

§ 1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents§ 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as

Init.

/


11

binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results.

§ 1.2.1.1 The invalidity of any provision of the Contract Documents shall not invalidate the Contract or its remaining provisions. If it is determined that any provision of the Contract Documents violates any law, or is otherwise invalid or unenforceable, then that provision shall be revised to the extent necessary to make that provision legal and enforceable. In such case the Contract Documents shall be construed, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to give effect to the parties’ intentions and purposes in executing the Contract.

§ 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade.

§ 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.

§ 1.3 CapitalizationTerms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles, or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects.

§ 1.4 InterpretationIn the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement.

§ 1.5 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications, and Other Instruments of Service§ 1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and retain all common law, statutory, and other reserved rights in their Instruments of Service, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect’s or Architect’s consultants’ reserved rights.

§ 1.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them, subject to any protocols established pursuant to Sections 1.7 and 1.8, solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor may retain one record set of the Instruments of Service. All copies, except the Contractor’s record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect upon the completion of the Work. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to the Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect, and the Architect’s consultants.

§ 1.5.3 Nothing in this Section 1.5 shall be construed to alter the rights of the Owner toward the drawings, specifications or other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants as set forth in this Agreement between the Owner and the Architect.

§ 1.6 Notice§ 1.6.1 Except as otherwise provided in Section 1.6.2, where the Contract Documents require one party to notify or give notice to the other party, such notice shall be provided in writing to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed and shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person, by mail, by courier, or by electronic transmission if a method for electronic transmission is set forth in the Agreement.

§ 1.6.2 Notice of Claims as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be provided in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly served only if delivered to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed by certified or registered mail, or by courier providing proof of delivery.

Init.

/


12

§ 1.7 Digital Data Use and TransmissionThe parties shall agree upon protocols governing the transmission and use of Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form. The parties will use AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit as a guide, to establish the protocols for the development, use, transmission, and exchange of digital data for the Project.

§ 1.8 Building Information Models Use and RelianceAny use of, or reliance on, all or a portion of a building information model without agreement to protocols governing the use of, and reliance on, the information contained in the model and without having those protocols set forth in AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, and the requisite AIA Document G202™–2013, Project Building Information Modeling Protocol Form, shall be at the using or relying party’s sole risk and without liability to the other party and its contractors or consultants, the authors of, or contributors to, the building information model, and each of their agents and employees.

ARTICLE 2 OWNER§ 2.1 General§ 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner’s approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner’s authorized representative.

§ 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor, within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of, or enforce mechanic’s lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner’s interest therein.

§ 2.2 Evidence of the Owner’s Financial Arrangements§ 2.2.1 [INTENTIONALLY OMITTED].

§ 2.2.2 [INTENTIONALLY OMITTED].



§ 2.3 Information and Services Required of the Owner§ 2.3.1 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including those required under Section 3.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities.

§ 2.3.2 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture, or an entity lawfully practicing architecture, in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.

§ 2.3.3 If the employment of the Architect terminates, the Owner shall employ a successor to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect.

§ 2.3.4 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work.

§ 2.3.5 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner’s control and

Init.

/


13

relevant to the Contractor’s performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor’s written request for such information or services.

§ 2.3.6 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2.

§ 2.4 Owner’s Right to Stop the WorkIf the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3.

§ 2.5 Owner’s Right to Carry Out the WorkIf the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a period of four (4) business days after receipt of notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such default or neglect. The Owner shall be entitled to recover its costs in correcting such deficiencies, including Owner’s expenses and compensation for the Architect’s additional services made necessary by such default, neglect, or failure. In such a case, the Owner shall issue an appropriate Change Order deducting from payments then or thereafter due to the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies. If current and future payments are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner on demand. If the Contractor disagrees with the actions of the Owner or the Architect, or the amounts claimed as costs to the Owner, the Contractor may file a Claim pursuant to Article 15.

ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR§ 3.1 General§ 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative.

§ 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of its obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect’s administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor.

§ 3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor§ 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.4, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Owner and Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Owner and Architect may require. It is recognized that the Contractor’s review is made in the Contractor’s capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.

Init.

/


14

§ 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Owner and Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Owner and Architect may require.

§ 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor’s notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall submit Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner, subject to Section 15.1.7, as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities.

§ 3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures§ 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures, and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract and shall complete the Work in a good and workmanlike manner in accordance with the Contract Documents. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and shall be solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Owner and Architect, and shall propose alternative means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. The Architect shall evaluate the proposed alternative solely for conformance with the design intent for the completed construction. Unless the Architect objects to the Contractor’s proposed alternative, the Contractor shall perform the Work using its alternative means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures.

§ 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors.

§ 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.

§ 3.3.4 If any of the Work is required to be inspected or approved by any public authority, or if any inspection of the Work is required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall cause such inspection or approval to be performed. No inspection performed or failed to be performed hereunder shall be a waiver of any of the Contractor’s obligations hereunder or be construed as an approval or acceptance of the Work or any part thereof.

§ 3.3.5 The Contractor acknowledges that it is the Contractor’s responsibility to hire all personnel for the proper and diligent prosecution of the Work and the Contractor shall use the Contractor’s best efforts to maintain labor peace for the duration of the project.

§ 3.4 Labor and Materials§ 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.

§ 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work approved by the Architect in accordance with Section 3.12.8 or ordered by the Architect in accordance with Section 7.4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the

Init.

/


15

consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive.

§ 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor’s employees, subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing Work under the Contract for the Contractor, and other persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them.

§ 3.5 Warranty§ 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor’s warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.

§ 3.5.2 All material, equipment, or other special warranties required by the Contract Documents shall be issued in the name of the Owner, or shall be transferable to the Owner, and shall commence in accordance with Section 9.8.4. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary warranty documentation to the Owner.

§ 3.6 TaxesThe Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. The Owner represents that it is an organization operated for purposes which make it exempt from New York State sales and compensating use tax under Article 28 of the New York Tax Law. The Contractor is further advised that the Owner is exempt from payment of all state and local sales and compensating use taxes of the State of New York and its cities and counties and the Contractor’s purchase of materials and supplies which are to be incorporated in and become integral component parts of the Owner’s structures, buildings or real property, pursuant to the provisions of this Contract. Such taxes are not to be added to the Contract sum, bid or costs to be reimbursed, as the case may be. This exemption does not, however, apply to tools, machinery, equipment or other property leased by or to the Contractor or a subcontractor, or to supplies and materials which, even though they are consumed in the performance of this Contract, are not incorporated into the Owner’s structures, buildings or real property. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall be responsible for and shall pay any and all applicable taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes, and such leased tools, machinery, equipment or other property and on all such unincorporated supplies and materials. The Owner shall deliver to the Contractor the appropriate exemption certificate to be supplied by the Owner, and the Contractor, its subcontractors, and materialmen shall be solely responsible for obtaining and delivering any and all exemption certificates or for furnishing a contractor exempt purchase certificate or other appropriate certificates to all persons, firms or corporations from whom the Contractor purchases supplies, materials and equipment for the performance of the Work covered by this Contract.

§ 3.7 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws§ 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded. The Contractor shall also procure all certificates of inspection, use, occupancy, other permits and licenses pursuant to the Work of the Contract, pay all charges and fees and give all notices necessary and incidental to the due and lawful prosecution of the Work. Certificates of inspection, use and occupancy shall be delivered to the Owner upon completion of the Work in sufficient time for occupancy of the Project in accordance with the approved schedule for the Work. The costs of such procurement, payment and delivery are included within the Guaranteed Maximum Price or

Init.

/


16

Lump Sum as may be applicable.

§ 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work.

§ 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction.

§ 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown ConditionsIf the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 14 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend that an equitable adjustment be made in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor, stating the reasons. If either party disputes the Architect’s determination or recommendation, that party may submit a Claim as provided in Article 15.

§ 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15.

§ 3.8 Allowances§ 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection.

§ 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,.1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all

required taxes, less applicable trade discounts;.2 Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit, and

other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; and

.3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor’s costs under Section 3.8.2.2.

§ 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness.

§ 3.9 Superintendent§ 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. The Contractor’s Superintendent or responsible temporary substitute shall attend all job meetings.

§ 3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall notify the Owner and Architect of the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. Within 14 days of receipt of the information, the Architect may

Init.

/


17

notify the Contractor, stating whether the Owner or the Architect (1) has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or (2) requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.

§ 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner’s consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed.

§ 3.10 Contractor’s Construction and Submittal Schedules§ 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall submit for the Owner’s and Architect’s information and the Owner’s approval a Contractor’s construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall contain detail appropriate for the Project, including (1) the date of commencement of the Work, interim schedule milestone dates, and the date of Substantial Completion; (2) an apportionment of the Work by construction activity; and (3) the time required for completion of each portion of the Work. The schedule shall provide for the orderly progression of the Work to completion and shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents. The schedule shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project.

§ 3.10.2 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, shall submit a submittal schedule for the Architect’s approval. The Architect’s approval shall not be unreasonably delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor’s construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule, or fails to provide submittals in accordance with the approved submittal schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals.

§ 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect.

§ 3.11 Documents and Samples at the SiteThe Contractor shall make available, at the Project site, the Contract Documents, including Change Orders, Construction Change Directives, and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction in sufficient detail to enable the Architect to prepare reproducible record drawings of the Project as built, and the approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar required submittals. These shall be in electronic form or paper copy, available to the Architect and Owner, and delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed.

§ 3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples§ 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules, and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work.

§ 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.

§ 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship, and establish standards by which the Work will be judged.

§ 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is to demonstrate how the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.

§ 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve, and submit to the Architect, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents, in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal

Init.

/


18

schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of Separate Contractors.

§ 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them, (2) determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and (3) checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.

§ 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect.

§ 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect’s approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, unless the Contractor has specifically notified the Architect of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, by the Architect’s approval thereof.

§ 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such notice, the Architect’s approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions.

§ 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law.

§ 3.12.10.1 If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the performance and design criteria provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by an appropriately licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings, and other submittals related to the Work, designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the services, certifications, and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor the performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10, the Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.

§ 3.12.10.2 If the Contract Documents require the Contractor’s design professional to certify that the Work has been performed in accordance with the design criteria, the Contractor shall furnish such certifications to the Architect at the time and in the form specified by the Architect.

§ 3.13 Use of SiteThe Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, lawful orders of public authorities, and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. The Contractor shall assure free, convenient, unencumbered and direct access to properties neighboring the Project site for the owners of such properties and their respective tenants, agents, invitees and guests.

Init.

/


19

§ 3.14 Cutting and Patching§ 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting, or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting, or patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting, fitting, or patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents.

§ 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors by cutting, patching, or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter construction by the Owner or a Separate Contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of the Separate Contractor. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold, from the Owner or a Separate Contractor, its consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.

§ 3.15 Cleaning Up§ 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor’s tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus materials from and about the Project. Except as may be expressly specified to the contrary in the Contract elsewhere, the Contractor shall clean all glass windows and surfaces so that they are dust-free upon the completion of the work and shall leave the site "broom clean" or its equivalent.

§ 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor.

§ 3.16 Access to WorkThe Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect with access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located.

§ 3.17 Royalties, Patents and CopyrightsThe Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend with qualified and competent counsel suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for defense or loss when a particular design, process, or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications, or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if an infringement of a copyright or patent is discovered by, or made known to, the Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for the loss unless the information is promptly furnished to the Owner and Architect.

§ 3.18 Indemnification§ 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall defend with qualified and competent counsel and indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees and disbursements, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss, or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death (including any liability, claim, damage, loss or expense incurred under any workers’ compensation law or regulation, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions or other culpable conduct of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss, or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. The Contractor shall also indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against any and all claims for mechanics’ liens by subcontractors, sub-subcontractors or material suppliers and against any security interests by suppliers of goods or materials. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18.

§ 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.

Init.

/


20

ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT§ 4.1 General§ 4.1.1 The Architect is the person or entity retained by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.2 and identified as such in the Agreement.

§ 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities, and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified, or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.

§ 4.2 Administration of the Contract§ 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be an Owner’s representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise agreed with the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor’s rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and promptly report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the Contract Documents, (2) known deviations from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (3) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of, and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of, the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.

§ 4.2.4 Communications The Owner and Contractor shall communicate with each other directly or through the Architect. Communications by and with the Architect’s consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with Separate Contractors shall be through the Owner.

§ 4.2.5 Based on the Architect’s evaluations of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts.

§ 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.4.2 and 13.4.3, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.

§ 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor’s submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect’s action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect’s professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect’s review of the Contractor’s submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5, and 3.12. The Architect’s review shall not constitute approval of safety

Init.

/


21

precautions or of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. The Architect’s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component.

§ 4.2.8 The Owner will prepare Change Orders. The Architect will prepare Construction Change Directives, and may order minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect will investigate and make determinations and recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4.

§ 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8; receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner’s review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section 9.10.

§ 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more Project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect’s responsibilities at the site. The Owner shall notify the Contractor of any change in the duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Project representatives.

§ 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness.

§ 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and reasonably inferable from, the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either, and will not be liable for interpretations or decisions rendered in accordance with the Contract Documents and in the exercise of professional care.

§ 4.2.13 The Architect’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If appropriate, the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information.

ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS§ 5.1 Definitions§ 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a Separate Contractor or the subcontractors of a Separate Contractor.

§ 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor.

§ 5.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work§ 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall notify the Owner and Architect of the persons or entities proposed for each principal portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design. Within 14 days of receipt of the information, the Architect may notify the Contractor whether the Owner or the Architect (1) has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or (2) requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.

§ 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection.

Init.

/


22


§ 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person, or entity for one previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution.

§ 5.3 Subcontractual Relations§ 5.3.1 By appropriate written agreement, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor’s Work that the Contractor, by these Contract Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies, and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors.

§ 5.3.2 The Contractor shall not enter into any subcontract, contract, agreement, purchase order or other arrangement ("Arrangement") for the furnishing of any portion of the materials, services, equipment or work with any party or entity if such party or entity is an affiliated entity (as defined below), unless approved by the Owner after full disclosure. The term "affiliated entity" means any entity related to or affiliated with the Contractor or with respect to which the Contractor has a direct or indirect ownership or control, including, without limitation, any entity owned in whole or in part by the Contractor, any holder of more than 10% of the issued and outstanding shares of, or the holder of any interest in, the Contractor, any entity in which any officer, director, employee, partner or shareholder (or member of the family of any of the foregoing persons) of the Contractor or any entity owned by the Contractor as a direct or indirect interest, which interest includes, but is not limited to, that of a partner, employee, agent or shareholder.

§ 5.4 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts§ 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided that

.1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor; and

.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract.

When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor’s rights and obligations under the subcontract.


§ 5.4.3 Upon assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity, the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor’s obligations under the subcontract.

ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS§ 6.1 Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts§ 6.1.1 The Owner will perform Work related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces and will award contracts in connection with the Project which are not part of the Contractor’s responsibilities under this

Init.

/


23

Agreement. The Contractor will be responsible for the coordination and integration of work to be performed by the Owner’s forces and separate contractors within the Contractor’s schedule. The Contractor shall manage its work to ensure that it is not interrupted or delayed on account of the awarding of other work on the Project to other contractors.

§ 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement.

§ 6.1.3 The Owner shall cooperate with the Contractor for coordination of the activities of the Owner’s own forces and of each Separate Contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall make any revisions to its construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, Separate Contractors, and the Owner until subsequently revised.

§ 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces or with Separate Contractors, the Owner or its Separate Contractors shall have the same obligations and rights that the Contractor has under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6, and Articles 10, 11, and 12.

§ 6.2 Mutual Responsibility§ 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and Separate Contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor’s construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.

§ 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor’s Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a Separate Contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly notify the Owner and the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that would render it unsuitable for proper execution and results of the Contractor’s Work. Failure of the Contractor to notify the Owner and the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects prior to proceeding with the Work shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner’s or Separate Contractor’s completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor’s Work. The Contractor shall not be responsible for discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that are not apparent.

§ 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a Separate Contractor because of the Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a Separate Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction.

§ 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage that the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or Separate Contractor as provided in Section 10.2.5.

§ 6.2.5 The Owner and each Separate Contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14.

§ 6.3 Owner’s Right to Clean UpIf a dispute arises among the Contractor, Separate Contractors, and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible.

ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK§ 7.1 General§ 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Changes in the Work may be initiated by the Contractor’s issuance of (and the Owner’s and the Architect’s written approval of) a written Change Order

Init.

/


24

Proposal which describes the change in the Work and the estimated cost of the change. Upon written approval by the Owner and the Architect of a Change Order Proposal, the Contractor may proceed with such changed Work pending the issuance of a formal Change Order document.

§ 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. A Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor. An order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone.

§ 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall proceed promptly with changes in the Work, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or order for a minor change in the Work.

§ 7.2 Change Orders§ 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Owner and signed by the Owner’s comptroller, the Contractor, and the Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following:

.1 The change in the Work;

.2 The amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and

.3 The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time.

§ 7.3 Construction Change Directives§ 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions, or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly.

§ 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order.

§ 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods:

.1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation;

.2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;

.3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or

.4 As provided in Section 7.3.4.

§ 7.3.4 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the Architect shall determine the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a reasonable amount. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.4 shall be limited to the following:

.1 Costs of labor, including applicable payroll taxes, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, workers’ compensation insurance, and other employee costs approved by the Architect;

.2 Costs of materials, supplies, and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed;

.3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others;

.4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use, or similar taxes, directly related to the change; and

.5 Costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change.

§ 7.3.5 If the Contractor disagrees with the adjustment in the Contract Time, the Contractor may make a Claim in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15.

Init.

/


25

§ 7.3.6 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor’s agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.

§ 7.3.7 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor’s agreement therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order.

§ 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change.

§ 7.3.8.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Agreement, the maximum allowance for a combination of overhead and profit for work shall be as follows: (a) when such added work is performed by the Contractor’s own forces, ten percent (10%) of the costs attributable to the change; and (b) when such added work is performed by a subcontractor or sub-subcontractor whose price is passed onto the Contractor, ten percent (10%) of the costs to the subcontractor or sub-subcontractor attributable to the change, and ten percent (10%) of the amount billed to the Contractor by such subcontractor or sub-subcontractor.

§ 7.3.9

§ 7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order. Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive.

§ 7.4 Minor Changes in the WorkThe Architect may order minor changes in the Work that are consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents and do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time. The Architect’s order for minor changes shall be in writing. If the Contractor believes that the proposed minor change in the Work will affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and shall not proceed to implement the change in the Work. If the Contractor performs the Work set forth in the Architect’s order for a minor change without prior notice to the Architect that such change will affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Contractor waives any adjustment to the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time.

ARTICLE 8 TIME§ 8.1 Definitions§ 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.

§ 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement.

§ 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8.

§ 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined.

§ 8.1.5 The date of final completion of the Work shall be the date on which the Contractor has finally completed satisfactorily all the Work required of the Contractor under and in accordance with the Contract Documents, including all close-out documents identified in Section 9.10.2.1.

Init.

/


26

§ 8.2 Progress and Completion§ 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement, the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work.

§ 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, commence the Work prior to the effective date of insurance required to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner.

§ 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time.

§ 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time§ 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by (1) an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, of an employee of either, or of a Separate Contractor; (2) by changes ordered in the Work; (3) by labor disputes, fire;or (4) unavoidable casualties documented in accordance with Section 15.1.6.2, or other causes beyond the Contractor’s control; by delay authorized by the Owner, or by other causes that the Contractor asserts, and the Architect determines, justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine.

§ 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15. A copy of any claim for extension of Contract time shall be delivered to the Owner and the Contractor shall immediately take all steps reasonably possible to lessen the adverse impact of such delay on the Owner.

§ 8.3.3 The Contractor agrees to make no claim for damages for delay in the performance of the Work under this Agreement caused by any act or omission to act of the Owner or any of its representatives, architects or contractors with respect to this Project and agrees that it shall be fully compensated for any delay by an extension of time to complete the performance of the Work.

ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION§ 9.1 Contract Sum§ 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.

§ 9.1.2 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed so that application of such unit prices to the actual quantities causes substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.

§ 9.2 Schedule of ValuesWhere the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit a schedule of values to the Architect before the first Application for Payment, allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in the form, and supported by the data to substantiate its accuracy, required by the Architect. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment. Any changes to the schedule of values shall be submitted to the Architect and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require, and unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s subsequent Applications for Payment.

§ 9.3 Applications for Payment§ 9.3.1 At least fifteen (15) days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner and the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under Section 9.2, for completed portions of the Work. The application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by all data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment that the Owner or Architect require, such as copies of requisitions, and releases and waivers of liens from Subcontractors and suppliers, and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents.

§ 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the

Init.

/


27

Architect, provided that these are included in fully executed Change Order timely issued by the Owner and signed by all parties, which shall include all undisputed amounts to be paid.

§ 9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay.

§ 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage, and transportation to the site, for such materials and equipment stored off the site.

§ 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information, and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances, in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers, or other persons or entities that provided labor, materials, and equipment relating to the Work. The Contractor further warrants that, except as the Contractor specifically notifies the Owner in writing, no Work, materials or equipment covered by an Application for Payment will have been acquired by the Contractor, or by any other person performing Work at the site or furnishing materials and equipment for the Project, subject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an encumbrance thereon is retained by the seller or otherwise imposed by the Contractor on such other person.

§ 9.4 Certificates for Payment§ 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, either (1) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment in the full amount of the Application for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor; or (2) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect’s reasons for withholding certification in part as provided in Section 9.5.1; or (3) withhold certification of the entire Application for Payment, and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect’s reason for withholding certification in whole as provided in Section 9.5.1. The Owner shall not be bound by the Architect’s Certificate for Payment. The Owner may make its own investigation of the progress of the Contractor’s Work and shall be obligated to pay only for Work actually completed by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect’s evaluation of the Work and the data in the Application for Payment, that, to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information, and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion, and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work; (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures; (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor’s right to payment; or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum.

§ 9.5 Decisions to Withhold Certification§ 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect’s opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such

Init.

/


28

representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect’s opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of

.1 defective Work not remedied;

.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims, unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;

.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or suppliers for labor, materials or equipment;

.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;

.5 damage to the Owner or a Separate Contractor;

.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or

.7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

.8 failure to submit Forms B and C as stipulated in Section 9.6.9.

§ 9.5.2 When either party disputes the Architect’s decision regarding a Certificate for Payment under Section 9.5.1, in whole or in part, that party may submit a Claim in accordance with Article 15.

§ 9.5.3 When the reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld.

§ 9.5.4 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the Owner makes payments by joint check, the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Contractor shall reflect such payment on its next Application for Payment.

§ 9.6 Progress Payments§ 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect.

§ 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the Owner, the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor’s portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. The Contractor shall place in effect for every Payment Application the issuance of the AIA G706 – 1994 Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims, if applicable, and G706-A – 1994 Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens, or forms submitted by the Owner to that effect, from every contractor, subcontractor and sub-subcontractor, including material suppliers, to the Owner with each Payment Application submitted.

§ 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor.

§ 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days, the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors and suppliers to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay, or to see to the payment of money to, a Subcontractor or supplier, except as may otherwise be required by law.

§9.6.4.1 The Contractor shall take prompt action with respect to any lien filed or claim made by any of its suppliers, materialmen, subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, or others to whom it is obligated so that any such liens or claims will be removed of record as against the Owner or the Owner’s property within sixty

Init.

/


29

(60) days after they are filed or made. To the extent such liens and claims are caused by the acts or omissions of the Contractor, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the removal and payment of all such liens and claims, and the Owner shall have no liability with respect to them. If the Contractor does not promptly remove any such lien or claim as required by this Section, the Owner may withhold as a security a sum equal to one and one-half (1.5) times the amount of the lien or claim from payments otherwise due to the Contractor, until the lien or claim is removed or paid. As is further set forth in Section 3.18.1 of this Agreement, the Contractor must indemnify the Owner in this regard.

§ 9.6.5 The Contractor’s payments to suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4.

§ 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors or provided by suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust, or entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision.

§ 9.6.8 Provided the Owner has fulfilled its payment obligations under the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall defend and indemnify the Owner from all loss, liability, damage or expense, including reasonable attorney’s fees and litigation expenses, arising out of any lien claim or other claim for payment by any Subcontractor or supplier of any tier. Upon receipt of notice of a lien claim or other claim for payment, the Owner shall notify the Contractor. If approved by the applicable court, when required, the Contractor may substitute a surety bond for the property against which the lien or other claim for payment has been asserted.

§9.6.9 Until final completion of the Work has been achieved, the Contractor shall submit for the Owner’s records, together with its monthly Application for Payment, an updated form B "Minority and Women Owned Business Monthly Utilization Report" showing any additions or changes in status on the Project and an updated Form C "Monthly Minority and Women Work Force Utilization Report". The Owner’s approval of the Contractor’s Application for Payment will be conditioned on Owner’s receipt of these documents. Failure to submit this documentation will cause the Application for Payment to be rejected.

§ 9.7 Failure of PaymentIf the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven (7) days after the date established in the Contract Documents for resolution of disputes of the amount accordingly due , then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents.

§ 9.8 Substantial Completion§ 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use.

§ 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

Init.

/


30

§ 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect’s inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor’s list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion.

§ 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion; establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance; and fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. § 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate. Upon such acceptance, and consent of surety if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to the Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 9.9 Partial Occupancy or Use§ 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect.

§ 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor, and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work.

§ 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment§ 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection. When the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect’s on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect’s final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor’s being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. The Owner shall not be bound by the Architect’s final Certification for Payment. The Owner may make its own investigation of the progress of the Contractor’s Work and shall be obligated to pay for only the Work actually completed by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner’s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment, (5) documentation of any special warranties, such as manufacturers’ warranties or specific Subcontractor warranties, and (6) if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or

Init.

/


31

satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts and releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance. If a lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging the lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance, including all costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees. The Contractor must also provide final updated copies of Form B and Form C described in Section 9.6.8 above.

§ 9.10.2.1 Final completion of the Work shall be further conditioned upon satisfaction of the following minimum criteria:

1. all Work shown and described in the Contract Documents is complete, including all punch list items; Record as-built drawings and documentation has been submitted and approved by the Owner;

2. operations and maintenance manuals for all products and equipment, as required, have been submitted and approved by the Owner;

3. equipment or product testing required by the Contract Documents or by regulatory agencies have been completed, submitted and approved (and recorded in O&M Manuals);

4. all required Owner training has been completed and documents;5. all regulatory agency certifications have been submitted or received by the Owner; and6. all areas have been cleaned pursuant to the terms herein.

§ 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed, corrected, and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of the surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims.

§ 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from.1 liens, Claims, security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled;.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents; or.4 audits performed by the Owner, if permitted by the Contract Documents, after final payment.

§ 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a supplier, shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment.

§ 9.10.6 Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of substantial completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. The Contractor shall assign or arrange for the assignment to the Owner of all warranties covering equipment furnished by the Contractor.

ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY§ 10.1 Safety Precautions and Programs§10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract, including but not limited to the Syracuse University Legal Management Program and the Syracuse University Multi-Employer Workplace Program.

Init.

/


32

§10.1.2 Prior to the commencement of any Work, the Contractor shall develop and maintain a Safety Program specifically designed for the contracted scope of work. The Contractor shall be responsible for all safety within the contract limit line from the start of construction through final completion. It shall ensure that all personnel, subcontractors, suppliers, Owner’s representatives and visitors adhere to the rules and regulations referred to and established by its Safety Program.

§10.1.3 The Contractor’s Safety Program shall contain but is not necessarily limited to the following:1. reference to all safety-related rules, codes, regulations, OSHA standards, etc.;2. a designated safety officer in accordance with Section 10.2.6 with required responsibilities; 3. means and methods for maintenance of the Safety Program at the Project site;4. requirements for all subcontractors to supply and maintain Safety Programs;5. requirements for all subcontractors to adhere to the Contractor’s Safety Program;6. regular safety inspections with formal distribution and filing of reports;7. a continuing on-site education program of all personnel by means of formal classes and/or

"Tool Box" meetings;8. procedures to ensure that safety-related items are included in the agendas of all regularly

scheduled Project-related meetings.

§10.1.4 The Contractor shall require all personnel, including those of the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and suppliers to report any accidents at the time of the incident. The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing within twenty-four (24) hours after it becomes aware of an incident and shall conduct a full investigation of any accident with the formal distribution and filing of a written report in a timely manner.

§10.1.5 The Owner reserves the right to comment, correct or add to the Contractor’s Safety Program. The Contractor shall immediately implement such changes to the Safety Program.

§10.1.6 The Owner may at any time and without notice to the Contractor make its own safety observations. The Contractor shall cooperate in any way necessary to facilitate such observations and will immediately implement the necessary means and methods to mediate any problems or hazards transmitted to it either verbally or in writing.

§ 10.2 Safety of Persons and Property§ 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to

.1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;

.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody, or control of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a Sub-subcontractor; and

.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, and utilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.

§ 10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with, and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities, bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury, or loss.

§ 10.2.3 The Contractor shall implement, erect, and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards; promulgating safety regulations; and notifying the owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities of the safeguards. The Contractor shall protect adjoining private or municipal property and shall provide barricades and temporary fences and covered walkways required to protect the safety of passers-by as required by prudent construction practices, local building codes, ordinances or the Contract Documents.

Init.

/


33

§ 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment, or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel.

§ 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3. The Contractor may make a Claim for the cost to remedy the damage or loss to the extent such damage or loss is attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18.

§ 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor’s organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor’s superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect.

§ 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition.

(Paragraphs deleted)§ 10.2.8 The Contractor shall maintain Work, materials and apparatus free from injury or damage from rain, wind, storms, frost or heat. If adverse weather makes it impossible to continue operation safely in spite of weather precautions, the Contractor shall cease work and notify the Owner and the Architect of such cessation. The Contractor shall not permit open fires on the project site.

§ 10.2.9 In addition to its other obligations pursuant to this Article 10, the Contractor shall, at its sole cost and expense, promptly repair any damage or disturbance to walls, utilities, sidewalks, curbs and the property of third parties ( including municipalities) resulting from the performance of the Work whether by it or by its subcontractors at any tier.

§ 10.2.10 The performance of the foregoing services by the Contractor shall not relieve the subcontractors of their responsibilities for the safety of persons and property and for compliance with all federal, state and local statutes, rules, regulations and orders of any governmental authority applicable to the conduct of Work.

§ 10.2.11 Injury or Damage to Person or PropertyIf either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, notice of the injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter.

§ 10.3 Hazardous Materials and Substances§ 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials or substances. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and notify the Owner and Architect of the condition.

§ 10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or

Init.

/


34

substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of the material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of the material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable additional costs of shutdown, delay, and start-up.

§ 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss, or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss, or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party seeking indemnity.

§ 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents. The Owner shall be responsible for hazardous materials or substances required by the Contract Documents, except to the extent of the Contractor’s fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances.

§ 10.3.5 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs (1) for remediation of hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, or (2) where the Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1, except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner’s fault or negligence.

§ 10.3.6 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred.

§ 10.4 EmergenciesIn an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor’s discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7.

ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS§ 11.1 Contractor’s Liability Insurance§ 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s operations and completed operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:

1. claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts that are applicable to the Work to be performed;

2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor’s employees;

3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than the Contractor’s employees;

4. claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage;5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property,

including loss of use resulting therefrom;

Init.

/


35

6. claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle;

7. claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and8. claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor’s obligations under Section

3.18.

The general liability insurance required of the Contractor under this Article shall be written on a commercial occurrence basis covering the Contractor and all the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and others for whom the Contractor is or may be responsible in form and amount satisfactory to the Owner and with an insurer licensed to do business in the State of New York, which is reasonably satisfactory to the Owner. It shall also include coverage for the so-called risks of product liability, completed operations, explosion, collapse, and underground, unless such coverage is expressly waived by the Owner in writing upon the written request of the Contractor. All liability insurance required by the Contract shall be maintained in force during the term of the Contract, and until the later of one year after the date of final completion or one year after the Contractor or any subcontractor performs any Work under the Contract. The Contractor is required to purchase and maintain its own insurance coverages and limits under the Contract, and in addition is solely responsible for the compliance of its subcontractors in meeting all of the insurance requirements in the Contract. Unless waived by Owner, all subcontractors will be required to provide the same coverage and limits as stated for the Contractor, and the Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner at any time it is aware that any subcontractor is not in compliance with these insurance requirements. Failure of the Contractor to procure or maintain any of the insurance coverages required herein shall not relieve the Contractor from any liability under the contract, nor shall failure of the Contractor to properly notify the Owner of non-compliance relieve the Contractor from any liability under the Contract; nor shall the insurance requirements be construed to conflict with or otherwise limit the obligations or indemnification responsibilities of the Contractor as may be stated elsewhere in the Contract. This clause shall apply to the extent it is not inconsistent with the insurance requirements set forth in Exhibit "B" to the Agreement.

§ 11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in Exhibit "B" to the Agreement or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. If any of the insurance required by this Agreement includes deductibles or self-insured retentions, satisfaction of such deductibles or self-insured retentions shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from the date of commencement of the Work until the date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment, and, with respect to the Contractor’s completed operations coverage, until the expiration of the period for correction of Work or for such other period for maintenance of completed operations coverage as specified in the Contract Documents.

§ 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of insurance. The certificates shall identify and name the Owner and the Architect and the Architect’s consultants as additional insureds with respect to the Contractor’s commercial general liability insurance coverages and policies, and indicate that the coverage shall be primary and non-contributory over any insurance carried by the Owner. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least thirty (30) days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner. An additional certificate evidencing continuation of liability coverage, including coverage for completed operations, shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2 and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of such coverage until the expiration of the time required by Section 11.1.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness. As soon as practicable following a written request by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish the Owner with certified copies of the Contractor’s insurance policies. Failure by the Contractor to maintain the required insurance coverages shall be grounds for immediate termination of the Contract by the Owner. This right of immediate termination shall supplement and be in addition to the Owner’s other rights under Sections 2.4 and 14.2.

(Paragraph deleted)§ 11.1.4 The Contractor shall cause the commercial liability coverage required by the Contract Documents to include (1) the Owner, the Architect and the Architect’s consultants as additional insureds for claims caused, in whole or in part, by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor’s operations; and (2) the Owner as an additional insured for claims caused, in whole or in part, by the

Init.

/


36

Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor’s completed operations. The policy shall provide primary and non-contributory coverage over any insurance carried by the Owner.

§ 11.1.5 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Contractor’s Required Insurance. Within three (3) business days of the date the Contractor becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any insurance required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide notice to the Owner of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration. Upon receipt of notice from the Contractor, the Owner shall, unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Owner, have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by the Contractor. The furnishing of notice by the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of any contractual obligation to provide any required coverage.

§ 11.2 Owner’s Insurance§ 11.2.1 The Owner shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability, containing the endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Owner shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.

§ 11.2.2 Failure to Purchase Required Property Insurance. If the Owner fails to purchase and maintain the required property insurance, with all of the coverages and in the amounts described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner, the Contractor may delay commencement of the Work and may obtain insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-Subcontractors in the Work. When the failure to provide coverage has been cured or resolved, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted. In the event the Owner fails to procure coverage, the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors to the extent the loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance to have been procured by the Owner. The cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by a Change Order. If the Owner does not provide written notice, and the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain the required insurance, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all reasonable costs and damages attributable thereto.

§ 11.2.3 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Owner’s Required Property Insurance. Within three (3) business days of the date the Owner becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any property insurance required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall provide notice to the Contractor of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration. Unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Contractor: (1) the Contractor, upon receipt of notice from the Owner, shall have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by either the Owner or the Contractor; (2) the Contract Time and Contract Sum shall be equitably adjusted; and (3) the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors to the extent any loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance had it not expired or been cancelled. If the Contractor purchases replacement coverage, the cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by an appropriate Change Order. The furnishing of notice by the Owner shall not relieve the Owner of any contractual obligation to provide required insurance.

§ 11.3 Waivers of Subrogation§ 11.3.1 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents, and employees, each of the other; (2) the Architect and Architect’s consultants; and (3) Separate Contractors, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents, and employees, for damages caused by fire, or other causes of loss, to the extent those losses are covered by property insurance required by the Agreement or other property insurance applicable to the Project, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require similar written waivers in favor of the individuals and entities identified above from the Architect, Architect’s consultants, Separate Contractors, subcontractors, and sub-subcontractors. The policies of insurance purchased and maintained by each person or entity agreeing to waive claims pursuant to this section 11.3.1 shall not prohibit this waiver of subrogation. This waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity (1) even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, (2) even though that person or entity did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, or (3) whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the damaged property.

Init.

/


37

(Paragraph deleted)§ 11.3.2 [INTENTIONALLY OMITTED].§ 11.4 Loss of Use, Business Interruption, and Delay in Completion Insurance [INTENTIONALLY OMITTED].§ 11.5 Adjustment and Settlement of Insured Loss§ 11.5.1 A loss insured under the property insurance required by the Agreement shall be adjusted by the Owner and made payable to the Owner for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.5.2. The Owner shall pay the Architect and Contractor their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Owner, and by appropriate agreements the Architect and Contractor shall make payments to their consultants and Subcontractors in similar manner.

§ 11.5.2 Prior to settlement of an insured loss, the Owner shall notify the Contractor of the terms of the proposed settlement as well as the proposed allocation of the insurance proceeds. The Contractor shall have 14 days from receipt of notice to object to the proposed settlement or allocation of the proceeds. If the Contractor does not object, the Owner shall settle the loss and the Contractor shall be bound by the settlement and allocation. Upon receipt, the Owner shall deposit the insurance proceeds in a separate account and make the appropriate distributions. Thereafter, if no other agreement is made or the Owner does not terminate the Contract for convenience, the Owner and Contractor shall execute a Change Order for reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work in the amount allocated for that purpose. If the Contractor timely objects to either the terms of the proposed settlement or the allocation of the proceeds, the Owner may proceed to settle the insured loss, and any dispute between the Owner and Contractor arising out of the settlement or allocation of the proceeds shall be resolved pursuant to Article 15. Pending resolution of any dispute, the Owner may issue a Construction Change Directive for the reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work.

§ 11.6 Performance and Payment Bonds§ 11.6.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder if stipulated in bidding requirements are specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of the execution of the Contract.

§ 11.6.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished.

ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK§ 12.1 Uncovering of Work§ 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect’s request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect’s examination and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense without change in the Contract Time.

§ 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment to the Contract Sum and Contract Time as may be appropriate. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the costs of uncovering the Work, and the cost of correction, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

§ 12.2 Correction of Work§ 12.2.1 Before Substantial CompletionThe Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, discovered before Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

Init.

/


38

§ 12.2.2 After Substantial Completion§ 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of notice from the Owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.5.

§ 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work.

§ 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2.

§ 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner.

§ 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors, whether completed or partially completed, caused by the Contractor’s correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor’s liability with respect to the Contractor’s obligations other than specifically to correct the Work.

§ 12.3 Acceptance of Nonconforming WorkIf the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made.

ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS§ 13.1 Governing LawThe Contract shall be governed by and enforced under the laws of the State of New York.

§ 13.2 Successors and Assigns§ 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract.

§ 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner’s rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate the assignment.

Init.

/


39

§ 13.3 Rights and Remedies§ 13.3.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law.

§ 13.3.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect, or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed upon in writing.

§ 13.4 Tests and Inspections§ 13.4.1 Tests, inspections, and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections, and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections, and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections, or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. The Owner shall directly arrange and pay for tests, inspections, or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations so require.

§ 13.4.2 If the Architect, Owner, or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection, or approval not included under Section 13.4.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection, or approval, by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Section 13.4.3, shall be at the Owner’s expense.

§ 13.4.3 If procedures for testing, inspection, or approval under Sections 13.4.1 and 13.4.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure, including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses, shall be at the Contractor’s expense, including the cost of re-testing for verification of compliance if necessary until the Architect certifies that the Work in question does comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 13.4.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection, or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect.

§ 13.4.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections, or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing.

§ 13.4.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work.

§ 13.5 Interest [INTENTIONALLY OMITTED].

ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT§ 14.1 Termination by the Contractor§ 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, for any of the following reasons:

.1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be stopped;

.2 An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency, that requires all Work to be stopped;

.3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or

Init.

/


40

(Paragraph deleted)§ 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, repeated suspensions, delays, or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3, constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less.

§ 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days’ notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed, as well as reasonable overhead and profit on Work not executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination.

§ 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3.

§ 14.2 Termination by the Owner for Cause§ 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor

.1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;

.2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors or suppliers in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors or Suppliers;

.3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of a public authority; or

.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents.

§ 14.2.2 When any of the reasons described in Section 14.2.1 exist, and upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, seven days’ notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety:

.1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;

.2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and

.3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work.

§ 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished.

§ 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract.

§ 14.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience§ 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work, in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine.

§ 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay, or interruption under Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent

.1 that performance is, was, or would have been, so suspended, delayed, or interrupted, by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or

.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract.

Init.

/


41

§ 14.4 Termination by the Owner for Convenience§ 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner’s convenience and without cause.

§ 14.4.2 Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall.1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;.2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work;

and.3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice,

terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders.

§ 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Owner shall pay the Contractor for Work properly executed; costs incurred by reason of the termination, including costs attributable to termination of Subcontracts; and the termination fee, if any, set forth in the Agreement.

ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES§ 15.1 Claims § 15.1.1 DefinitionA Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, a change in the Contract Time, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. This Section 15.1.1 does not require the Owner to file a Claim in order to impose liquidated damages in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 15.1.2 Time Limits on ClaimsThe Owner and Contractor shall commence all Claims and causes of action against the other and arising out of or related to the Contract, whether in contract, tort, breach of warranty or otherwise, in accordance with the requirements of the binding dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement and within the period specified by applicable law, but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and Contractor waive all Claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 15.1.2.

§ 15.1.3 Notice of Claims§ 15.1.3.1 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor, where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered prior to expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2, shall be initiated by notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party under this Section 15.1.3.1 shall be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim.

§ 15.1.3.2 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor, where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2, shall be initiated by notice to the other party. In such event, no decision by the Initial Decision Maker is required.

§ 15.1.4 Continuing Contract Performance§ 15.1.4.1 Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will prepare Change Orders and issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the Initial Decision Maker.

§ 15.1.4.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted in accordance with the Initial Decision Maker’s decision, subject to the right of either party to proceed in accordance with this Article 15. The Architect will issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decision of the Initial Decision Maker.

§ 15.1.5 Claims for Additional CostIf the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given before proceeding to execute the portion of the Work that is the subject of the Claim. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4.

Init.

/


42

§ 15.1.6 Claims for Additional Time§ 15.1.6.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given.

§ 15.1.6.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated, and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction.

(Paragraphs deleted)§ 15.1.7 [INTENTIONALLY OMITTED].

§ 15.2 Initial Decision§ 15.2.1 Claims, excluding those where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2 or arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, and 11.5, shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1, an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim. If an initial decision has not been rendered within 30 days after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker, the party asserting the Claim may demand mediation and binding dispute resolution without a decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree, the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner.

§ 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that, in the Initial Decision Maker’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim.

§ 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner’s expense.

§ 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of the request, and shall either (1) provide a response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished, or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part.

§ 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (1) be in writing; (2) state the reasons therefor; and (3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation, to binding dispute resolution.

§ 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time, subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1.

§ 15.2.6.1 Either party may, within thirty (30) days from the date of receipt of an initial decision file for mediation.

§ 15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor’s default, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety’s assistance in resolving the controversy.

Init.

/


43

§ 15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic’s lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines.

§ 15.3 Mediation§ 15.3.1 Claims, disputes, or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract, except those waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4, 9.10.5, and 15.1.7, shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution.

§ 15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2, the parties may nonetheless proceed to the selection of the arbitrator(s) and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings.

§ 15.3.3 Either party may, within thirty (30) days from the date that mediation has been concluded without resolution of the dispute or sixty (60) days after mediation has been demanded without resolution of the dispute, proceed to litigation if appropriate.

§ 15.3.4 The parties shall share the mediator’s fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

§ 15.4 § 15.4.1

§ 15.4.1.1

§ 15.4.2

(Paragraph deleted)§ 15.4.3. [INTENTIONALLY OMITTED].

§ 15.4.4 Consolidation or Joinder § 15.4.4.1

§ 15.4.4.2

§ 15.4.4.3 [INTENTIONALLY OMITTED].

Revised 2/25/17 SU Sadler Hall Elevator Modernization 2020 SU Project #102671-20125

SYRACUSE UNIVERSITY Contractor Insurance Requirements

The Contractor shall provide, maintain and deliver during the term of this Agreement the following insurance with at least the minimum coverages and limits indicated below: 1. Workers’ Compensation Insurance Workers’ Compensation and Employers’ Liability insurance as required under the laws of the State of New York. 2. Disability Insurance Disability insurance as required under the laws of the State of New York. 3. Commercial General Liability and Property Damage Insurance Commercial General Liability and Property Damage insurance written on an occurrence basis and a commercial form which shall

specifically include contingent liability arising out of operations performed by subcontractors, contractual liability with a specific endorsement referring to the University’s project name and number, completed operations and products liability, with limits of not less than:

Commercial General Liability including contractual liability for bodily injury and property damage $1,000,000 per occurrence, $2,000,000 aggregate per project.

The policy shall contain no labor law exclusion. 4. Automobile Liability Insurance Automobile liability insurance covering owned, non-owned, and hired vehicles, with limits of not less than:

$1,000,000 combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage.

5. Umbrella Liability Insurance Umbrella liability policy to increase the limits of the insurance required under paragraph 3 and 4 above to not less than $5,000,000 per occurrence and in the aggregate per project. 6. Property Insurance In accordance with (a) or (b) below, whichever is applicable, Property insurance shall be maintained upon the entire work to the full

insurable value of the construction cost thereof as more fully described in Sub-Paragraph 11.3.1 of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, as amended. This insurance shall specifically insure against the risk of fire and extend coverage and shall include “all risk” insurance for physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief.

(a) In projects where there is no Construction Manager, the Contractor shall provide and maintain the Property insurance in

accordance with the requirements of Article 11 of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. (b) In projects where there is a Construction Manager, the Construction Manager shall provide and maintain the Property

insurance in accordance with the requirements of Article 11 of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.

( X ) If checked in the preceding box, the Contractor shall also provide a Property insurance policy providing coverage as detailed below.

(X) Builder’s Risk Insurance: Contractor shall provide an "All Risk" builders risk insurance policy for fire, flood, earthquake, terrorism, testing of mechanical or electrical devices and extended coverages, on all the Premises and Improvements. The policy shall include Contractor and subcontractors as named insureds and Owner, as its interest may appear. The amount of insurance shall be 100% of full replacement cost. The policy shall contain a Consent of Occupancy endorsement, a waiver of subrogation clause in the form required by Section 11.3.7. ( ) Installation Floater: Contractor shall provide an “All Risk” installation floater policy, on a replacement cost basis and shall include coverage for flood and earth movement as well as coverage for losses that may occur during equipment testing. The Installation Floater must provide coverage from the time the equipment/material becomes the responsibility of the Contractor and shall continue without interruption during the installation, including any time during which the equipment/material is being transported to the installation site, or awaiting installation, whether on or off site. The policy shall be in an amount equal to the initial Contract Amount plus additional coverage equal to contract amount for all subsequent change orders. The policy shall include Contractor and subcontractors as named insureds and Owner, as its interest may appear. The policy shall contain a Consent of Occupancy endorsement, a waiver of subrogation clause in the form required by Section 11.3.7.

Revised 2/25/17 SU Sadler Hall Elevator Modernization 2020 SU Project #102671-20125

The policies required by paragraph 3 and 4 above and the umbrella policy, shall name the University and the architect and architect’s consultants as an additional insured with respect to the University’s project name and number to which these Insurance Requirements pertain. The above policies shall be primary and non-contributory insurance ahead of any insurance carried by the University with respect to the Project. This insurance shall be placed with insurance companies authorized to do business in New York State and rated at least A-minus by Best’s Key Rating Guide, with a financial category of VIII or higher. The Contractor shall file with the University certificates, evidencing the required insurance. The certificate holder shall be: Syracuse University 119 Euclid Ave. Syracuse, NY 13244 The certificate will not be acceptable to the University if there is a disclaimer to the validity of this coverage unless a copy of the actual policy endorsement accompanies the certificate. Acceptable policy endorsements are as follows: ISO Form Additional Insured Endorsement CG 20 10 11 85, or the carrier’s manuscript equivalent that covers completed operations, naming the University and the architect and architect’s consultants as an additional insured (using ISO endorsement CG 20 32 07 04 or is equivalent) with respect to the University’s project name and number and stating that the policies shall be primary and non-contributory ahead of any other insurance carried by the University. If any of the insurance policies required in paragraph 1 – 6 include deductibles or self-insured retentions, satisfaction of the deductibles or self-insured retentions shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. A Certificate of Insurance which states “ATIMA” or “As Their Interests May Appear” will not be accepted.

DIVISION 1 SECTION 01 01 00 - SUMMARY OF WORK PAGE 1

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 01 00 - SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Drawings and General Provision of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and otherDivision 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 PROJECT DESCRIPTION:

A. The Project consists of an elevator modernization at Sadler Hall at Syracuse University, Syracuse, NewYork. The project includes new elevator machines and motors, new controllers, hoistway equipment,fixtures and accessories. The cabs were modernized in 2004 and will be largely reused.

B. Additional electrical, mechanical, fire alarm and general construction support work is included as part ofthis Contract.

1.03 CONTRACTS:

A. The work identified in this specification shall be the work of one single Prime Contractor who isresponsible for all aspects of project completion.

B. The technical specifications of the Contract are arranged for the convenience of the Owner andContractor into divisions of work according to the following schedule:

1. Division 1 - General Requirements for all trades.2. Divisions 2-13 - General Construction.3. Division 14 - Conveying Equipment.4. Division 23 - Mechanical.5. Divisions 26 - Electrical.6. Division 27 - Communications.7. Divisions 28 - Electronic Safety and Security.

C. The organization of this work into Divisions shall not relieve the Prime Contractor from providing all ofthe work shown on the drawings or specified herein, whether or not the individual subcontractorscorrectly identify their respective responsibilities.

D. The initial specification section for each Division of the work provides amplified descriptions of thework of each Division. In such Sections may appear a section entitled “Related Work Not Included”.This Section may identify work which is related to the work of this Division but which is to be performedby another Division or it may identify work which is related to the work of this Division but is notincluded in the Contract.



1.04 WORK INCLUDED:

The work of this Contract shall include providing all materials, labor, services, permits and related workto furnish a complete, operating, tested, functioning, documented Elevator Upgrade including all workshown, specified or required for proper system operation including but not limited to the following:

A. Provide Elevator removals and new work as shown on the Contract Drawings.

B. Provide General Construction removals and new work as shown on the Contract Drawings.

C. Provide Mechanical removals and new work as shown on the Contract Drawings.

D. Provide Electrical removals and new work as shown on the Contract Drawings.

E. Delivery of all new materials and equipment.

F. Provide demolition and remove from site all discarded materials and equipment except items specificallydesired to be reused or turned over to the Owner. Include suitable credit for salvage value in the base bid.(This establishes the amount of material to be disposed of by the Contractor; confirm whether Ownerwants any removed parts at Pre-construction meeting.)

G. Provide temporary facilities as required for completion of the work. Contractor shall maintain solidbarricades (provided by Contract 1) and dust protection to minimize dust propagation to the rest of thebuilding.

H. Provide temporary barricades with appropriate signs where the entrances to the hoistway are open orwhere completely functioning interlocks are not provided to prevent opening of entrances. Refer toSpecification Section 14 21 00, Part 3.02.

I. Comply with minimum requirements of the latest edition of the “Field Employee’s Safety Handbook”published by Elevator World Inc.

J. Provide all necessary rigging and material moving equipment required to deliver, install and removedebris. Arrange such equipment to prevent damage to the building and contents during operations.

K. Provide Permits and Inspections.

L. Submittals, Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. Provide Shop Drawings for the following:

1. General Construction Work: See Divisions 2-13.2. Elevator Work: See Division 14.3. Mechanical Work: See Division 23.4. Electrical Work: See Divisions 26-28.

M. Guarantee.

N. As-Built Drawings.

O. Owner Instruction.



P. O&M Manuals. Submit manuals in the form of a single composite electronic PDF file.

1.05 RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED:

A. None.

1.06 ALTERNATES/ALLOWANCES/UNIT PRICES:

A. Identify a lump sum price to deduct the work of any Alternate Item from the Base Bid Amount. SeeSection 01 21 00 (if added by Addendum).

B. Identify Allowance (See Section 01 23 00) and Unit Prices (See Section 01 22 00) (if added byaddendum).

1.07 CONTRACT SCHEDULE:

A. Ordering and staging materials: Immediately upon notice to proceed.

B. Conform to the Project Schedule as indicated on Contract Drawing T101.

1.08 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS:

A. This Contractor shall be responsible to apply for, obtain and meet the requirements of all permits andinspections required by authorities having jurisdiction for the work of this contract. This Contractor shallpay all fees associated with these permits and inspections.

1.09 LAWS AND REGULATIONS:

A. Conform with all Federal, State, County, and Municipal Laws, Ordinances and Regulations. Complywith the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. The Scope of the Work in all sections of this Specification shall consist of the furnishing of all labor,materials, equipment, and appliances, and the performance of the work required by the ContractDocuments or by the conditions at the site, joining every part of this work with itself and the Work ofothers to form a complete, functioning entity.

B. Items not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the Drawings but which are inherentlynecessary to make a complete working installation, shall be included.

C. Install work so that all items are operable and serviceable, and avoid interfering with operation of doorsor removal of rails, filters, belt guards, etc. Provide easy and safe access to valves, controllers, motorstarters, and other equipment requiring frequent attention.



1.11 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS:

A. The Owner shall enter into separate contracts with other contractors for work to be executed concurrentlywith the work of this Contract. Contractors shall cooperate with each other and the Owner in execution ofthe work and share owner supplied services and space as required.

B. The work of Integrated Automation (EMS), Division 25, shall be performed by separate concurrentcontractor to furnish space temperature monitoring. The Prime Contractor shall not include any costs forEMS work under this project.

C. There may be concurrent projects at Lyman Hall during the Contract period; however, they are notexpected to impact this Project.

1.12 OWNER FURNISHED MATERIALS:

A. The Owner will furnish car cameras and fire alarm speaker-strobes for this project. See details on thePlans.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL:

A. See the individual Technical Sections for specifications on individual products.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 WORK SEQUENCE:

A. If required, the Work will be performed in phases to provide the least possible disruption to the Owner’suse of the surrounding facilities. Employ such methods as are required to perform the work indicated onthe Drawings in compliance with governing regulations and according to the Owner’s schedule.

3.02 TEMPORARY FACILITIES:

A. See Section 01 50 00 for detailed information and requirements.

B. Storage: Confine storage to the areas designated by the Owner, to be determined at project start.

C. Field Office: No field office is required for this Project.

D. Restrooms: The Owner shall designate one lower floor and one upper floor restroom facility forcontractor personnel throughout the project. The restroom shall be maintained daily by the Contractor.

E. Temporary Power: Building power shall be available to the Contractor without cost. Contractor shallprovide temporary outlet as required.

F. Welding Power: Provide power for all welding operations from Contractor provided motorized weldinggenerator. Do not connect welders to building power.



G. Water: Building water shall be available to the Contractor.

3.03 PROJECT FOREMAN:

A. Furnish at the site during construction a competent and experienced foreman. He/she shall have completecharge of all field work of this Contract. He/she shall be authorized to act for the Contractor in thecontractor’s absence, and to represent the Contractor with the Engineer and Owner. He/She is required tohave a working portable telephone during working hours at the contractor’s expense.

B. The project foreman shall be present at site whenever any Contractor or subcontractor employees areworking at the site, except for the Elevator Contractor’s team. If only the Elevator Contractor’s team ison site, the Prime Contractor shall visit the job site daily to confirm project requirements arecontinuously being met, and shall attend weekly project meetings. In the event of absence by the projectforeman, the Prime Contractor shall designate an Assistant Foreman and advise the Owner and Engineerof the designated individual’s name.

END OF SECTION 01 01 00


DIVISION 1 SECTION 01 01 05 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS PAGE 1


SECTION 01 01 05 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.01 PARTICIPATION BY MINORITY AND WOMEN OWNED BUSINESSES:

A. Bidders are advised that it is Syracuse University’s intent to achieve the following levelsof participation on the project by disadvantaged constituencies:

1. 5% of the Contract Sum on a cumulative basis subcontracted to (3%), or spentwith suppliers (2%) which are, certified minority owned businesses having theirprincipal place of business within the County of Onondaga, New York.

2. 5% of the Contract Sum on a cumulative basis subcontracted to (3%), or spentwith suppliers (2%) which are, certified women owned businesses having theirprincipal place of business within the County of Onondaga, New York.

3. Each bidder will be required to submit a completed FORM A, “Schedule ofMinority and Women Owned Business Participation” with the bid. Thisinformation must be submitted with the bid. ANY BIDS WHICH OMIT THEREQUIRED INFORMATION ON MINORITY AND WOMEN OWNED BUSINESSPARTICIPATION WILL BE CONSIDERED INFORMAL AND MAY BEREJECTED.

4. The successful bidder must submit the required records that document theefforts expended to solicit bids and quotations from minority and women ownedsubcontractors and material suppliers, and the results achieved by thissolicitation. Success in these efforts will be considered when inviting firms to bidon future projects.

5. Certification of minority or women owned business status may be made by anyauthorized governmental divisions of the State of New York or the City ofSyracuse.

B. Diversity in the Workforce:

1. Bidders are expected to employ 5% minority and 5% women in their workforceon this project. Bidders are also expected to emphasize the same workforcegoals to subcontractors employed on the project, but results will be measuredcumulatively by prime contract.

2. Utilization results will be required to be reported on a regular basis as follows: Ona monthly basis throughout the entire schedule of the project, the successfulbidder will be required to submit an updated FORM B, “Minority and WomenOwned Business Monthly Utilization Report”, showing any additions or changesin status on the project. Also on a monthly basis, the successful bidder will berequired to submit an updated FORM C, “Monthly Minority and Women WorkForce Utilization Report”.



3. Achievement of the participation goals and submission of the required reportswill be an important factor in determining whether Syracuse University continuesto invite the bidder to bid on future projects.

1.02 OBSERVANCE OF LAWS:

A. Contractor at all times shall observe and comply with all Federal, State, and local laws,by-laws, ordinances, codes and regulations, in any manner affecting the conduct of thework or applying to any employees on the Project, as well as all orders or decreeswhich have been promulgated or enacted, or which may be promulgated or enactedduring the progress of the work by any legal bodies or tribunals having authority orjurisdiction over the work, materials, employees, or the Contract. The Contractor shallindemnify and save harmless the Owner and all its officers, employees, and agents,from all suits, actions or claims of any character or description brought for, made onaccount of, or arising from the violation of any law, by-law, ordinance, regulation, orderor decree. Comply with the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).

1.03 PERMITS, TESTS AND INSPECTIONS:

A. The Contractor shall give requisite notices, obtain and pay for the building permit and allother permits, and pay for all deposits and fees necessary for the installation, tests, andinspection of all work provided under this specification except for Owner providedtesting services described in Section 01 40 00. Provide testing as required by theregulations of the local and/or state authorities.

B. Refer to Section 01 40 00 - Quality Control Services.

1.04 REGULATIONS GOVERNING ASBESTOS:

A. The Owner has reported that they have [NOT] detected [ANY EXISTING] asbestoscontaining materials. [THIS DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE SITE IS 100%ASBESTOS FREE.]

B. If any material which appears to possibly contain asbestos is encountered, theContractor shall:

1. Immediately notify the Owner.2. Cease work and remove all personnel from the affected area.3. Take measures to seal off the affected areas.4. Await instructions from the Owner.5. Cooperate with any consultant, testing lab, or decontamination Contractor the

Owner may retain.



C. Should asbestos material be encountered on the job, the Contractor shall comply withall statues and regulations of the State of New York and all rules and regulations of theUnited States Environmental Protection Agency as they pertain to the emission ofasbestos into the air during construction and demolition work and the disposal ofmaterial containing asbestos. Particular attention is drawn to latest edition of the Codeof Federal Regulation, Title 40, Part 61, Section 112 of Clean Air Act and NYS LaborLaw 202h, High-Voltage Proximity Act.

D. Contractor shall comply fully with the regulations of OSHA as they pertain to theprotection of workers exposed to the emission of asbestos fiber and shall take all stepsnecessary to protect his employees, as well as all other people engaged in the work,from exposure to asbestos fibers resulting from this work.

1.05 DEFINITIONS:

A. Where used in the Plans and Specif ications the following words and correspondingdefinitions shall apply:

1. Provide - Contractor shall supply, install, start-up, and maintain until finalacceptance.

2. Furnish - Same definition as Provide.3. New or Proposed - Work occurring as part of this Project, usually employed on a

drawing to distinguish from existing work. All work shown on the drawings shallbe assumed to be new unless specifically identified as existing.

4. Exist - Existing work.5. Shown - Shown on the Plans.6. Specified - Specified on the Technical Specifications.

B. “Contractor”, when used in this specification or on the drawings, refers to the Contractorresponsible for all work described under these complete specifications.

C. “Subcontractor”, any reference or letting of work to subcontractors or manufacturers inthese specifications, or on the drawings, does not relieve the Contractor of hisresponsibility for the work, materials and equipment under this Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 NEW PRODUCTS, SINGLE MANUFACTURER:

A. All equipment, materials and products furnished shall be new unless specifically shownto be reused. All materials shall be new and of the best quality of their respective kinds.The work when completed will be accepted in an undamaged and prefect conditiononly. Where equipment, materials and products are used for the same purpose, theyshall be provided by the same manufacturer.



2.02 AMERICAN MANUFACTURER:

A. It is the intent of the Owner to use American-made products and materials. Alternativeswill not be accepted without prior review by the Architect and written acceptance by theOwner. All materials shall be clearly identified with their country of origin. Materials notidentified with the country of origin shall be removed from site by the Contractor.

2.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. All equipment, materials and products shall conform to the applicable ANSI, ASA,NFPA, UL, AGA and/or ARI standard. All electrical equipment shall be UL or ETLListed.

2.04 WARRANTY:

A. Provide one year manufacturer’s warranty on all equipment , materials and products.Where shown or specified, provide manufacturer’s extended warranty.

2.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION:

A. All materials shall be delivered to the site in their original, unopened labeled containers.

B. All materials shall be stored in a clean, dry area as required by the Owner.

C. All materials shall be properly protected from weather, damage and theft. Thecontractor shall be responsible for the proper care and protection of all materials,equipment, etc., on site.

2.06 TEMPORARY FACILITIES:

A. Storage:

1. It is desired to minimize on-site storage for this Project. One standard storagetrailer may be maintained on-site if required. Locate this trailer to minimizeaesthetic impact from the surrounding buildings. Remove trailer from site assoon as major construction is complete.

2.07 TEMPORARY HEAT:

A. The Contractor shall be responsible to provide any temporary heat required for the useof the Contractor.

2.08 TEMPORARY ELECTRIC POWER FOR WELDING:

A. All electric power for arc welding on the site of the Project shall be supplied by the traderequiring such power, at its own cost and expense, and it shall be provided by means ofself-contained generating units.



2.09 WATER:

A. Building water shall be available to the Contractor unless interrupted for building work. Contractor shall make all connections to existing facilities to provide water forconstruction purposes. The University shall pay the cost of building water used by theContractor, under the provision that reasonable water conservation techniques areemployed. Contractor shall provide backflow prevention in accordance with the CrossConnection Control Manual as referenced by the New York State Department of Health.Connections to fire hydrants will not be permitted under this contract, under anycircumstances.

2.10 SECURITY:

A. The Contractor shall protect all work, materials, equipment, etc., against theft,vandalism, marring or damage until acceptance by the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall protect the premises from entry by unauthorized persons.

2.11 TEMPORARY VENTILATION:

A. The Contractor shall provide temporary ventilation as required to perform the requiredwork.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.01 QUALITY OF WORK:

A. All work shall be executed in accord with recognized standards of workmanship. Allwork shall be installed in a neat and orderly manner. If, in the judgment of the Architect,the workmanship is not acceptable, the work in question is to be removed andreinstalled in a manner satisfactory to the Architect.

B. Furnish at site during construction a competent and experienced Superintendent.He/she shall have complete charge of all field work of this Contract. He/she shall beauthorized to act for the Contractor in his/her absence, and to represent the Contractorwith the Architect or Owner. The Project Superintendent shall not be changed duringthe Project except for single day occurrences for personal needs. It is essential that thesame Superintendent be provided for the duration of the Project to maintain continuityon the job site. The University shall view any departure from this requirement by theContractor as an indication of the Contractor's unwillingness to meet the needs of theUniversity.



C. The project Superintendent shall be present at site whenever any Contractor orsubcontractor employees are working at the site. In the event of absence by the projectSuperintendent, the Prime Contractor shall designate an Assistant Superintendent andadvise the Owner and Architect of the designated individual's name. The AssistantSuperintendent shall have been working on the site for a minimum of five (5) workingdays prior to being designated acting Superintendent and shall be designated at leasttwo (2) working days prior to becoming acting Superintendent.

D. All personnel employed by or subcontracted by the Contractor shall at all times besuitably clothed and shall conduct themselves in a professional manner. Shirts shall beworn at all times. Any employee found to have been making gestures or harassingremarks to the staff, students or general public shall be disciplined by the Contractorand removed from the site.

E. No radios or other portable sound equipment shall be played on the site.

3.02 PROTECTION:

A. The Contractor shall provide adequate protection of the work, his workmen, the GeneralPublic and private property.

B. The Contractor shall use all means and precautions necessary to insure on-site safetyduring construction. All OSHA construction requirements covering a project of this typeshall be required of the Contractor.

C. All fencing and security measures must be implemented before work starts. Only metalfencing described below shall be used.

D. The Contractor shall use all means and precautions necessary to insure the safety ofthe occupants of the buildings during construction. Occupied portions of the buildingsshall have a minimum of two exits available at all times.

3.03 BARRIERS:

A. The Contractor shall furnish, erect and maintain barricades, fences, railings,enclosures, guard lights, danger signals, warnings, cribbing, shoring, and other suchprecautions necessary to protect all excavations, trenches, installations and structuresin the area of the work to insure the safety of the public and to avoid damage or injuryto any and all persons and property. Warning lights shall be of blinker type, battery orelectrically operated. Open flame type warning torches shall not be permitted.

1. Warning lights shall be placed at all excavations in locations that adequatelyprotect the public.

2. The Contractor shall be solely and without exception, responsible for safety onthe project site.

3. All fence and security measures shall be implemented before work starts.



B. Provide a perimeter fence around the contract limits of the Project as specified inSection 02100 generally as described on the Plans.

C. Where sidewalks and road crossings are made, maintain a minimum of one lane oftraffic and one sidewalk active for use of the public at all times. Provide full time,continuous flag persons at each side of an excavation at any time the roadway width isreduced to one lane. It is a requirement of this Contract that the Contractor employ theservices of a qualified traffic control service or personnel specifically trained in trafficcontrol to provide continuous flag persons, signage and communications. Traffic controlpersonnel shall have no other duties on the project site. The full width of any roadwaymust be available for two way traffic at the conclusion of the day. If steel road plates areemployed, a minimum of 1" thick plates shall be provided and arranged to support themaximum highway load as well as loaded fire truck. Depending on the job conditions,an engineered solution may be required.

3.04 SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION:

A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for compliance with all applicable safety andhealth regulations including, but not limited to, U.S. Department of Labor Safety andHealth Regulations for Construction. Construction employees are required to complywith the most stringent rule or standard in the event of dual or concurrent State andFederal jurisdiction. Detailed information on this subject may be obtained from theOffice of Information Services, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, U.S.Department of Labor, Washington, D.C. 20210.

B. Open pits or ditches shall be fenced; where walks cross such ditches, bridged walkwaysshall be provided with rails on both sides. Bridged walkways shall be adequately lightedat night.

C. Temporary walks and roads shall be surfaced by compacted run of crusher if they areto be in public use.

D. Walks and roadways used by both Contractor and the public shall be kept in repair andcleared by the Contractor at least once each day and more often as conditions require.

E. No obstructions are to be placed on or around f ire hydrants or fire departmentconnections that could make them inaccessible or inoperative for fire fighting purposes.

F. All temporary construction sheds, trailers, and flammable liquid storage areas belongingto Contractors shall be so placed on the construction site to m inimize any danger toOwner’s property and the public. Construction trailers and sheds shall require thepre-approval of the Owner.



G. Conduct of the work shall be such that pestilence does not occur. To prevent influx ofrats, vermin and other pestilence, the Contractor shall retain an approved exterminatingfirm until such time that the danger of pestilence has passed as approved by theArchitect. Contractor shall remove all garbage and trash from the site daily.

3.05 SYRACUSE UNIVERSITY MULTI-EMPLOYER WORKPLACE PROGRAM:

A. Provide compliance with Syracuse University Multi-Employer Workplace Program.

B. Review the full copy of the program statement located at < http://ehss.syr.edu/wp-content/uploads/2017/11/SU-Written-Hazard-Communication-

Program-Version-November-9-2017.pdf >

3.06 SYRACUSE UNIVERSITY LEAD MANAGEMENT PROGRAM:

A. Provide compliance with Syracuse University Lead Management Program.

B. Review the full copy of the program statement located at <http://ehss.syr.edu/wp-content/uploads/2017/08/Lead-Management-Program-Final.pdf>

3.07 FIRE SAFETY:

A. Fire Watch: Provide a fire watch wherever welding, brazing, cutting or other processesinvolving an open flame or potential for generating sparks is used. Fire watch shallconsist of a person with a 10 pound carbon dioxide fire extinguisher. While on firewatch, the person so assigned shall have no other duties or assignments.

B. Fire Blanket: In addition to providing a fire watch, have available an approved fireblanket to cover any combustible materials in the immediate area.

3.08 INSPECTIONS:

A. The Architect or Owner may visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage ofconstruction according to the General Conditions. The periodic observation orinspection of the general project progress shall not be construed as supervision ofactual construction, nor make the Architect or Owner responsible for providing a safeplace for performance of work by the Contractors or Contractor’s employees or those ofsuppliers of Contractors or for access, visits, use, work, travel or occupancy by anyperson.



3.09 CONTRACTOR’S USE OF BUILDINGS:

A. As necessary for execution of work:

1. Rooms used by Contractors shall be adequately protected with plywood sheetslaid on the finished floor. Security measures shall be taken to isolate work andstorage areas.

2. Any damage shall be repaired with like materials and blend into its environment,without having a patched look.

B. Work shall proceed as though each building is occupied:

1. No tools or materials can be stored in paths of egress.2. Building shall be weather-tight and secure at the end of each day’s work.3. Fire alarm system and sprinkler system must be operable at all times.

3.10 PROCEDURE AND SCHEDULE OF WORK:

A. Where work occurs within or attached to an existing structure, perform all work only onapproved schedule. Do not interfere with normal operation of existing systems. Do notshut off any heating, plumbing or electric facilities without permission of proper party incharge. Do as much as possible prior to the shutdown to minimize the shutdown time.Contractor shall make temporary connections to enable an orderly progress of the work.

3.11 ORDER OF WORK:

A. If, in the judgment of the Architect or Owner, it becomes necessary at any time duringconstruction in order to accelerate work and/or complete certain areas of project, theContractor shall concentrate his entire efforts and manpower to certain designatedareas. The Contractor shall complete work in certain areas ahead of the rest of thework so same can be turned over to the Owner. Contractor shall confer with theArchitect, Owner and all other Contractors to agree upon schedule procedure.Contractor shall follow this schedule diligently. Contractor shall expedite certain portionsof work to avoid delaying other Contractor’s work.

3.12 LAYING OUT WORK:

A. The Plans are in part diagrammatic. Contractor shall verify rough-in dimensions withShop Drawings and with the Plans. Conform to dimensions shown on the Plans inpreference to scaling from the drawings. Provide all fittings and appurtenances requiredfor proper system operation.

B. Before commencing work, the Contractor shall carefully examine the contract drawings.If any discrepancies occur between the drawings and the specifications, he shall reportsuch discrepancies to the Architect in writing and obtain written instructions as to themanner in which to proceed. No departures from the contract drawings shall be madewithout prior written approval of the Architect.



3.13 EXAMINATION OF ACTUAL CONDITIONS:

A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify allmeasurements at the site and shall be responsible for the contingencies which may beencountered. No extra compensation will be allowed on account of a differencebetween actual dimensions and measurements at the site and those indicated on thedrawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect forconsideration before proceeding with the work.

B. Contractor shall work accurately to bench marks and to proper elevations anddimensions established by the Contractor. Contractor shall check conditions and detailsof the work in relation to the progress of the work.

C. The Contractor shall lay out the work, establishing heights and grades for all pipingwork included in these specifications in strict accordance with the intent of the drawings,the physical conditions of the Project and the finished site grades. He shall beresponsible for the accuracy of the work and that the work meets all physical conditionsof the Project and the requirements of these specifications.

D. Prefabrication of piping, conduit, etc. may be performed only at the risk of theContractor. Changes to prefabricated piping required by actual site conditions shall bemade by the Contractor without extra compensation from the University.

E. Due to the scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes inelevation, etc. which may be required. Make all such changes in piping, location ofequipment, etc., to accommodate work to obstacles encountered, at no increase incompensation. If requested, submit drawings detailing all major deviations or changes.All changes must be approved before installing.

F. Plans show general arrangement of piping and connections. Install work substantiallyas indicated. Verify exact locations and elevations on job.

G. Thoroughly coordinate work with that of other Contractors.

H. Should either Architect’s details, field conditions, a change in equipment or ShopDrawing information necessitate an important rearrangement, report same to Architectsand obtain approval before proceeding.

I. No compensation shall be awarded for extra work because above precautions have notbeen followed. In event of conflicts, Architect’s decision is final. Contractor shall be fullyresponsible for unauthorized changes.

3.14 MANUFACTURER’S DIRECTIONS:

A. In the case where any manufactured article, material, or equipment is specified, thenthe Contractor must install, apply, connect, erect, use, clean and condition it is strictaccord with the manufacturer's directions.



3.15 INTERRUPTION OF UTILITIES SERVICES:

A. All underground utilities or service lines uncovered or exposed by the operations of theContractor shall be adequately protected by the Contractor, who shall also beresponsible for the repair of any damage to such services. The Contractor shall beresponsible for all costs resulting from his damage to utility lines. These include but arenot limited to material cost, wages, supervisory professional costs, disruption ofservices, research and overhead costs. The Contractor shall notify the Owner and therespective utility immediately of any damages to utility lines.

3.16 CONSTRUCTION AIDS:

A. Contractor shall supply and assemble, erect and move into proper location all derricks,hoists, lifting apparatus and similar equipment necessary for the execution andinstallation of the work.

B. Hoists, derricks and other lifting apparatus shall be equipped with safety devicesrequired by law and shall be maintained until removed from site. All such equipmentshall be so placed as to not interfere with or damage the work, or endanger the generalpublic.

C. The Contractor shall furnish, at his own cost and expense, all scaffolding, trestles,ladders and platforms and all other equipment required for the execution of the workunder his contract.

D. All trucks, payloaders, and other moving equipment shall be equipped with back-upalarm devices.

E. All scaffolds shall be built in accord with the regulations of all State and Local Laws andRegulations.

F. All trucks, loaders, excavators and equipment shall be free of leaks of oil, fuel, hydraulicfluids and anti-freeze. Remove from site any leaking equipment. Maintain on sitesorbent pads and spill kits to remediate any equipment leakage. Immediately clean upany spotting on roads, sidewalks, parking lots, lawns and gardens. Hired trucks,concrete trucks and all subcontractor vehicles shall also comply with this paragraph andshall be so advised by the Prime Contractor.

G. Operate machinery so as to eliminate the possibility of marking roads, curbs, sidewalksand parking lots. Protect surfaces with suitable planking when crossing with trackedequipment.



3.17 EROSION CONTROL:

A. The Contractor shall take all steps necessary to control on-site erosion andsedimentation and comply with State and local regulations. Contractor shall provide theerection of temporary barriers of baled hay backed by earth swales to contain runoff foras long as needed to prevent erosion damage and to protect adjacent properties and tocomply with the provision of any erosion control plan required to be filed with governingauthorities. The Contractor shall also provide basins or other appurtenances requiredby State or local authorities as a result of de-watering requirements.

3.18 PUMPING:

A. The Contractor shall install and maintain pumps of adequate capacity as required tomaintain all pits and manholes, open trenches and other depressions f ree of wateraccumulated at any time up to completion of the work. All costs in connection withremoval of water shall be borne by the Contractor.

3.19 PROTECTION AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND THE WORK:

A. Protection from freezing - During construction and until final acceptance, protect fromfreezing all fixtures, equipment and piping, both in building, trenches, etc. Any damageshall be replaced at Contractor’s expense to meet Architect’s approval.

B. Materials and Equipment - Store materials and equipment on dry base 6" above groundor floor. Protect from rusting or other weather damage. Keep covered with waterproofcovering. Protect against theft or damage from any cause or by any person; assume fullresponsibility; replace items stolen or damaged at no cost to Owner. Items subject tocorrosion shall be kept in building under cover or other weather-tight enclosure. Itemssubject to moisture damage shall be stored in a heated area, such as insulation, valves,etc.

C. Store materials and equipment at site in an orderly manner, in such location that will notinterfere with other work and will not obstruct access to building or existing buildings orfacilities.

D. After installation and until acceptance, protect f rom damage by plaster, concrete, paint,falling objects, other workmen. etc. Protect all finished surfaces of insulation. Fullresponsibility rests with Contractor supplying equipment for replacing any equipmentdamaged or marred prior to final acceptance. Contractor shall immediately replace anyof his protective covering removed at any time by others.

3.20 NOISE AND VIBRATION:

A. Install all equipment to be free of transmission of noise and vibration to occupiedspaces. Arrange isolated equipment so that it does not contact members of thebuilding structure, ceiling grids, piping, conduits or ductwork.



3.21 EQUIPMENT CHECKOUT AND TESTING:

A. Notify Architect when installation(s) is/are ready for testing, as specified with ample timein advance. Provide all metered and unmetered services, tools, equipment andmanpower necessary to perform tests.

B. Perform all equipment testing as specified and as recommended by manufacturer anddirected by the Architect. Demonstrate that all operating and safety devices are inproper working order.

C. Perform necessary operating and pressure testing for all piping and equipment whichshall be:

1. Buried underground: before backfilling; 2. Installed in or under slabs: before pouring; 3. Buried in building walls: before being buried.

3.22 MONTHLY M/WBE OWNED BUSINESS; AND MINORITY AND WOMEN WORKFORCE UTILIZATION REPORTS:

A. Until Final Completion of the Work has been achieved, the Contractor shall submit forthe Owner’s records, together with its monthly Applications for Payment, an updatedForm B, “Minority and Women Owned Business Monthly Utilization Report”, showingany additions or changes in status on the Project, and an updated Form C, “MonthlyMinority and Women Work Force Utilization Report”. The Owner’s approval of theContractor’s Applications for Payment will be conditioned on Owner’s receipt of thesedocuments. Failure to submit this documentation will cause an Application for Paymentto be rejected.



FORM B

MINORITY AND WOMEN OWNED BUSINESS MONTHLY UTILIZATION REPORT

COMPANY NAME: ______________________ PROJECT: ___________________________ADDRESS: ____________________________ PROJECT NO.: _______________________

PERIOD COVERED: FROM: ______________ TO: ________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

Sub Name &Classification

WBE [X]

MBE [X]

Contract Amount

Dollar Amount - Work Complete

% of Contract Amount

WBE Total

MBE Total

NOTE: Form B must be submitted monthly in accordance with Articles 9.5.1.8 and 9.6.8of the A 201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, 2017 Edition asamended. This form can be found online at http://cpdc.syr.edu//html/forms.html.



FORM C

MONTHLY MINORITY AND WOMEN WORKFORCE UTILIZATION REPORT


ADDRESS: _____________________________ PROJECT NO.: _______________________

PERIOD COVERED: FROM: ______________ TO: _________________________________

WORK HOURS OF EMPLOYMENT

_____________________________________________________________________________

CONSTRUCTION TRADE MALE FEMALE_____________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________TOTALS

NOTE: Form C must be submitted monthly in accordance with Articles 9.5.1.8 and 9.6.8 ofthe A 201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, 2017 Edition as amended.This form can be found online at http://cpdc.syr.edu/html/forms.html.



DIVISION 1 SECTION 01 21 00 - ALLOWANCES PAGE 1


SECTION 01 21 00 - ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENT:

A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing handlingand processing allowances.

B. Selected materials and equipment, and in some cases, their installation are shown andspecified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been establishedin lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials andequipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation.

1.03 SELECTION AND PURCHASE:

A. At the earliest feasible date after Contract award, advise the Engineer of the date whenthe final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowancemust be completed in order to avoid delay in performance of the Work.

B. When requested by the Engineer, obtain proposals for each allowance for use inmaking final selections, include recommendations that are relevant to performance ofthe Work.

C. Purchase products and systems as selected by the Engineer from the designatedsupplier.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowance, in theform specified for Change Orders.

B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to indicate actual quantities of materials delivered tothe site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.

1.05 UNUSED MATERIALS:

A. Unless specified elsewhere, return unused materials to the manufacturer or supplier forcredit to the Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.


DIVISION 1 SECTION 01 21 00 - ALLOWANCES PAGE 2

B. Where it is not economically feasible to return unused material for credit and whenrequested by the Engineer, prepare unused material for the Owner’s storage, anddeliver to the Owner’s storage space as directed. Otherwise, disposal of excessmaterial is the Contractor’s responsibility.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION:

A. Inspect products covered by an allowance promptly upon delivery for damage ordefects.

3.02 PREPARATION:

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials andinstallations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfacedwith related construction activities.

3.03 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES:

A. Provide Allowances as identified in the Informative Pricing of the Bid Form.



DIVISION 1 SECTION 01 22 00 - UNIT PRICES PAGE 1


SECTION 01 22 00 - UNIT PRICES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section

1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.

B. A unit price is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Form as a priceper unit of measurement for materials or services that will be added to or deducted fromthe Contract Sum by Change Order in the event the estimated quantities of Workrequired by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.

C. Unit prices include all necessary material, overhead, profit and applicable taxes inaccordance with contract documents.

D. Refer to individual Specification Sections for construction activities requiring theestablishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices arespecified in those Sections.

E. Schedule: A “Unit Price Schedule” is included at the end of this Section. SpecificationSections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials and methodsdescribed under each unit price.

F. The Owner reserves the right to reject the Contractor’s measurement of work-in-placethat involves use of established unit prices, and to have this Work measured by anindependent surveyor acceptable to the Contractor at the Owner’s expense.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 UNIT PRICE SCHEDULE:

A. Any unit prices required for this project are identified in Section 01 01 00 and the BidForm.



DIVISION 1 SECTION 01 23 00 - ALTERNATES PAGE 1


SECTION 01 23 00 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Alternates.

B. Definition: An Alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Formfor certain construction activities defined in the Bidding Requirements that may beadded to or deducted from Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept acorresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in theproducts, materials, equipment, systems or installation methods described in ContractDocuments.

C. Coordination: Coordinate related work and modify or adjust adjacent Work asnecessary to ensure that Work affected by each accepted Alternate is complete andfully integrated into the project.

D. Schedule: A “Schedule of Alternates” is included at the end of this Section.Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materialsand methods necessary to achieve the Work described under each Alternate.

E. Include as part of each Alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects and similaritems incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned aspart of the Alternate.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES:

A. Alternates required for this project are identified in Section 01 01 00 and the Bid Form.



DIVISION 1 SECTION 01 26 00 - MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PAGE 1


SECTION 01 26 00 - MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling andprocessing Contract modifications.

1. Division 1 Specification Section “Allowances” for procedural requirements governingthe handling and processing of allowances.

2. Division 1 Specification Section “Unit Prices” for administrative for the Contractor’sConstruction Schedule.

3. Division 1 Specification Section “Product Substitutions” for administrativeprocedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract.

1.03 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK:

A. Supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving anadjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, will be issued by the Engineer on AIAform G710, Architect’s Supplemental Instructions.

1.04 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS:

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Proposed changes in the Work that will requireadjustments to the Contract Sum or Contract Time will be issued by the Engineer, witha detailed description of the proposed change and supplemental or revised Drawingsand Specifications, if necessary.

B. Proposal requests issued by the Engineer (or Owner) are for information only. Do notconsider them instruction either to stop work in progress, or to execute the proposedchange.

C. The Engineer (or Owner) will use AIA Document G 709 for Owner-initiated changeOrder Proposal Requests.

D. Unless otherwise indicated in the proposal request, within 10 days of receipt of theproposal request, submit to the Engineer for the Owner’s review an estimate of costnecessary to execute the proposed change.



1. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs, along withthe total amount of purchases to be made. Include all labor costs all overheadand profit costs. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiatequantities.

2. Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental and amounts of tradediscounts.

3. Comply with requirements in Section “Product Substitutions” if the proposedchange in the Work requires the substitution of one product or system for aproduct or system specified.

4. The estimate of costs must contain a summary of all subcontractor costs, and allmajor material suppliers. A copy of all subcontractors’ quotations must beincluded.

5. Refer to the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction AIA, A201-2017Edition as amended (paragraph 7.3.8.1) for the Maximum Allowance forOverhead and Profit.

6. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work willhave on the Contract time.

E. Contractor-Initiated Change Order Proposal Requests: When latent or other unforeseenconditions require modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changesby submitting a request for a change to the Architect.

F. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the changeon the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate theeffect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and Contract Time.

1. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs, along withthe total amount of purchases to be made. Include all labor costs all overheadand profit costs. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiatequantities.

2. Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental and amounts of tradediscounts.

3. Comply with requirements in Section “Product Substitutions” if the proposedchange in the Work requires the substitution of one product or system for aproduct or system specified.

4. The estimate of costs must contain a summary of all subcontractor costs, and allmajor material suppliers. A copy of all subcontractors’ quotations must beincluded.

5. Refer to the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction AIA, A 201-12017 Edition as amended (paragraph 7.3.8.1) for the Maximum Allowance forOverhead and Profit.

6. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work willhave on the Contract Time.



1.05 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE:

A. Construction Change Directive: When the Owner and Contractor are not in totalagreement on the terms of a Change Order Proposal Request, the Engineer may issuea Construction Change Directive on AIA Form G714, instructing the Contractor toproceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. TheConstruction Change Directive will contain a complete description of the change in theWork and designate the method to be followed to determine change in the ContractSum or Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work requiredby the Construction Change Directive.

C. After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting datanecessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

1.06 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES:

A. Upon the Owner’s approval of a Change Order Proposal Request, the Engineer (orOwner) will issue a Change Order for signatures of the Owner and Contractor on AIAForm G701, as provided in the Conditions of the Contract.


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)



DIVISION 1 SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT COORDINATION PAGE 1


SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General andSupplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specifications apply to thisSection.

1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies administrative and supervisory requirements necessary forProject coordination including, but not necessarily limited to:

1. Coordination.2. Administrative and supervisory personnel.3. General installation provisions.4. Cleaning and protection.5. Utility interruptions.

B. Progress meetings, coordination meetings and pre-installation conferences asincluded in Section “Project Meetings”.

C. Requirements for the Contractor’s Construction Schedule are included in Section“Submittals”.

1.03 COORDINATION:

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction activities included under various Sectionsof these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part ofthe Work. Coordinate construction operations included under dif ferent Sectionsof the Specifications that are dependent upon each other for proper installation,connection, and operation.

B. Where installation of one part of the Work is dependent on installation of othercomponents, either before or after its own installation, schedule constructionactivities in the sequence required to obtain the best results.

C. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of differentcomponents to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, serviceand repair.

D. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.



E. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involvedoutlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items asrequired notices, reports, and attendance at meetings.

F. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate Contractors wherecoordination of their Work is required.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES:

A. Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures withother construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of theWork. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of schedules.

a. Bar-Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar-charttype Contractor’s construction schedule. Submit initial schedule forreview at the preconstruction meeting. Submit final schedule within15 days after Commence of the Work.

b. Provide a separate time bar for each significant constructionactivity. Provide a continuous vertical line to identify the firstworking day of each week. Use the same breakdown of units of theWork as indicated in the “Schedule of Values.”

c. Phasing: Provide notations on the schedule to show how thesequence of the Work is affected by requirements for phasedcompletion to permit Work by separate contractors and partialoccupancy by the Owner prior to final completion.

2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities.3. Delivery and processing of submittals.4. Progress meetings.5. Project close-out activities.

B. Staff Names: Within 7 days of a letter of intent of executed contract, submit a listof the Contractor’s principal staff assignments, including the Superintendent andother personnel in attendance at the site; identif y individuals, their duties andresponsibilities; list their addresses and telephone numbers.

C. Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room, the temporary field office, andeach temporary telephone.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations arecarried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, andmaterials.



E. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actuallyincorporated in, the Work. Refer to other sections for disposition of salvagedmaterials that are designated as Owner’s property.

1.05 UTILITY INTERRUPTIONS:

A. Utility Interruptions: Coordinate scheduling and timing of any interruption ofmechanical, electrical, communication, fire alarm or data services. Request inwriting a minimum of fourteen (14) days in advance of scheduled shut down.Outages and shut downs will occur at the Owner’s convenience and may bescheduled evenings, weekends or holidays at no additional cost to the Owner.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS:

A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the installer of each major component toinspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed.Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in anacceptable manner.

B. Manufacturer’s Instruction: Comply with manufacturer’s installation instructionsand recommendations, to the extent that those instructions andrecommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained inContract Documents.

C. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior toinstallation. Reject damaged and defective items.

D. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securingWork. Secure Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and buildingmovement.

E. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints inexposed Work to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to theArchitect for final decision.

F. Recheck measurements and dimensions before starting each installation.

G. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that willensure the best possible results. Isolate each part of the completed constructionfrom incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration.

H. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and test, to minimizethe necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose.



I. Mounting Heights: Refer questionable mounting height decisions to the Architectfor final decision.

3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:

A. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress andadjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensureprotection from damage or deterioration until final completion.

B. Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessary throughthe remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operablecomponents to ensure operability without damaging effects.



DIVISION 1 SECTION 01 31 50 - PROJECT MEETINGS PAGE 1


SECTION 01 31 50 - PROJECT MEETINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY:

A. The Owner’s Representative (Architect, Project Manager or Construction Manager) willschedule and administer project meetings, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Pre-Bid Meeting.2. Pre-Construction Conference.3. Pre-Installation Conferences.4. Progress Meetings5. Project Turn-over Meeting.

B. The Owner’s Representative (Architect or Project Manager) will:

1. Prepare agenda for meetings.2. Distribute written notice of each meeting in advance of meeting date.3. Make physical arrangements for meetings.4. Preside at meetings.5. Prepare Project Reports or meeting minutes, to include all significant

proceedings and decisions.

6. Duplicate and distribute copies of reports within five business days after eachmeeting:

a. To all participants in the meeting.b. To all parties affected by decisions made at the meeting.

1.03 PRE-BID MEETING:

A. A pre-bid meeting will be scheduled at the project site prior to receipt of bids for allinvited bidders and potential subcontractors for the purpose of reviewing the scope ofwork, inspection of project site and to answer any questions. Answers to any questionswill remain informal unless and until officially responded to in addenda transmit to allbidders.



1.04 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE:

A. A pre-construction conference will be scheduled at the Project site or anotherconvenient location no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement and prior tocommencement of construction activities to review responsibilities and personnelassignments.

B. Attendees: The Owner, Architect and their consultants, the Contractor and itssuperintendent, major subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers and other concernedparties shall each be represented at the conference by persons familiar with andauthorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress including such topicsas:

1. Tentative Construction Schedule.2. Critical Work Sequencing.3. Designation of Responsible Personnel.4. Procedures for Processing Field Decisions and Change Orders.5. Procedures for Processing Applications For Payment.6. Distribution of Contract Documents.7. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.8. Preparation of Record Documents.9. Use of the Premises.10. Office, Work and Storage Areas.11. Equipment Deliveries and Priorities.12. Safety Procedures.13. First Aid.14. Security.15. Housekeeping.16. Working Hours.17. Parking Regulations.18. Shutdown of Services.

1.05 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES:

A. Conduct a pre-installation conference at the site before each construction activity thatrequires special coordination with other construction such as roof installation, specialtyequipment, elevators, etc. The Installer and representatives of manufacturers andfabricators involved in or affected by the installation, and its coordination or integrationwith other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow shall attend themeeting. Advise the Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

B. Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particularactivity under consideration at each pre-installation conference, including requirementsfor:



1. Contract Documents.2. Options.3. Relate Change Orders.4. Purchases.5. Deliveries.6. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Quality Control.7. Possible Conflicts.8. Compatibility.9. Time Schedules.10. Weather Limitations.11. Manufacturer’s Recommendations.12. Compatibility Of Materials.13. Acceptability Of Substrates.14. Temporary Facilities.15. Space and Access Limitations.16. Governing Regulations.17. Safety.18. Inspection and Testing Requirements.19. Required Performance Results.20. Recording Requirements.21. Protection.

C. Record significant discussions and agreements and disagreements of each conference,along with the approved schedule. Distribute the record of the meeting to everyoneconcerned, promptly, including the Owner and Architect.

D. Do not proceed if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whateveractions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work and reconvenethe conference at the earliest feasible date.

1.06 PROGRESS MEETINGS:

A. Progress meetings will be held weekly at the Project site, coordinated with preparationof payment requests.

B. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner and Architect, the Contractor,each subcontractor, supplier or other entity concerned with current progress or involvedin planning, coordination or performance of future activities shall be represented atthese meetings by persons familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude mattersrelating to progress.

C. Agenda: Note corrections to the report of the previous progress meeting. Review itemsof significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate tothe current status of the project.



D. Contractor’s Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determinewhere each activity is in relation to the Contractor’s Construction Schedule, whether ontime or ahead or behind schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will beexpedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whetherschedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will becompleted within the Contract Time.

E. Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including such items as:

1. Coordination of Work.2. Interface Requirements.3. Time .4. Sequences.5. Deliveries.6. Off-Site Fabrication Problems.7. Access.8. Site Utilization.9. Temporary Facilities and Services.10. Hours of Work.11. Hazards and Risks.12. Housekeeping.13. Quality and Work Standards.14. Change Orders.15. Documentation of Information for Payment Requests.

F. Schedule Updating: Revise the construction schedule after each progress meetingwhere revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the revisedschedule prior to the date of the next progress meeting.

1.07 TURN OVER MEETING:

A. Refer to Section 017823, Instructions of the Owner’s Personnel.





DIVISION 1 S ECTION 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PAGE 1


SECTION 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General andSupplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to thisSection.

1.02 SUMMARY:

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting theprogress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Startup construction schedule.2. Contractor’s Construction Schedule.3. Construction schedule updating reports.4. Daily construction reports.5. Material location reports.6. Site condition reports.7. Unusual event reports.

1.03 DEFINITIONS:

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling,monitoring, and controlling the construction Project. Activities included in a constructionschedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on theplanned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through thenetwork schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and containsno float.

C. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor,but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties asneeded to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.



2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adverselyaffecting the early start of the successor activity.

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity withoutadversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

4. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary forcompleting an activity as scheduled.

1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS:

A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. PDF file.

B. Construction schedule.

1. Submit weekly and one day prior to construction progress meeting.

C. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

D. Unusual Event Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.


A. Prescheduling Conference: Review methods and procedures related to the preliminaryconstruction schedule and Contractor’s Construction Schedule, including, but notlimited to, the following:

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports.2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.3. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations, interim

milestones, and partial Owner occupancy.4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products.5. Review schedule for work of Owner’s separate contracts.6. Review submittal requirements and procedures.7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and

inspecting agencies.9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup

procedures, including commissioning activities.10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.11. Review procedures for updating schedule.



1.06 COORDINATION:

A. Coordinate Contractor’s Construction Schedule with the schedule of values submittalschedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules andreports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work fromentities involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities andschedule them in proper sequence.

1.07 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL:

A. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a programthat has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work tofinal completion.

C. Activities: Treat each floor or separate area as a separate numbered activity for eachmain element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 30 days, unlessspecifically allowed by Architect.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long leaditems and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separateactivities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to,submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated inSection 013300 “Submittals” in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times inContractor’s Construction Schedule with submittal schedule.

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.5. Commissioning Time: Include no fewer than 30 days for commissioning.6. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for

Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect’s administrative proceduresnecessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

7. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completionof punch list items and final completion.

D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the ContractDocuments and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work isaffected.

1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each

contract.



3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Workperformed by Owner.

4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product.Include delivery date.

5. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Includedelivery date.

6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction.b. Limitations of continued occupancies.c. Uninterruptible services.d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.e. Use-of-premises restrictions.f. Provisions for future construction.g. Seasonal variations.h. Environmental control.

7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion ofthe Work, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Subcontract awards.b. Submittals.c. Purchases.d. Mockups.e. Fabrication.f. Sample testing.g. Deliveries.h. Installation.i. Tests and inspections.j. Adjusting.k. Curing.l. Building flush-out.m. Startup and placement into final use and operation.n. Commissioning.

8. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each majorportion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major areamust be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide forthe following:

a. Structural completion.b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.c. Permanent space enclosure.d. Completion of mechanical installation.e. Completion of electrical installation.f. Substantial Completion.



E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled tooccur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the followingissues:

1. Unresolved issues.2. Unanswered Requests for Information.3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.4. Notations on returned submittals.5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and the Contract Time.

F. Contractor’s Construction Schedule Updating: At weekly intervals, update schedule toreflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one day before eachregularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisionshave been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with thereport of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including,but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, andactivity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is seven or morecalendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recoveryschedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with theschedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, equipmentrequired to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.

H. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separatecontractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractorwith a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and

post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they havecompleted their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved inperformance of construction activities.

1.08 GANTT-CHART SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS:

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal,Gantt-chart-type, Contractor’s Construction Schedule within 30 days of date establishedfor commencement of the Work.

1. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional inf ormationreceived since the start of Project.



B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify firstworkday of each week with a continuous vertical line.

1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete,indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments withintime bar.

1.09 REPORTS:

A. All reports shall be made available in PDF format and submitted weekly minimum or atgreater intervals when requested by the Owner or Architect, or when otherwiseindicated.

B. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the followinginformation concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site.2. List of separate contractors at Project site.3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.4. Equipment at Project site.5. Material deliveries.6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence

of rain or snow.7. Testing and inspection.8. Accidents.9. Meetings and significant decisions.10. Unusual events.11. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.12. Meter readings and similar recordings.13. Emergency procedures.14. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.15. Change Orders received and implemented.16. Services connected and disconnected.17. Equipment or system tests and startups.18. Partial completions and occupancies.19. Substantial Completions authorized.

C. Material Location Reports: At prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materialsdelivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materialspreviously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement ofprogress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or storedaway from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials:

1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage.2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and

installed.



3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.

D. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between siteconditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submitwith a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions,together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

E. Unusual Event Reports: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs atProject site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a specialreport. List chain of events, persons participating, responses by Contractor’s personnel,evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner inadvance when these events are known or predictable.

1. Submit unusual event reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of anoccurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.





DIVISION 1 SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PAGE 1


SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY:

A. Section Includes:

1. [Submittal schedule requirements.]2. Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals.

1.03 DEFINITIONS:

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that requireArchitect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated inindividual Specification Sections as “action submittals.”

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that donot require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complyingwith requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individualSpecification Sections as “informational submittals.”

1.04 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE:

A. [Submittal Schedule: Submit, as an action submittal, a list of submittals, arranged inchronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time requiredfor review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals notedby Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by thosecorrections.] [Load submittal schedule into Web Based Project Software.]

1.05 SUBMITTAL FORMATS:

A. Submittal Information: Include the following information in each submittal:

1. Project name.2. Date.3. Name of Architect.4. Name of Construction Manager.



5. Name of Contractor.6. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.7. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.8. Number and title of Specification Section, with paragraph number and generic

name for each of multiple items. (Example: 230514 – Variable Frequency Drives)9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.10. Indication of full or partial submittal.11. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.12. Other necessary identification.13. Remarks.14. Signature of transmitter.

B. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

C. Deviations and Additional Information: On each submittal, clearly indicate deviationsfrom requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations andlimitations; include relevant additional information and revisions, other than thoserequested by Architect on previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on eachsubmittal or noting on attached separate sheet.

D. PDF Submittals: Prepare each submittal as combined PDF package, incorporatingcomplete information into each PDF file. Name PDF file with the Specification numberand description of the submittal. (Example: 230514 – Variable Frequency Drives)

1.06 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

A. Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types ofsubmittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Prepare each submittal as a single PDF package, and transmit to Architect bysending via email or by uploading to Architects Web Based project softwarewhen requested by the architect. Use Syracuse University Web Based projectsoftware where Syracuse University Campus Planning, Design, and Constructionis the project Architect or Engineer. Enter required data in web-based softwaresite to fully identify submittal and submit each submittal separately.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance ofconstruction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, othersubmittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrentlyunless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approvedsubmittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the sameSpecification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.



4. Coordinate transmittal of submittals for related parts of the Work specified indifferent Sections so processing will not be delayed because of need to reviewsubmittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiringcoordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, asfollows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. Noextension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmitsubmittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additionaltime if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will adviseContractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in samemanner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 days for review of each resubmittal.

D. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initialsubmittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent

of revision.3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect’s

action stamp.

E. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors,suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessaryfor performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

F. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use onlyfinal action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect’s actionstamp.

1.07 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element ofconstruction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standardpublished data are unsuitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as ProductData.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options areapplicable.



3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer’s catalog cuts.b. Manufacturer’s product specifications.c. Standard color charts.d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.e. Testing by recognized testing agency.f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.g. Notation of coordination requirements.h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams that show factory-installed wiring.b. Printed performance curves.c. Operational range diagrams.d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on

accompanying Shop Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before Shop Drawings, and before or concurrent withSamples.

B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do notbase Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printeddata.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include thefollowing information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products.b. Schedules.c. Compliance with specified standards.d. Notation of coordination requirements.e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. [BIM Incorporation: Develop and incorporate Shop Drawing files into BIMestablished for Project].

C. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check ofthese characteristics with other materials.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such asaccessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Permanently attach label on unexposed side of Samples thatincludes the following:



a. Project name and submittal number.b. Generic description of Sample.c. Product name and name of manufacturer.d. Sample source.e. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.f. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. Provide PDF transmittal via email or Web-Based Project software. Include digitalimage file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information forrecord.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available forquality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity.Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of constructionassociated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated inindividual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in anundamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated asOwner’s property, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer’s color charts consisting ofunits or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patternsavailable.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices wherecolor, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selectedfrom manufacturer’s product line. Architect will return submittal withoptions selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated,prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished inmanner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed foruse, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samplesinclude, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured orfabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units ofrepetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; colorrange sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

D. Test and Research Reports:

1. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency,on testing agency’s standard form, indicating and interpreting results ofcompatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include writtenrecommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.



2. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results offield tests performed either during installation of product or after product isinstalled in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the ContractDocuments.

3. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, ontesting agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of materialfor compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

4. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testingagency, on testing agency’s standard form, indicating and interpreting results oftests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performancerequirements in the Contract Documents.

5. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current productproduced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the ContractDocuments. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer andwitnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed bya qualified testing agency.

6. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organizationacceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with buildingcode in effect for Project. Include the following information:

a. Name of evaluation organization.b. Date of evaluation.c. Time period when report is in effect.d. Product and manufacturers’ names.e. Description of product.f. Test procedures and results.g. Limitations of use.

1.08 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES:

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certificationsby a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the ContractDocuments, provide products and systems complying with specific performance anddesign criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are insufficient to perform services or certification required,submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data,and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF file of certificate, signed andsealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specificallyassigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteriain the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used inperforming these services.



C. BIM Incorporation: Incorporate delegated-design drawing and data files into BIMestablished for Project when called for.

1. Prepare delegated-design drawings in the following format: Same digital datasoftware program, version, and operating system as original Drawings.

1.09 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW:

A. Action Submittals and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check forcoordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the ContractDocuments. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp beforesubmitting to Architect.

B. Contractor’s Approval: Indicate Contractor’s approval for each submittal with a uniformapproval stamp. Include name of reviewer, date of Contractor’s approval, andstatement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved forcompliance with the Contract Documents.

1. Architect will not review submittals received from Contractor that do not haveContractor’s review and approval.

1.10 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW:

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, indicate corrections or revisionsrequired, and return it via email or the Web-Based Project software. The stamp willindicate a uniform self-explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be marked andexecuted to indicate whether the returned submittal is for unrestricted use (noexceptions taken), final-but-restricted use (make corrections noted), must be revisedand resubmitted (use not permitted) or is rejected (use not permitted).

B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or willreturn it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal toappropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use ofpartial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will bereturned for resubmittal without review.

E. Architect will return without review submittals received from sources other thanContractor.

F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be returned by Architect withoutaction.


DIVISION 1 SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES PAGE 1


SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for quality controlservices.

B. Quality control services include inspections and tests and related actions includingreports performed by independent agencies, governing authorities, and the Contractor.They do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by the Architect.Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirementsspecified or indicated. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility forcompliance with Contract Document requirements.

C. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installationprocedures, not production of standard products.

D. Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities are specified inthe Sections that specify those activities. Those requirements, including inspections andtests, cover production of standard products as well as customized fabrication andinstallation procedures.

E. Inspections, test and related actions specif ied are not intended to limit the Contractor’squality control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Documentrequirements.

F. Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control services required by theArchitect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of thisSection.

1.03 RESPONSIBILITIES:

A. Contractor Responsibilities: The Contractor shall provide inspections, tests and similarquality control services, specified in individual Specifications Sections and required bygoverning authorities, only where they are specifically indicated to be the Contractor’sresponsibility; these services include those specified to be performed by anindependent agency as well as those indicated to be performed by the Contractor.Costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Sum.



B. The Contractor shall employ and pay an independent agency to perform specifiedquality control services.

C. The Owner will engage and pay for the services of an independent agency to performinspections and tests not designated as the Contractor’s responsibility.

D. Where the Owner has engaged a testing agency or other entity for testing andinspection of a part of the Work, and the Contractor is also required to engage an entityfor the same or related element, the Contractor shall not employ the entity engaged bythe Owner, unless otherwise agreed in writing with the Owner.

E. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of requiredinspections, tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicatecompliance with Contract Document requirement, regardless of whether the original testwas the Contractor’s responsibility. Cost of retesting construction revised or replaced bythe Contractor is the Contractor’s responsibility, where required tests were performedon original construction.

F. Associated Services: The Contractor shall cooperate with agencies performing requiredinspections, tests and similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services asrequested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignmentof personnel. Auxiliary Services required include, but are not limited to:

1. Provide access to the Work and furnishing incidental labor and facilitiesnecessary to facilitate inspections and tests.

2. Taking adequate quantities of representative sample of materials that requiretesting or assisting the agency in taking samples.

3. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivery ofsamples to testing laboratories.

4. Providing the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use formaterials mixes that require control by the testing agency.

5. Security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project site.

G. Owner Responsibilities: The Owner will provide inspections, tests and similar qualitycontrol services specified to be performed by independent agencies and not by theContractor, except where they are specifically indicated as the Contractor’sresponsibility or are provided by another identified entity. Costs for these services arenot included in the Contract Sum.

H. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent agency, testinglaboratory or other qualified firm to perform services, which are the Owner’sresponsibility.



I. Coordination: The Contractor and each agency engaged to perform inspections, testsand similar services shall coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodaterequired services with a minimum of delay. In addition, the Contractor and each agencyshall coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing constructionto accommodate inspections and tests. The Contractor is responsible for schedulingtimes for inspections, tests, taking samples and similar activities.

J. The independent testing agency shall submit a certified written report of eachinspection, test or similar service, to the Architect, in duplicate, unless the Contractor isresponsible for the service. If the Contractor is responsible for the service, submit acertified written report of each inspection, test or similar service through the Contractor,in duplicate. Submit two (2) additional copies of each written report directly to theOwner.

K. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test or similar service shall include, butnot be limited to the following:

1. Date of Issue.2. Project Title and Number.3. Name, Address and Telephone Number of Testing Agency.4. Dates and Locations of samples and Tests or Inspections.5. Names of Individuals Making the Inspection or Test.6. Designation of the Work and Test Method.7. Identification of Product and Specification Section.8. Complete Inspection or Test Results.9. Ambient Conditions at the Time of Sample-Taking and Testing.10. Comments or Professional Opinion as to Whether Inspected or Tested Work

Complies with Contract Document Requirements.11. Name and Signature of Laboratory Inspector.12. Recommendations on Retesting.


A. Qualification for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies,including independent testing laboratories, which are pre-qualified as complying with“Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification” by theAmerican Council of Independent Laboratories, and which specialize in the types ofinspections and tests to be performed.

B. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall beauthorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the State in which the Projectis located.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 REPAIR AND PROTECTION:

A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing sample-taking and similar services,repair damaged construction and restore substrates and f inishes to eliminatedeficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply withContract Document requirements for “Cutting and Patching”.

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protectrepaired construction.

C. Repair and protection are the Contractor’s responsibility, regardless of the assignmentof responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services.



DIVISION 1 SECTION 01 42 00 - REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS PAGE 1


SECTION 01 42 00 - REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 DEFINITIONS:

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. Indicated: The term “indicated” refers to graphic representations, notes or schedules onthe Drawings, or other Paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similarrequirements in the Contract Documents. Where terms such as “shown”, “noted”,“scheduled” and “specified” are used, it is to help the reader locate the reference; nolimitation on location is intended.

C. Directed: Terms such as “directed”, “requested”, “authorized”, “selected”, “approved”,“required” and “permitted” mean “directed by the Engineer (or Owner)”, “requested bythe Engineer” and similar phrases.

D. Approve: The term “approved” ,where used in conjunction with the Architect’s (orOwner) action on the Contractor’s submittals, applications, and requests, is limited tothe Architect’s (or Owner) duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of theContract.

E. Regulations: The term “Regulations” includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawfulorders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, andagreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. Concealed: The term “concealed” means work that is not normally visible in thecompleted project, such as work installed in pipe shafts, chases or recesses, behindfurred walls, or above permanent or removable ceilings.

G. Furnish: The term “furnish” is used to mean “supply and deliver to the project site, readyfor unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.”

H. Install: The term “install” is used to describe operations at project site including theactual “unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, workingto dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.”

I. Provide: The term “provide” means “to furnish and install, complete and ready for theintended use.”



J. Installer: An “Installer” is the Contractor or an entity engaged by the Contractor, eitheras an employee, subcontractor, or Contractor of lower tier for performance of aparticular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, and similaroperations they are engaged to perform.

K. Project Site: The space available to the Contractor for performance of constructionactivities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as partof the project. The extent of the Project Site is shown on the Drawings and may or maynot be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built.

L. Testing Laboratories: A “testing laboratory” is an independent entity engaged to performspecific inspections or tests, either at the Project Site or elsewhere, and to report onand, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests.

M. Construction Superintendent: A “Construction Superintendent” is the Contractor’srepresentative who is responsible for continuous field supervision, coordination andcompletion of the work.

N. Foreman: A “Foreman” is an employee of either the Contractor or a Subcontractor whois responsible for to oversee an individual trade (i.e. mechanical, plumbing, electrical,etc.) or multiple trades. The foreman is responsible to perform his/her tasks at thedirection of the Construction Superintendent.

1.03 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION:

A. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sectionsbased on the Construction Specification Institute’s 2004 Edition format andMASTERFORMAT numbering system.

B. Numbering: The section number and page number are located at the top of each page.Paragraph letters and sub-paragraph numbers are located in the left margin. Refer tosection, page, and paragraph letters and numbers in all citations of the text.

C. Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions in the use oflanguage and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used inparticular situations or circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other ContractDocuments is the abbreviated type. Words and meanings shall be interpreted asappropriate. Words that are implied, but not stated shall be interpolated as thesense required. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural wordsinterpreted as singular where applicable and the context of the ContractDocuments so indicates.



2. Imperative and streamlined language is used generally in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by theContractor. At certain locations in the text, for clarity, subjective language isused to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor,or by others when so noted.

a. The words “shall be” shall be included by inference wherever a colon (:) isused within a sentence or phrase.

1.04 INDUSTRY STANDARDS:

A. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include morestringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same forceand effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extentreferenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with the standard in effect as of the date of the ContractDocuments.

C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified,and the standards may establish different or conflicting requirements for minimumquantities or quality levels. Refer requirements that are different, but apparently equal,and uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.

D. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specifiedshall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactlywith the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum withinreasonable limits. In complying with these requirements, indicated numeric values areminimum or maximum, as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Referuncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.

E. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required tobe familiar with industry standards applicable to that entity’s construction activity.Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. Wherecopies of standards are needed for performance of a required construction activity, theContractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source.

F. Codes and Regulations applicable to the Work include, but are not necessarily limitedto the following:

1. City of Syracuse Elevator Code.2. Onondaga County Plumbing Code.3. City of Syracuse Board of Heating Examiners.4. Local Utility Standards.5. National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).6. New York Board of Fire Underwriters (NYBFU).



7. New York State Department of Health Code.8. Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State.9. New York State High Pressure Boiler Code. 10. Building Code of New York State.11. Existing Building Code of New York State.12. Plumbing Code, Mechanical Code, and Fuel Gas Code of New York State.13. Fire Code and Property Maintenance Code of New York State.14. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

G. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner’s records, submit copies of permits,licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices,receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar documents, correspondence, andrecords established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulationsbearing upon performance of the Work.





DIVISION 1 SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES PAGE 1


SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This section specifies requirements for temporary services and facilities, includingutilities, construction and support facilities, security and protection.

B. Temporary utilities required include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Water service and distribution.2. Temporary electric power and light.3. Telephone service.4. Storm and sanitary sewer.

C. Temporary construction and support facilities required include, but are not limited to,the following:

1. Temporary heat.2. Field offices and storage sheds.3. Temporary roads and paving.4. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water.5. Dewatering facilities and drains.6. Temporary enclosures.7. Hoists and temporary elevator use.8. Temporary Project identification signs and bulletin boards.9. Waste disposal services.10. Rodent and pest control.11. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.

D. Security and protection facilities required include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Temporary fire protection.2. Barricades, warning signs, lights.3. Sidewalk bridge or enclosure fence for the site.4. Environmental protection.5. Welding permit.




A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations ofauthorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to, the following:

1. Building Code Requirements.2. Health and Safety Regulations.3. Utility Company Regulations.4. Police, Fire Department and Rescue Squad Rules.5. Environmental Protection Regulations.

B. Standards: Comply with NFPA Code 241, “Building Construction and DemolitionOperations”, ANSI-A10 Series Standards for “Safety Requirements for Constructionand Demolitions”, and NECA Electrical Design Library “Temporary Electrical Facilities”.

1. Refer to “Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Services”,prepared jointly by AGC and ASC, for industry recommendations.

2. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA and UL standards and regulationsfor temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with National ElectricCode (NFPA 70).

C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test eachtemporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.


A. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation andtermination of each temporary utility. At the earliest feasible time, when acceptable tothe Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of the permanent service.

B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat inappearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire preventionmeasures. Do not overload facilities, or permit them to interfere with progress. Do notallow hazardous, dangerous or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop orpersist on the site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS:

A. General: Provide new materials; if acceptable to the Engineer, undamaged, previouslyused materials in serviceable condition may be used. Provide materials suitable for theuse intended.



B. Lumber and Plywood:

1. For signs and directory boards, provide exterior type, Grade B-B High DensityConcrete Form Overlay Plywood conforming to PS-1, of sizes and thicknessindicated.

2. For fences and vision barriers, provide exterior type, minimum dO thick exteriorplywood.

C. Paint:

1. For sign panels and applying graphics, provide exterior grade alkyd gloss enamelover exterior primer.

D. Tarpaulins: Provide waterproof, fire-resistant, UL labeled tarpaulins with flame-spreadrating of 15 or less. For temporary enclosures provide translucent nylon reinforcedlaminated polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride fire retardant tarpaulins.

E. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities.

F. Open-Mesh Fencing: Provide 11-gage, galvanized 2-inch, chain link fabric fencing 6-fencing 6-feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts, 1½O I.D. for line posts and 2½O I.D.for corner posts.

2.02 EQUIPMENT:

A. General: Provide new equipment; if acceptable to the Engineer, undamaged, previouslyused equipment in serviceable condition may be used. Provide equipment suitable foruse intended.

2.03 WATER HOSES:

A. Provide ¾O heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100 ft. long, withpressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system;provide adjustable shut-off nozzles at hose discharge.

2.04 WATER:

A. Building water shall be available to the Contractor unless interrupted for building work. Contractor shall make all connections to existing facilities to provide water forconstruction purposes. The University shall pay the cost of building water used by theContractor, under the provision that reasonable water conservation techniques areemployed. Connections to fire hydrants will not be permitted under this contract, underany circumstances.



2.05 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICE:

A. The Contractor shall maintain an office in the metropolitan Syracuse area withtelephone coverage during regular working hours and with facsimile receiving capability24 hours per day. The office shall be capable of contacting the on-site foreman viaportable telephone at all reasonable hours.

B. Provide a Contractor’s field office trailer for the duration of the project. The Contractorshall equip the trailer or the Construction Superintendent with a portable, fixed orvehicular telephone for this project. In addition to Contractor required space, the fieldoffice trailer shall be equipped with one space at least 20! long x 8! wide with one 72" x36" x 30" in height freestanding table and 8 chairs for project meetings. Trailer shall beclean when it arrives at site and shall be kept clean by the Contractor.

2.06 TEMPORARY STORAGE:

A. It is desired to minimize on-site storage for this Project. A reasonable number ofstorage trailers may be maintained on-site if required. Locate trailers to minimizeaesthetic impact from the surrounding buildings. Remove trailers from site as soon asmajor construction is complete. The storage trailer, if provided, shall be separate fromthe office trailer specified in 2.05B above.

2.07 TEMPORARY POWER:

A. The Contractor shall provide temporary electrical power as required for the use of theContractor. Electrical power shall not be taken off of University buildings.

B. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured NEMA polarized outlets to preventinsertion of 110-120 volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outletsequipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button and pilot light, for connectionof power tools and equipment.

C. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords; use “hard-service” cordswhere exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connectseparate lengths of electric cords, if single lengths will not reach areas whereconstruction activities are in progress.

D. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattagerequired for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered glass enclosures,where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture.

2.08 TEMPORARY ELECTRIC POWER FOR WELDING:

A. All electric power for arc welding on the site of the Project shall be supplied by the traderequiring such power, at its own cost and expense, and it shall be provided by means ofself-contained generating units.



2.09 TEMPORARY HEAT:

A. The Contractor shall be responsible to provide any temporary heat required for the useof the Contractor. Provide temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled byUL, FM or another recognized trade association related to the type of fuel beingconsumed.

2.10 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES:

A. Workers may not use existing Syracuse University facilities. Contractor to furnishtemporary on-site sanitary facilities.

B. Provide self-contained single-occupant toilet units of the chemical, aerated re-circulation, or combustion type, properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass fiberreinforced polyester shell or similar non-absorbent material.

2.11 SECURITY:

A. The Contractor shall protect all work, materials, equipment, etc., against theft,vandalism, marring or damage until acceptance by the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall protect the premises from entry by unauthorized persons.

2.12 TEMPORARY VENTILATION:

A. The Contractor shall provide temporary ventilation as required to perform the requiredwork. In addition to any other required equipment, the Contractor is required to have onsite one working 36" diameter fan for each vault in the project.

2.13 FIRST AID SUPPLIES:

A. Comply with governing regulations.

2.14 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS:

A. Provide hand-carried, portable UL-rated, class “A” fire extinguishers for temporaryoffices and similar spaces. In other locations provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated,class “ABC” dry chemical extinguishers, or combination of extinguishers of NFPArecommended classes for the exposures.

1. Comply with NFPA 10 and 241 for classification, extinguishing agent and sizerequired by location and class of fire exposure.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION:

A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities wherethey will service Project adequately and result in minimum interference withPerformance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify asrequired. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed, or are replaced byauthorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.02 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION:

A. General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service orconnect to existing service. Where the company provides only part of the service,provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipments; complywith the company’s recommendations.

1. Arrange with the company and Owner for a time when service can beinterrupted, where necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction.3. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to

the Owner or Engineer, and will not be accepted as a basis of claims for aChange Order.

B. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressuresadequate for construction until permanent water service is in use.

1. Obtain water service from the Owner’s existing water system, as directed,without metering and without payment of use charges. Exercise control overusage in an effort to conserve water. The Owner reserves the right to charge theContractor for water use in the event that wasteful or excessive use is observed.

2. Sterilization: Sterilize temporary water piping prior to use.3. Provide shut-off valve on the temporary water service near its connection to the

source.

C. Temporary Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric powerservice and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristicsduring construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload protecteddisconnects, automatic ground-fault interrupters and main distribution switchgear.

1. Connect temporary service to the Owner’s power source, where directed, withoutmetering and without payment of use charges. Exercise control over usage in aneffort to conserve energy. The Owner reserves the right to charge the Contractorfor electric power use in the event that wasteful or excessive use is observed.

2. Do not use electric power for temporary heat.



3. Except where overhead service must be used, install electric power serviceunderground.

4. Power Distribution System: Install wiring overhead, and rise vertically where leastexposed to damage. Where permitted, wiring circuits not exceeding 125 volts,AC 20 ampere rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cablewhere overhead and exposed for surveillance.

5. Maintain electric power in operation for Owner’s use in occupied areas of thebuilding.

D. Temporary Lighting: Whenever overhead floor or roof deck has been installed providetemporary lighting with local switching.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protectionrequirements, without operating the entire system, and will provide adequateillumination for construction operations and traffic conditions.

E. Temporary Telephones: Provide temporary telephone service for all personnel engagedin construction activities, throughout the construction period. Install telephone on aseparate line for each temporary office and first aid station or where an office has morethan two occupants.

1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers, including thefollowing:

a. Syracuse University Public Safety Department.b. Syracuse University Physical Plant.c. Syracuse University Project Manager.d. Syracuse University Safety Department.e. Local Police and Fire Department.f. Ambulance Service.g. Entities engaged in the work, as appropriate.

F. Field Offices: Provide insulated, weather tight temporary offices of sufficient size toaccommodate required office personnel at the Project site. Keep the of fice clean andorderly for use for small progress meetings.

G. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Install storage and fabrication sheds, sized, furnishedand equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporaryutility service. Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within the buildingor elsewhere on the site.

H. Temporary Paving: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paving to adequatelysupport the indicated loading and to withstand exposure to traffic during theconstruction period. Locate temporary paving for roads, storage areas and parkingwhere the same permanent facilities will be located. Review proposed modifications topermanent paving with the Engineer.



1. Coordinate temporary paving development with subgrade grading, compaction,installation and stabilization of subbase, and installation of base and finishcourses of permanent paving.

2. Install temporary paving to minimize the need to rework the installations and toresult in permanent roads and paved areas that are without damage ordeterioration when occupied by the Owner.

3. Delay installation of the final course of permanent asphalt concrete paving untilimmediately before Substantial Completion. Coordinate with weather conditionsto avoid unsatisfactory results.

4. Extend temporary paving in and around the construction area as necessary toaccommodate delivery and storage of materials, equipment usage,administration and supervision.

I. Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat required by construction activities, for curingor drying of completed installations or protection of installed construction from adverseeffects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select safe equipment that will not have aharmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinateventilation requirements to produce the ambient condition required and minimizeconsumption of energy.

J. Heating Facilities: Except where use of the permanent system is authorized, providevented self-contained LP gas or fuel oil heaters with individual space thermostaticcontrol.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander type heatingunits is prohibited.

K. Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets, wash facilities and drinking water fixtures.Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation andmaintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install where facilities will best serve the Project’sneeds.

1. Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups and similar disposable materialsfor each facility. Provide covered waste containers for used material.

L. Toilets: Use of the Owner’s designated existing toilet facilities may be permitted.Designated facilities are to be cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to theOwner. At substantial completion, restore these facilities to the condition prevalent atthe time of initial use. Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy.Use of pit-type privies will not be permitted.

M. Drinking Water: Provide drinking water from permanent or temporary lines, or providecontainerized tap - dispenser bottle-water type drinking units as required.



N. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: For temporary drainage and dewatering facilities andoperations not directly associated with construction activities included under individualSections, comply with dewatering requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections.Where feasible, utilize the same facilities. Maintain the site, excavations andconstruction free of water.

O. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosure for protection of construction inprogress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operationsand similar activities.

1. Where heat is needed and the permanent building enclosure is not complete,provide temporary enclosures where there is no other provision for containmentof heat.

2. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirementsto avoid dangerous conditions and effects.

3. Install tarpaulins securely, with incombustible wood framing and other materials.Close openings of 25 square feet or less with plywood or similar materials.

4. Close openings through floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load-bearing wood-framed construction.

5. Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 square feet in area,use UL-labeled fire-retardant treated material for framing and main sheathing.

P. Temporary Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and employees.Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered “tools andequipment” and not temporary facilities.

Q. Temporary Elevator Use: Refer to Division 14 “Elevator” Sections.

R. Temporary Exterior Lighting: Install exterior sign lights so that signs are visible whenWork is being performed.

S. Scaffolding: Provide exterior and interior scaffolding, shoring, bracing, and supports asrequired for the Work of this Contract. Build all scaffolds and supports in accordancewith all State and Local Laws and Regulations.

T. Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewheredaily. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible wastematerial and debris. Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above80EF (27EC). Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separatelyfrom other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material in a lawful manner.



U. Rodent and Pest Control: Before deep foundation Work has been completed, retain alocal exterminator or pest control company to recommend practices and minimizeattraction and harboring of rodents, roaches and other pests. Employ this service toperform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so the Project will berelatively free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform controloperations in a lawful manner using environmentally safe materials.

V. Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders arenot adequate. Cover finished permanent stairs with a protective covering of plywood ofsimilar material so finishes will be undamaged at the time of acceptance.

W. General: Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as available, do notchange over from use of temporary security and protection facilities to permanentfacilities until final completion, or longer as requested by the Engineer.

1. Provide the necessary safeguards to prevent accidents, to avoid all necessaryhazards, and to protect the public, the work, and the property at all times,including Saturdays, Sundays, holidays, and other items when no work is beingdone.

X. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire protection needs are supplied by permanentfacilities, install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of the types needed toprotect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire loses. Comply with NFPA 10“Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers”, and NFPA 241 “Standard for SafeguardingConstruction, Alterations and Demolition Operations”.

1. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intendedpurpose, but not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usablestairwell.

2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire

protection facilities, stairways and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibitsmoking in hazardous fire exposure areas.

4. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion-type temporary heatingunits, and similar sources of fire ignition.

Y. Permanent Fire Protection: At the earliest feasible date in each area of the Project,complete installation of the permanent fire protection facility, including connectedservices, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities.

Z. Barricades, Warning Signs and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirementsfor erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphicsand warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protectedagainst. Where appropriate and needed provide lighting, including flashing red oramber lights.



1. Schedule and perform work to maintain traffic at all times. Where traffic,including pedestrians, must cross open trenches, provide suitable bridges andrailing, capable of sustaining anticipated superimposed loads. Provide flagmenas required to direct flow of interrupted vehicular traffic.

AA. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure ofpartially completed areas of construction, including openings in the buildingenvelope. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.

1. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value orattractive for theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection withthe installation and release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft andvandalism.

BB. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities andconduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmentalregulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways and subsoil might becontaminated or polluted, or that other undesirable ef fects might result.

CC. Welding Permit: Obtain welding permit from the Syracuse University Departmentof Safety before performance or use of any welding equipment.



DIVISION 1 SECTION 01 51 00 - INDOOR AIR QUALITY DURING CONSTRUCTIONPAGE 1


SECTION 01 51 00 - INDOOR AIR QUALITY DURING CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies requirements Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) management duringconstruction operations, including isolation of construction areas and control ofemissions during construction.

B. This Section excludes control measures for abatement or air management associatedwith asbestos, PCB and lead.


A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations ifauthorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to the following:

1. Building Code requirements.2. Health and safety regulations.3. Utility company regulations.4. Police, Fire Department and Rescue Squad rules.5. Environmental protection regulations.6. LEED Requirements.

B. Standards: Comply with Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ NationalAssociation, INC., (SMACNA) “IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings UnderConstruction.”

C. Inspections: Arrange for architect’s, engineer’s, commissioning agent’s and owner’sinspection of control measures.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan: Not less than five days before thepreconstruction meeting, prepare and submit and IAQ Management Plan that includesthe following.

1. Identify sources of airborne contaminants (demolition, welding, grinding, sanding,painting, roofing, etc.)



2. Locate occupied areas potentially affected by the project. Identify HVAC inletslocated in the construction areas that will be affected by the project. Identifyoperable windows that will affected by the project. Identify project debris pathand contractors’ entrance/exiting pathways.

3. Identify construction activities likely to produce detectable odor or dust inoccupied areas.

4. Classify potential IAQ problems by relative risk.

a. Class 1: Pollutants with nuisance impacts (i.e. a small scale wallrelocation).

b. Class 2: Pollutants which could cause a moderate but temporary healthimpact (replacement of multiple walls, ceilings or floor coverings,demolition, drywall finishing).

c. Class 3: Pollutants with potentially hazardous health effects (i.e. heatingof roof tar, application of enamel paint, mixing of epoxy resins, operationof combustion engines within the building).

5. Identify proposed control measures:

a. Barriers.b. Local exhaust/pressurization.c. Source control (welding extraction, dust suppression, etc.).d. Construction scheduling (restricting work to off-hours).

6. Product Data: Data for film, tape products, source control equipment, filtermedia.

7. MSDS Data: Provide MSDS data for all adhesives, floor and wallpatching/leveling materials, caulking and sealants, insulating materials,fireproofing and fire stopping, carpet, paint, clear finish for wood surfaces,lubricants, cleaning products.

1.05 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING:

A. After award of Contract and prior to the commencement of the Work, schedule andconduct meeting with Owner and Architect to discuss the proposed IAQ ManagementPlan and to develop mutual understanding relative to details of control measures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS:

A. Filtration Media: 2-ply panel filter with MERV 6 rating. Design Product: Tridek-E.

B. Barrier Material: 6 mil white opaque fire retardant plastic film.

C. Tape: 2-inch wide polypropylene film with acrylic adhesive. Design Product: 3M 8087.



D. Temporary Duct: 4-mil disposable flame retardant poly ductwork.

2.02 EQUIPMENT:

A. Fans: Negative pressure fans for exhausting work areas as required by the IAQManagement Plan.

B. Welding Fume Extraction Units: Portable high vacuum extraction system with internalfiltration system.

C. HEPA Vacuum: Vacuum cleaners meeting the definition of a HEPA vacuum under theEPA RRP rule for lead paint renovations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL:

A. Construction activity shall be controlled to avoid causing detectable odor, visible dustand other air pollutants at levels known to present a risk of illness in occupied areas.Throughout the duration of the project the contractor shall perform the work requiredwithout affecting the indoor air quality of the occupied areas. Work shall be performedwith special care, planning and quality control to avoid disruption or interference withnormal facility operations and to protect the health and safety of the general public.

B. Openings to the exterior shall be enclosed after each work shift to protect the buildinginterior from moisture.

C. Occupied areas of the building shall not be used for the storage of materials, trash, anddebris from the work area.

D. Occupied areas of the building shall not be used for the transportation of materials,trash and debris from the work area during occupied hours. All areas used fortransportation shall have adequate floor protection and cleaned daily prior tooccupancy.

E. All construction debris shall be stored in enclosed waste containers to prevent releaseof dust and odors.

3.02 CONTAINMENT:

A. Barriers: Construct barriers around all construction areas within occupied areas forClass 2 and Class 3 activities. Barriers shall extend from the floor to underside of theceiling or floor above and be sealed tight. The enclosures shall include aweather-stripped door with a door sweep and dirt catching tack mat at all entrances tothe work area. All existing equipment to remain in the construction area shall becovered and taped with barrier material.



B. Floor Protection: When existing flooring is to remain provide 6-mil floor covering overentire area. Provide hardboard paneling over plastic to protect floors from impacts.

C. Areas within the barriers shall be maintained under negative pressure in relation to theoccupied areas during Class 2 and Class 3 activities. The exhaust location shall beselected so that the discharge is not re-circulated into the building.

D. Work activities such as cutting of steel, concrete, masonry, operation of internalcombustion engines, or other activities that produce significant dust or odors shall beconducted outside of occupied hours unless the contractor can demonstrate thatcontainment will maintain acceptable IAQ within the occupied areas.

3.03 HVAC PROTECTION:

A. Isolate and shut down HVAC equipment to the greatest extent possible.

1. Seal all inactive openings with 6-mil adhesive duct protection film. Seals toremain in place throughout construction.

2. Provide sheet metal cap and 6-mil adhesive duct protection film over sealedopenings on equipment that must remain in operation during the constructionactivities.

3. Provide filtration media over inlet openings that must remain active duringconstruction (outdoor air intakes, returns, exhaust).

4. De-energize and wrap all standalone equipment (fan coil units, heat pumps, etc.)within the work area with 6-mil sheeting and tape.

5. Systems that serve both construction areas and the occupied areas shall haveopenings sealed and isolated from the construction areas until the space issubstantially compete and ready for fire alarm testing.

B. Return Plenums:

1. Identify all return air plenums in the construction area. All tiles are to remain inplace throughout construction activities if plenum is to remain active duringconstruction activities. Provide 3-mil adhesive duct protection film over transferopenings (including vented lighting fixtures).

C. New Systems:

1. The permanent system shall not be used for temporary heating or cooling until allparticulate generating activities are complete. Provide panel filters with tapedseams at all return air inlets on HVAC equipment that is operated in constructionareas once the particulate generating activities are complete.



2. All ductwork, air handling equipment, heat pumps, fan coils, VAV boxes, etc.,shall have all openings protected with a minimum 3-mil adhesive duct protectionfilm. The film shall be installed prior to arrival at the site and shall remain inplace until the equipment is put in operation. All openings into the duct systemshall be protected throughout the duration of the project. Protective coveringsshall only be removed immediately before the installation.



DIVISION 1 SECTION 01 60 00 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PAGE 1


SECTION 01 60 00 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing theContractor’s selection of products for use in the Project.


A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind,from a single source.

B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting betweentwo or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatiblewith products previously selected, even if previously selected products were alsooptions.

C. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprintmanufacturer’s or producer’s nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces ofproducts which will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.

D. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or, whererequired for observation after installation, on an accessible surface that is notconspicuous.

E. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface, whichis inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the followinginformation and other essential operating data:

1. Name of product and manufacturer.2. Model and serial number.3. Capacity.4. Speed.5. Ratings.



1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer’srecommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deteriorationand loss, including theft.

B. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowdingof construction spaces.

C. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items thatare flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and otherlosses.

D. Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer’s original sealed container or otherpackaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing,unpacking, protecting and installing.

E. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents, andto ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

F. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement ofquantity or counting of units.

G. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will notendanger the supporting construction.

H. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in aweather tight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintaintemperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer’s instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCT SELECTION:

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the ContractDocuments, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at the time ofinstallation. Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guardsand other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intendeduse and effect.

1. Use salvaged materials only where specifically directed to do so.2. Hazardous Materials: Do not incorporate any products into the work that contain

asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), or similar known or suspectedhazardous or toxic material.



B. Product Selection Procedures: Product selection is governed by the ContractDocuments and governing regulations, not by previous Project experience. Proceduresgoverning regulations, not by previous Project experience. Procedures governingproduct selection include the following:

1. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where only a single product ormanufacturer is named, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will bepermitted.

2. Semi-proprietary Specification Requirements: Where two or more products ormanufacturers are named, provide one of the products indicated. Nosubstitutions will be permitted.

3. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, accompanied by theterm “or equal” or “approved equal” comply with the Contract Documentprovisions concerning “substitutions” to obtain approval for use of an unnamedproduct.

C. Non-Proprietary Specifications: When the Specifications list products or manufacturersthat are available and be incorporated in the Work, but do not restrict the Contractor touse of these products only, the Contractor may propose any available product thatcomplies with Contract requirements. Comply with Contract Document provisionsconcerning “substitutions” to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

D. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product orassembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or tradename, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwisecomplies with Contract requirements.

E. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliancewith performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements,and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Generaloverall performance of a product is implied where the product is specified for a specificapplication. Manufacturer’s recommendations may be contained in published productliterature, or by the manufacturer’s certification of performance.

F. Compliance with Standards, Codes Regulations: Where the Specifications only requirecompliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select a product thatcomplies with the standards, codes or regulations specified.

G. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, theArchitect’s decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily andalso complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the ContractDocuments concerning “substitutions” for selection of a matching product in anotherproduct category, or for noncompliance with specified requirements.



H. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase “...asselected from manufacturer’s standard colors, patterns, textures...” or a similar phrase,select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. TheArchitect will select the color, pattern and texture from the product line selected.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS:

A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for installation ofproducts in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place,accurately located and aligned with other Work.



DIVISION 1 SECTION 01 63 10 - PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS PAGE 1


SECTION 01 63 10 - PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requestsfor substitutions made after award of the Contract.

1.03 DEFINITIONS:

A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change or modify the meaning ofother terms used in the Contract Documents.

B. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods ofconstruction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award ofthe Contract are considered requests for “substitutions.” The following are notconsidered substitutions:

1. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Engineer.2. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract

Documents.3. The Contractor’s determination of and compliance with governing regulations

and orders issued by governing authorities.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Substitution Request Submittal: Submit requests in the form and in accordance withprocedures required for Change Order proposals.

B. Identify the product, or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in eachrequest. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide completedocumentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and thefollowing information , as appropriate:

1. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication andinstallation procedures.

2. Samples, where applicable or requested.



3. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution withthose of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such assize, weight, durability, performance and visual effect.

4. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed toother parts of the work and to construction performed by the Owner andseparate Contractors, that will become necessary to accommodate the proposedsubstitution.

5. A statement indicating the substitution’s effect on the Contractor’s ConstructionSchedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicatethe effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time.

6. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any, in the ContractSum.

7. Certification by the Contractor that the substitution proposed is equal-to or betterin every significant respect to that required by the Contract Documents, and thatit will perform adequately in the application indicated.

8. Engineer’s Action: Within 7 days of receipt of the request for substitution, theEngineer will request additional information or documentation necessary forevaluation of the request. Within 14 days of receipt of the request, or 7 days ofreceipt of the additional information or documentation, which ever is later, theEngineer will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the proposedsubstitution. If a decision on use of a proposed substitute cannot be made orobtained within the time allocated, use the product specif ied by name. Acceptance will be in the form of a Change Order.

1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS:

A. Design Equipment - The design of this Project is based upon the use of the specifiedequipment materials and products. The Plans are prepared on the basis of thearrangement, size capacity and characteristics of the design equipment.

B. Specified Alternate Equipment - In the event the Contractor elects to use equipmentnamed as an alternate manufacturer herein, the Contractor shall verify that theequipment is of the same capacity, arrangement, size and characteristics as the designequipment and shall make all incidental changes in their work and coordinate and payfor any changes in work made necessary by deviations from the design capacity,arrangement, size and characteristics of the alternate manufacturer’s equipment.

C. Substitutions of Unspecified Equipment, Products and Materials - Unspecifiedequipment, products and materials may be added to the List of Specified AlternateEquipment, Products and Materials at the request of any bidder by written application atleast five (5) days prior to the bid date.

D. Addition of an unspecified equipment product of material to the List of AlternateManufacturers will occur at the determination of the Engineer if there is sufficient time toreview the proposed substitution prior to bid date and to issue addenda to allContractors. In no case will substitutions be approved to individual bidders. Substitutionrequests will not be acted upon within the last five (5) days prior to bid date.



E. Addition of unspecified equipment, products and materials to the List of AlternateManufacturers does not relieve the Contractor from their obligation described insubparagraph B to verify that the equipment is of the same arrangement, capacity, sizeand characteristics and to pay for any modifications required in theirs and otherContractors’ work made necessary by the use of this equipment.

F. By submission of their bid for this Project, the Contractor acknowledges the authorityand prerogative of the Engineer and Owner to evaluate proposed substitutions as tosuitability for the Project and the Contractor agrees to abide by the Engineer’s decisionif unspecified equipment, products and material are disallowed by the Engineer.

G. Conditions: The Contractor’s substitution request will be received and considered by theEngineer when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined bythe Engineer; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to recordnoncompliance with these requirements.

1. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required.2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents.3. The request is timely, fully documented and properly submitted.4. The request is directly related to an “or equal” clause or similar language in the

Contract Documents.5. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the

Contract Time. The request will not be considered if the product or methodcannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly orcoordinate activities properly.

6. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessaryapproval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can beapproved.

7. A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energyconservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsettingresponsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities forthe Owner may include additional compensation to the Engineer for redesigningand evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner ofseparate Contractors, and similar considerations.

8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated withother materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitutioncan be coordinated.

9. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warrantyrequired by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that theproposed substitution provide the required warranty.

H. The Contractor’s submittal and Engineer’s acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Dataor Samples that relate to construction activities not complying with the ContractorDocuments does not constitute an acceptance or valid request for substitution, nordoes it constitute approval.


DIVISION 1 SECTION 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PAGE 1


SECTION 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for cutting andpatching. Except as otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, do notcut or alter any work without the consent of the Architect (or Owner).

B. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cuttingand patching individual parts of the Work.

C. Requirements of this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer toDivision Sections 23, 26 and 33 for other requirements and limitations applicable tocutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations.

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Where approval of procedures for cutting and patchingis required before proceeding, submit a proposal describing procedures well in advanceof the time cutting and patching will be performed and request approval to proceed.Include the following information, as applicable, in the proposal:

1. Describe the extent of cutting and patching required and how it is to beperformed; indicate why it cannot be avoided.

2. Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction; includechanges to structural elements and operating components as well as changes inthe building’s appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. List products to be used and firm or entities that will perform Work.4. Indicate dates when cutting and patching is to be performed.5. List utilities that will be disturbed or affected, including those that will be

relocated and those that will be temporarily out-of-service. Indicate how longservice will be disrupted.

6. Where cutting and patching involves addition of reinforcement to structuralelements, submit details and engineering calculations to show howreinforcement is integrated with the original structure.



B. Approval by the Engineer to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive theEngineer’s right to alter require complete removal and replacement of a part of theWork found to be unsatisfactory.


A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in amanner that would reduce their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

B. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before performance of any cuttingand patching work.

C. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or safetyrelated components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to performas intended, or result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety.

D. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching anyoperating elements or safety related systems.

E. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or inoccupied spaces, in a manner that would, in the Architect’s opinion, reduce thebuilding’s aesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching.Remove and replace Work cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

F. If possible, retain the original installer or fabricator to cut and patch the followingcategories of exposed Work, or if it is not possible to engage the original installer orfabricator, engage another recognized experienced and specialized firm.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS:

A. Use materials that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are notavailable or cannot be used where exposed surfaces are involved, use materials thatmatch existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visualeffect. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existingmaterials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION:

A. Before cutting existing surfaces, examine surfaces to be cut and patched andconditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed. Take corrective actionbefore proceeding, if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered.



3.02 PREPARATION:

A. Temporary Support: Provide adequate temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project thatmight be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage toadjoining areas.

D. Take all precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit or ductworkserving the building, but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions havebeen made to bypass them.

3.03 PERFORMANCE:

A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cuttingand patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.

1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components orperformance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting andpatching required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

2. Each Contractor shall do all cutting and patching required for installation of thiswork inside and outside of existing structure and/or manholes. He shall do allcutting and patching required for improperly located or sized sleeves or openingsin new construction. He shall not cut waterproofed walls or floors except asdirected. He shall not cut reinforcing steel or pierce structural members withoutspecial written permission of the Engineer. He shall cut in approved manner toavoid damage to adjacent work.

3. Each Contractor shall patch all cut holes as directed by the Engineer. He shallcaulk holes through outside walls with waterproof caulking compound both insideand outside. Thoroughly waterproof before backfilling.

4. Each Contractor shall examine General Plans for new construction for properclearances and inspect all pipe and crawl spaces. He shall do all necessaryexcavation for installation of respective work. He shall remove all surplusexcavated material as directed. e shall provide at least twelve (12) inchesclearance between earth and work.

5. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any cost caused by defective or illtimed work. Except as otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall not cut or alter any work without the consent of the Owner.

6. All work shall be executed in accordance with the drawings and in conformitywith the specification section for the class of work concerned. Materials andfinishes shall match the existing work as closely as possible, unless shown,indicated or scheduled to be otherwise.



B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements to beretained or adjoining construction. Where possible, review proposed procedures withthe original installer; comply with the original installer’s recommendations.

1. In general, where cutting is required, use hand or small power tools designed forsawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly tosize required with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily coveropenings when not in use.

2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed orfinished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine such as acarborundum saw or diamond core drill.

4. Comply with requirements of applicable Sections of Division 2 where cutting andpatching requires excavating and backfilling.

5. Bypass utility services such as pipe or conduit, before cutting, where services areshown or required to be removed, relocated or abandoned. Cut-off pipe orconduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve or plug and seal theremaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or otherforeign matter after bypassing and cutting.

C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply withspecified tolerances.

1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of theinstallation.

2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration intoretained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence ofpatching and refinishing.

3. Where removal of walls or partitions extends one finished area into another,patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space to provide an evensurface of uniform color and appearance. Remove existing floor and wallcoverings and replace with new materials, if necessary to achieve uniform colorand appearance.

4. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat overentire unbroken containing the patch, after the patched area has received primerand second coat.

5. Patch, repair or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even planesurface of uniform appearance.

D. Plaster Installation: Comply with manufacturer’s instruction and install thickness andcoats as indicated.

1. Unless otherwise indicated provide 3-coat work.2. Finish gypsum plaster with smooth-troweled finish. Sand lightly to remove trowel

marks and arises.



3. Cut, patch, point-up and repair plaster to accommodate other construction and torestore cracks, dents and imperfections.

3.04 CLEANING:

A. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used asaccess. Remove completely paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature.Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and similar features before painting or other finishingis applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.



DIVISION 1 SECTION 01 74 00 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS PAGE 1


SECTION 01 74 00 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements forwarranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturersstandard warranties on products and special warranties.

B. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor’s special warranty ofworkmanship and materials.

C. General closeout requirements are included in Section “Project Closeout”.

D. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installation that arespecified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions 2 through16.

E. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Ownerare specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

F. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer’s disclaimers and limitations on productwarranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporatesthe products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors requiredto countersign special warranties with the Contractor.

1.03 DEFINITION:

A. Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individualmanufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturerto the Owner.

B. Special Warranties are written required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents,either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rightsfor the Owner.



1.04 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS:

A. Related Damages and Losses: When correction warranted Work that has failed,remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure orthat must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.

B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and beencorrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement.The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitableadjustment for depreciation.

C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed,replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements ofContract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing orrebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use ofthe Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.

D. Owner’s Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to impliedwarranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwiseavailable under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on timein which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.

E. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limitselections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the ContractDocuments.

F. The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the Project where a specialwarranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of theWork, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign suchcommitments are willing to do so.

1.05 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit Written Warranties to the Architect prior to the date certif ied for finalCompletion. If the Architect’s Certificate of Final Completion designates acommencement date for warranties other than the date of final Completion for theWork, or a designated portion of the work, submit written warranties upon request of theArchitect.

B. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by theOwner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period,submit properly executed warranties to the Architect within fifteen days of completion ofthat designated portion of the Work.

C. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractorand a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document thatcontains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required



parties. Submit a draft to the owner through the Architect for approval prior to finalexecution.

D. General Contractors One-Year Written Warranty: Provide a one-year written warrantyincluding the materials and workmanship of every subcontractor.

E. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction,provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in eachrequired manual.





DIVISION 1 SECTION 01 77 00 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT PAGE 1


SECTION 01 77 00 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY:

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures.2. Final completion procedures.3. Warranties.4. Final cleaning.5. Repair of the Work.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 017823 “Operation and Maintenance Data” for additional operation andmaintenance manual requirements.

2. Section 017839 “Project Record Documents” for submitting Record Drawings,Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.

1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: For each type of cleaning agent.

B. Contractor’s List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at final completion.

D. Syracuse University Closeout Checklist.

1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS:

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data per Section 017823.

C. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.



D. Field Report: For pest control inspection.

E. FAMIS Equipment Audit Spreadsheet (Owner to provide Excel template).

1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS:

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal itemsspecified in other Sections.

1.06 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES:

A. Contractor’s List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to becompleted and corrected (Contractor’s punch list), indicating the value of each item onthe list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of tendays prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. Listitems below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities havingjurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to servicesand utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similarreleases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 1 Sections, includingproject record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage orsettlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specificwarranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, finalcertifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections,including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver tolocation designated by the Owner. Label with manufacturer’s name and modelnumber.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule ofmaintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity ofeach item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtainthe Architect’s signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing records.6. Submit sustainable design submittals not previously submitted.7. Submit changeover information related to Owner’s occupancy, use, operation,

and maintenance.



C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of tendays prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. Listitems below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise

Owner’s personnel of changeover in security provisions.3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial

Completion.5. Instruct Owner’s personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of

products, equipment, and systems. 6. Advise Owner of changeover in utility services.7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local

emergency responders.8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements.9. Complete final cleaning requirements.10. Touch up paint and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to

eliminate visual defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completiona minimum of ten days prior to date the Work will be completed and ready for finalinspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspectionor notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare AIA Form G704“Certificate of Substantial Completion” after inspection or will notify Contractor of items,either on Contractor’s list or additional items identified by Architect, that must becompleted or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections asincomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for finalcompletion.

1.07 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES:

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determiningfinal completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 “PaymentProcedures”.

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect’s SubstantialCompletion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list),endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that eachitem has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coveragecomplying with insurance requirements.



4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.5. Submit final completion photographic documentation.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance aminimum of ten days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for finalinspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspectionor notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificatefor Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must becompleted or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections asincomplete is completed or corrected.

1.08 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST):

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affectedby construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including,if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Unless directed or mutually agreed upon otherwise, organize list of spaces insequential order starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floorto highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categoriesfor ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name.b. Date.c. Name of Architect.d. Name of Contractor or Construction Manager.e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.b. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.c. Web-based project software upload. Utilize software feature for creating

and updating list of incomplete items (punch list).

1.09 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES:

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designatedportions of the Work where warranties are indicated to commence on dates other thandate of Substantial Completion, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limitOwner’s rights under warranty.



B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion ofdesignated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Ownerduring construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contentsof Project Manual.

D. Warranty Electronic File: Provide warranties and bonds in PDF format. Assemblecomplete warranty and bond submittal package into a single electronic PDF file withbookmarks enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents atbeginning of document. Provide single warranty document in addition to warrantyinformation as specified in 01 78 23 “Operation and Maintenance Data”.

1. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.

E. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenancemanuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS:

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer orfabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentiallyhazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FINAL CLEANING:

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations tocomply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental andantipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning.Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial buildingcleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection forcertification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designatedportion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by constructionactivities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, wastematerial, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains,and other foreign deposits.



c. Rake grounds that are not planted, mulched, or paved to a smooth,even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus materialfrom Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free

condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoiddisturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflectivesurfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, includingroofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, andsimilar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess

nap; clean according to manufacturer’s recommendations if visible soil orstains remain.

j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors andwindows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable,vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not toscratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent.l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator

equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint andmortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, includingstains resulting from water exposure.

n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Cleanexposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters duringconstruction or that display contamination with particulate matter oninspection.

1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with Division 23 sections.

p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with fullefficiency.

q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 01 50 00 “TemporaryFacilities”. Prepare written report.

D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 0150 00 “Temporary Facilities”.



3.02 REPAIR OF THE WORK:

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection fordetermination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair, or remove and replace, defective construction. Repairing includes replacingdefective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, andproperly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot berepaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating componentsthat cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities usedduring construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces,and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes andsurfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that already show evidence of repair orrestoration.

a. Do not paint over “UL” and other required labels and identification,including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied torequired labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that mayimpede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, anddefective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to complywith requirements for new fixtures.



SYRACUSE UNIVERSITY

OFFICE OF CAMPUS PLANNING, DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTIONCONTRACT CLOSEOUT CHECK LIST

PROJECT NUMBER PROJECT NAME PROJECT MANAGER PROJECT BUDGET

Dates

Final punch list transmitted to ContractorContract notification completion of punch listFinal project inspectionFinal sprinkler test & certificationFinal fire test & certificationFinal elevator test & certificationFinal plumbing test & certificationFinal electrical test & certificationOther Certifications

Flame spread carpet & paintFire suppression system

Final walk through and instruction to ownerTemporary certificate of occupancyFinal certificate occupancyAs built drawingsOperation & Maintenance Manuals

HVAC PlumbingElectricalElevator Fire Alarm

Complete set of project shop drawingContractor’s written guaranteeCopy of warranty or guarantee documents for special materials and equipment

RoofElevator

Contractor’s affidavit of payment of debts and claims, AIA Document G706 Contractor’s affidavit of release of liens, AIA Document G706A (for major subcontractors)

Consent of Surety to final payment AIA Document G707

Final application for payment



DIVISION 1 SECTION 01 77 10 - FINAL CLEANING PAGE 1


SECTION 01 77 10 - FINAL CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS:

A. General: Special cleaning requirements for specific units of work are included in theappropriate sections of Divisions 2 through 16.

B. Refer to “Project Close-out” section for general close-out requirements.

C. Refer to “Temporary Facilities” section for general requirements on cleaning-up andwaste removal.

D. Environmental Requirements: Conduct cleaning and waste disposal operations incompliance with local laws and ordinances. Comply fully with federal and localenvironmental and anti-pollution regulations.

1. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil paint, or paintthinner in storm or sanitary drains.

2. Burning or burying of debris, rubbish or other waste material on the premises willnot be permitted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS:

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by themanufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents thatare potentially hazardous to health or property, or that might damage finished surfaces.



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. General: Provide final cleaning of the work at the time indicated below. Employexperienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface orunit of work to the condition expected from a commercial building cleaning andmaintenance program. Comply with the manufacturer’s instructions for cleaningoperations.

B. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting the Architect/Engineer’sinspection for certification of substantial completion, either for the entire work or for aportion of the work.

1. Remove labels that are not required as permanent labels.2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows,

to a polished condition. Remove putty and other substances that are noticeableas vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and otherdamaged transparent materials. Then polish mirrors and glass, taking care not toscratch the surfaces.

3. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-freecondition, free of dust, stains, films, and similar noticeable distractingsubstances. Except as otherwise indicated, avoid disturbing the naturalweathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their originalreflective condition.

4. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes andsurfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces which cannot be satisfactorily repairedor restored, or which show visible evidence of repair or restoration. Do not paintover UL and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical “boiler plates”.

5. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics and similarspaces.

6. Broom clean concrete floors in unoccupied spaces.7. Vacuum clean carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap.

Shampoo carpet if required.8. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment clean, including elevator

equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortardroppings and other foreign substances.

9. Vacuum clean all radiation units and their fin coils and surfaces.10. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary ready for use condition, free of stains,

including stains resulting from water exposure.11. Replace air filters and clean the inside of ductwork and housings.12. Clean food service equipment to a sanitary condition, ready and acceptable for

its intended food service use.13. Clean light fixtures and lamps so as to function with full efficiency. Replace

burned out bulbs.



14. Clean the project site, yard and grounds, in areas disturbed by constructionactivities including landscape development areas, of litter and foreignsubstances. Sweep paved areas to a broom-clean condition. Remove stains,petro-chemical spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neitherplanted nor paved, to a smooth even-textured surface.

15. Remove all waste materials, rubbish, tools, construction equipment, machineryand surplus material from the site.

16. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to the building.17. Leave the project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Removal of Protection: Except as otherwise indicated or requested by theArchitect/Engineer, remove temporary protection devices and facilities which wereinstalled during the course of the work to protect previously completed work during theremainder of the construction period.

D. Compliance: Comply with safety standards and governing regulations for cleaningoperations. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner.



DIVISION 1 SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA PAGE 1


SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1- GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY:

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operationand maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance manuals.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” for submitting copies of submittals foroperation and maintenance manuals.

1.03 DEFINITIONS:

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regularinteraction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals per Section 01 33 00 “SubmittalProcedures”. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required bythis Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operation and maintenancesubmittals is acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond torevisions and field conditions.

B. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days beforecommencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether generalscope and content of manual are acceptable.



C. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspectionfor Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration andtraining. Architect will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect’s comments. Submitcopies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect’scomments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

D. Comply with Section 01 77 00 “Closeout Procedures” for schedule for submittingoperation and maintenance documentation.

1.05 FORMAT OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

A. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a single composite electronicPDF file.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available.Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file forminimum readable file size. “Recognize Text” shall be run on all scanneddocuments to provide a text searchable PDF.

1.06 REQUIREMENTS FOR OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

A. Organization of Manuals: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into theformat as described below and as indicated in Figure 1:O&M Manual Diagram:

1. Title Page: Indicate Building Name, Project Title and SU Project Number.2. Table of contents: Hyperlinked bookmarked information with links to each CSI

Master Format specification section contained in manual.

3. Contact List: Indicating name and contact information for the following:

a. Construction Manager or General Contractorb. Subcontractorc. Architectd. Architects Subconsultants

4. Project Warranties: Include the overall project warranty and hyperlinks to anyspecial warranties included in equipment’s specification sections.

5. Operations and Maintenance Information: Operations and Maintenanceinformation for every CSI specification section included in project. Each sectionshall contain the final submittal that has been updated to include anyarchitectural remarks, any special contractor and or manufacturer warrantyassociated with the equipment or system, the installation, operations andmaintenance manuals for each piece of equipment, including any accessorycomponents and all test reports for systems and equipment.



Figure 1 - O&M Manual Diagram



PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)



DIVISION 1 SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PAGE 1


SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS:

A. Definitions: Record documents indicate changes in the Work in relation to the way inwhich the Work was shown and specified in the original contract documents; they alsoprovide additional information, important for the Owner’s records, that was not indicatedin original contract documents. Individual sections of Divisions 2 through 33 indicatespecific project record document requirements that extend the general requirements ofthis section. Project record documents include those documents or copies ofdocuments that relate directly to performance of the Work, and that the Contractor isrequired to prepare or maintain for the Owner’s records, by recording the Work actuallyperformed. Record documents may include the following:

1. Newly prepared drawings, (if specified).2. Marked-up copies of contract drawings and shop drawings.3. Marked-up copies of specifications, addenda and change orders.4. Marked-up product data submittals.5. Field records for variable and concealed conditions such as excavation,

foundations mechanical, electrical, communication utilities.6. Miscellaneous record information on work which is otherwise recorded only

schematically or not at all.

B. Refer to “Project Closeout” section for general closeout requirements.

C. Refer to “Submittals” sections for general requirements on submittal of recorddocuments.



1.03 RECORD DOCUMENT PROCEDURES:

A. Record Drawings:

1. Mark-up Procedure: During the progress of the Work, maintain a set of eitherblue-line or black-line white-prints of both contract drawings and shop drawingsfor project record document purposes. Mark-up these drawings showing theactual installation, where this installation varies substantially from the Work asoriginally shown. Give particular attention to information on concealed workwhich might be difficult to identify or measure and record at a later date. Mark-upimportant additional information that was either shown schematically, or omittedfrom the original drawings. Note field order numbers, alternate numbers, changeorder numbers and similar identification on the record drawings whereapplicable.

2. Record exact location on underground conduits, ductbank and piping and anyand all variations from the original construction drawings in neat, legible, hand-drawn lines and text. Attach copies of field sketches and Engineer’sSupplementary Instructions where they occur.

3. Keep an accurate record and show on Record Drawings the actual installedlocation of any concealed work such as underground piping or conduits andunder-slab piping or conduits. Provide location on Record Drawings for outsideservices by indicating actual dimensions from fixed reference points which will beavailable after completion of construction. “Tie” two (2) dimensions from differentreference points to confirm locations of concealed work. Indicate top and bottomelevations and station number of utilities crossed as part of this work.

4. Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction:

a. Depths of elements in relation to other existing facilities.b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and

appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.c. Field changes of dimensions and detail. d. Changes made of Field Order or by Change Order.e. Details not on original contract drawings.

5. Mark completely and accurately, record prints of either the contract drawings orshop drawings, whichever is most capable of showing the actual physicalconditions. Mark drawings with erasable colored pencil, using separate colorswhere it is feasible to distinguish between changes for different categories ofwork at the same general location. Where shop drawings are marked-up forrecord purposes, make a cross reference on the contract drawings at thecorresponding location. Require each person preparing the mark-up to initial anddate the mark-up and to indicate the name of the responsible firm.



6. Responsibility for the Mark-up: Where it is feasible, the individual or entity whoobtained data, whether the individual or entity be the installer, subcontractor,testing agency or similar entity, is required to prepare the mark-up on the recorddrawings. Make certain that the entity making the mark-up is capable ofrecording information accurately in an understandable uniform drawingstechnique. Make certain that the data is recorded as soon as possible af ter it hasbeen obtained. In the case of work to be concealed, record the data and checkthe mark-up before concealment.

7. As part of and at the time of issuance of a change order, the Contractor willincorporate the changes into the record drawings by reference to the changeorder number and inclusion of the data and drawings in the appropriate drawingsor as an attachment.

8. The Engineer will review the status and accuracy of the record drawings on aweekly basis.

9. After the project is completed and before final inspection, the Contractor shallprepare and submit to the Engineer, the complete sets of “As-Built Drawings”(marked Mylar reproducible prints). The drawings shall incorporate all changes,revision, etc. to the original plans, schedules and details. The Contractor’s finalpayment shall not be approved before “As-Built Drawings” have been submittedand approved and stamped by Architect/Engineer.

10. Provide the original or copies of the Record Drawings to the Engineer for reviewand reproduction by the Engineer. Provide the original copy of Record Drawingsto the Engineer for the Owner with one (1) photocopy for the Engineer’s files.The Contractor should retain a second photocopy to be retained by theContractor. The Contractor shall be responsible to the safe-keeping andmaintenance of the Record Drawings throughout construction, and formaintenance of one (1) photocopy at the Contractor’s office for a period of notless than one (1) year following final acceptance. Photocopy services from pintsare available from Syracuse Blue Print Company as well as other localprintmaking firms. The Contractor shall mark their submittal “As-Built” with thedate of submission.

1.04 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS:

A. General: During the progress of the Work, maintain one copy of the specificationsincluding addenda, change orders and similar modifications issued in printed formduring construction, for record document purposes. Mark-up these specifications toindicate the actual Work, where work varies substantially in comparison to the text ofthe specifications and modifications as originally issued. Give particular attention tosubstitutions, field orders, selection of options, and similar information on work where itis concealed or cannot be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Noterelated record drawing information and product data, where applicable. Uponcompletion of mark-up, submit the record specifications to the Engineer for use inpreparing the final record specifications.



1. In each specification section, wherever products, materials or units of equipmentare specified or scheduled, mark the record specification copy with theproprietary name and model number of the project furnished. In addition, recordthe name of the manufacturer, supplier and other significant identification, so asto provide a record of the selections made, and documented coordination withrecord product data submittals and maintenance manuals.

2. For each specified product, note in the record specif ication copy if record productdata has been submitted in maintenance manuals in lieu of being submitted asrecord product data.

B. Record Product Data:

1. General: During the progress of the Work, maintain one approved copy of eachproduct data submittal for record document purposes. Mark-up these submittalsto indicated the actual Work, where work varies substantially in comparison tothe product data submittal information. Include changes to the product asdelivered to the site, and variations from the manufacturer’s instructions andrecommendations for installation. Give particular attention to products that will beconcealed and portions of the Work which cannot otherwise be readily discernedat a later date by direct observation. Note related change orders, field orders andmark-up, submit a complete set of record product data to the Engineer for theOwner’s records.

2. Where record product data is required as a part of maintenance manuals, submitthe marked-up product data as an insert in the maintenance manual, in lieu ofsubmittal as record product data.





DIVISION 4 SECTION 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PAGE 1

DIVISION 4 MASONRY

SECTION 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions andDivision 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY:


1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Face brick. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Masonry joint reinforcement. 5. Ties and anchors. 6. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

1.03 DEFINITIONS:

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days.

1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressivestrengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with

ACI 315, “Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement”. Show elevations of reinforcedwalls.

C. Samples:

1. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks.



2. Colored mortar.

1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS:

A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.

a. Include data on material properties. b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within

specified tolerances. c. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67. d. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing

average net-area compressive strength of units.

2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Pre-blended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Reinforcing bars. 6. Joint reinforcement. 7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions ofingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Testaccording to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention,and ASTM C 91 for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply withcompressive strength requirement.

D. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortartype, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, andresulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

E. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipmentto be used to comply with requirements.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated.

B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or auniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from singlemanufacturer for each product required.



C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including colorfor exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single sourceor producer for each aggregate.

D. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in theContract Documents.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosedlocation, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, donot install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not usecementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contaminationavoided.

D. Deliver pre-blended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensingsilos. Store pre-blended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and ina dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.


A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproofsheeting at end of each day’s work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not inprogress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24" (600 mm) down both sides of walls and hold cover securely inplace.

2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, securecover a minimum of 24" (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover inplace.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least threedays after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed orpainted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings onground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral

finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing

mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.



D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost.Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezingconditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS602.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40EF (4EC)and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days aftercompleting cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL:

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to containchips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where suchdefects will be exposed in the completed Work.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-resistanceratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness,or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS:

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces ofadjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide special shapes for corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and otherspecial conditions.

2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent.

1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does notreduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested according toASTM E 514 as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellentmanufacturer’s mortar additive, with test period extended to 24 hours, shall show no visiblewater or leaks on the back of test specimen.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may beincorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) ACM Chemistries; RainBloc. 2) BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Plus. 3) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. -Conn.; Dry-Block.



C. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strengthof 2150 psi (14.8 Mpa).

2. Density Classification: Normal weight unless otherwise indicated. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions d" less than nominal dimensions.

2.03 BRICK:

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color ofexposed faces of adjacent units:

1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinishedbrick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished.

B. Face Brick:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Modular from Redland Brick.

2. Supplier: Paragon Supply, Inc. Syracuse, NY.3. Type: FBX. 4. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength

of 3350 psi (23.10 Mpa). 5. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per

ASTM C 67. 6. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated “not

effloresced”.7. Size (Actual Dimensions): Match existing. 8. Color and Texture: Match existing.

2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS:

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction.Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no otheringredients.

D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortarmixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance inmasonry mortar.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporatedinto the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors.



b. Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments. c. Solomon Colors, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors. d. Spec Mix; Pre-blended Colored Mortar.

E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushedstone.

2. For joints less than ¼" (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100% passing the No. 16(1.18-mm) sieve.

3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce

required mortar color.

F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

G. Cold-Weather Admixture: Non-chloride, non-corrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of compositionindicated.


a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. b. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. -Conn.; Morset. c. Sonneborn Products, BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Trimix-NCA.

H. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUscontaining integral water repellent by same manufacturer.


a. ACM Chemistries; RainBloc for Mortar. b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Mortar Admixture. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. -Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar Admixture.

I. Water: Potable.

2.05 REINFORCEMENT:

A. Un-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade420).

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148" (3.77-mm) diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148" (3.77-mm) diameter.



5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.187" (4.76-mm) diameter. 6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16" (407 mm) o.c.7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10! (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair ofside rods.

D. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry:

1. Adjustable (two-piece) type, ladder truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backingwythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximumadjustment of 1¼" (32 mm). Size ties to extend at least halfway through facing wythe, but with atleast e" (16-mm) cover on outside face.

2.06 TIES AND ANCHORS:

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply withthe following unless otherwise indicated.

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M,Class B-2 coating.

B. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4" (100 mm) wide.

1. Where wythes are of different materials, use adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connectionshaving a maximum adjustment of 1¼" (32 mm).

2. Wire: Fabricate from 3/16" (4.76-mm) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

C. Partition Top anchors: 0.105" (2.66-mm) thick metal plate with d" (9.5-mm) diameter metal rod 6" (152mm) long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in andout of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES:

A. Compressible Filler: Pre-molded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressibleup to 35%; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene or urethane.

B. Pre-formed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying withASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateralstability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No.15 asphalt felt).



D. Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following as detailed:

1. Wicking Material: Absorbent rope, made from cotton or UV-resistant synthetic fiber, ¼" to d" (6to 10 mm) in diameter, in length required to produce 2" (50-mm) exposure on exterior and 18"(450 mm) in cavity. Use only for weeps.

2. Round Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Medium-density polyethylene, d" (9-mm) OD by 4" (100mm) long.

3. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistantpolypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth c" (3 mm) less thandepth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer’s standard.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may beincorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent. 2) Blok-Lok Limited; Cell-Vent. 3) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents. 4) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent. 5) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent. 6) Wire-Bond; Cell Vent.

E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade withinthe wall cavity.


a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break or Mortar Break II as applicable. b. Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat. c. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop. d. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.

F. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cellsand hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148" (3.77-mm) steel wire, hot-dipgalvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.


a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817. b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner. d. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.



2.08 MASONRY CLEANERS:

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer’s standard-strength cleaner designed for removingmortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry withoutdiscoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleanermanufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offeringproducts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. ProSoCo, Inc.

2.09 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES:

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders,water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view,

regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Pre-blended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a pre-blended mix. Measurequantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before deliveringto Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the followingtypes of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls for interior load-bearing

walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type isnot indicated, use Type N.

D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other ingredientsto produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products.

1. Pigments shall not exceed 10% of portland cement by weight. 2. Mix to match Architect’s sample.

3. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units:

a. Face brick.

E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.



1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that willcomply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces andpour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi (14 Mpa).

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8" to 11" (203 to 279 mm) as measured according to ASTM C143/C 143M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerancesand other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental toperformance of work.

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actuallocations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL:

A. Thickness: Build cavity walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Buildsingle-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment,complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or tofit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, un-chipped edges.Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfacesand, where possible, cut edges concealed.

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.

1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

F. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.

1. Tooth-in new brick to existing at opening perimeter as indicated.



G. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but notwet at time of laying.

3.03 TOLERANCES:

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus ½" (12 mm) or minus¼" (6 mm).

2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus ½"(12 mm).

3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus¼" (6 mm) in a story height or ½" (12 mm) total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than ¼" in 10! (6mm in 3 m), or ½" (12 mm) maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary fromlevel by more than c" in 10! (3 mm in 3 m), ¼" in 20! (6 mm in 6 m), or ½" (12 mm) maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than ¼" in 10! (6 mm in 3 m), d"in 20! (9 mm in 6 m), or ½" (12 mm) maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion andcontrol joints, do not vary from plumb by more than c" in 10! (3 mm in 3 m), ¼" in 20! (6 mm in6 m), or ½" (12 mm) maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than ¼" in 10! (6 mm in 3 m), d" in 20!(9 mm in 6 m), or ½" (12 mm) maximum.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than ¼" in 10! (6mm in 3 m), or ½" (12 mm) maximum.

7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than1/16" (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpageof units.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus c" (3 mm), witha maximum thickness limited to ½" (12 mm).

2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than c"(3 mm).

3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus d" (9 mm) orminus ¼" (6 mm).

4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus c" (3mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than c" (3 mm).



3.04 LAYING MASONRY WALLS:

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses andfor accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid usingless-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry to match existingpattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4" (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners orjambs.

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than onequarter unit. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less thannominal 4" (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in coursebelow; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, removeloose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill insolidly with masonry around built-in items.

F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath,wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24" (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, andsimilar items unless otherwise indicated.

I. Carefully remove and salvage existing brick and precast concrete sills for reinstallation where indicated.Anchor sills using stainless steel anchors as required to secure precast. Install thru-wall flashing, metaldrips, weeps and other accessories as indicated or required to maintain watertight installation.

J. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structureabove unless otherwise indicated.

1. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells ofCMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide ½"(13-mm) clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48" (1200 mm)o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

2. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above tocomply with Section 078446 “Fire-Resistive Joint Systems”.

3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING:

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.



3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on

footings where cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar tofill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thicknessunless otherwise indicated.

3.06 CAVITY WALLS:

A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using the following method:

1. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.

a. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use adjustable(two-piece) type reinforcement to allow for differential movement regardless of whetherbed joints align.

B. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away fromcavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar finsprotruding into cavity.

C. Coat cavity face of backup wythe to comply with Section 071113 “Bituminous Damp-proofing”.

D. Installing Cavity-Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12" (300 mm) o.c.both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners designed for this purpose.Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges buttedtightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown.

1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and masonry.

3.07 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT:

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of e" (16 mm) onexterior side of walls, ½" (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6" (150 mm).

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16" (406 mm) o.c. 2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8" (203 mm) above and below wall openings and extending

12" (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets,column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.



3.08 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS:

A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do notallow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall orpartition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:

1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control joint. Fillresultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant.

2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep

head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant. 4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is

complete for application of sealant.

C. Form expansion joints in brick as follows:

1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4" (100 mm) in direction ofwater flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any.

2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry. 3. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 4. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than d" (10 mm)

for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 “Joint Sealants”.

D. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressiblefiller of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 “Joint Sealants”,but not less than d" (10 mm).

3.09 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS:

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, otherobstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could punctureflashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed ofmortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing withadhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe,turned up a minimum of 8" (200 mm), and 1½" (38 mm) into the inner wythe.

3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6" (150 mm) into masonry at each end.At heads and sills, extend flashing 6" (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2" (50 mm) toform end dams.

4. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexibleflashing ½" (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metalflashing termination.



5. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completedonly where if specifically indicated on the Drawings.

C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built intomasonry.

D. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately aboveembedded flashing and as follows:

1. Use specified cellular plastic weep/vent product to form weep holes. 2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills installed within plastic

tubing. 3. Space weep holes 24" (600 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 4. Space weep holes formed from plastic tubing and wicking material 16" (400 mm) o.c. 5. Trim wicking material flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set.

E. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainagematerial in “Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories” Article.

3.10 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION:

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforcedmasonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated.Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and supportforms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently tocarry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to

resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for groutplacement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60" (1520 mm).

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections andprepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests andinspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done atContractor’s expense.

B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the “2010 Building Code of New York State”.

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-preparedmortar.



2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes,and locations of reinforcement.

3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof.

E. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar formortar air content and compressive strength.

F. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.

3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING:

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or thatdo not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed toeliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fillwith mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat,uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins andsmears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes orchisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparisonpurposes. Obtain Architect’s approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning ofmasonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering themwith liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsingsurfaces thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer’s written

instructions.7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of

stain on exposed surfaces. 8. Clean stone trim to comply with stone supplier’s written instructions. 9. Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in ILI’s “Indiana Limestone Handbook”.

3.13 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL:

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor’s property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.



B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminatedsand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.

1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4" (100 mm) in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry

waste. Fill material is specified in Section 312000 “Earth Moving”. 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18" (450 mm) of finished grade.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as describedabove, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner’s property.



DIVISION 4 SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS PAGE 1

DIVISION 5 MISCELLANEOUS METALS

SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions andDivision 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY:


1. Metal ladders. 2. Steel framing and supports for pit platform.3. Metal grating.4. Bearing and leveling planes for applications where they are not specified in other sections.

1.03 COORDINATION:

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint andcoating manufacturer’s written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatiblewith one another.

B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnishsetting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts,anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliversuch items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and detailsof metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, “StructuralWelding Code -Steel”.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS:

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metalfabrications by field measurements before fabrication.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 METALS:

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. Formetal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, rollermarks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

2.02 FASTENERS:

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use andzinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M),Class Fe/Zn 5, at foundation walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, PropertyClass 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M).

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M).

D. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the loadimposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, asdetermined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testingagency.

E. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1)stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (AST M F 738M), and nits, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:

A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

B. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, nongaseous groutcomplying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer forinterior and exterior applications.



2.04 FABRICATION, GENERAL:

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only asnecessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joinedpieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius ofapproximately 1/32" (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposedsurfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwiseimpairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosionresistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness

shows after finishing.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or weldswhere possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fastenersunless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, andsimilar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devicesto secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

2.05 METAL LADDERS:

A. General:

1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, except for elevator pit ladders. 2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

B. Steel Ladders:

1. Space side rails 18" (457 mm) apart unless otherwise indicated. 2. Side rails: Continuous, ½" x 2½" (12.7 mm x 64 mm) steel flat bars, with eased edges.3. Rungs: ¾" (19 mm) diameter steel bars.



4. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-oxide

granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled withaluminum-oxide grout.

6. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60" (1500 mm) o.c. with welded orbolted steel brackets.

7. Galvanize ladders, including brackets.

2.06 FINISHES, GENERAL:

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly unless indicated otherwise.

B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surroundingsurface.

2.07 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES:

A. Shop prime steel items.

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning”.

C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, “Paint Application Specification No. 1:Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel”, for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metalfabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges andsurfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to beleft as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut,or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for boltedor screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosionresistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness

shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.



D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications arerequired to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete andmasonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:

A. Touch-up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areasof shop paint are specified in Section 099123 “Interior Painting”.



DIVISION 7 SECTION 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING PAGE 1

DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

SECTION 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The Contract Drawings and the General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions ofthe Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1Specifications Sections apply to the work of this Section.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Firestopping: Provide Firestopping of all penetrations through fire barriers to comply with, but notlimited to, the 2009 Edition of the NFPA 101 Life Safety Code 8.3.5, and the New York State BuildingCode 712. Firestopping shall be approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

B. Smokestopping: Provide all penetrations through smoke barriers as defined in Chapter 7 of the NewYork State Building Code shall comply with, but not limited to, the 2009 edition of NFPA 101 LifeSafety Code 8.4.4. Smokestopping shall be approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Schedule of Firestopping/Smokestopping: Submit complete list, for approval, of penetrations to besealed, indicating location, fire rating of penetrated assembly, identification of penetration seal to beused, fire rating of penetration seal, and evidence of acceptance testing.


A. Firestopping Materials: Provide penetration seal assemblies whose fire-resistance ratings have beendetermined by testing in the configurations required and which have fire-resistance ratings at least ashigh as that of the fire-rated assembly in which they are to be installed.

1. Comply with all applicable codes including but not limited to:

a. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM.)

1) ASTM E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of BuildingMaterials.

2) ASTM E 119 Method of Fire Tests of Building Construction Materials.3) ASTM E 814 Test Method for Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops.4) ASTM C 665 (Corrosion & Microbial Resistance Portions) Standard

Specification for Mineral-Fiber Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Constructionand Manufactured Housing.

5) ASTM E 90 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss ofBuilding Partitions.

2. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and /or Factory Mutual Research Corporation for eachspecific intended application:



a. UL Building Materials Directory.b. UL Fire Resistance Directory.c. UL 2079 Test.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL:

A. Firestopping and Smokestopping materials shall allow normal expansion and contraction (intumescent)of the penetrating item without failure of the penetrations seal, and shall be heat absorbing(endothermic). Products may not emit hazardous, combustible or irritating by-products during installationor curing. Products shall not require special tools for installation.

B. Manufacturers: Provide products complying with requirements of the Contract Documents and made byone of the following:

1. Rectorseal.2. Hilti, Inc.3. 3M Fire Protection Products.4. Specified Technologies Inc.5. U.S. Gypsum Company.6. Johns Mansville.7. BlazeMaster.

2.02 FIRESTOPPING PRODUCTS:

A. Provide firestopping products which:

1. Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according torequirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain fire resistancerating of assembly.

a. F-rated systems in accordance with ASTM 814b. T-rated systems in accordance with ASTM 814.

B. Firestopping Flame Spread Performance Requirements:

1. Provide products with flame-spread ratings of less than 25 and smoke-development rating of lessthan 50 as determined in accordance with ASTM E 84.

C. Firestopping UL Performance Requirements:

1. Provide products with UL ratings specified for assembly indicated as determined in accordancewith UL listing.

D. FM approval in lieu of UL shall be accepted by the Owner.



E. Where a specific firestopping product is identified on the drawings, either that product or a similarproduct which has been tested in the exact application shown on the drawings shall be employed, afterreview by the Engineer.

F. Firestop caulk shall be Johns Manville Firetemp Cl, Rectorseal Biostop 500+, or approved equal, exceptwhere otherwise shown on the drawings.

2.03 SMOKESTOPPING PRODUCTS:

A. Provide smokestopping products which:

1. Allow normal expansion and contraction movement of the penetrating item without the failure ofthe penetration seal.

2. Maintain at least the smoke resistance of the barrier penetrated.3. Firestop caulk shall be Johns Manville Firetemp Cl or approve equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION AND QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Install firestopping materials in exact accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and conditions ofthe testing; provide all accessory materials required.

B. Provide the services of a factory representative of the fire proofing product to review the installationpractices and conduct training of the applications.

C. Installer shall be trained to perform work.

D. Inspection: The Authority Having Jurisdiction shall have final inspection review of all work performed.Contractor shall make modifications to completed and uncompleted work as directed by the AuthorityHaving Jurisdiction at the Contractor’s expense.

E. Refer to the Certified Installation Instructions sheet below for an example of an acceptable installationmethod for one type of condition. Note that this sheet is an example only. The contractor shall provide asubmittal including similar sheets for each type of penetration and material penetrating. Details need notbe project specific, but must match the actual configuration found in the field. Contractor shall conformto the details of that certified installation instruction sheet.


DIVISION 9 SECTION 09 20 00 - METAL FRAMING & DRYWALL PAGE 1

DIVISION 9 FINISHES

SECTION 09 20 00 - METAL FRAMING & DRYWALL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Section includes:

1. Metal wall/ceiling support systems.2. Gypsum wallboard.3. Water-resistant gypsum backing board.4. Drywall finishing.

B. Provide metal support systems, gypsum wallboard and dry wall finishing as shown. The items coveredinclude but are not limited to the following:

1. GWB shaft wall in elevator machine room.2. Temporary work for dust control.3. Repair of drywall and plaster surfaces affected by the work of this contract.

1.02 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit product data for all materials to be used in conjunction with this project.


A. Standards of work. Provide work in accordance with:

1. GA-214-90 Recommended Specification: Level of Gypsum Board Finish; Gypsum Association;1990.

2. GA-219-89 Recommendations for installation of Steel Fire Door Frames in Steel Stud-GypsumBoard Fire-Rated Partitions; Gypsum Association; 1989.

B. Installer Qualifications: Provide installation by a company specializing in work similar to that requiredon this project and with not less than 5 years of documented experience.

C. Regulatory Requirements: At locations indicated on drawings, provide fire-rated assemblies tested inaccordance with ASTM E 119 and acceptable to authorities for ratings required. Provide assemblies aslisted in the following:

1. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.’s (UL) “Fire Resistance Directory”.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FRAMING MATERIALS:

A. General: Select size and gage of framing members and establish spacing to comply with requirements ofASTM C 754 unless otherwise specifically indicated.



1. Maximum deflection: L/240 at 5 lbf per square foot.

B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645, minimum 25 gauge steel with protective coating except 20 gauge foruse with “Cement Backer Boards” (Durock or equal). Provide nominal sized units as indicated ondrawings.

C. Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, soft, Class I galvanized.

1. Ceiling hangers: Minimum 0.162 inch diameter (8 gage) wire.2. Furring channel ties: Minimum 0.048 inch diameter (18 gage) wire.

D. Furring Channel Ties: Minimum 0.048 inch diameter (18 gage) wire.

1. Hat-shaped except as otherwise indicated.

E. Furring Fasteners/connectors: Manufacturer’s recommended System for specific application indicated,complying with ASTM C 754.

F. Manufacturers: Provide products complying with requirements of the contract documents and made byone of the following:

1. Dale/Incor.2. Dietrich Industries, Inc.3. Gold Bond Building Products, a National Gypsum Division.4. USG Corporation.

2.02 GYPSUM BOARD:

A. General: Maximum length available to minimize end to end butt joints in area receiving finished gypsumboard.

1. Edges: Tapered.2. Rating: All assemblies shall use fire-rated (Type-X) drywall.3. Thickness: As shown on Partition Type drawings or e" if no thickness shown.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C36:

1. Top and Base drywall layers for all interior non-wet wall/ceiling area applications.

C. Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630:

1. Top and Base wall layers for all interior wet area wall/ceiling area applications except forceramic tile installations.

2. Base layer for cement board top layer in all ceramic tile wall locations as detailed.

D. Cement Backer Board: USG “Durock” or equal.

1. Top layer for all wet interior ceramic wall tile and Shower/Drying type ceiling areas.



E. Gypsum Lath Board: USG “Imperial GYPSUM Base” or equal.

1. Top layer for skim coat plaster wall and ceiling finishes. 2. High activity Use and damage areas.

F. Manufacturers: Provide products complying with requirements of the contract documents and made byone of the following:

1. Domtar Gypsum.2. Georgia-Pacific Corporation.3. Gold Bond Building Products, a National Gypsum Division.4. USG Corporation.

2.03 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES:

A. General: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, provide trim and accessories by manufacturer ofgypsum board materials, made of galvanized steel or zinc alloy and configured for concealment in jointcompound.

1. Include corner beads, edge trim, and other trim units necessary for project conditions. Provideaccessories as required in order to achieve details indicated, whether or not specific accessoriesare shown on the drawings.

2. All trim shall be concealed in joint compound.

2.04 JOINT TREATMENT:

A. General: Provide products by manufacturer of gypsum boards. Comply with ASTM C 475 and withmanufacturer’s recommendations for specific project conditions.

1. Joint Tape: Manufacturer’s standard paper reinforcing tape recommended for use with finishscheduled.

2. Provide open mesh glass fiber tapes suitable for use with any or all drywall boards if sorecommended or defined as a better system by the manufacturer.

B. Setting Type Joint Compound: Chemical hardening type, for the following applications:

1. Interior Use: (USG “Durabond” or equal.)

a. Laminating drywall to face of existing masonry or plaster wall systems.b. Taping and prefilling.c. Filling, smoothing or otherwise preparing existing interior concrete, masonry, or other

solid surfaces for laminated application of gypsum board in accordance withmanufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Finish Setting Type Joint Compound: Chemically hardening type for finish coat use as follows:

1. Interior Use: (USG “Sheetrock Lightweight Setting Type-Easy Sand” or equal.)



2.05 VENEER FINISH PLASTER:

A. U.S. Gypsum Company (USG) “Imperial Finish Plaster”, or approved equal.

B. Comply with ASTM C587.

C. One or Two Coat System.

D. Total applied thickness: 3/32! to c".

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:

A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials as produced or recommended by manufacturer of gypsumproducts.

B. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self-drilling type; lengths as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer forproject conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Environmental Conditions: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishinggypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer’srecommendations, whichever are more stringent. For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board toframing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsumboard, maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours before application and continuously afteruntil dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C) when using temporary heat sources. Ventilate buildingspaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to preventfinishing materials from drying too rapidly.

B. Ventilation: Provide controlled ventilation during joint finishing operations, to eliminate excessivemoisture. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too quickly.


A. Deliver materials in original and unopened packages, containers, or bundles, with brand names andmanufacturer’s labels intact and legible.

B. Store materials in dry location, fully protected from weather and direct exposure to sunlight.

C. Stack gypsum board products flat and level, properly supported to prevent sagging or damage to ends andedges.

D. Store corner bead and other metal accessories to prevent bending, sagging, distortion, or othermechanical damage.



3.03 INSTALLATION OF METAL FRAMING:

A. Coordinate installation of anchorage devices for suspended ceilings/soffits, verifying that spacing andrated strength are correct for anticipated load conditions.

B. Comply with provisions of ASTM C 754 and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framinginstallation except where exceeded by other requirements.

C. Headers and Soffits:

1. Secure hangers to structure or to anchorage devices so that full strength of hanger can beachieved.

a. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects withinceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system.

b. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontalforces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Secure metal framing members by means of screws, clips, or wire ties, as appropriate tosubstrate. Space framing members at not more than 16" on center.

D. Steel Studs:

1. General: Install tracks and studs in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and asfollows:

a. Stud spacing: 16" on center, except as otherwise shown.

2. Door openings: Comply with GA-214; reinforce openings as required for size and weight ofdoors, using a minimum of two side-by-side studs an each side of opening.

a. At openings in fire-rated partitions, comply with requirements of governing authoritiesfor framing.

3. Partition heights: Extend studs full height, to underside of floor or roof construction above.4. Blocking and bracing: Install blocking and bracing as recommended by manufacturer for

adequate support of wall-mounted items installed as work of other sections.

E. Wall Furring:

1. General: Install wall furring members in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

a. Spacing: 16" on center, except as otherwise shown.

2. On solid walls, install furring members vertically.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD:

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 840 and CA-216 except where exceeded by other requirements.



1. Install all drywall up to underside of existing deck unless detailed otherwise.2. Wherever possible, install gypsum board to minimize butt and joints.3. Apply ceiling boards prior to installation of wallboards. Arrange to minimize butt end joints near

center of ceiling area.4. Install wallboards in a manner which will minimize butt end joints in center of wall area. Stagger

vertical joints on opposite sides of walls.5. Butt all joints loosely, with maximum of 1/16" between boards.6. Place wrapped edges adjacent to one another; do not place cut edges or butt ends adjacent to

wrapped edges.7. Support all edges and ends of each board on framing or by solid substrate, except that long edges

at right angles to framing members in non-fire-rated construction may be left unsupported.

B. Installation on Metal Framing and Furring:

1. Single-layer application: Install gypsum board by means of screw attachment.

a. On walls and partitions, plan installation so that leading edge or end of gypsum board isattached to open end of stud flange first.

2. Double-layer application:

a. Install base layer by means of 1" screws, spaced at 24" on center.b. Install face layer by means of screws at least d" longer than total thickness of gypsum

board layers, spaced at 12" on center.

3. For fire-rated construction, install gypsum board by means of screws as specified for the testedassembly.

C. Installation on Interior Masonry, Concrete Walls, or Other Solid Substrates: Grind off protruding areas toproduce a plumb and true wall surface. Fill pockets or holes greater than 4" in diameter with chemicallyhardening joint compound and allow to dry. Skim coat glazed block surfaces with similar joint compoundnoted above. Apply adhesive recommended by manufacturer to back of gypsum boards and install boardsvertically, pressing into place. Provide additional support and bracing with mechanical fasteners atmaximum 24! o.c. while adhesive is hardening.

D. Installation of Cement Board, Gypsum Lath Board and Water-Resistant Backing Boards:

1. Install at all wet locations as detailed on Drawings.2. Install specialty gypsum boards in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations for

installation, including minimum clearances and sealing of penetrations and edges.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES:

A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for installation of trim items. Except for itemsintended by manufacturer to be left exposed or semiexposed, install trim units for concealment in jointfinishing compound. Wherever possible, fasten metal trim items to substrate with same fasteners used toinstall gypsum board products.

B. Corner Bead: Install metal corner bead at all external corners unless details clearly indicate its omissionat specific locations.



C. Edge Trim: Install edge trim at locations indicated and wherever edge of gypsum board otherwise wouldbe exposed.

3.06 FINISHING:

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216 except where exceeded by other requirements.

1. Do not mix joint compound except as specifically recommended by manufacturer.

B. Finish gypsum board in each area to the level of finish per GA-214 indicated below:

C. All finishing compounds shall be chemically hardening type.

D. All Exposed Wall/Ceiling Drywall Surfaces:

1. Level 4: Embed tape in joint compound at all joints and interior angles. Provide three separatecoats of compound at all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Provide smooth surfacesfree of tool marks and ridges.

E. All Concealed Drywall Behind Ceramic Tile Surfaces:

1. Level 2: Embed tape in joint compound at all joints and interior angles. Provide one separate coatof compound at all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Provide surfaces free of excessjoint compound; tool marks and ridges are acceptable.

F. All Wall/Ceiling Drywall Surfaces Scheduled for Plaster Veneer Finish:

1. Level 5: Embed tape in joint compound at all joints and interior angles. Provide three separatecoats of compound at all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Apply a thin skim coat ofjoint compound or a special-purpose coating to the entire gypsum board surface. Provide smoothsurfaces free of tool marks, ridges and visual defects; ready for decoration. Touch up and sand ifnecessary to produce satisfactory surface.

G. Joint Treatment: Tape and finish joints in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions for compoundsused, using proper hand tools designed for the purpose.

1. Avoid raising nap of face paper when sanding; carefully sponge down any areas roughened bysanding process.

H. Penetrations: Fill cutouts and openings around fixtures and penetrations with joint compound.

I. Finish water-resistant gypsum backing board forming base for ceramic tile to comply with ASTM C 840and gypsum board manufacturer’s directions for treatment of joints behind tile.



3.07 CLEANING:

A. Promptly remove any residual gypsum drywall materials from adjacent or adjoining surfaces, leavingspaces ready for subsequent finishing operations and decorating.



DIVISION 9 SECTION 09 91 00 - PAINTING PAGE 1

DIVISION 9 FINISHES

SECTION 09 91 00 - PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED:


1. Preparation of surfaces.2. Painting of machine room walls.3. Painting of machine room floors.4. Painting of hoistway entrance doors and frames.


A. Do not paint pre-finished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code-required labels orequipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

1.03 DEFINITIONS:

A. “Paint” includes coating systems materials, primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, andother applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats.

B. DFM (Dry Film Mils): thickness, measured in mils, of a coat of paint in the cured state.

C. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section:

1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter.

2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

3. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

4. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured ata 60-degree meter.

5. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical information, label analysis, and application instructionsfor materials proposed for use.

1. List materials and cross-reference the specific coating and finish system and application. Identify materials by the manufacturer’s catalog number and general classification.

B. Samples: Submit initial color selection in the form of manufacturer’s color charts.



C. Provide a list of materials and applications for each sample. Label each sample as to location andapplication.


A. Materials:

1. All coating materials required by this section shall be provided by a single manufacturer, unlessotherwise required or approved. For a given application (i.e. interior walls in student rooms) asingle brand, color and mix shall be used.

B. Applicator: Firm with not less than ten (10) years of successful experience in painting work similar inscope to work of this project.

C. Crew: Maintain throughout duration of the work a crew of painters who are fully qualified to satisfyrequirements of the specifications.

D. VOCs: Certify that all products supplied comply with Federal State and Local regulations controlling theuse of Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturer: Provide products of the following:

1. Benjamin Moore Paint Company.2. Strathmore Paint Company.3. Sherwin-Williams Company.

2.02 LEAD CONTENT:

A. Not more than 0.06 % lead by weight (calculated as lead metal) in the total nonvolatile content of thepaint or the equivalent measure of lead in the dried film.

B. Not more than permitted by applicable regulations where they are more stringent than above.

2.03 MATERIAL SCHEDULE:

A. Provide paint materials as follows:

1. Elevator Machine Room Walls:

a. Primer: Sherwin-Williams PrepRite 200 Latex Primer or PrepRite Masonry Primer asrequired or equal in Benjamin Moore Super Spec, one (1) coat.

b. Paint: Sherwin-Williams Promar 200 Int. Latex Eggshell or equal in Benjamin MooreSuper Spec, two (2) coats.



2. Elevator Machine Room Floor:

a. Primer: Sherwin-Williams Armor Seal Tread-Plex Primer or equal in Benjamin Moore,one (1) coat.

b. Paint: Sherwin-Williams Armor Seal Tread-Plex Finish or equal in Benjamin Moore, two(2) coats. Provide “shark grip” slip resistance additive.

3. Exposed Piping, Conduit, Hangers, etc. in Finished Spaces:

a. Primer: Sherwin-Williams All-Surface Enamel Latex Primer or equal in BenjaminMoore Super Spec, one (1) coat.


4. Hoistway Doors and Frames:

a. Primer: Sherwin-Williams PrepRite 200 Latex Primer or equal in Benjamin Moore SuperSpec, one (1) coat.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer’s original, unopened packages and containersbearing manufacturer’s name and label with the following information:

1. Product name or title of material.2. Product description.3. Federal Specification number, if applicable.4. Manufacturer’s stock number and date of manufacture.5. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.6. Thinning instructions.7. Application instructions.8. Color name and number.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambienttemperature of 45EF (7EC). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean conditions, free of foreignmaterials and residue.

C. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Takenecessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazardsresulting from handling, mixing, and application.

3.02 PREPARATION:

A. Clean all surfaces of moisture, rust, plaster, dirt and foreign matter before painting. Schedule painting sothat dust and other contaminants do not fall on wet painted surfaces.



B. Remove dirt, dust, grease, oils, and foreign matter. Prepare surface for proper texture necessary toachieve optimum coating adhesion and intended finished appearance. Plan cleaning, preparation andcoating operations to avoid contamination of freshly coated surfaces.

C. Remove hardware, cover plates, and similar items before applying coatings. After application of coatings,install removed items. Use only skilled workers for removal and replacement of such items.

D. Provide protection for non-removable items not scheduled for coating.

E. Protect surfaces not scheduled for coating. Clean, repair, or replace to the satisfaction of the Engineerany surfaces inadvertently spattered or coated.

F. Before hand or power tool cleaning, remove visible oil, grease, soluble welding residue, and salts bysolvent cleaning. After hand or power tool cleaning, re-clean surfaces if necessary.

G. Before touching up coatings damaged by handling or welding, re-prepare damaged surfaces.

H. For piping equipped with lubricated groove lock type fittings, such as Victaulic, clean all lubricant fromfitting and pipe prior to priming. Take all necessary steps to eliminate bleed through of lubricants.

3.03 MIXING AND THINNING:

A. Remove and discard any skin formed on surface of coatings in containers. Discard any containers whereskin comprises 2% or more of the remaining materials. Do not add thinner except as specificallyrecommended (not merely permitted) by the coating manufacturer for proper coating application underthe circumstances prevailing at the project site when application equipment recommended by the coatingmanufacturer is employed. Use only the quantities and the types of thinner recommended.

3.04 APPLICATION:

A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and use applicators and techniques bestsuited for substrate and type of material being applied.

B. Apply additional coats when undercoats show through the final coat of paint until paint is of uniformcolor and finish and is approved by the Engineer.

C. Apply coats of paint as scheduled.

D. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pre-treated, or otherwiseprepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of applicationmethod. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by themanufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according tomanufacturer’s written instructions, sand between applications.

2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touch-up primed.3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats

until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensureedges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent tothat of flat surfaces.



4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not re-coat surfacesuntil paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumbpressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift orlose adhesion.

E. Techniques: Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes as indicated in the schedules.2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to

formation of a durable paint film.3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.

F. Application Procedure: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators accordingto manufacturer’s written instructions.

1. Brushes: use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate sizefor the surface or item being painted.

2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep’s wool as recommended by themanufacturer for the materials and texture required.

3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by themanufacturer for the material and texture required.

G. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer’s recommendedspreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by themanufacturer.

H. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by themanufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated byothers. Re-coat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence appears of suction spots or unsealed areas infirst coat, to endure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

I. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaquesurface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brushmarks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

J. Completed work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaintwork not complying with requirements.


A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as theOwner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied.

1. The Owner may engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paintmaterial being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project may be taken, identified, sealed,and certified in the presence of the Contractor.

2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required bythe Owner:



a. Quantitative material analysis.b. Abrasion resistence.c. Apparent reflectivity.d. Flexibility.e. Washability.f. Absorption.g. Accelerated weathering.h. Dry opacity.i. Accelerated yellowness.j. Recoating.k. Skinning.l. Color retention.m. Alkali and mildew resistance.

3. The Owner may direct the Contractor to discontinue painting if test results show material beingused does not comply with specified requirements. The Contractor shall remove noncomplyingpaint from the site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint.If necessary, the Contractor may be required to remove rejected paint from previously paintedsurfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible.

3.06 CLEAN UP:

A. Clean paint spattered surfaces by washing or scraping and use care not to damage adjacent finishedsurfaces.

B. Provide “Wet Paint” signs to newly painted surfaces.

C. Remove protection from surfaces, equipment, and operating parts. Remove tape and adhesive residue.

D. Protect sprinkler heads - they ARE NOT to be painted.



DIVISION 14 SECTION 14 21 00 - TRACTION ELEVATORS PAGE 1

DIVISION 14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

SECTION 14 21 00 - TRACTION ELEVATORS

PART 1 - SCOPE

1.01 SCOPE:

A. This section includes the following:

1. Provide where shown, all materials, labor, services, rigging, permits and related work to furnish acomplete, operating, tested, functioning, documented traction elevator system modernizationincluding work shown, specified or required, including but not limited to the following:

a. Three (3) overhead traction elevators of capacity and features scheduled and specified.

1.02 SPECIFICATION INTENT:

A. It is the intent of the Specification to provide traction elevators which conform to Syracuse UniversityStandards in terms of keying, car accessories and maintainable parts.

B. Provide and install fully non-proprietary elevator systems complying in all respects with thesespecifications. Contractor shall utilize only freely available supplies and components from approved thirdparty suppliers.

1.03 APPLICABLE CODES:

A. Facilities to comply with all current applicable building codes. These codes include but are not limitedto:

1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).2. 2017 New York State Uniform Code Supplement3. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code, 2013 Edition.4. ASME A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, 2013 Edition.5. NFPA 70 National Electric Code, 2014 Edition.

1.04 DEFINITIONS:

A. Traction Elevators: Elevators in which cars are hoisted by the action of a series of ropes, sheaves, andmotors; with other components of the work, including governors, safeties, car enclosures, hoistwayentrances, operation systems, signal equipment, guide rails, electrical wiring, buffers, and devices ofoperations, safety, security, required performance at rated speed and capacity, and for complete elevatorinstallation.

B. Defective Elevator Work: Operation or control system failures; performances below specified ratings;excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; the need forexcessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactoryconditions.



1.05 SUBMITTALS:

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1Specification Sections.

B. Product Data for each elevator including capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features,controls, finishes, and similar information.

C. Shop Drawings for each elevator showing plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicatingservice at each landing, coordination with building structure, and relationships with other construction.Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on buildingstructure at points of support, and location of signals. Include maximum and average power demands.

D. Maintenance manuals for each different traction elevator, including operation and maintenanceinstruction, parts listing with sources indicated, recommended parts inventory listing, emergencyinstruction, and similar information. Include all diagnostic and repair information available tomanufacturer’s and installer’s maintenance personnel. Submit for Owner’s information at projectcloseout as specified in Division 1.

E. Inspection and acceptance certificates and operating permits as required by governing authorities fornormal, unrestricted elevator use.

F. Color and material selection chart for all Architect selected furnishes.

G. Submit welding certificates for all personnel performing field welding.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage the elevator manufacturer or an experienced installer approved by theelevator manufacturer who has completed elevator installations similar in material, design, and extent tothat indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Specific Qualifications: Licensed elevator contractor with demonstrated experience in tractionelevator modernization projects. Experience in high-rise, multi-car installations required.Contractor shall be experienced with projects in universities, hospitals, and similar institutionaloccupancies. Contractor’s ability to successfully complete time-sensitive, closely scheduledprojects involving multiple elevator teams and the ability to coordinate the work of varioussubcontractors shall be demonstrated on the Contractor’s Statement of Qualifications.

B. Regulatory Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with the applicableprovisions of the codes and standards listed in Summary of Work.

C. Accessibility Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with Section 4.10 in theU.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Boards “Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA), Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).”



1.07 WARRANTY:

A. General Warranty: The elevator warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of otherrights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to,and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the ContractDocuments.

B. Standard Elevator Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair,restore, or replace defective elevator work within the specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 12 months from date of completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering tractionelevator components that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. GAL.2. Janus.3. Hollister-Whitney.4. MCE.5. Imperial.6. Columbia.7. PTL Equipment.8. Titan.

2.02 ELEVATOR CAR:

A. Existing car shell to remain.

B. Existing car doors to remain.

C. Existing elevator cab interior and finishes to remain.

D. Provide and install new ADA compliant vandal-resistant Car Operating Panels with:

1. #4 stainless steel finish.2. Engraved fire service sign.3. C.O.P. installed K-tech hands free emergency telephone.4. Emergency light.5. Digital position indicator with passing gong.

6. Keyed off/on switches for inspection, phase two fire service, run/stop, light, fan, hoistwayaccess, emergency mdeical service and independent service. Provide Chicago lock numbers:

a. Fire Service Recall #FEO-K1.b. Independent, Lights and Fan #G1601.c. Inspection, Hoistway Access and Run #G1612.



7. Illuminated fire emblem and hands free phone call received indicators.8. Local alarm button, call cancel, alarm, door open and door close.9. Provide illuminated buttons with braille tags and audible signal registered display for each floor.10. C.O.P. shall be provided with permanently engraved fire service instructions.11. Car numbers shall be engraved on C.O.P.s.12. C.O.P. shall be manufactured by PTL Equipment.13. C.O.P. shall be provided with voice annunciation.

2.03 ENTRANCE FIXTURES:

A. Provide and install ASME A17.1, AJH approved, ADA compliant, vandal resistant hall call fixtures at42" centerline above the finished floor. Primary recall landing shall have permanently engraved fireservice instructions within the call station fixture. Fixtures shall have #4 stainless steel finish. ProvideBraille tags.

B. Fire service key switch on primary recall landing only. Verify primary and secondary recall locationswith the AHJ. Fixtures shall have lighted and audible signal registered display.

C. Provide fire pictographs on each landing, permanently engraved on hall call fixtures.

D. Metal plate floor tags with Braille and raised lettering permanently attached to both sides of the doorframe jambs. Tags shall be riveted to the door frame at 60" above the finished floor. Tags shall be #4stainless steel with black lettering.

E. Provide surface-mount combination hall lantern/digital position indicator at each landing. Fixture shallhave #4 stainless steel finish, bi-color arrows and red digits. CE Electronics Model GTCH/GTCV.

F. Hall call fixtures shall be manufactured by PTL Equipment.

2.04 ENTRANCES:

A. Existing hoistway frames to remain. Provide new baked enamel (primed only) hoistway doors.

B. Provide Tri-lock door key plug #6950 at each entrance, no equal. Provide chrome finish.

C. Provide hoistway access key switches at terminal landings only.

2.05 MECHANICAL:

A. Provide and install a new microprocessor based elevator controller:

1. Controller shall be MCE, Motion 4000, no equal. Provide the following features:

a. Velocity feedback via motor mounted encoder, position feedback via encoded tape inhoistway.

b. Serial link communications to C.O.P. and hall call stations.c. Floor-mounted single door cabinet, 72"H x 32"W x 20"D.d. Provide door nudging and pre-opening.e. Factory installed support for future card reader security system.



f. Factory installed support for future emergency power operation.g. Factory installed CE micro comm interface for hall lanterns/position indicators.h. Factory installed dry contact output for car in service status (ISRT flag).

2. Drive types shall be VVVF, closed loop flux vector. 3. Speed and capacity shall be as scheduled on the Contract Documents.4. Terminate all required fire alarm connections to provide Phase 1 Recall and Phase 2 emergency

operation.5. Connect to phone lines for campus emergency phones. Verify ring down service.6. Connect light/fan circuits to separate emergency power disconnects (provided by others).

B. Existing rails, sheaves and beams shall remain.

C. Provide approved capacity plates.

D. Existing safeties shall remain.

E. Provide new roller guides as follows:

1. Counterweight: Elsco Type D.

F. Adjust and balance car float as required to allow smooth ride condition.

G. Provide and install new overhead geared traction machines.

1. Machine shall be Hollister-Whitney #54 with disk brake.2. Provide full isolation package, including blocking beams and clips. Provide drip pans. Machines

for elevators 1 and 2 shall be “rectangular base” type for mounting rope gripper. Machine forElevator 3 shall be standard “diagonal base”.

3. Provide new 25 HP, 1200 rpm AC motor. Motor shall be inverter-rated, elevator duty, asmanufactured by Imperial Electric. Motor shall have NEMA nameplate F insulation.

H. Provide ropes and wedge sockets. Rope tension shall be equalized with rope tensioner.

I. Provide interlocks and terminal landing devices for car entrances and counterweights. Pin all switches torails where rail connections are made.

J. Provide fascias, dust covers and toe guards.

K. Provide neoprene traveling cables. Provide separate communications tracker with shielded twisted pairsfor Cat 5E data, fire alarm, speaker, telephone and future card swipe reader; Drake Model 18-020-99.

L. Provide pit stop switches. Switches shall be red mushroom head, push to stop/pull to run.

M. All hoistway wiring shall be wholly enclosed in cable ways.

N. Clean and realign rails at project completion, for “like new” ride quality.

O. Provide AHJ inspection and full load test.



P. All components shall be inspected by the Contractor prior to placing in service. Additional componentsnot included in this specification deemed by the Contractor necessary for inspection shall be standard.

2.06 MICROPROCESSOR LOGIC CONTROLLER:

A. Function:

1. Controller shall start and stop car smoothly and shall cause the cab to make accurate landingsunder all load conditions.

2. Components and operating devices shall govern starting, stopping, direction of travel,acceleration, retardation and speed.

B. Type: Microprocessor based self diagnostic programmable controller with an Erasable ProgrammableRead Only Memory with provisions for enabling random access memory for such items as timeradjustments and motion control tuning.

1. The printed circuit boards (modules) shall be of the type that plug into pre-wired mounting racks.No field wiring or alteration shall be necessary in order to replace defective modules.

2. Any field wiring changes required during construction shall be required to be made only to themounting rack connection points and not to the individual module circuitry or components. If itbecomes necessary to alter individual modules, they shall be returned to the factory where suchdesign changes may be made so that correct replacement units are available.

3. Wiring connections for operating circuits and for external control circuits shall be brought toterminal blocks mounted in an accessible location within the controller cabinet. Terminal blocksusing pierce-through serrated washers shall not be accepted.

4. Safety and Motion Circuits: Electro-Mechanical pilot type relays. Safety circuits shall bemonitored by the microprocessor for redundant protection. All outputs shall be individuallyfused.

5. Identify each device and fuse (ampere rating) on panels by name, letter, or standard symbol, in anapproved indelible and legible manner. Coordinate identification markings with wiring diagrams.All logic symbols and circuitry designations shall be in accordance with ANSI Standards.

C. Hand-held Diagnostic Tester: Shall plug into the control processing unit or shall be capable of beingcable connected. Tester shall enable operator to monitor logic, timer, and counter values for moreproductive operation.

D. Fault Protection System:

1. Protect against the following:

a. Complete power circuit protect from failure under short circuit.b. Surge protection.c. Overload.d. Low voltage, phase loss, unbalanced voltage.

E. Components and Operating Devices:

1. Reverse phase relay.2. Additional components and devices as required to suit type of operation specified.



2.07 TOP-OF-CAR EQUIPMENT:

A. Ventilation Fan: Single, Speed: 350 cfm, Nylube Model X12F5.

B. Inspection Station: Integrated unit with mushroom head run/stop switch, directional controls, inspectionswitch, light switch, GFCI outlet and guarded top-of-car light.

1. Draka Model TOCI-L.2. Provide medium base compact fluorescent bulb for fixture.

C. Top-of-Car Safety Rail: Provide top-of-car safety rail on both sides and rear of car top. Rail shall be steelor aluminum.

2.08 DOOR EQUIPMENT:

A. Door Operator: Provide closed loop VVVF door operator for use with center opening doors. Operatorshall have hand-held programmer for adjustment of door operation parameters.

1. GAL Model MOVFR.

B. Door Clutch: Provide new door clutches, GAL Model LWZ-2 with integrated door restrictor.

C. Door Locks: Provide new door locks, GAL Model MOCP.

D. Door Closers: Provide new Spirator style closers.

2.09 DOOR EDGE DETECTOR:

A. Provide non-contact, infrared door edge detector.

1. Door edge detector shall be PanaChrome 3D by Janus or Owner approved equal.

2.10 BUFFERS:

A. Existing to remain.

2.11 PLATFORM/STILES/CROSSHEAD:


2.12 PAINT:

A. Rust inhibitive primer and paint shall be used where painted surfaces are specified or provided.

2.13 ROPE GRIPPER:

A. Provide Hollister-Whitney Model 622 rope gripper.



2.14 GOVERNOR:

A. Provide new 12" overspeed governors and tension weight/tail sheaves. Hollister-Whitney Model 207governor and Model 192 tension weight/tail sheave.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DELIVERY OF TOOLS, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:

A. The Contractor shall assume responsibility and all costs associated with the delivery and removal of allmaterials and equipment. The Contractor shall furnish all trucking, rigging, and transportation for allitems required to complete the project. In addition, the Contractor shall accept responsibility to protectthe grounds, building, and building contents during associated deliveries and removals.

3.02 BARRICADES:

A. Contractor shall provide non-perforated barricades at each landing to a height of not less than 4!-0" abovefloor. These barricades shall be in addition to those provided by Contract 1. At no time shall thebarricades be removed prior to the installation of fully functional safety interlocks, and installation ofwalls. At no time shall any entrance be left open to any elevator shaft. Contractor shall comply with anyand all Occupational Safety and Health Standards for general industry (26 CFR 1911) and for theConstruction Industry (29 CFR 1926). Special attention shall be addressed to sections 1926.502 PersonalFall Arrest Systems and especially 1926.502(d)(ii) regarding work in Elevator Shafts by all personsworking inside the guarded areas. The Contractor shall be required to show documentation that eachperson who has access to the elevator entrances has been trained in the proper use of personal fallprotection. The Owner reserves the right to require additional safety precautions at any time. A copy ofthe “Elevator Industry Field Employee’s Safety Handbook” shall be required on the site at all times andan additional copy shall be provided to the Owner’s Risk Management-Safety Department along with ajob specific safety program prior to the beginning of any work. Perform work at all times in accordancewith the minimum requirements of the “Elevator Industry Field Employee’s Safety Handbook,”published by Elevator World.

3.03 DUST PROTECTION:

A. Barricades shall be so constructed as to protect adjacent portions of the building from dust and debris.Barricades shall be arranged to avoid damage to existing building finishes.

3.04 ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT:

A. Install equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed installation instructions.

B. All discarded materials are the sole responsibility of the Contractors to completely remove from the siteat their expense.



3.05 TESTING:

A. The Contractor shall provide for all testing and inspection services. The Contractor shall provide for areasonable amount of time to integrate the elevator operations with the work of other trades. TheContractor shall provide a unit cost within the Base Bid for additional labor where requested by theOwner. The Contractor shall provide a complete functioning elevator, approved by the Authority HavingJurisdiction, and is required to make any corrections directed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction toobtain final approval.

3.06 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine elevator areas, with installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances,and other conditions affecting performance of elevator work. Examine hoistways, hoistway openings,pits, and machine rooms, as constructed; verify critical dimensions; and examine supporting structure andother conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Do not proceed with installation untilunsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. For the record, prepare a written report, endorsed by the installer, listing dimensional discrepancies andconditions detrimental to the performance of elevator work.

3.07 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. Comply with manufacturer’s instruction and recommendations.

B. Welded Construction: Where welded construction is used, comply with AWS standards for workmanshipand for qualifications of welding operators.

C. Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with work of other trades for proper time and sequence to avoidconstruction delays. Use established benchmarks, lines, and levels to ensure dimensional coordination ofthe Work.

D. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts designed toeffectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby, eliminate sources ofstructure-borne noise from elevator system.

E. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, if any, as recommended by manufacturers.


A. Acceptance Testing: Upon nominal completion of elevator installation, and before permitting use (eithertemporary or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASMEA17.1 and by the City of Syracuse.

B. Advise Owner, Architect/Engineer, and Authorities Having Jurisdiction in advance of dates and timesthat tests are to be performed on elevators.



3.09 DEMONSTRATION:

A. Instruct Owner’s personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of elevators. Reviewemergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of failure inoperation and other building emergencies. Train Owner’s personnel in procedures to follow inidentifying sources of operational failures or malfunctions. Confer with Owner on requirements for acomplete elevator maintenance program.

B. Make a final check of each elevator operation with Owner’s personnel present and just prior to date ofSubstantial Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly.

3.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE:

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Date First Elevator is Taken Out of Service, provide fullmaintenance service by skilled, competent employees of the elevator installer. Include monthlypreventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrications, cleaning,and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts andsupplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.

1. Perform maintenance, and callback service, during normal working hours.

2. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service.

a. Response Time: 2 hours or less.

3. Maintenance shall continue on all elevators until expiration of one (1) year warrantee period onlast elevator modernization.

3.11 “AS-BUILT” DRAWINGS:

A. The Contractor shall be required to prepare and submit a set of Division 14 “As-Built” Drawings as theportions of work are completed and prior to application for final payment.

B. The “As-Built” Drawings shall include a full set of the ‘as bid’ or ‘conformed’ Contract Drawings forDivision 14.

C. The submitted Drawings shall be in the form of full size as-bid first plus additional drawings andattachments following. The Drawings shall be clean, original paper copies of the Contract Drawings,marked up in red pencil or pen with the Contractor’s markups. For Floor Plans drawn at less than ¼"scale, the field drawings shall be expanded to ¼" scale to provide room for mark ups.

D. The Contractor shall maintain a dedicated set of Construction Drawings at a protected location at the jobsite for the continuous documentation for these as-builts. The Contractor shall record the actual installedlocations of equipment, wiring, conduit/pathway, etc. Record any and all variations from the originalConstruction Drawings in neat, legible, hand drawn lines and text. Attach copies of Contractor’s fieldsketches and note where they pertain.



E. Confirm that all information provided to the Contractor in the Form of Request for Information (RFI)responses, accepted Requests for Proposal (RFPs), Change Orders and Supplemental Instructions (Sis)are properly conveyed on the Drawings. Show the actual changes made, do not just paste a copy of theRFI, RFP, ASI, or CO unless that document includes a full scale drawing which accurately represents thework actually installed.

F. Confirm that the room names and numbers shown on the As-Built’s are the actual room numbers andnames posted on the rooms at the time of turn over.

G. Confirm that equipment schedules accurately depict any changes made during construction.

H. For work which becomes concealed as part of the project, keep an accurate record and show on “As-Built” Drawings the actual installed location of any concealed work such as conduit, piping, etc. Providelocation on Record Drawings for outside services by indicating actual dimensions from fixed referencepoints which will be available after completion of construction. “Tie” two (2) dimensions from differentreference points to confirm locations of concealed work.

I. For projects extending more than three months, provide the original “As-Built” to the Engineer as thework is completed on sections of the project and obtain a receipt from the Engineer. The Contractor shallbe responsible for the safe keeping and maintenance of the “As-Built” Drawings throughout construction,and for maintenance of one (1) photocopy at the Contractor’s office for a period of not less than three (3)years following final acceptance.

J. Provide the original copies of the “As-Built” Drawings to the Architect or Engineer in accordance withthe provisions of the General Conditions and Division 1. Unless reproducible “As-Built” Drawings arerequired under the General Condition and Division 1, provide the original paper copy of “As-Built”Drawings to the Engineer.

3.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION:

A. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals per Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures”. Submitreviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect/Engineer will comment on whether content of Operation and Maintenance submittals isacceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions andfield conditions.

B. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencingdemonstration and training. Architect/Engineer will comment on whether general scope and content ofmanual are acceptable.

C. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for SubstantialCompletion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will returncopy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect’s comments. Submit copies of eachcorrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect’s comments and prior to commencingdemonstration and training.



D. Comply with Section 01 77 00 “Closeout Procedures” for schedule for submitting Operation andMaintenance documentation.

E. Format of Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit manuals in the form of a single compositeelectronic PDF file.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanningof paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.“Recognize Text” shall be run on all scanned documents to provide a text searchable PDF.

F. Organization and Requirements for Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Unless otherwise indicated,organize each manual into the format as described below, and as indicated in Figure 1: O&M ManualDiagram, in Section 01 78 23.

1. Title Page: Indicate Building Name, Project Title and SU Project Number.2. Table of Contents: Hyperlinked bookmarked information with links to each CSI Master Format

specification section contained in manual.


a. Construction Manager or General Contractor.b. Subcontractor.c. Architect.d. Architect’s Subconsultants.

4. Project Warranties: Include the overall project warranty and hyperlinks to any special warrantiesincluded in equipment’s specification sections.

5. Operations and Maintenance Information: Operations and Maintenance information for everyCSI specification section included in project. Each section shall contain the final submittal thathas been updated to include any architectural remarks, any special Contractor or manufacturerwarranty associated with the equipment or system, the installation, Operations and Maintenancemanuals for each piece of equipment, including any accessory components, all test reports forsystems and equipment and parts list for each piece of equipment.

6. Include a typed guarantee from the Contractor with a 1 year guarantee stated as commencing onthe date of final acceptance.

7. The Contractor shall include a completed copy of the O&M Manual checklist which follows thissection as the last page of the O&M Manual.



DIVISION 14 SECTION 14 21 50 - GC/TRADE SUPPORT FOR ELEVATOR INSTALLATION PAGE 1


SECTION 14 21 50 - GC/TRADE SUPPORT FOR ELEVATOR INSTALLATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions andother Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SCOPE:

A. Provide where shown, all materials, labor, services, permits and related work, to provide elevatorhoistways, GC support, electrical, mechanical, fire protection and fire alarm support to enablecompletion of a complete, operating, tested, functioning, documented elevator system including all workshown, specified or required.

B. GC shall provide an on-site storage area for elevator equipment. Area shall be dry and enclosed withinbuilding. Space will provide rollable access to the elevator hoistway at ground level, adjacent to thehoistway.

C. If required by the GC, provide scaffolding from the base to the top of the hoistway to be used by the GCfor the construction of the hoistway, roof and closure walls. GC shall remove scaffolding prior to date ofturn-over to Elevator Contractor. (Elevator Contractor shall not require scaffolding.)

D. GC shall provide on-site refuse containers for disposal of elevator packing material and ElevatorContractor refuse.

E. GC shall provide cut-outs to accommodate elevator equipment and patching/painting of walls, floors orpartitions in the hoistway and control room.

F. GC shall provide guarding and protection of the public and workers from the project site and hoistwayduring construction. Elevator Contractor shall provide additional barricades for the protection of workerswhen Elevator Contractor is on site.

G. GC shall provide a permanent light fixture in each elevator pit together with GFCI outlet and outlet forappropriate switches.

H. GC shall provide enclosed Machine Room maintained at a temperature between 55EF and 95EF.

I. GC shall provide fire extinguisher in Machine Room. (Existing Reused)

J. GC shall provide illumination of the Machine Room.

K. GC shall provide a self-closing and self-locking door for Machine Room.

L. GC shall provide fire alarm system interface with suitable relays for Phase 1 and Phase 2 recall andcontact for fireman’s hat. (Existing Reused)


DIVISION 14 SECTION 14 21 50 - GC/TRADE SUPPORT FOR ELEVATOR INSTALLATION PAGE 2

M. GC shall provide shunt trip main circuit breakers at location designated by Elevator Contractor, withassociated wiring.

N. GC shall provide 208Y/120V, 3-phase circuits for machines and separate 120V, 1-phase circuits for carlights/fans. All circuits shall have full-sized ground conductor.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DELIVERY OF TOOLS, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:

A. The Contractor shall assume responsibility and all costs associated with the delivery and removal of allmaterials and equipment. The Contractor shall furnish all trucking, rigging, and transportation for allitems required to complete the project. In addition, the Contractor shall accept responsibility to protectthe grounds, building, and building contents during associated deliveries and removals.

3.02 BARRICADES:

A. Solid barricades shall completely enclose entrances to the shaft from the public and shall have a keyedlocked entrance on each floor. Each barricade shall completely contain all portions of the project for eachindividual landing to a height of not less than 8’-0” or to the ceiling. At no time shall the barricades beremoved prior to the installation of fully functional safety interlocks, and installation of walls. At no timeshall any entrance be left open to any elevator shaft. Contractor shall comply with any and allOccupational Safety and Health Standards for general industry (26 CFR 1911) and for the ConstructionIndustry (29 CFR 1926). Special attention shall be addressed to sections 1926.502 Personal Fall ArrestSystems and especially 1926.502(d)(ii) regarding work in Elevator Shafts by all persons working insidethe guarded areas. The Contractor shall be required to show documentation that each person who hasaccess to the elevator entrances has been trained in the proper use of personal fall protection. The Ownerreserves the right to require additional safety precautions at any time. A copy of the “Elevator IndustryField Employee’s Safety Handbook” shall be required on the site at all times and an additional copy shallbe provided to The Syracuse University Risk Management-Safety Department along with a job specificsafety program prior to the beginning of any work. Perform work at all times in accordance with theminimum requirements of the “Elevator Industry Field Employee’s Safety Handbook,” published byElevator World.

3.03 PROTECTION:

A. Temporary Use: Do not use elevator for construction purposes unless cars are provided with temporaryenclosures, either within finished cars or in place of finished cars, to protect finishes from damage.



DIVISION 14 SECTION 14 28 00 - ELEVATOR SYSTEM STARTUP & WITNESSED TESTING PAGE 1


SECTION 14 28 00 - ELEVATOR SYSTEM STARTUP & WITNESSED TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions andother Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SCOPE:

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Engineer’s pre-inspection elevator testing of building interfaces.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 WITNESSED TESTING:

A. At the completion of the elevator installation, prior to calling in for an elevator inspection, GC shallreview and complete the attached pre-inspection checklist. Once GC is satisfied that all work issuccessfully completed, the GC shall notify the Engineer and Owner that the elevator is complete andshall submit the attached completion certification to the Engineer, suitably signed. The Engineer andOwner shall arrange to be present on site to witness the elevator operation. The following operationsshall be verified:

1. Normal operation, including independent service.2. Card security functionality, if present.3. Operation on emergency power, including pre-transfer landing and emergency power indicator

light functionality, if present.4. Recall and fire service operation, including primary and secondary recall, fire fighters hat

functionality.5. Shunt trip operation.6. Emergency phone functionality.7. Remote elevator control panel functionality, if present.



Notice: This checklist reflects the most common issues encountered when performing an Engineer’s inspection.The Engineer’s inspection does not preclude the Contractor from obtaining an AHJ approved elevatorinspection. Violations not indicated below may appear during AHJ inspections. It is suggested that elevatorindustry personnel have access to a current set of applicable code books. The most common industry codebooks are: The ASME A17.1 Elevator Code 2013 Edition; The New York State 2017 Uniform CodeSupplement; NFPA 13 Sprinkler Code; NFPA 72 Fire Alarm Code; NFPA 70 National Electric Code.

Owner EngineerSU Campus Planning, Design & Construction1320 Jamesville AvenueSyracuse, NY 13244-5140Phone (315) 443-5321Fax (315) 443-4969

Peterson Guadagnolo Consulting Engineers PC476 East Brighton Ave

Syracuse, NY 13210Phone (315) 476-8311

Fax (315) 476-8305

Pre-Inspection Checklist for New Elevator Installations & Modernizations

Instructions:Check each box when the item is completed. Note any variances received from The City of Syracuse or NewYork State. Submit the completed form to the Engineer prior to scheduling Engineer’s inspection.

-In the Machine Room and/or Control Room � All non-elevator-related piping and equipment are prohibited from entering or passing through the machine room per ASME

A17.1 section 2.8.1.� Electrical disconnects must be lockable in the open position and properly located within sight of the elevator devices as

outlined in NFPA 70 section 620.51. All disconnects must be properly fused or utilize a non-self resetting circuit breaker.� A dedicated circuit with lockable fused disconnect is required to be located in the machine room serving the car lighting per

NFPA 70 section 620.22.� A dedicated circuit shall service machine room lighting and receptacles. Receptacles in the machine room shall have GFCI

protection by a GFCI-type receptacle NFPA 70 section 620.85. � Warning signs shall be posted when there is power from more than one source per NFPA 70 section 620.52 � Electrical clearances are to be provided and maintained in front of the controller and disconnect at all times. It is interpreted

that machine room doors that swing into the electrical clearance area endanger worker safety and are prohibited.� Machine rooms are to be properly lighted so the electrical control devices and machinery are well illuminated. The light

switch is to be located in the machine room and placed near the machine room door jamb per ASME A17.1 section 2.7.9.1.The required lighting shall not be connected to the load side of a GFCI per NFPA 70 section 620.23.

� All electrical equipment, controllers, and machines are to be properly installed and grounded per NFPA 70 section 620.81.All electrical conduits are to be properly secured and routed in a workmanlike manner.

� An “ABC” type fire extinguisher is required to be located in the room per ASME A17.1 section 8.6.1.6.5.� Holes around piping and structure penetrations in the machine room are to be properly filled and firestopped to maintain a fire

rated enclosure.� The machine room door is to be self-closing and self-locking per ASME A17.1 section 2.7.3.4. � The clear headroom in the machine room shall be not less than 7 feet per ASME A17.1 section 2.7.4.1.

� Machine rooms are to be vented and/or heated by mechanical or natural means to ensure proper operating temperatures of theequipment at all times per ASME A17. 1 section 2.7.9.2. If the elevator machine room is provided with standby power, themachine room HVAC shall be provided with standby power as well.

� Where sprinklers are provided in the elevator machine room, they shall be served by a dedicated branch line with non-retardable flow switch and control valve with tamper switch. Alternatively, a preaction sprinkler system may be installed. Ineither case, sprinkler activation in the machine room shall activate shunt trip operation.

� The circuit supplying the shunt trip device coil shall be served by emergency power, when available, and shall be monitoredfor power loss.

-In the Pit Area� A pit ladder is required with a handrail at least 42 inches above the landing. The ladder is to be non-combustible and located

near the jamb side of the hoistway door, the rungs are to have a clearance of not less than 4½ inches, spaced 12 inches apartand not less than 12 inches wide. See ASME A17.1 section 2.2.4.

� A pit stop switch is to be located adjacent to the pit ladder and 18 inches above the landing in order to be accessible beforestepping onto the pit ladder. A second pit stop switch is required when the pit exceeds 66" in depth.

� A light for the pit is to be located so as to provide adequate lighting for the area. The switch is to be near the stop switch. Thelight is to be guarded. See ASME A17.1 section 2.2.5. The required lighting shall not be connected to the load side of a GFCIper NFPA 70 section 620.24.

� A dedicated circuit shall service pit lighting and receptacles. A GFCI type receptacle is required in pits per NFPA 70 section620.85. When a sprinkler is present in the pit area, a weatherproof while-in-use cover is required. A single receptaclesupplying a permanently installed sump pump shall not require GFCI protection per NFPA 70 section 620.85.

� Sprinklers are required in the pits of hydraulic elevators and are to be served by a dedicated branch line with flow switch andcontrol valve with tamper switch. See NFPA 13 sections 8.15.5.1 and 8.15.5.2. Activation of sprinkler heads located not morethan 24" off the pit floor shall not activate shunt trip operation.

-In the Hoistway� All non-elevator-related piping and equipment are prohibited from entering or passing through the hoistway per ASME A17.1

section 2.8.1.� All offsets or ledges within the hoistway greater than four inches are to be tapered to not less than 75 degrees per ASME

A17.1 section 2.1.6.� In general, sprinklers are not required in elevator hoistways and shall be prohibited. Where sprinklers are required, they are to

be served by a dedicated branch line with non-retardable flow switch and control valve with tamper switch. Sprinkleractivation in the elevator shaft shall activate shunt trip operation.

� Hoistway ventilation, if required, shall be activated by fire alarm initiating devices (smoke detectors/heat detectors) at eachlobby. The circuit supplying the hoistway ventilation system (damper, hatch, etc) shall be served by emergency power, whenavailable, and shall be monitored for power loss unless the system is arranged to fail open upon loss of power.

-General, Operations, and Building Interface� A hands-free emergency phone shall be provided in the elevator car and shall ring to the Syracuse University Department of

Public Safety.� Fire alarm initiating devices must be properly located in each elevator lobby and in the machine room. Activation of these

devices shall initiate primary or alternate recall, as required.� Smoke detectors and heat detectors are required in the hoistway when a sprinkler head is located in the hoistway. See ASME

A17.1 section 2.27.3.2 & NFPA 72. Fire alarm initiating devices in the machine room or hoistway, if provided, shall initiateprimary or alternate recall shall cause the visual signal in the car to illuminate intermittently per ASME A17.1 section2.27.3.2.

� Fire alarm initiating devices shall not active shunt trip. Shunt trip shall only be activated by flow switch on branch linesserving machine room and hoistway (if provided).

� In general, glass is prohibited in elevator cars and hoistways.� If card access security is provided, activation of recall and/or fire service shall bypass all lockouts and restrictions.� If elevator machine is provided with standby power, the elevator shall be interlocked with the transfer switch feeding the

elevator such that when the elevator is operating on emergency power, an indicator is lit at the primary recall floor. SeeASME A17.1 section 2.27.2.3. Additionally, the elevator shall move to the nearest floor and open its doors prior to transferswitch operation.

� Loss of power to a group of elevators provided with emergency power shall cause sequential recall of elevators. Operation ofelevators on emergency power shall be determined by position of generator selector switch.

� If provided, remote elevator control panel shall be provided with position indicator, fire service switch, and generator selectorswitch, if required. Fire service switch at remote elevator control panel shall be On-Off only.

� Illumination at the landing sill shall be not less than 10 footcandles per ASME A17.1 section 2.11.10.2.

� All signage required by NFPA 70 and ASME A17.1 must be properly installed including the following examples: code dataplates, fire service instructions, emergency identification numbering, hoistway door floor numbers, rope data tags, in-carcapacity tags, crosshead data tags, governor rope data tags, full-load working pressures, and governor tripping speeds.

I certify that the above items have been verified and found to be in proper working order for the followingelevator(s).

Elevator(s): __________________________________________________________Certified by: Print Name: __________________ Signature:__________________ Company: ________________________________________________________Date: _______________________ Phone: ____________________

Remarks:

DIVISION 23 SECTION 23 00 00 - HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 1

DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING

SECTION 23 00 00 - HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for Division 23 - Heating,Ventilating and Air Conditioning work.

1.02 DIVISION 23 - DESCRIPTION:

A. The technical specifications of this Contract are arranged for the convenience of the Owner andContractor into Divisions of work. The work of Division 23 - HVAC, is further described inSpecification Sections of the 23 00 00 Series and on Contract Drawings of the “M” series.

B. The organization of this work into Divisions shall not relieve the Prime Contractor from providing all ofthe work shown on the complete set of drawings or specified in the complete set of Specifications,whether or not the individual subcontractors correctly identify their respective responsibilities.

1.03 OTHER DIVISION SPECIFICATIONS APPLICABLE TO THIS WORK:

A. The Work of Section 23 05 00 - HVAC Basic Materials and Methods applies to the work on this Section.

B. To the extent that the work of this Division or Contract includes the work of other trades, the Contractorfor this Division shall adhere to the requirements of other specification sections. All GeneralConstruction work shall be performed in accordance with the provisions of the appropriate Division 01through Division 19 Section. All electrical work shall be performed in accordance with appropriateDivision 26 Sections.

C. The work of Division 25 - Integrated Automation and Control (IAC) shall be performed by OrangeAutomation. Integrated Automation work shall be directly contracted by the Owner. The HVACContractor shall coordinate with Orange Automation.

1.04 WORK INCLUDED:

The work of this Division shall include providing all materials, labor, services, permits and related workto furnish a complete, operating, tested, functioning, documented HVAC System including all workshown, specified or required for proper system operation including but not limited to the following:

A. Provide HVAC Basic Materials and Methods. (Section 23 00 00)

B. Provide HVAC Insulation. (Section 23 07 00)

C. Provide HVAC Ducts and Casings. (Section 23 31 00)

D. Provide HVAC Air Inlets & Outlets. (Section 23 37 00)

E. Provide Split System Air Conditioners. (Section 23 62 00)



F. Provide Firestopping and Smokestopping for HVAC Systems. (Section 23 84 00)

G. Provide demolition and removal of existing equipment, ductwork and piping where shown, removal of alldebris from site and proper disposal of same.

H. Provide revision of ductwork and provide new ductwork as shown on Mechanical Drawings. Provideliner and flexible ductwork as shown or required.

I. Provide phased work to meet the project schedule and allow re-occupancy of access as needed.

J. Provide and install new diffusers, registers and grilles.

K. Provide maintenance of system in good condition until final acceptance.

L. Provide openings in existing and new construction as required for the work of this division.

M. Patch openings in existing and new construction caused by removals or rework by this division.

N. Provide submittals for the work of this division. As a minimum, provide submittals for all itemsidentified in the respective sections. Do not submit full catalogs. Submit project specific items.

O. Provide Owner’s Operation Instruction.

P. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals in the form of a single composite electronic PDF file.

Q. Provide Warranty.

R. Provide “As-Built” Drawings.

1.05 WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

A. The work of Temperature Control (Division 25 - Integrated Automation) shall be provided by the Ownerbut is specified in Division 25. Refer to Specification Section 23 09 00 for installation of IAC furnishedvalves, dampers and equipment.

1.06 RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX:

A. The following attached table lists the responsibilities of the various subcontractors required by theseSpecifications.

1.07 SPECIAL CHARACTER OF SADLER HALL:

A. The highest degree of quality of materials and professionalism of workmanship is required for the HVACSystem.

B. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain a worker instruction and quality monitoring campaignthroughout the duration of the project directed at enlisting each worker in maintaining the highest qualityof work and the maximum protection of the existing and proposed facilities from unintentional,neglectful or intentional damage and to provide the best possible HVAC system for the building andequipment.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Provide products as specified in Division 23.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Conform to Division 23 Specifications for installation and execution of work.

ATTACHMENT(S): Responsibility Matrix



THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

Category Device Furnished By Installed By Power WiringControl

Wiring

Fire

Alarm

Wiring

Notes

Life Safety Devices:Duct Smoke Detectors Div. 26

Div. 23/ Div.

26N/A N/A Div. 26

Smoke Dampers Div. 23 Div. 23 N/A N/A Div. 26

Smoke Damper Acuators Div. 23 Div. 23 N/A N/A Div. 26

Smoke Control Dampers and Fire/Smoke

Damper ActuatorsDiv. 23 Div. 23 Div. 26 N/A Div. 26

Div. 26 is responsible for

bringing all end switches to a

common and convenient

location for monitoring by Div

25.

Hazardous Gas Detectors (CO, NOx, Natural

Gas etc.)Div. 26 Div. 26 Div. 26 Div. 26 Div. 26

Refrigerant Monitors and associated

controls, dampers and actuators.Div. 23 Div. 23 Div. 26 Div. 26 Div. 26

Air Terminals: Supply/Exhaust Air & Fume Hood Valves Div. 23 Div. 23 Div. 25 Div. 25 NADiv. 26 to power fan/electric

reheat.

VAV Boxes Div. 23 Div. 23 Div. 25 Div. 25 NADiv. 26 to power fan/electric

reheat.

Meters:Building Steam and Building Chilled Water

MetersOwner Div. 23 Div. 26 Div. 26 N/A Refer to specific details

Electric Meters (Non-Utility Div. 26 Div. 26 Div. 26 Div.26 N/AConfiguration and software

integration by Div. 25.

Gas Meters (Non-Utility) Div. 22 Div. 22 Div. 25 Div. 25 N/A

Water Meters (Non-Utility) Div. 22 Div. 22 Div. 25 Div. 25 N/A

Controllers: Network Controllers Div. 25 Div. 25 Div. 25 Div.25 NA

Application Specific Controllers Div. 25 Div. 25 Div. 25 Div. 25 N/A

Valves: Hydronic Valves/Actuators Div. 25 Div. 23 Div. 25 Div. 25 N/ADiv. 25 to field mount

actuators when required.

Heat Pump Solenoid Valves Div. 23 Div. 23 Div. 23 Div. 23 N/AValve shall be specified with

heat pump package.

Steam Valves Div. 23 Div. 23 Div. 25 Div. 25 N/ADiv. 23 provide pneumatic

connection when required.

RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX Page 1 of 3 JUNE 17, 2019


Wiring

Fire

Alarm

Wiring

Notes

Pneumatic Systems: Control Air Compressor Div. 23 Div. 23 Div. 26 N/A N/A

Control Tubing, Regulators, Accessories Div. 23 Div. 23

Pneumatic Air Dryer Div. 23 Div. 23 Div. 26 N/A N/A

Motor Controls: Motor Starters Div. 26 Div. 26 Div. 26 Div. 25 Div. 26

Variable Frequency Drives Div. 23 Div. 26 Div. 26 Div. 25 Div. 26

Sensors and

Accessories:

Sensors (Temperature, Humidity, CO2,

Water Pressure, Air Pressure)Div. 25 Div. 25 N/A Div. 25 N/A

Wells for temperature sensor Div. 25 Div. 23 N/A Div. 25 N/ADiv. 23 to provide tap or

weldolet, etc. as req'd.

Taps for Pressure Sensors Div. 23 Div. 23 N/A N/A N/A

Air flow/Water flow stations (unrelated to

building meters)Div. 25 Div. 23 N/A Div. 25 N/A

Airflow Stations integral to equipment

(Piezometer, Flow Ring)Div. 23 Div. 23 N/A Div. 25 N/A

Div. 25 to provide differential

pressure sensor.

Current Sensors Div. 25 Div. 25 N/A Div. 25 N/A

End switches Div. 25 Div. 25 N/A Div. 25 N/A

Dampers: Control Dampers and Linkages Div. 23 Div. 23 N/A N/A N/A

Damper Actuators Div. 25 Div. 25 N/A Div. 25 N/A

Door Hardware: Locks, Strikes, Electric Hinges Div. 8 Div. 8 Div. 26 Div. 26 N/A

Panic Hardware/Magnetic Locks Div. 8 Div. 8 Div. 26 Div. 26Div. 26/

Div.28

Wiring Diagrams Div. 8 N/A N/A N/A

ADA Buttons Div. 8 Div. 8 Div. 26 Div. 25 N/A Div. 26 provide pathways.

Door Operators Div. 8 Div. 8 Div. 26 Div. 25Div. 26/

Div. 28

Div. 26 to provide pathways,

Div. 8 to provide

programming.

Chexit Div. 8 Div. 8 Div.26 Div. 26Div. 26/

Div. 28



Wiring

Fire

Alarm

Wiring

Notes

Security: Door Contacts/Card Readers Div. 25 Div. 25 N/A Div. 25 N/A Div. 26 to provide pathways

Panels with Controllers Div. 25 Div. 25 Div. 25 Div. 25 N/A

Rexx devices if not in crashbar Div. 25 Div. 25 Div. 25 Div. 25 N/A

Rexx devices if in crashbar Div. 8 Div. 8 Div. 26 Div. 25 N/A


DIVISION 23 SECTION 23 05 00 - HVAC BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PAGE 1

DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

SECTION 23 05 00 - HVAC BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DIVISION 23 – DESCRIPTION:

A. The Technical Specifications of this Contract are arranged for the convenience of the Owner andContractor into divisions of work. The Work of Division 23, HVAC, is further described in SpecificationSections of the 23 00 00 Series and Contract Drawings of the M series.

B. The organization of this Work into Divisions shall not relieve the Prime Contractor from providing all ofthe work shown on the complete set of Drawings or specified in the complete set of Specifications,whether or not the individual subcontractors correctly identify their respective responsibilities.


A. To the extent that the Work of this Division or Contract includes the work of other trades, the Contractorfor this division shall adhere to the requirements of other Specification Sections. All GeneralConstruction work shall be performed in accordance with the provisions of the appropriate Division 1through Division 19 Sections.

1.03 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Provide Mechanical Basic Materials and Methods.

B. Provide Dielectric Pipe Fittings/Unions.

C. Provide Escutcheons.

D. Provide Fire Wall Sealant.

E. Provide Hangers, Riser Clamps, Attachments and Rods.

F. Provide Identification Systems.

G. Provide Pipe and Fittings.

H. Provide Delivery, Storage and Protection of Equipment and Materials.

I. Provide Sleeves.

J. Provide Valves.

K. Provide Piping Layout Coordination.

L. Provide Miscellaneous Painting.

M. Provide Equipment Installation.



N. Provide Noise and Vibration Free Installation.

O. Provide Adjustment and Initial Lubrication.

P. Provide Maintenance of systems in good condition until final acceptance.

Q. Provide Permits and Inspections.

R. Provide As-Built Drawings.

S. Provide One (1) Year Warranty.


A. Division 23 shall be responsible to apply for, obtain and meet the requirements of all permits andinspections required by authorities having jurisdiction for the work of Division 23. Division 23 shall payall fees associated with these permits and inspections.


A. Division 23 shall conform with all Federal, State, County, and Municipal Laws, Ordinances andRegulations. Comply with the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).

1.06 CONTRACTOR EXAMINATION OF THE SITE:

A. It shall be the responsibility of each prospective Contractor to visit the project site and to examineexisting conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible to include under this Division all effort,materials, supplies, temporary installations and other work to relocate, remove or modify existing workas required to complete the work of this Division.

1.07 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS:

A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to examine the complete project documents including Plansand Specifications thoroughly prior to bid and to notify the Architect/Engineer of any uncertainties orapparent omission, conflicts, or discrepancies between the Plans and Specifications. In any case of aconflict between the Plans and Specifications or between two Specification sections it shall be assumedthat the larger capacity or quantity, or higher quality, shall govern until a determination can be made bythe Architect/Engineer.

B. Plans and Specifications are of abbreviated form. Omitted words or phrases shall be inferred.

C. Plans and Specifications are complementary. Provide all work which is either shown or specified or both.

D. Where provided on the Drawings, typical details shall be assumed to be applied to each installation of theequipment whether or not specifically identified at each point in the Plans.

E. The Division 23 Contractor shall assume that all work on the Mechanical Drawings is included in hiswork unless specifically noted otherwise.



1.08 DEFINITIONS

Where used in the Plans and Specifications the following words and corresponding definitions shall apply:

A. Provide- Contractor shall supply, install, start-up, and maintain until final acceptance.

B. Furnish - Submit, receive approval, purchase and turn over. Do not include the costs to install if furnishonly is indicated. Include one year guarantee on material furnished.

C. New- Work occurring as part of this Project, usually employed on a drawing to distinguish from existingwork. All work shown on the Drawings shall be assumed to be new unless specifically identified asexisting.

D. Exist - Existing work.

E. Shown - Shown on the Plans.

F. Specified - Specified on the Technical Specifications.

G. HV - The Contractor performing the Division 23 - Heating and Ventilation work. In the Plans andSpecifications, the words “By Div 23” and “By HV” or “By H&V” shall be considered synonymous.

H. Elect or EC - the Contractor performing the Division 26 work. In the Plans and Specifications, the wordsDiv 26”, “By EC” and “By Elect” shall be considered synonymous.

I. Plumb or Plumbing or - Plg - The Contractor performing the Division 22 - Plumbing work. In the Plansand Specifications, the words “By Plumb” or “By Plumbing” or “By Plg” shall be consideredsynonymous.

J. FP - The Contractor performing the Division 21 - Fire Protection. In the Plans and Specifications, thewords “By Div 21 – FP” or “By FP” shall be considered synonymous.


A. Electrical connections by Electrical Contractor specifically shown in their Contract. The Division 26Contractor is responsible only for the electrical connections included under Division 26 and theElectrical Drawings. Division 23 Contractor shall provide all other electrical work necessary forsatisfactory operation of equipment furnished under Division 23.

1.10 REGULATIONS GOVERNING ASBESTOS:

A. If any material which appears to possibly contain asbestos is encountered, the Contractor shall notify theProject Manager and the Architect/Engineer and shall take steps to stop work in the immediate area andprotect workers and the public from exposure. See Division 1.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCESS DOORS:

A. Cast Brass: Rough finish escutcheons shall be of cast brass construction, solid type with set screw.CS&B No. 13 or equal by Grinnell, Elcen.

B. Chrome Plated: Chrome plated escutcheons shall be of cast brass construction with polished chromeplated finish, split type with springs, CS&B Cadwell No. 40, or equal by Grinnell, Elcen.

2.02 GASKETS:

A. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21 raised-face steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated.

B. All gaskets to be made with non-asbestos materials.

C. Gaskets for Condensate and Water Service shall be standard non-asbestos composition gaskets asrecommended by valve manufacturer.

2.03 BALANCING VALVE:

A. Description: Y pattern, globe style balance valve with handwheel positioning, and vernier or numericposition readout. 100% positive leakproof shutoff. Hidden memory stop.

B. Threaded or soldered bronze body – Sizes ½" – 2".

C. Cast-iron body flanged for size 2½" – 6".

D. Sizing table: Provide valves sized according to the table below to provide a pressure drop of 2 ft wg infull open position:

GPM Flow Size Connection

0-4.1 ½" Sweat or Thread

4.2-6.0 ¾" Sweat or Thread

6.1-8.2 1" Sweat or Thread

8.3-20 1¼" Sweat or Thread

20.1-29 1½ " Sweat or Thread

29.1-40 2" Sweat or Thread

40.1-102 2½ " Flanged

102.1-125 3" Flanged

125.1-210 4" Flanged

210-300 5" Flanged

300.1-430 6" Flanged



E. Manufacturer: Tour Anderson.

2.04 DIELECTRIC PIPE FITTINGS/UNIONS:

A. Construction: Fittings and unions to be rated at 250 PSI at 180EF and be designed to meet therequirements of ANSI B16.39, including hydrostatic strength, tensile strength and air pressure testing.All pipe threads to be in accordance with ANSI B2.1 and solder joints to meet national plumbingstandards.

B. Make: Watts No. 3001-3008 and 3110-3200, or equal by Epco, Eclipse.

2.05 FIRE WALL SEALANT:

A. Intumescent, hand moldable putty.

B. Make: 3M Fire Barrier Moldable Putty or equal by Flamesafe, Dow Corning.

2.06 HANGERS, RISER CLAMPS, ATTACHMENTS AND RODS:

A. Hangers:

1. Regular: Adjustable clevis type, black steel construction, Carpenter and Paterson Fig. 100. Type1, PHD Fig. 451, or equal by M-Co.

2. With Insulation Shield: Adjustable clevis type, black steel construction, galvanized steel saddlewelded to lower strap, Carpenter and Paterson Fig. 100SH. Type 1 plus Type 40, PHD Fig. 170,or equal by M-Co.

B. Riser Clamps:

1. Riser clamps shall be of steel construction, two-piece type, Carpenter and Paterson Fig 126. Type42, PHD Fig 550, or equal by M-Co.

C. Attachments:

1. C-Clamps: Clamps shall be of steel construction with locking nut Carpenter and Paterson Fig. 47clamp. Type 23, PHD Fig 250, or equal by M-Co.

D. Beam Clamps: Beam clamp shall be of malleable iron construction, Carpenter and Paterson Fig. 15.Center Beam Type 21, or equal by M-Co, PHD.

E. Hanger Rod:

1. Hanger rod shall be steel, full threaded type, Carpenter and Paterson Fig. 94 or machine threadeye rod, Fig. 33, or equal by M-Co.



2. Rods:

Pipe Sizes Rod DiameterUp to 2" d"2½" to 3" ½"4" and 5" e"6" ¾"8" to 12" f"

F. Floor Supports:

1. Floor support hanger devices shall not be used.

G. Wall Hangers:

1. Angle iron or unistrut type wall brackets shall not be used.

2.07 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS:

A. Equipment Labels:

1. Small: Labels shall be adhesive backed plastic tape with embossed letters in contrasting color.Tape shall be d" wide.

2. Large: Labels shall be adhesive backed plastic tape with embossed letters in contrasting color.Tape shall be ¾" wide.

3. Make: Seton Name Plate Company.

B. Piping Markers:

1. Pipe markers shall be adhesive type indicating pipe contents and sizes on a colored backgroundconforming to American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard A13.1.

a. Hot water - yellow with black lettering.b. Chilled water - green with white lettering.c. Steam - yellow with black lettering.d. Condensate - yellow with black lettering.e. Condenser water - green with white lettering. f. Glycol hot water - yellow with black lettering.

2. Make: Seton Name Plate Company - Setmark, or equal by Dover, Brady.

C. Valve Tags:

1. Tags: Tags shall be 1¾" x 3¼" laminated with two 0.020" thick plastic sheets with matte finishand with a brass eyelet in the corner. Typed information shall include appropriate alphanumericcode (prefixed with the letter “H” for heating etc.), system designation, the fluid in the pipe, andsize and function of the valve.

2. Make: Dover Enterprises, Syracuse, NY, phone: (315) 446-1550 or approved equal by SetonName Plate Company or others.



D. Ceiling Markers:

1. Provide d" diameter, round, colored sticker on ceiling grid t-bar to indicate locations of HVACequipment and valves. Coordinate colors with SU Fix-It.

2.08 SLEEVE:

A. Sheet Metal Sleeves: 10 gauge, galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Sleeves: Schedule 40 galvanized, welded steel pipe, ASTM A53, Grade A.

C. Sleeves are to be tack welded in each quadrant and caulked.

2.09 STRAINERS:

A. Cast-iron strainer rated for 40 psig and 340EF low pressure steam. Spirax/Sarco cast-iron Model CI-125,Keckley Style “A”, or approved equal. Provide nipple and cap.

B. Cast steel strainer rated for 125 psig and 500EF. Spirax/Sarco 150# flanged Model SLF, Keckley Style“SA” or approved equal. Provide nipple and cap.

C. Bronze strainer, stainless steel mesh, Spirax/Sarco Model TBT, Keckley Style “E” or approved equal,with sweat tubing connections. Provide bronze strainer and plug.

2.10 PIPE:

A. Copper Pipe:

1. Type:

a. Type L, ASTM B 88.b. Type ACR, ASTM B 280.

2. Fittings: Wrought or cast solder type pressure fittings.



3. Make: Anaconda or equal by Mueller, Revere.

4. Unions:

a. Description: Cast brass with solder ends. Working pressure: 200 PSI W.O.G.b. Make: Nibco or equal by Mueller, Revere.

5. Solder and Flux:

a. Solder shall be in solid wire form of Type II 95-5 tin antimony solder conforming toASTM B-32, Grade 5A. Flux shall be zinc chloride or a mixture or zinc and ammoniumchlorides. Solders containing lead shall not be used. 96.5-3.5 and 95-5 tin/silver soldersmay be used.

b. Make: Silverbrite or equal.

B. Steel Pipe:

1. Schedule 40 weight, seamless black finish, ASTM A-53.

a. 37½E beveled ends for welding.b. Threaded ends.

2. Schedule 80 weight, seamless black finish, ASTM A-53.3. Electric Resistance Welded (ERW) pipe may be substituted only for hydronic heating and

cooling systems.4. Schedule 40 weight, seamless, black finish, ASTM A-106 (high temperature) for steam lines

above 50 psig.5. All steel pipe shall be of United States or Canadian manufacture and shall be stamped with the

country of origin.

6. Fittings:

a. Welded Fittings: factory forged, seamless construction, butt weld type, 37½E beveledends. Where branch connections are two sizes or more smaller than main size, use of“Weldolets”, “Threadolets” or “Sockolets” is acceptable, if welded per manufacturer’sinstruction. Mitered elbows, “shaped” nipples, and job fabricated reductions notacceptable unless specifically called for.

7. All weld fittings are to be of North American manufacture and shall be marked with country oforigin.

C. Miscellaneous Piping Material/Products:

1. Welding Materials: except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials to comply withinstallation requirements.

a. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for WeldingMaterials.

2. Gaskets for flanged joints: ANSI B16.20 raised-face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated.



3. All gaskets to be made with non-asbestos material.

4. Bolts: hex head machine bolts and nuts.

a. Condensate: Carbon Steel, ASTM A307-Grade B bolts, ASTM A 563-Grade nuts.b. Steam, Hot Water, Chilled Water: Carbon alloy steel SAE 429-Grade 5 bolts.

5. Pipe Thread Sealant: Loctite 567 PST or Loctite 592 PST.

2.11 VALVES:

A. Gate Valves:

1. Cast-iron, 125 psig, 340EF. Make: Stockham class 125 iron gate valve, figure G624.2. Cast steel, 125 psig, 500EF. Make: Stockham class 125 cast steel gate valve, Model 1822.

B. Ball Valves:

1. Two Piece: Full port (¼" through 1"), conventional port (1¼" through 2"), brass or bronze body,stainless steel ball, 150 psig sat. Steam, 600 psig W.O.G., two piece construction, blow-out profstem, removable operation handle screwed: Design Valve: threaded ends, Nibco Fig.T-585-70-66, soldered ends; Nibco Fig. S-585-70-66, Jamesbury.

2. Union End: Bronze body, chromium plated brass ball, single union end with O ring seal, 150 psigsat. Steam, 600 psig W.O.G., blow-out proof stem, removable operation handle, soldered ends,Design valve; Apollo, Fig. 70-403.

3. Drain Valves: Bronze ball valve with hose end thread, vacuum breaker and cap. Make: Apollo78-200 series with dust cover and chain, with Watts 8A vacuum breaker.

C. Butterfly Valves:

1. Butterfly valves for general use with line sizes 2½" and larger. Bubble tight shut off rating: 175psi, ANSI class 125 wafer body type butterfly valve with epoxy coated cast iron body, aluminumbronze disc. 304 S.S. stem and EPDM interchangeable valve seat. Gear operator with handwheel. Bray series 30, Jamesbury, Lunkenheimer or Contramatics.

D. Check Valves, Domestic Water System:

1. Bronze body, Class 125 swing check valve.2. Stockham Model B-309 with solder ends.3. Stockham Model B-319 with threaded ends.

E. Ball Valves, (Small):

1. d" and ½" screwed, with lever operator unless otherwise specified. Steam and Condensate: Fullport carbon steel body ball valve with modified Teflon seats and 316 stainless steel ball and trimsuitable for 800 psi at 500EF (21-2236MT) Jamesbury “Clincher.”




A. All equipment, materials and products furnished shall be new unless specifically shown to be reused. Allmaterials shall be new and of the best quality of their respective kinds. The work when completed will beaccepted in an undamaged and perfect condition only. Where equipment, materials and products are usedfor the same purpose, they shall be provided by the same manufacturer.


A. All equipment, materials and products shall conform to the applicable ANSI, ASA, NFPA, UL, AGAand/or ARI standard. All electrical equipment shall be UL or ETL Listed.

2.14 WARRANTY:

A. Provide one year manufacturer’s warranty on all equipment, materials and products. Where shown orspecified, provide manufacturer’s extended warranty.

2.15 SUBSTITUTIONS FOR SPECIFIED EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS:

A. Design Equipment - The design of this Project is based upon the use of the specified equipment materialsand products. The Plans are prepared on the basis of the arrangement, size, capacity and characteristics ofthe design equipment.

B. Specified Alternate Equipment - In the event the Contractor elects to use equipment named as analternate manufacturer herein, the Contractor shall verify that the equipment is of the same capacity,arrangement, size and characteristics as the design equipment and shall make all incidental changes in hiswork and coordinate and pay for any changes in work made necessary by deviations from the designcapacity, arrangement, size and characteristics of the alternate manufacturer’s equipment.

C. Substitutions of Unspecified Equipment, Products and Materials - Unspecified equipment, products andmaterials may be added to the List of Specified Alternate Equipment, Products and Materials at therequest of any bidder by written application at least five (5) days prior to the bid date.

D. Addition of an unspecified equipment product of material to the List of Alternate Manufacturers willoccur at the determination of the Engineer if there is sufficient time to review the proposed substitutionprior to bid date and to issue addenda to all Contractors. In no case will substitutions be approved toindividual bidders. Substitution requests will not be acted upon within the last five (5) days prior to biddate.

E. Addition of unspecified equipment, products and materials to the List of Alternate Manufacturers doesnot relieve the Contractor from his obligation described in subparagraph B to verify that the equipment isof the same arrangement, capacity, size and characteristics and to pay for any modifications required inhis and other Contractors’ work made necessary by the use of this equipment.

F. By submission of his bid for this Project, the Contractor acknowledges the authority and prerogative ofthe Engineer and Owner to evaluate proposed substitutions as to suitability for the Project and theContractor agrees to abide by the Engineer’s decision if unspecified equipment, products and material aredisallowed by the Engineer.



2.16 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION:



C. All materials shall be properly protected from weather, damage and theft. The contractor shall beresponsible for the proper care and protection of all materials, equipment, etc., on site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. All work shall be executed in accord with recognized standards of workmanship. All work shall beinstalled in a neat and orderly manner. If, in the judgment of the Engineer, the workmanship is notacceptable, the work in question is to be removed and reinstalled in a manner satisfactory to theEngineer.

B. Furnish at site during construction a competent and experienced foreman. He/she shall have completecharge of all field work of this Contract. He/she shall be authorized to act for the Contractor in his/herabsence, and to represent the Contractor with the Engineer or Owner. The Project foreman shall not bechanged during the Project except for single day occurrences for personal needs. It is essential that thesame foreman be provided for the duration of the Project to maintain continuity on the job site. TheOwner shall view any departure from this requirement by the Contractor as an indication of theContractor’s unwillingness to meet the needs of the Owner.

C. The project foreman shall be present at site whenever any Contractor or subcontractor employees areworking at the site. In the event of absence by the project foreman, the Prime Contractor shall designatean Assistant Foreman and advise the Owner and Engineer of the designated individual’s name. TheAssistant Foreman shall have been working on the site for a minimum of five (5) working days prior tobeing designated acting foreman and shall be designated at least two (2) working days prior to becomingacting foreman.

D. All personnel employed by or subcontracted by the Contractor shall at all times be suitably clothed andshall conduct themselves in a professional manner. Shirts shall be worn at all times. Any employee foundto have been making gestures or harassing remarks to the staff, students or general public shall bedisciplined by the Contractor and removed from the site.


3.02 SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION:

A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for compliance with all applicable safety and healthregulations including, but not limited to, U.S. Department of Labor Safety and Health Regulations forConstruction. Construction employees are required to comply with the most stringent rule or standard inthe event of dual or concurrent State and Federal jurisdiction. Detailed information on this subject maybe obtained from the Office of Information Services, Occupational Safety and Health Administration,U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, D.C. 20210.



B. No obstructions are to be placed on or around fire hydrants or fire department connections that couldmake them inaccessible or inoperative for fire fighting purposes.

C. All temporary construction sheds, trailers, and flammable liquid storage areas belonging to Contractorsshall be so placed on the construction site to minimize any danger to Owner’s property and the public.Construction trailers and sheds shall require the pre-approval of the Owner.

D. Conduct of the work shall be such that pestilence does not occur. To prevent influx of rats, vermin andother pestilence, the Contractor shall retain an approved exterminating firm until such time that thedanger of pestilence has passed as approved by the Engineer. Contractor shall remove all garbage andtrash from the site daily.

3.03 FIRE SAFETY:

A. Fire Watch: Provide a fire watch wherever welding, brazing, cutting or other processes involving an openflame or potential for generating sparks is used. Fire watch shall consist of a person with a 10 poundcarbon dioxide fire extinguisher. While on fire watch, the person so assigned shall have no other dutiesor assignments.

B. Fire Blanket: In addition to providing a fire watch, have available an approved fire blanket to cover anycombustible materials in the immediate area.

3.04 INSPECTIONS:

A. The Engineer or Owner may visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction according tothe General Conditions. The periodic observation or inspection of the general project progress shall notbe construed as supervision of actual construction, nor make the Engineer or Owner responsible forproviding a safe place for performance of work by the Contractors or Contractor’s employees or those ofsuppliers of Contractors or for access, visits, use, work, travel or occupancy by any person.

3.05 SUBMITTAL:

A. Type - Provide Submittals for materials and equipment including product data of Shop Drawings,Coordination Drawings and Samples as scheduled in respective Sections of this Division. All ShopDrawings shall be submitted electronically through the Prime Contractor.

B. Contractor Verification of Appropriateness of Submittal - The Contractor shall personally verify that theproducts depicted on the submittal are in conformance with the Contract and that the capacity andquantities are accurate. The Contractor shall thoroughly verify sizes, dimensions and connectionrequirements. The Contractor shall then mark the Project Name, the Date, the Contractor firm name, thewords “Checked for Compliance” and signature of the Contractor employee.

C. Submittals which have not been checked and marked by this Division Contractor (and by the GeneralContractor if this Division Contractor is a subcontractor) will not be reviewed by the Engineer.



D. Product Data - Provide submittals of product data for each product to be utilized on the Project.Submittals for equipment shall include detailed and dimensional literature and catalog data showingdetailed compliance with the Contract documents. Submittals shall include a copy of the manufacturer’sprinted installation instructions for the equipment proposed. Submittals for electrically energizedequipment shall show all electrical characteristics and inter-connection requirements. Where the productdata shows products and materials of different sizes, the Contractor shall circle, arrow or otherwisedesignate the specific equipment for this project. Submittals not so designated or full product linecatalogs will be rejected.

E. Engineer’s Review of Shop Drawings - The Engineer’s review of Shop Drawings signifies only that suchdrawings appear to be in substantial conformity with the Contract drawings and Specifications. Such areview does not relieve the Contractor from complying with the Plans and Specifications. The Engineershall not verify quantities nor shall he indicate approval of every detail on the submittal nor acceptanceof any omission.

3.06 MARKING OF SUBMITTALS:

The Engineer shall return copies of the Submittals marked as follows:

A. “Returned Not Reviewed” - Submittals did not meet the requirements for Contractor verification or didnot have submittal properly designated as identified in the previous paragraph. Material is returned toContractor. Resubmittal is required.

B. “Reviewed for General Compliance Only - No Exception Taken” - Submittals bearing this comment havebeen found to be generally in conformance with the intent of the Plans and Specifications.

C. “Reviewed for General Compliance Only - Make Corrections Noted” - Submittals bearing this commenthave been found to be generally in conformance with the intent of the Plans and Specifications, with theexception of the noted items. A resubmittal to the Engineer is not required and it is understood theContractor will make the noted corrections.

D. “Reviewed for General Compliance Only - Revise and Resubmit” - Submittals bearing this commenthave been found to contain a substantial departure from the Plans and Specifications. The Contractormust make a new corrected submittal.

E. “Reviewed for General Compliance Only - Rejected” - Submittals bearing this comment depict materials,equipment or supplies which are not judged by the Engineer to meet the requirements of the Plans andSpecifications. The Contractor shall provide a new submittal on alternative equipment.

3.07 SAMPLES:

A. The Contractor shall, when required, submit to the Engineer for review, typical samples of materialsequipment and products. The Samples shall be properly identified by tag, and shall be submittedsufficiently in advance of the time when they are to be incorporated into the work so that rejectionthereof will not cause delay.




A. In the case where any manufactured article, material, or equipment is specified, then the Contractor mustinstall, apply, connect, erect, use, clean and condition it in strict accordance with the manufacturer’sdirections.

3.09 SLEEVES, INSETS AND OPENINGS:

A. Provide sleeves for all piping systems. Set all sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction.Cooperate with other trades. Contractor shall correct all omitted or improperly located sleeves withoutadditional compensation.

3.10 SUPPORTS AND HANGERS:

A. Supports: Investigate thoroughly Plans and Shop Drawings related to work to determine how equipmentand piping are to be supported, mounted or suspended. Provide extra steel, bolts, inserts, pipe standbrackets, or any other items required for proper support. Provide supporting accessories where required,whether or not shown on the Drawings. Where directed, furnish drawings showing supports, etc., forapproval.


A. Install all equipment to be free of transmission of noise and vibration to occupied spaces. Arrangeisolated equipment so that it does not contact members of the building structure, ceiling grids, piping,conduits or ductwork.






















3.13 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER’S DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE:

A. After submission and acceptance of the Operating and Maintenance information and prior to finalacceptance of the Project, provide a scheduled instruction period for the Owner’s designatedrepresentative. Instruction period shall be sufficient to cover the contents of the Operating andMaintenance portfolio, a walk through of the Project and a review of all systems.

B. At the conclusion of the instruction period, provide approved copies of the accepted Operation andMaintenance Manual to the Owner’s representative and obtain a signed receipt.



3.14 GUARANTEE:

A. Prior to application for final payment, the Contractor shall provide a written guarantee covering allportions of the work of this Division. The guarantee shall include all work and materials for a period ofone (1) year from the date of final acceptance. The guarantee shall provide for the repair or replacementof any defective equipment, materials, products or work at no cost to the Owner.

B. Items or work which are repaired or replaced under this guarantee shall be covered under an extendedguarantee by the Contractor so that the replaced products or work shall have performed satisfactorilywithout repair or replacement for a period of one (1) year.

C. The failure of any manufacturer to provide a one (1) year warranty, or the failure of any manufacturer orvendor to honor a warranty shall not relieve the Contractor from his obligation to provide a completeparts and labor guarantee on all work provided under his Contract for a period of one (1) year.

D. Supplemental Guarantees - Supplemental Guarantees and extended warranties may be included underthis Contract as part of specific specification sections.

3.15 GUARANTEE PERIOD:

A. During the guarantee periods, the Owner may respond to emergency situations. Emergency situations forthe purposes of this section are those situations determined to be potentially harmful to the surroundingpersonnel, equipment or environment. In cases where work is performed by the Owner’s employees, theContractor will be charged for all labor and material needed to complete emergency repairs, if the repairsare determined to be the result of faulty material or workmanship. The performance of these repairs bythe Owner shall not void any Contractor guarantee.

B. The act of the Owner in responding to any emergency situation shall not relieve the Contractor from theobligation of responding to the emergency and from correcting any problems as part of the originalProject cost.

C. The Owner shall begin preventive maintenance programs immediately following final inspections.Preventive maintenance activities will not relieve Contractor from any equipment warranties.

3.16 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:

A. Maintain a dedicated set of Construction Drawings at a protected location at the Job Site for therecording of actual installed locations of piping, ductwork, equipment and accessories. Record exactlocations of underground piping and structures. Record any and all variations from the originalConstruction Drawings in neat, legible hand drawn lines and text. Attach copies of field sketches andEngineer’s supplementary instructions where they occur.

B. Keep an accurate record and show on As Built Drawings the actual installed location of any concealedwork such as underground piping and under-slab piping, valves in crawl spaces, etc. Provide location onAs-Built Drawings for outside services by indicating actual dimensions from fixed reference pointswhich will be available after completion of construction. “Tie” two (2) dimensions from differentreference points to confirm locations of concealed work. Indicate top and bottom elevations, and stationnumber of any utilities crossed as part of this work.



C. Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction:

1. Depths of elements in relation to other existing facilities.2. Horizontal and vertical locations of utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface

improvements.3. Field changes of dimensions and detail.4. Changes made by Supplemental Instruction or by Change Order.5. Details not on original Contract Drawings.

D. Provide the original of the As Built to the Engineer for review and reproduction by the Engineer. Providethe original copy to the Engineer for the Owner with one (1) photocopy for the Engineer’s files. TheContractor shall retain a second photocopy to be retained by the Contractor. The Contractor shall beresponsible for the safe keeping and maintenance of the As Built throughout construction, and formaintenance of one (1) photocopy at the Contractor’s office for a period of not less than one (1) yearfollowing final acceptance. The Contractor shall mark each drawing his submittal “As-Built” with thedate of submission, the name of the firm and the signature of the preparer.


A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements at the siteand shall be responsible for the contingencies which may be encountered. No extra compensation will beallowed on account of a difference between actual dimensions and measurements at the site and thoseindicated on the Drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Engineer forconsideration before proceeding with the work.

B. Contractor shall work accurately to bench marks and to proper elevations and dimensions established bythe Contractor. Contractor shall check conditions and details of the work in relation to the progress of thework.

C. The Contractor shall lay out the work, establishing heights and grades for all piping work included inthese specifications in strict accordance with the intent of the Drawings, the physical conditions of theProject and the finished site grades. He shall be responsible for the accuracy of the work and that thework meets all physical conditions of the Project and the requirements of these specifications.

D. Prefabrication of piping, conduit, etc. may be performed only at the risk of the Contractor. Changes toprefabricated piping required by actual site conditions shall be made by the Contractor without extracompensation from the Owner.

E. Due to the scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, etc.which may be required. Make all such changes in piping, location of equipment, etc., to accommodatework to obstacles encountered, at no increase in compensation. If requested, submit at least five (5)copies of Drawings detailing all major deviations or changes. All changes must be approved beforeinstalling.

F. Plans show general arrangement of piping and connections. Install work substantially as indicated. Verifyexact locations and elevations on job.




H. Should either Engineer’s details, field conditions, a change in equipment or Shop Drawing informationnecessitate an important rearrangement, report same to Engineers and obtain approval before proceeding.

I. No compensation shall be awarded for extra work because above precautions have not been followed. Inevent of conflicts, Engineer’s decision is final. Contractor shall be fully responsible for unauthorizedchanges.

3.18 BARRIERS:

A. The Contractor shall furnish, erect and maintain barricades, fences, railings, enclosures, guard lights,danger signals, warnings, cribbing, shoring, and other such precautions necessary to protect allinstallations and structures in the area of the work to insure the safety of the public and to avoid damageor injury to any and all persons and property. Warning lights shall be of blinker type, battery orelectrically operated.

1. The Contractor shall be solely and without exception, responsible for safety on the project site.2. All barricade and security measures shall be implemented before work starts.

3.19 PROTECTION:

A. The Contractor shall provide adequate protection to the work, his workmen, the General Public andprivate property.

B. The Contractor shall use all means and precautions necessary to insure on-site safety during construction.All OSHA construction requirements covering a project of this type shall be required of the Contractor.

C. All fencing and security measures must be implemented before work starts.

D. The Contractor shall use all means and precautions to insure the safety of the occupants of the buildingsduring construction. Occupied portions of the buildings shall have a minimum of two exits available atall times.

3.20 LAYING OUT WORK:

A. The Plans are in part diagrammatic. Contractor shall verify rough-in dimensions with Shop Drawings andwith the Architectural Plans. Conform to dimensions shown on the Plans in preference to scaling fromthe Mechanical Drawings. Provide all fittings and appurtenances required for proper system operation.

B. Contractor shall allow for thickness of finishes when roughing in his work. He shall not rough withoutobtaining accepted Shop Drawings for the actual equipment to be installed.

C. Due to the scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, etc.which may be required. Make all such changes in piping, ductwork, conduit system, location ofequipment, etc., to accommodate work to obstacles encountered, at no increase in compensation. Ifrequested, submit at least five (5) copies of Drawings detailing all major deviations or changes. Allchanges must be approved before installing.



D. Plans show general arrangement of piping and connections. Install work substantially as indicated. Verifyexact locations and elevations on job. Before installing work, consult other Plans, details and Contractorsto determine headroom and work interferences. Examine Architectural Plans for exact location ofequipment, fixtures and outlets. Where not definitely located, obtain information from Architect.

E. Thoroughly coordinate work with that of other Contractors. Raise piping and drip where necessary. Ventall air pockets in water piping, even though not so indicated. Determine exact route and/or location ofeach pipe before fabrication and installation. Furnish in writing to Architect, any information necessaryto permit work of other trades to be installed properly and without delay. Maintain maximum head room.If plumbing work cannot be installed at least 7!-0" above the floor (in mechanical spaces or basement andhigher in finished spaces dependent on ceiling height), consult with the Engineers and obtain approvalbefore proceeding. If directed by Architect or Engineers, prepare composite Drawings and sections (scalenot less than ¼" = 1"), clearly showing installation of work in relation to work of other trades.

F. Should Architect’s details, field conditions, change in equipment or Shop Drawing informationnecessitate an important rearrangement, report same to Engineers and obtain approval before proceeding.

G. Install piping, etc. to avoid interferences with removal of coils, filters, belt guards or any operating partof all systems, or operation of overhead or swinging doors. Maintain easy and safe access to valves,controllers, motor starters, and other equipment requiring frequent operation. Maintain opening of accessdoors, switch boxes, motor starters, panel boards, etc. Maintain a clear walking space.

H. No compensation awarded for extra work because above precautions have not been followed. In event ofconflicts, Engineer’s decision is final. Contractor fully responsible for unauthorized change.

3.21 MISCELLANEOUS PAINTING:

A. Paint all hangers and exposed or unpainted or ungalvanized iron work in the HVAC Systems with twobrush coats of black rust preventative paint. Touch up any damaged surfaces of factory paintedequipment.

3.22 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION:

A. It is required of each equipment manufacturer, through the Contractor, to carefully check Plans andSpecifications as some affect their particular equipment. Report to Engineers, any discrepancies orcontradictions as applied to their particular equipment which prevents proper functioning, servicing, etc.before or at the time when Shop Drawings are submitted. Furnish manufacturer’s printed installationinstructions for each piece of equipment. Thoroughly instruct Contractors’ personnel on job, exactly howtheir equipment shall be installed, connected, lubricated, started up, operated, etc., so that all factoryinstructions are rigidly followed.

B. Install, test, start and operate all equipment only as instructed by manufacturer and in presence ofmanufacturer’s representative, as directed. Follow instructions of manufacturer as noted above. Providemock-up installation of certain typical equipment, if required, such as fixtures, chair carriers,countersinks, etc. as directed, and obtain Architect’s and Engineer’s approval before proceeding withactual installation of same.



C. Contractor shall provide as recommended by manufacturer all necessary incidental valves, fittings,piping, wiring, etc., not supplied by manufacturer or other Contractors, for proper apparatus operation.Contractor shall provide accurate information to other Contractors for required services to equipment,such as water supply and waste connections, masonry openings, wiring requirements, etc. Suchinformation shall be complete and correct for each particular job.

D. If required by Engineers, Contractor shall submit satisfactory evidence that equipment, systems, etc. havebeen installed strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, have been properly aligned,are properly adjusted, have been properly tested, lubricated, balanced, etc.

E. As soon as installed, lubricate and leave in good working order, all motors, bearings, etc., in accordancewith manufacturer’s instructions.

F. Lubrication Chart - Provide 8½" x 11" lubrication chart, typed in capital letters, mounted in wood frameunder clear plastic. Hang where directed. HVAC Contractor shall provide chart listing all motors. OtherContractors supply information on motors furnished by them.

G. List following information:

1. Name and location of equipment.2. Type of lubrication recommended by manufacturer.3. Lubrication period recommended by manufacturer.


A. Notify Engineers when installation(s) is/are ready for testing, as specified with ample time in advance.Provide all metered and unmetered services, tools, equipment and manpower necessary to perform tests.

B. Perform all equipment testing as specified as recommended by manufacturer and directed by Engineers.Demonstrate that all operating and safety devices are in proper working order.

C. Perform necessary operating and pressure testing for all piping and equipment which shall be: buriedunderground, before backfilling; installed in or under slabs, before pouring; buried in building walls,before being buried and installed above furred ceilings before ceiling installation.

3.24 ESCUTCHEONS:

A. Every un-insulated pipe penetrating a wall, ceiling or floor surface exposed to view shall be providedwith an escutcheon.

B. Units in unfinished spaces (boiler rooms, etc.) shall be of the rough finish type.

C. Units in finished spaces shall be of the chrome plated type.

D. Units shall be of sufficient diameter to cover sleeves and where used with extended sleeves shall be ofsufficient depth to fit over the sleeve and reach the finish surface snugly.



3.25 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:

A. All components shall be selected for a minimum safety factor of 5.

B. Units shall be capable of supporting pipe under all operating conditions and shall allow free expansionand contraction of piping.

C. All rigid hanger assemblies shall provide for vertical movement after installation by means of threadedadjustment.

D. Piping systems subject to shock loads shall be supported by units incorporation shock-absorbing devicesof approved design.

E. Hanger rods shall be subjected to tensile loads only. Where axial or lateral movement is anticipated,suitable linkages shall be provided.

F. Units shall be designed and installed so that pipe movement will not cause them to become disengaged.

G. Units shall be spaced to permit drainage and so that there will be limited sag between hangers. Spacingshall also be such as will prevent excessive bending stresses from concentrated loads between supports.

H. Units in contact with copper pipe shall be copper clad.

I. Support units from the building structural system, NOT from metal roof decks.

J. Units supporting insulated pipe carrying liquids or gasses at temperatures ABOVE OR BELOWAMBIENT shall be furnished with pipe covering protection saddles sized in accordance with theassociated pipe and the specified insulation thickness. See 2.4B.

K. Insulation shields shall be galvanized steel, formed to fit the adjoining insulation, extending through a180E arc and shall conform with the following table:

PIPE SIZE GAUGE LENGTH½" to 2½" 18 8"

L. Welded attachments shall be of materials comparable to the pipe.

M. All units, including pipe attachments, structural attachments, hanger rods, bracing, all necessaryaccessories and their installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 - Installation of SprinklerSystems, latest issue.

N. Maximum horizontal support intervals shall be as follows:

1. Steel pipe 1¼" and smaller: 8! – 0".2. Steel pipe 1½" and larger: 10! – 0".3. Copper tubing 1½" and smaller: 5! – 0".4. Copper tubing 2": 8! – 0".5. Cast-iron pipe - support at each bell, 5! – 0".6. No-hub c.i. pipe: At each joint for 3" pipe at each side of each joint for 4" and over pipe.



3.26 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS (General Installation Requirements):

A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or othercovering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification aftercompletion of covering and painting.

B. Equipment:

1. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment marker on or near each majoritem of mechanical equipment and each operational device, as specified herein if not otherwisespecified for each item or device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipmentand operational devices.

a. Meters, gauges, thermometers and similar units.b. Fuel-burning units including water heaters.c. Pumps and similar motor-driven units.d. Storage tanks and pressure vessels.e. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water treatment systems and similar equipment.

2. Lettering Size: Minimum ¼" high lettering for name of unit where viewing distance is less than2!- 0", ½" high for distances up to 6!-0", and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering b" to ¾" of size of principal lettering.

3. Test of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish betweenmultiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergencyprecautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

C. Piping:

1. After piping has been painted or insulated, apply pipe labels as specified above.2. Space labels on 15! centers in mechanical rooms. Space at 25 centers elsewhere and at each side

of partitions and interior walls. Also at each branch and riser take off and adjacent to each valve(except at fixtures and equipment).

D. Valves Identification:

1. General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system;exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture faucets,convenience hose bibs, and shut-off valves at plumbing fixtures, and similar rough-inconnections of end-use fixtures and units. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for eachpiping system.

2. Provide a valve tag chart, framed and securely fastened to the wall, using anchors and fasteners,where directed by the Owner.

3. Submit list of valve tags, including wording, for approval BEFORE ordering.

E. Ceiling Markers:

1. Place sticker on nearest ceiling grid t-bar below any operational HVAC equipment (e.g. balancevalves, isolation valves, vents, drains, strainers, filters, fans, coils, etc.)



3.27 PIPE SCHEDULE:

Service Size Pipe Fittings Joints

Hydronic Heating,Chilled WaterCooling, GlycolHeating Systems

2" andsmaller

Type “L” Copper Wrought Copper PressureFitting

Sweat, Solder,threaded

3½" andlarger

Schedule 40 Steel Butt-Welded Welded

Steam in Buildings2½" andlarger

Schedule 40 Steel Butt-Weld Fittings,Standard Weight

Welded

2" andsmaller

Schedule 40 Steel,Threaded

Threaded Threaded

Condensate inBuildings

2½" andlarger

Schedule 80 Steel Butt-Weld Fittings, ExtraHeavy

Welded

2" andsmaller

Schedule 80 Steel,Threaded

3000 lb. Forged SteelThreaded for HPCondensate, 300 lb. Cast-Iron Threaded for LPCondensate

Threaded

Refrigeration ACR Copper Wrought Copper PressureFitting

Brazed

AHU Drains & AC Unit Drains Type “L” Copper Wrought Copper 95/5 No-LeadSolder

3.28 SEALING SLEEVES:

A. All openings in floors and all openings in full height walls shall be firestopped in a manner equal to orsuperior to the surrounding construction.

B. All penetrations in fire rated walls or floor assemblies shall be fitted with 3M brand fire barrierpenetration sealing systems 7902/7904, CP-25 caulk or 303 putty and installed in accordance withinstructions provided.

3.29 SLEEVE INSTALLATION:

A. Where drilling through floors and walls has been allowed, sleeves may be installed after drilling.

B. Where sleeves have been omitted or improperly located, pay for cutting and patching as required to makecorrections.

C. Install as follows:



1. Sleeves through walls, partitions and ceilings shall terminate flush with exterior surfaces.2. In any mechanical room whose floor does not rest upon a slab on grade, sleeves shall extend to 4"

above the finished floor.3. Sleeves through finished floors shall be terminated ¼" above the finished floor.4. Use sheet metal sleeves for pipe 6" and larger. Use schedule 40 steel pipe sleeves for pipe smaller

than 6".5. Mechanical Contractor shall identify and plug all abandoned openings in an acceptable manner.

3.30 SLEEVE SIZES:

A. Insulated pipe shall pass through sleeves of sufficient size to pass both pipe and insulation. Generally,this will mean the interior of the sleeve shall be at least 2" larger than the exterior diameter of the pipepassing through it.

B. Bare pipe shall pass through sleeves whose interior diameter will be that of a pipe two sizes larger thanthat of the pipe passing through it.

3.31 VALVES:

A. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping system. Locate valves so as to be accessible.

B. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stemspointed downward or horizontal plane unless approved by the Owner and Engineer.

C. Select and install valves with ends to match piping system requirements.

D. Select and install valves with renewable seats, except where otherwise indicated.

E. Install swing check valves in horizontal position with hinge pin horizontally perpendicular to center lineof pipe. Install for proper direction of flow.

3.32 STRAINERS:

A. Install Y-type strainers full size of pipeline shown on the Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer’sinstallation instructions. Install pipe nipple, cap and shutoff valve in strainer blow-down connection, fullsize of connection. Locate strainer in pipe ahead of steam trap serving steam main drips.



3.33 VALVE CHART:

Service Size Type

Hydronic Heating,Chilled Water andGlycol Hot Water

¼" thru 2" Standard PortTwo Piece BronzeBody withChrome BrassBall

2½" and Larger Butterfly Valve

Indoors at Heating/CoolingTerminal Units

Single Piece, Stainless Ball, Union End

Drain & Air Bleed Valves Hose End Ball Valve

Steam

LowPressure(to 15 psi)

2" and smaller Class 300 Bronze Gate or Jamesbury Clincher BallValve

2½" and larger Class 125 Cast-Iron Gate Valve

MediumPressure (15 to 50psi)

2" and smaller Jamesbury Clincher

2½" and larger Class 125 Cast-Iron Gate Valve

HighPressure 50 to 115psig andfirst valveinsidebuilding(anypressure)

d" to ½" StrainerBlowdown Service

Screwed Carbon Body Ball Valve

¾" to 2" Isolating Service Class 300 RP&C Gate Valve

¾" to 2" Throttling Service Class 300 RP&C Globe Valve

2½" and larger Cast Steel Gate Valve

Steam CondensateLow and MediumPressure Systems

½" to 2" Bronze Body, Solid Copper-Nickel Disk GateValve

2½ " and Larger Cast-Iron Body Butterfly Valve

Steam CondensateCheck Valves

½" and Larger CheckValves

Class 300 Bronze Body Check Valve

Steam Gauge andBlow-off Valves

d" to ½" Screwed Carbon Body Ball Valve



Service Size Type

Steam CondensateHigh PressureSystem and FirstValve insideBuilding

d" to ½" Screwed Carbon Body Ball Valve

¾" to 2" Class 300 Steel Gate Valve

2½" and Larger Cast-Iron Gate Valve



O&M Manual Checklist Date (Include completed copy of this Checklist in O&M Manual when submitted)

Project Trade

Project Name

Submitted as an electronic file per Section 01 78 23 YES / NO

Composite electronic PDF file YES / NO

Minimum readable text size YES / NO

Title page “Recognize Text” turned on for all scanned documents YES / NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O&M Manual:

Cover Sheet listing:

Building Name

O&M Manual Table of Contents: Hyperlinked book-marked information with links to each CSI Master FormatSpecification Section in manual YES / NO

O&M Manual Contact List: Contractor Each Major Subcontractor Contractor Name Contractor Name Contractor’s Address Contractor’s Address Contact person Contact person Tel. & Fax #’s Tel. & Fax #’s Project Manager Name Engineer Architect Name Name Company Name Company Name Contact person Contact person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O&M Manual Project Guarantee & Warranties:

Typed guarantee from Contractor with 1 year guarantee stated as commencing on the date of final acceptance by the University. Date must be identified

Hyperlinks to any special warranties included in Equipment Specifications YES / NO



O&M Manual - Remaining Pages: Checklist Page 2

1. Organized by CSI Specification Section number. YES / NO2. Each CSI Specification Section included. YES / NO3. Includes final submittal, updated to contain A/E remarks. YES / NO4. Includes any special Contractor or manufacturer warranty. YES / NO5. Includes the Installation, Operation and Maintenance (IOM) manuals for each piece of equipment, up to date for the

version of equipment supplied. YES / NO6. Includes IOM data for accessory data. YES / NO7. Includes test reports for each piece of equipment. YES / NO

Scan of spare parts list. Scan of all test reports (i.e. fire alarm). Scan of all inspections (i.e. plumbing, electrical). Scan of all certification data. Scan of facility lubrication chart. Scan of facility valve chart. Scan copy of complete temperature control and operating instructions. Completed copy of checklist last page of O&M Manual.



DIVISION 23 SECTION 23 07 00 - HVAC INSULATION PAGE 1


SECTION 23 07 00 - HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The Contract Drawings and the General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions ofthe Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1Specification Sections apply to the work of this Section.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Furnish and install all insulation materials for the complete duct, piping and equipment systems asrequired for proper system operation.

B. This Section includes semirigid and flexible insulation for ducts, plenums, and breechings; insulatingcements; field-applied jackets, accessories; and sealing compounds.

C. This Section also includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; field-applied jackets; accessoriesand attachments; and sealing compounds for above ground, interior and exterior mechanical pipingsystems as listed in Part 3 application schedules. This section also includes mechanical equipmentinsulation requirements.

1.03 REFERENCES:

A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. B 209 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.2. C 533 Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.3. C 534 Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tube Form.4. C 547 Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.5. C 553 Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.6. C 612 Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.7. C 795 Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel.8. E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

B. American National Standards:

1. A 117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Sustainable Design Submittals Provisions:

1. Refer also to Section 01 81 13 Sustainable Design Requirements.2. Credit EQ 4.1: Printed product data for adhesives and sealants indicating VOC content in g/L.



B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for insulating materials proposed to be used thatidentify thermal conductivity, thickness, jackets (both factory and field applied, if any) for each type ofproduct indicated. Provide manufacturer’s installation requirements for each type of insulation. Showcompliance with necessary industry standards and listing agencies.


A. With the exception of duct liners, all insulating materials required for ducting, plenums, and breachingpiping and equipment shall be furnished and installed under this contract. The execution of the workshall be in strict accordance with the best practices of the trade, the manufacture’s requirements, and theintent of this specification.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in thisSection according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers withappropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed rating of150 or less.

C. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation materials,jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:

1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by the Project Manager.2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less, for various pipe

sizes.3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is less, for various pipe

sizes.

D. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncompliance withrequirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials according to these Specifications.

E. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings, valves, ducts and equipment uncovered for inspectionaccording to these Specifications.


A. Packing: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTMspecification designation, type, and maximum use temperature.

B. Insulation materials shall be kept dry and protected from the weather at all times until installation iscomplete. Insulation material found to be wet or damaged shall be replaced by the contractor at no cost tothe Owner.

C. Insulation materials shall be new and undamaged.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 INSULATION MATERIALS:

A. Mineral–Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply withASTM C 612, Type IB, for use to 450 deg. F, with a factory-applied jacket manufactured from foil,reinforcing scrim, and kraft paper (FSK). Minimum density of 3 lb./cu.ft., maximum conductivity (K) of0.40 (BTU-in./hr.-sq.ft.-deg. F) at 300 deg. F, 0.23 K or less at 75 deg. F. Johns Manville Mat-facedMicro-Aire Type 800 or equal in Owens-Corning.

B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply withASTM C 553, Type II, for use to 250 deg. F, with a factory-applied jacket manufactured from either foil,reinforcing scrim, and kraft paper (FSK) or with a factory applied white or black metalizedpolyproylene-skrim-kraft (PSK). The (PSK) jacket is to be used in exposed areas where the structure is tobe painted. Minimum density of 3/4 lb./cu.ft., maximum conductivity of 0.43 (BTU-in./hr.-sq.ft.-deg. F)at 200 deg. F. Moisture absorption less than 1% by volume, moisture transmission 0.02 perms. JohnsManville Microlite XG or equal in Owens-Corning.

C. Ductboard Insulation ISO Board (Outdoor): Insulated sheathing, polyisocyanurate foamboard insulationISO, additionally jacketed with a layer of glass mesh embedded in two heavy coats of weather barriermastic, similar to Mon-ECO Industries 55-50.

D. Fiberglass “Pipe & Tank” Insulation: For ductwork, semi-rigid fiberglass board in roll form. Complywith ASTM C 795, Type II, for use to 850 deg. F with a factory-applied jacket manufactured from foil,reinforcing scrim, and kraft paper (FSK). Maximum conductivity of 0.45 (BTU-in./hr.-sq.ft.-deg. F) at300 deg. F.

E. Pipe and Tank Insulation: For equipment and tanks, semi-rigid fiberglass board in a roll form faced withfactory applied vapor retarder jacket (ASJ). Comply with ASTM C 795, Type II, for use to 850 deg. F.Maximum conductivity, 0.26 (BTU-in./hr.-sq.ft.-deg. F) at 100 deg. F.

F. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547,Type I-Molded, for use to 850 deg. F, with factory-applied, all-purpose, vapor-retarder jacket (ASJ), withself-sealing adhesive lap (SSL). Minimum 3 lbs./cu.ft. density, maximum 0.23 (BTU-in./hr.-sq.ft.-deg. F)at 75 deg. F thermal conductivity. Manville APT, Owens-Corning 25 ASJ or approved equal in CSG.

G. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for indoor applications. Complywith MIL-C-19565C, Type II.

H. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Complywith ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. Armaflex 25/50cemented with factory recommended adhesive. Covered with aluminum jacketing for abuse and/orexterior locations. Maximum thermal conductivity per ASTM C-177, C-158 0.27 @ 75 deg. F, 0.276 @90 deg. F, water permeability per ASTM E-96, 0.17 perm-in. Armstrong Armaflex II sheet and rollinsulation with Armstrong 520 adhesive.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.



I. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Flat, curved, grooved block or preformed pipe sections of non-combustible,inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos containing fibrous reinforcement. Comply withASTM C 533, Type I.

J. Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting cover system consisting of one-piece,pre-molded, PVC covers with fiberglass inserts manufactured from 20mils thick, high-impact,ultraviolet-resistant PVC.

1. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs,traps, mechanical joints, roof drains, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories for the disabled.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

K. Steam Piping Fittings:

1. Fittings to 2" - insulating finishing cement with 4 ounce canvas and lagging finished.2. Fittings above 2" - mitered sections of insulation - troweled insulating cement with 4 ounce

canvas and lagging finished.3. Provide label on all cement finished fittings with legend “Non Asbestos Insulation”. Mark

adjacent insulation with the date in black permanent marker.

2.02 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS:

A. Aluminum Jacket: Stucco-embossed finished sheets manufactured from 0.016" thick aluminum alloycomplying with ASTM B209 and having an integrally bonded 1-mil thick, heat-bonded polyethylene andkraft paper moisture barrier over entire surface in contact with insulation. Fittings shall be preformed 45and 90 degree short and long radius elbows; same material and thickness as jacket.

B. PVC Jacket: White, 25/50 rated per ASTM E 84, UV resistant, minimum thickness 0.020" for insulationO.D. up to 18" and 0.030" for insulation O.D. above 18" with fittings complying witih “Standard PVCFitting Covers” above.

2.03 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS:

A. Tape: Tape for sealing joints in the insulation shall be a minimum of 3" wide, pressure sensitive and ofthe same type material as the insulation jacket it is used on.

B. Bands: ¾" wide, 0.007" aluminum, or stainless steel, ASTM A666, Type 304, 0.020" thick.

C. Wire: 0.008" nickel-copper alloy; 0.062", soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.0062", soft-annealed,galvanized steel.

D. Screws: Stainless steel sheet metal screws.

E. Anchor Pins and Washers: Anchor pins and washers shall be weld attached and shall have a holdingcapacity of 100 lb. for direct pull perpendicular to the attached surface, and shall have a pin lengthsufficient for insulation thickness indicated:

1. Weld attached: Copper-coated steel pin for capacitor-discharge welding and a minimum 1½ "diameter galvanized speed washer.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSULATION:

A. Coordination and Preparation: For ductwork, schedule insulation application after sealing and leaktesting duct systems. For piping schedule, insulation application after completion of piping testing. Cleanand dry surfaces to receive insulation. Keep insulation dry during application and finishing. All surfacesshall be clean and dry. Surfaces shall be free of loose scale, dirt, oil, water, weld, spotter, burns, and rustbefore installation.

B. Hangers: Confirm that piping and ducts are at correct elevation and grade prior to insulating. Providehigh density or phenolic block inserts for below ambient piping and welded saddles for other piping ateach hanger before insulating, for all piping 2" and larger. Insulation shields shall be permitted only forpiping 1½" and smaller sizes and then only if the shield does not noticeably compress the insulation.Insulation shields shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel, a minimum of 6" long.

C. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer’s written instructions:with smooth, straight, and even surfaces: and free of voids throughout the length of the ducts and fittings.Covering shall be continuous. The covering shall be neatly terminated at each end of unions with plasticmaterial troweled on a bevel, but unions shall not be covered. Coverings shall be neatly finished at pipeanchors, fittings, etc.

D. At all points where existing lines or ducts are broken to cut in new connections, the insulation shall berepaired to its original condition.

E. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity,unless otherwise indicated.

F. Hangers and Anchors: Seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projectionswith vapor-retarder mastic. Apply insulation continuously around hangers and attachments.

G. Interior Walls and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partition,except fire-rated walls and partitions.

H. Fire-Rated Wall and Partitions: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper sleeves for fire-rated wall andpartitions penetrations. Apply insulation continuously through walls and floors unless not allowed byfirestop system.

I. Handicap Lavatories: Cover all exposed lavatory supply and waste fittings with insulation and removablePVC covers to comply with ANSI Std. A117.1 requirements.

3.02 PROTECTION:

A. Coordinate with other trades so as to cause no delays in applying insulation; be aware of testing,painting, hanger installation and heat tracing requirements. Coordinate clearance requirements withpiping installer for insulation application.

B. Protect work of other Contractors and SNL from dirt and debris caused by the insulation work. Removerubbish daily and at the conclusion of work.



C. Do not insulate over nameplates or sight /light glasses.

D. Coordinate with pump layout to insure pressure switches and gauges are extended outside of pumpinsulation boxes.

3.03 MINERAL-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION APPLICATION – FOR DUCTS & PLENUMS:

A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for“Stretch-Outs” using a maximum compression of 25%. Duct wrap shall be installed to allow maximumfullness at corners (avoid excessive compression). Secure blanket insulation with anchor pins and speedwashers to prevent sagging. Do not over compress.

B. Apply adhesive to ducts to assist with installation and as required by the manufacturer.

C. On rectangular and oval ducts, install anchor pins and speed washers to the bottom of horizontal ducts24" and larger and all sides of vertical ducts 24" and larger:

1. Space 18" o.c. each way. Apply additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at crossbracing.

2. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers. Do not over compress insulation duringinstallation.

3. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulationsurface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

D. Insulation shall be butted tightly at joints and vapor barrier facing shall be overlapped a minimum of 2" .All seams shall be stapled approximately 6" on center with outward cinching ½" staples, then sealedimmediately with minimum 3" wide pressure sensitive tape having the same facing as the insulation. Donot use staples in public or exposed locations. Apply tape with a moving pressure using a squeegee orother appropriate sealing tool. For systems operating at below ambient, use vapor barrier adhesive, sealall joints and butter all staples to maintain water vapor integrity of piping system.

E. Apply insulation on duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for each surface. Applymitered sections of rigid insulation to curved fittings in outdoor ducts.

F. Apply vapor-retarder mastic or matching pressure sensitive tape to open joints, breaks, and punctures.

3.04 MINERAL-FIBER BOARD INSULATION APPLICATION FOR DUCTS & PLENUMS:

A. Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with adhesive and anchor pins andspeed washers.

B. All corners shall be reinforced with minimum 2 x 2 aluminum corner angle, secured in place withmatching foil tape.

C. Apply adhesive to ducts to assist with installation and as required by the manufacturer.

D. Install anchor pins and speed washers to the sides ducts as follows:



1. On duct sides with dimensions 18" and smaller, along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3" maximum from insulation end joints, and 16" o.c.

2. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18". Space 16" o.c. each way, and 3" maximum frominsulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface atcross bracing.

3. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulationsurface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

E. Insulation shall be butted tightly at joints. Cover joints immediately with minimum 3" wide withpressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Apply tape with a moving pressure using asqueegee or other appropriate sealing tool.

F. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for eachsurface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows.Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

G. Apply vapor-retarder mastic or matching pressure sensitive tape to open joints, breaks, and punctures.

3.05 MINERAL-FIBER “PIPE AND TANK” INSULATION APPLICATION:

A. “Pipe and Tank” Applications for Ducts and Fittings: Secure insulation to ducts with adhesive and lappedseams with pressure sensitive tape.

B. Insulation shall be butted tightly at joints and vapor barrier facing shall be overlapped a minimum of 2".All seams shall be stapled approximately 6" on center with outward chinching ½" staples, then sealedwith minimum 3" wide pressure sensitive tape having the same facing as the insulation.

C. Apply insulation on round and oval duct elbows and transitions with individually mitered gores cut to fitthe fitting. Cover the insulation at the fitting with glass cloth, overlapping the duct insulation by 2" andseal with vapor barrier mastic.

3.06 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION – PIPES & TUBES:

A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows: use preformed pipe insulation when able. Usepipe and tank insulation for larger diameter piping where preformed insulation is not available. To meetrequired thickness, apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

1. Keep adhesive and contact surfaces clean and free of dirt and moisture. Seal immediately onceadhesive is exposed. Seal circumferential joints with a minimum 3" wide tape and secure withtwo outward clinching staples at the overlap. Rub the longitudinal joints firmly with a squeegeeand secure with 2 outward clinching staples evenly spaced in each 3 foot section of insulation.

2. Where vapor retarders are indicated; seal staples and any penetrations in the insulation withvapor-retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15 to 20 feet toform a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.

3. Taper the ends of insulation at terminations. Seal all raw edges of insulation with mastic.

B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:

1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.



2. Make width of insulation segments the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus twicethe thickness of the pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacentstraight pipe segments with a collar fabricated for preformed pipe insulation.

4. Fill all voids and seal all raw edges of insulation with vapor retarder mastic.

C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows and mechanical grooved couplings as follows:

1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equalto adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.

2. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers. Secure the fitting covers by wrapping the endswith minimum 1½" wide PVC tape. Overlap a minimum of 2" and do not stretch the last 2" oftape. Secure the throat with a stainless steel tack.

3. On systems requiring a vapor barrier, seal the throat with vapor barrier mastic (the PVC fittingcover is to act as the vapor barrier).

D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:

1. Apply premolded pipe insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipeinsulation, sized and cut to fit around the valve body, over the flanges, and around the bonnet.Fill all voids and seal all raw edges in insulation with vapor retarder mastic. Caulk around valvestem cutout.

2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbinginsulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to strainer basket without disturbinginsulation.

3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.07 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION:

A. Apply insulation according to the manufacturer’s written instructions and as follows:

1. Secure single layer of insulation to the duct or pipe with stainless-steel bands at 12" intervals.Tighten bands without deforming the insulation material.

2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3". Secure inner layerwith 0.062" soft annealed, stainless-steel wire. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands.

3. On exposed applications, without metal jacket finish insulation with a skim coat of mineral-fiber,hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed insulation. When dry, apply flood coat of laggingadhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1". Apply finishcoat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth finish.

3.08 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION – DUCTWORK ALUMINUM JACKET:

A. Exterior: Apply aluminum jacketing to all external ductwork that is insulated. Cover all fittings andspecialties with aluminum jacketing.

B. Apply metal jacket with 2" overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Secure jacket with stainless-steelsheet metal screws 6" o.c. and at end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water and sealend joints with weatherproof mastic.



3.09 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS – PIPING:

A. Apply insulation to piping systems using materials, thickness and jackets listed in the schedule at the endof this section.

B. Piping exposed to the weather: Any piping subject to freezing and any piping with heat tracing shall havethe insulation thickness increased by an additional 2" mineral insulation of the same finish as specifiedfor the particular service when not subject to freezing.

C. Insulate all steam and condensate return piping, all hydronic heating, cooling, heat recovery and coolingcoil condensate piping. Insulate all mains, branches, fittings, flanges and valves.

D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems,materials, and equipment:

1. In steam, hot water, domestic and non-potable service only: Flexible connectors, unions, pressurereducing valves, balancing valves, flow control valves, steam traps, and in sizes less that 1½",valves and strainers.

2. Fire-suppression piping.

E. Refrigeration Piping:

1. Insulate all refrigeration suction lines between the compressor unit and the cooling coils with25/50 Armaflex.

2. Insulate all refrigeration discharge lines in occupied spaces with ASJ fiberglass, to protectagainst incidental contact.

3.10 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION – PIPING:

A. Interior: Apply either aluminum or PVC jacketing to exposed insulated pipe, valves, fittings, andspecialties, at an elevation of 8 feet or less above finished floor in mechanical/electrical rooms,penthouses, and services aisles/pipe chases. Fittings of aluminum jacketed piping may be eitheraluminum or standard PVC fitting covers. Jacketing for piping in existing areas shall match existingjacketing.

B. Exterior: Apply aluminum jacketing to all external piping that is insulated. Cover all fittings, valves, andspecialties with aluminum jacketing.

C. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 2" overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Secure jacketwith aluminum bands or sheet metal screws on 12" centers and at end joints. On piping exposed to theweather, overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water and seal end joints with weatherproof mastic.

D. Apply PVC jacketing where indicated, with 2" overlap at longitudinal seams and at fitting covers, themaximum the cover allows. Seal longitudinal seams by joining with PVC welding solvent. Sealcircumferential ends with 1½" PVC tape.

3.11 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS – DUCTWORK & PLENUMS:

A. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems:



1. Indoor concealed and exposed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork.2. Outdoor exposed supply and return ductwork.3. Boiler breeching and connector ductwork.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems,materials, and equipment:

1. Fibrous-glass ducts.2. Interior metal ducts with duct liner.3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.4. Factory-insulated plenums, casing, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections.5. Flexible connectors.6. Vibration-control devices.7. Testing agency labels and stamps.8. Nameplates and data plates.9. Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.

3.12 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS – EQUIPMENT:

A. Hot Water Converters, Chilled Water Heat Exchangers, Chilled Water Chemical Feeders, Hot WaterStorage Tanks, Condensate Receivers, Flash Tanks, Separators and Blow-Off Tanks (unless furnishedwith factory-insulation equal to the following):

1. Insulate with 1½" fiberglass preformed pipe or “pipe and tank” insulation. Secure insulation withbanding on vessels 3 foot in diameter and larger. Finish with aluminum jacketing and secure withmetal bands or sheet metal screws. Secure jacketing with stainless steel banding on vessels 6 footin diameter and larger.

B. Steam Condensate Pumps (unless factory insulated jacket is provided with pump): Insulate with aremovable, reusable custom fit cover manufactured from teflon-impregnated cloth with double sewn andbinded seams and 1" thick fiberglass. Suitable for continuous temperatures to 500EF.

C. Chilled Water and Process Chilled Water Pumps (Operating at 45EF or less or as indicated on thedrawings):

1. Base Mounted and In-Line Pumps: Insulate with 1" Armaflex applied with adhesive to the casingand piping of the pumps.

D. Roof and Overflow Drains:

1. Wrap roof drain sump with 1½" thick fiberglass blanket and cover with a premolded PVC cover.

3.13 FINISHES:

A. Paint insulation in finished or occupied spaces.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of the insulationmanufacturer’s recommended protective coating.



3.14 STENCILING:

A. Stencil or mark flow direction and type of piping at 20 foot intervals.

B. Existing or Newly Installed Insulation Repair:

1. Repair damaged sections of existing or newly installed mechanical insulation whether previouslydamaged or damaged during this construction period. Use insulation of same thickness asexisting insulation, install new jacket lapping and seal over existing.

2. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily.

C. Insulation Thickness Schedule:

1. See Contract Drawings for Insulation Thickness Schedule.



DIVISION 23 SECTION 23 31 00 - HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PAGE 1


SECTION 23 31 00 - HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Provide a complete, operating, tested, functioning, documented ductwork system including all workshown, specified, or required for proper system operation.

B. Galvanized steel ductwork for supply air, return air, outside air and general building exhaust air.

C. Duct Shop Drawings.

D. Splitter and Manual Dampers.

E. Ductwork accessories to include duct hardware, duct access doors and turning vanes.

F. Provide duct lining.

1.02 REFERENCES:

A. Applicable provisions of the following Codes and Trade Standard Publications shall apply to the work ofthis Section, and are hereby incorporated into, and made apart of the Contract Documents.

B. Material standards shall be as specified or detailed hereinafter and as follows:

1. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.2. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.3. SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.4. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.5. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.6. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheets, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process.

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. See Division 1 for Additional Requirements.

B. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials, duct connectors and all accessories. Include soundattenuator test data in accordance with ASTM E477.

C. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall submit duct fabrication standards and methods of installation, incompliance with SMACNA and these Specifications, for review and approval by the Engineer, clearlyindicating the combination of metal gauges and reinforcement intended for use for each pressureclassification. Duct fabrication shall not be allowed until a satisfactory review of this Standard has beenperformed and fabrication drawings have been reviewed and coordinated. MERELY SUBMITTINGCOPIES OF THE SMACNA PRESSURE CLASS TABLES DOES NOT COMPLY WITH THISREQUIREMENT.



D. Provide scaled ductwork coordination drawings for all floors and systems in accordance with Section 2305 01 - HVAC Coordination Drawing Requirements.

E. Test Reports: Indicated pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure, and leakagerate, following SMACNA-HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

F. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures for glass fiber ducts.

G. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that installation of glass fiber ductwork meet or exceed recommendedfabrication and installation requirements.

H. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts, duct fittings and all accessories. Recordchanges in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.

I. Diffusers and grilles submittals shall indicate airflow rate (cfm), throw length to 50 fpm, blow pattern,and NC values for each individual diffuser or grille.


A. All ducts and fittings shall be manufactured by a sheet metal fabrication company whose primarybusiness experience is the manufacture of commercial and industrial quality ducts and fittings.

B. Sheet Metal Contractor shall have adequate experience of building ductwork of the types required forthis Project as well as successful experience with projects of similar scope. Bids from sheet metal shopswhich do not meet the specified requirements shall not be acceptable.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealantmanufacturers.

B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants, includingthroughout the full curing time.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GALVANIZED STEEL DUCTWORK:

A. Galvanized steel duct fabricated from quality zinc coated galvanized sheet steel, of lockforming quality.

B. Shop fabricated according to the current edition of the SMACNA HVAC duct construction standards for2" w.g. duct pressures minimum. See Drawings for additional requirements.

C. Shop fabricated joints shall be sealed with Hardcast Alumagrip 701 sealant.

2.02 STAINLESS STEEL WELDED DUCTWORK:

A. All ductwork shall be fabricated from type 304 Stainless Steel sheet, ASTM-A-167-“Stainless and HeatResisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip”.



B. Ductwork shall have all longitudinal joints butt welded continuously. Welds shall be neatly beaded withno protrusions, or slag.

C. Ductwork shall have all transverse joints lapped and continuously welded at assembly points. Welds shallbe neatly beaded with no protrusions or slag. Lapped sections shall be arranged to drain any condensateinside ductwork to the interior face of the joint.

D. Welding shall be performed using the Gas Tungsten Arc Welding Process, “TIG” using Argon shieldinggas, or the Gas Metal Arc Welding Process “MIG” using a gas mixture of 90% Helium, 7.5% Argon and2.5% Carbon Dioxide. Electrodes, Speeds and Flow rates shall conform to AWS standards as reprinted inSMACNA “Manager’s Guide for Welding”.

E. All work shall conform to the provisions of the latest edition of AWS D9.1 “Code for Welding of SheetMetal.”

F. Personnel acting as welders shall provide a qualifications certificate, dated within five years prior to theproject start date, stating that the individual has been tested by an independent agency and found to bequalified to perform welding under standard AWS D 9.1 “Code for Welding of Sheet Metal”.

G. Prior to fabricating any ductwork, the contractor shall submit samples of work performed by theindividual selected to perform the work on this project. The samples shall include at least onelongitudinal seam of minimum length 3!-0" and two transverse welds around the full circumference of a10" sample duct. Samples shall become property of and shall remain in the possession of the University.

H. Previously performing contractors are Central New York Sheet Metal, Syracuse, Delia Sheet Metal,Syracuse, Woodcock Armani Mechanical Contractors, Syracuse and J&K Sheet Metal, Binghamton,Century Heating, Syracuse. These contractors have demonstrated capability in stainless steel work in thepast. These contractors must still submit qualification records and samples for the actual individualperforming the work.

I. Other contractors will be considered by the University if they can supply qualification information andsamples.

2.03 BLACK STEEL DUCTWORK:

A. Black steel ductwork fabricated from quality hot-rolled steel, ASTM A-569 temper.

B. Shop fabricated according to the current edition of the SMACNA Industrial Duct Construction Standardsfor low gauge steel.

C. Shop fabricated joints shall be continuously welded.

D. Grease hood ductwork shall be 10 gauge, continuously welded.

2.04 SOUND LININGS:

A. Elastomeric foam sound lining, where noted or scheduled on Drawings or listed in Part 3 of this Section.

B. Minimum Thickness:



1. In ductwork: 1".2. In plenums: 1½".

C. Flamespread Rating: 25.

D. Smoke Developed Rating: 50.

E. Suitable for Duct Velocity of 5,000 fpm.

F. Thermal Conductivity: 0.25 BTU in/hr/sf/°F.

G. Noise Reduction Coefficient for 1" Thickness: 0.60.

H. Sound Transmission: Class 25.

I. Basis of Design: Armacell - AP/Armaflex, AP/Armaflex FS, AP/Coilflex or AP/Spiralflex.

J. Adhesive:

1. Air-drying, low VOC, contact adhesive.2. SCAQMD Rule 1168 compliant.3. Flamespread Rating: 25.4. Smoke Developed Rating: 50.5. Spray Application: Armaflex low VOC spray contact adhesive.6. Brush/Roller Application: Armaflex 520 BLV adhesive.

2.05 NON-HARDENING CAULKING:

A. Guaranteed to be permanently elastic.

B. Similar to Tremco Polybutene.

2.06 SPLITTER AND MANUAL DAMPERS:

A. Shop fabricated splitter and manual dampers. Dampers shall have locking quadrant arms and end bearingplates. Provide extended quadrant locks where insulated ductwork is used.

2.07 MOTORIZED DAMPERS:

A. Motorized dampers to be Tamco Series 9000 or equivalent. Dampers shall be of airfoil design andgalvanized construction; they shall either parallel or opposed blade type with metal compressible jambseals and extrude vinyl blade edge seals on all blades. Blades shall rotate on stainless steel sleevebearings. Maximum damper blade length shall be 60". Leakage rate shall not exceed 8 cfm/square foot at1" w.g. and 12 cfm/square foot at 4" w.g.

2.08 TURNING VANES:

A. Shop fabricated or factory fabricated turning vanes. Vanes shall be welded to vane runner.



B. Special continuous vane elbows shall be shop fabricated according to the dimensions and details shownon the plans for discharge elbows.

2.09 DUCT ACCESS DOORS:

A. Provide an access door for all control dampers, fire dampers, smoke dampers and combination fire/smokedampers.

B. Door construction shall be die formed of minimum 22 ga. galvanized steel with 1" of insulation fullyenclosed double skin. Bulb type seal shall be integrally fastened to door.

C. Frame construction shall be die formed of minimum 22 ga. galvanized steel.

D. Allowable leakage maximum 0.133 cfm for 18" x 10" at 8" w.g.

E. Make: Nailor Industries Ultra Low Leakage Access Doors, Model 0800 flat oval.

2.10 DUCT FLEXIBLE CONNECTION:

A. Provide flexible CONNECTION of 4" minimum fabric width:

1. Between ductwork and the inlets and outlets of all fans except those listed below. For the fanslisted below, provide a flexible inlet connector and a rigid/sealed outlet connection.

a. Hazardous exhausts.

2. Equipment equipped with fans.3. All ductwork that crosses building expansion joints, as identified on the Architectural and

Structural Drawings.

B. The connections shall be placed as close to the equipment as practical except at fan suction connectionsand the clear gap at rest shall be not less than 3". At fan suction connections, locate flexible ductconnection at least 3 duct diameters away from fan inlet connection.

C. There shall be no tension of the fabric under static or dynamic loads.

D. All fabric for flexible duct connections to equipment shall be a minimum of 22 oz. Glass fabric, doublecoated with neoprene, fire retardant, waterproof, airtight, and approved UL, similar to Ventfabrics orVentglass.

E. Exterior flexible connection shall be insulated type similar to Duro Dyne.

F. Flexible connections shall be fabricated from approved flameproofed fabric conforming to NFPA 90A. Asbestos shall not be acceptable.

G. Flexible connections shall be installed further upstream from fan powered equipment (in the main ductsize) to prevent obstruction of the fan inlet due to suction of the fabric into the airstream.

H. Ductwork shall be increased in size where the flexible connections are located to prevent fully drawn inconnections from blocking any duct area. Submit detail for review.



2.11 DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES:

A. Diffusers and grilles as scheduled on the Plans with minimum performance noted.

2.12 DUCT SHOP DRAWINGS:

A. Duct Coordination Shop Drawings shall not be required for this project.

2.13 SPIRAL DUCT:

A. Materials:

1. Unless otherwise specified, all spiral duct and fittings shall be a minimum of G-60 galvanizedsheet metal in accordance with ASTM A653 and A924 specifications. Gauges are to be inaccordance with current SMACNA standards (Reference 1.1.3).

B. Construction: Spiral duct shall be round spiral lock seam construction, of gauges in accordance withSMACNA guidelines. Duct shall be continuous unjoined lengths.

C. Fittings shall be fabricated standing seam sealed fittings. Elbows shall be gored with 1.5 bend radius.Diverging flow fittings shall be constructed with a radiused entrance to branch taps. All taps shall bemade with factory fabricated fittings. All fittings on lined insulated duct shall be lined and insulated.

D. Access doors on spiral ductwork shall be bolted access doors.

2.14 DUCT ACCESS PLATES:

A. Fixed removable screwed plates with gasket.

2.15 DUCT SEALER:

A. Premium quality indoor/outdoor heavy duty pressure sensitive duct joint rolled sealer “Gray Matter”butyl adhesive / sealant. Aluminum backed, 30 mil thick modified butyl adhesive / sealant, peel strength17 lbs. per linear inch. 720 psi tensile strength with 560% elongation, 24 hour full bonding time.

B. Service temperature: !20EF to 220EF.

C. Application temperature: 35EF to 110EF.

D. Mold and mildew resistant.

E. Surface Burning Characteristics:

1. Flamespread: 25.2. Smoke Developed: 50.

F. SMACNA pressure Classes ½, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 and 10" w.g.

G. Seal Classes SMACNA A, B, C.



H. Manufacturer: Carlisle, “Hardcast 701 Alumagrip”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SEALING:

A. Seal all ductwork as it is being assembled. Seal all joints - longitudinal and transverse. Seal all jointswith equipment with flex connectors. Seal with “Hardcast 701 Alumagrip” sealant.

B. Seal all ductwork to SMACNA seal Class “A”.

3.02 DUCT HANGER AND SUPPORTS:

A. Provide suitable angle iron/strap hangers and supports inside the mechanical shafts, mechanical roomsand in ceilings of the buildings, and on the roof(s) as shown on the Drawings (Architectural/HVAC).This work shall be performed as required by job conditions as instructed by the Architect in the field tosupport all air distribution ductwork and devices in both horizontal and vertical planes.

B. When hanging and supporting the ductwork, the following shall be complied with:

1. Except as otherwise note, ductwork up to 42" in greatest dimension shall be hung by using sheetmetal bands secured as a minimum at (2) locations to the vertical sides of the ductwork and at (1)location under the duct. All support systems shall be compatible with the building structure androofing system as approved by the Architect.

2. Where ductwork major axis dimension is larger than 42", ductwork shall be hung by usingthreaded rods of not less than d" soft steel secured to angle iron trapeze support frame aroundductwork with threaded nuts for securement and adjustment.

3. Ductwork shall be securely attached to the building construction. The hanger design and spacingshall be governed by the major duct dimension and shall be in accordance with SMACNA DuctManual, except as modified hereinbefore. Vertical ductwork shall be supported at each floorlevel in an approved manner using angles or channels attached to the ducts. The installation,when complete and under operating conditions, shall be free from chatter or vibration. Ifnecessary to achieve this, additional supports and/or bracing shall be furnished without extra costto the Owner. Supports and bars and similar items shall be primed and painted structural steel.Touch up with aluminum paint any surfaces where galvanizing is destroyed on indoor ductwork,zinc primer on exposed ductwork with a final coat of aluminum paint. Provide vibration isolationhangers where specified under Vibration Isolation Section 23 83 00 of these Specifications.

4. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall provide all supplemental steel required to support the ductworkin shafts, mechanical rooms or on the floor where structural steel is not properly positioned.Beam clamps shall be double sided.

5. The maximum hanger spacing shall be 10"-0" on centers and additionally on each side of anelbow or change-in-direction fitting.

3.03 SHEETMETAL TESTING:

A. Duct leakage testing shall not be required for this project.



3.04 PAINTING:

A. All exposed ductwork in finished rooms except mechanical rooms shall be painted one coat primer, onecoat finish of color selected by Architect.

3.05 DUCTWORK PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION:

A. Provide temporary polyethylene film seal end cap for HVAC openings to prevent contamination of theHVAC ductwork interior prior to start-up of the HVAC system.

B. On duct sizes 6˝ in diameter to 14" in diameter or 16-47 linear inches for square or rectangular ducts, thepolyethylene film seal shall be capable of extending at least 8" beyond the opening of the duct and shallbe attached to the duct by means of an elastic band sewn around the circumference of the film seal. Thepolyethylene film shall be a minimum of 2 mil (0.002") thickness and the elastic band shall be aminimum of ¼" thick.

C. On duct sizes 14" in diameter to 38" in diameter or 48-119 linear inches for square or rectangular ducts,the polyethylene film seal shall be capable of extending at least 12" beyond the opening of the duct andshall be attached to the duct by means of an elastic band sewn around the circumference of the film seal.The polyethylene film shall be a minimum of 2.5 mil (0.0025") thickness and the elastic band shall be aminimum of d" thick.

D. Make: Ductcap Products Inc.

3.06 DUCT CLEANING:

A. Clean dust and debris from interior and exterior of all new ducts using wet rags and vacuums.

B. Cover open ends of ductwork when installation does not proceed for more than one day. Thisrequirement shall apply to each individual run of duct, such that no duct section shall remain open orunconnected for more than 8 hours.

3.07 SOUND LININGS:

A. Adhere duct liner to duct wall with full coverage of adhesive conforming to ASTM C919.

B. Secure Insulation with mechanical fasteners per SMACNA, NAIMA or duct liner manufacturer’srecommendations. Pin length shall be such as to limit compression of liner.

C. All exposed edges of duct liner shall be factory or field coated. For systems with air flow in excess of4000 fpm (20 m/sec) a metal nosing must be installed in all liner leading edges.

D. Repair all unprotected penetrations, tears and rips in the surface of the liner with liner adhesive meetingASTM C919 or Johns Manville Superseal, or provide continuous sheetmetal edge protectors at enteringand leaving edges of lined duct sections.

E. Dimensions of lined ductwork are clear inside dimensions after lining has been installed.

F. Extent of ductwork sound linings shall be as indicated on the Drawings.



3.08 SOUNDPROOF CONSTRUCTION FOR DUCT PENETRATIONS:

A. Required for openings between ductwork and equipment room walls, also floors (except in shafts).

B. Soundproofing: Pack openings with fibrous glass blanket or board for full depth of penetration and caulkeach side of opening with non-hardening, non-aging caulking compound.



DIVISION 23 SECTION 23 37 00 - HVAC AIR INLETS & OUTLETS PAGE 1


SECTION 23 37 00 - HVAC AIR INLETS & OUTLETS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions andDivision 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes requirements for HVAC air inlets and outlets.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and inlets of typesand capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5years.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with American Refrigeration Institute (ARI) 650“Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets”.

2. Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with American Society of Heating,Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 70 “Method of Testing for Rating theAir Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets”.

3. Test and rate air outlets and inlets in certified laboratories under requirements of Air DiffusionCouncil (ADC) 1062 “Certification, Rating and Test Manual”.

4. Provide air outlets and inlets bearing ADC Certified Rating Seal.5. Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 90A

“Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems”.

1.04 REFERENCES:

A. ADC 1062, Certification, Rating and Test Manual.

B. AMCA 500, Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.

C. ARI 650, Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets.

D. ASHRAE 70, Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets.

E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) B 221.

F. NFPA 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.



1.05 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for air outlets and inlets including the following:

1. Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, room location, numberfurnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

2. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating construction,finish, and mounting details.

3. Indicate for each unit the neck size, neck velocity, noise criteria (NC) value with accessoriesinstalled and at the applied airflow and the throw to 50 fpm terminal velocity.

B. Submit three (3) samples of each type of finish furnished.

C. Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes, and spare parts lists. Include thisdata, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers. Identify onoutside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending andprevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.

B. Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffic.Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose withwaterproof wrapping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

A. Provide diffusers of one of the following:

1. Anemostat Products Div.; Dymanics Corp. of America.2. Krueger Mfg. Co.3. Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc.4. Price Industries, Inc.

B. Provide registers and grilles of one of the following:

1. Anemostat Products Div.; Dynamics Corp. of America.2. Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc.3. Price Industries, Inc.

2.02 CEILING AIR DIFFUSERS:

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard ceiling air diffusers whereshown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated,and as required for complete installation.



B. Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses,throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer’s current data.

C. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceilingsystems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and adequatesupport. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling systems which willcontain each type of ceiling air diffuser.

D. Types: Provide ceiling diffusers of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as listed on diffuserschedule. The following requirements shall apply to nomenclature indicated on schedule:

1. Diffuser Faces:

a. Square: Square housing, core of square concentric louvers, square or round ductconnection.

b. Linear Slot: Extruded aluminum continuous slot, single or multiple.c. Linear Bar: Extruded aluminum with fixed deflection bars parallel to the long dimension.

2. Diffuser Mountings:

a. Flush: Diffuser housing above ceiling surface with flush perimeter flange and gasket toseal against ceiling.

b. Lay-In: Diffuser housing sized to fit between ceiling exposed suspension tee bars andrest on top surface of tee bar.

3. Diffuser Patterns:

a. Adjustable linear: Manual adjustable core with concentric rings or louvers, fullyadjustable for horizontal to vertical air flow and fully adjustable for 1- or 2-directionflow as indicated on drawings.

b. 1 Way: Fixed louver face for 1-direction air flow, direction indicated on Drawings.c. 2 Way: Fixed louver face for 2-direction air flow, directions indicated on Drawings.d. 3 Way: Fixed louver face for 3-direction air flow, directions indicated on Drawings.e. 4 Way: Fixed louver face for 4-direction air flow, directions indicated on Drawings.

4. Diffuser Dampers:

a. Diffuser dampers shall not be provided. It is a requirement of this project that upstreamduct volume dampers be provided.

5. Diffuser Accessories:

a. Equalizing grid: Provide for all ceiling diffusers.

6. Diffuser Finishes:

a. Enamel: Semi-gloss enamel finish as selected by Architect.



2.03 GRILLES:

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard grilles where shown; of size,shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as requiredfor complete installation.

B. Performance: Provide grilles that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop,and noise criteria ratings for each size device and listed in manufacturer’s current data.

C. Provide grilles with border styles that are compatible with adjacent wall or ceiling systems, and that arespecifically manufactured to fit into construction with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to generalconstruction drawings and specifications for types of construction which will contain each type of grille.

D. Types: Provide grilles of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as listed on air distributionschedule. The following requirements shall apply to nomenclature indicated on schedule:

1. Materials:

a. Aluminum Construction: Manufacturer’s standard extruded aluminum frame andadjustable blades.

2. Grille Faces:

a. Horizontal Straight Blades: Horizontal blades, individually adjustable or fixed, atmanufacturer’s standard spacing. See Drawings.

b. Vertically Straight Blades: Vertical blades, individually adjustable or fixed, atmanufacturer’s standard spacing. See Drawings.

c. Eggcrate Blades: Eggcrates grilles at manufacturer’s standard spacing.

3. Grille Dampers:

a. Opposed Blade: Adjustable opposed blade damper assembly, key operated from face ofregister.

4. Grille Accessories:

a. Operating Keys: Tools designed to fit through register or grille face and operate volumecontrol device.

5. Grille Finishes:

a. White Enamel: Semi-gloss white enamel finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION:

A. Inspect areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not proceed withwork until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.02 INSTALLATION/APPLICATION/ERECTION:

A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and inaccordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended function.

B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to interfaceinstallation of air outlets and inlets with other work.

C. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction “Reflected CeilingPlans”. Locate units as shown on drawings.

3.03 ACCEPTABLE CRITERIA:

A. HVAC air inlets and outlets shall be clean, undamaged, with no visible rivet marks, scratches orblemishes. Blades shall be rigid and not loose. No rattles shall be observed.

B. Mountings shall be clean to adjacent construction with uniform edge to adjacent surfaces.



DIVISION 23 SECTION 23 62 00 - SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS PAGE 1


SECTION 23 62 00 - SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY:


B. The Work of Section 23 05 00 - HVAC Basic Materials and Methods applies to the Work of this Section.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Furnish and install complete DX Cooling System, including evaporator unit, refrigerant piping, valvesand specialties, reusing existing condensing unit.

B. 6-year compressor warranty.

C. Cooling performance shall be as scheduled.

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Provide submittals for:

1. DX cooling system. 2. Refrigerants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 EVAPORATOR UNIT:

A. Ceiling suspended DX fan coil, low profile, with sheetmetal enclosure. Enclosure shall be painted off-white and shall be provided with a louvered bottom return panel and ducted front discharge.

B. Fan:

1. The evaporator unit fan shall be an assembly with a DWDI, forward curve direct driven by asingle motor.

2. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanentlylubricated bearings.

3. The indoor air unit fan motor shall be an ECM Type with two (2) selectable speeds, Low andHigh.

C. Filter:

1. Return air shall be filtered by an easily removable air filter.



D. Coil:

1. The evaporator coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth, pre-coated aluminum finson copper tubing.

2. Tubing shall have inner groves for high efficiency heat exchange.3. All tube joints shall be brazed.4. The coil shall be pressure tested at the factory.5. A sloped condensate pan and drain connections shall be provided under the coil.

E. Electrical:

1. The electrical power of the unit shall be as scheduled.2. The indoor unit shall be provided with an electrical heat element as scheduled.

F. Control:

1. The evaporator unit shall be provided with all necessary controls for fan and electric heating.Control shall be via low-voltage, non-communicating type t-stat.

G. Refrigerant:

1. Refrigerant shall be R-410a.

2.02 CONDENSING UNIT:


2.03 MANUFACTURER & MODEL:

A. As scheduled on the Plans.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL:

A. Install system in strict conformance with manufacturers printed installation instructions.

B. Follow latest EDA guidelines regarding refrigerant recovery.

3.02 NEW REFRIGERANT LINE INSTALLATIONS:

A. Flow Nitrogen through lines prior to and during brazing.

B. Soap test lines at 150 psig nitrogen pressure.

C. Triple evacuate system. First and second evacuation to 500 microns, breaking vacuum with refrigeranteach time. Final evacuation to be to 200 microns. If vacuum cannot be achieved, identify and correctsource of leaks.

D. Start refrigeration system, check system for proper refrigerant charge.



E. Checkout controls and verify system is operating properly.



DIVISION 23 SECTION 23 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING AND PAGE 1SMOKESTOPPING FOR HVAC SYSTEMS


SECTION 23 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING FOR HVAC SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Specification Section 07 84 13 - Firestop Penetration Systems applies to the work of this Section.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Provide firestopping and smokestopping for HVAC Systems to comply with the New York StateBuilding Code Section 714.

B. Provide submittals and installation detail sheets.

C. Coordinate product to be used with the General Contractor and other trades so as to provide one productthat will be used by all trades on this project. Submit on this elected product only.

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Provide a schedule of each type of penetration together with the proposed method of protecting thatpenetration type. Schedule shall include the following details:

1. Penetrated item (e.g. wall, floor, roof).2. Construction of item (e.g. metal studwall with gypsum wallboard).3. Fire rating of item (e.g. 1 hour wall).4. Description of penetrating item (e.g. 1" to 3" Schedule 40 pipe).5. Identification of penetrating seal to be used in this case (e.g. Rectorseal biostop pipe collar).6. UL or FM detail sheet (e.g. per attached example).7. UL of FM system number (e.g. WL1200).

B. Submittal shall include complete details for each penetration covered by this Division.

C. It is intended that the submittal include each detail in full for each system used, so that it is clear that theinstalling Contractor has the correct reviewed information in the field.




a. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM.)

b. ASTM E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.



1) ASTM E 119 Method of Fire Tests of Building Construction Materials.2) ASTM E 814 Test Method for Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops.3) ASTM C 665 (Corrosion & Microbial Resistance Portions) Standard

Specification for Mineral-Fiber Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Constructionand Manufactured Housing.


2. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and /or Factory Mutual Research Corporation for eachspecific intended application


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL:

A. Firestopping and smokestopping materials shall allow normal expansion and contraction (intumescent) ofthe penetrating item without failure of the penetrations seal, and shall be heat absorbing (endothermic).Products may not emit hazardous, combustible or irritating by-products during installation or curing.Products shall not require special tools for installation.

2.02 MASONRY EXEMPTION:

A. The Contractor shall note New York State Building Code Section 714.3.1 Exemption, which states:

1. Exception: Where the penetrating items are steel. ferrous or copper pipes, tubes or conduits, theannular space between the penetrating item and the fire-resistance-rated wall is permitted to beprotected by either of the following measures:

a. In concrete or masonry walls where the penetrating item is a maximum 6-inch (152 mm)nominal diameter and the area of the opening through the wall does not exceed 144square inches (0.0929 m2), concrete, grout or mortar is permitted where installed the fullthickness of the wall or the thickness required to maintain the fire-resistance rating.

b. The material used to fill the annular space shall prevent the passage of flame and hotgases sufficient to ignite cotton waste when subjected to ASTM E119 or UL 263time-temperature fire conditions under a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01inch (2.49 Pa) of water at the location of the penetration for the time period equivalent tothe fire-resistance rating of the construction penetrated. MANUFACTURERS

2.03 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturers: Provide products complying with requirements of the Contract Documents and made byone of the following:

1. Rectorseal.



2. Hilti, Inc.3. 3M Fire Protection Products.4. Specified Technologies Inc.5. U.S. Gypsum Company.6. Johns Manville.7. BlazeMaster.


A. Provide Firestopping Products which:

1. Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according torequirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain fire resistancerating of assembly.

a. F-rated systems in accordance with ASTM 814.b. T-rated systems in accordance with ASTM 814.

B. Firestopping Flamespread Performance Requirements:





E. Where a specific firestopping product is identified on the Drawings, either that product or a similarproduct which has been tested in the exact application shown on the drawings shall be employed, afterreview by the Engineer.








PART 3 - EXECUTION





D. Inspection: The Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) shall have final inspection review of all workperformed. Contractor shall make modifications to completed and uncompleted work as directed by theAHJ at the Contractor’s expense.

E. Refer to the Certified Installation Instructions sheet on the following page for an example of anacceptable installation method.

3.02 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING ITEMS:

A. Under Division 23, provide and pay for all firestopping materials, assemblies and labor to providecomplete firestopping and smokestopping.

B. Provide firestopping of penetrations at each fire-rated floor, wall or roof assembly of the followingcomponents:

1. Ducts provided by Division 23.2. Insulated pipe provided by Division 23.3. Uninsulated pipe provided by Division 23.4. Conduits provided by Division 23.

3.03 FIRE DAMPERS, SMOKE DAMPERS AND COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS:

A. Conform to manufacturer’s details and details shown on the Drawings for fire dampers, smoke dampersand combination fire/smoke dampers. Typically there is a gap of c" per foot of damper height or widthwhich is not to be caulked; however, a flange attached to the sleeve covers that opening.

Attachment(s): Example Detail Sheet



EXAMPLE

DIVISION 26 SECTION 26 00 00 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 1

DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL

SECTION 26 00 00 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The Contract Documents and the General provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions ofthe Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1Specification Sections apply to the Work of this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for Division 26, Electricalwork.

1.03 DIVISION 26 - DESCRIPTION:

A. The technical specifications of this Contract are arranged for the convenience of the Owner andContractor into Divisions of work. The work of Division 26, Electrical, is further described inSpecification Sections of the 26 00 00 Series and on Contract Drawings of the “E” series.

B. The organization of this work into Divisions shall not relieve the Prime Contractor from providing all ofthe work shown on the complete set of drawings or specified in the complete set of Specifications,whether or not the individual subcontractors correctly identify their respective responsibilities.


A. To the extent that the work of this Division or Contract includes the work of other trades, the Contractorfor this Division shall adhere to the requirements of other specification sections. All GeneralConstruction work shall be performed in accordance with the provisions of the appropriate Division 1through Division 14 Section. All mechanical work shall be performed in accordance with appropriateDivision 23 Sections.

1.05 WORK INCLUDED:

The work of this Division shall include providing all materials, labor, services, permits and related workto furnish a complete, operating, tested, functioning, documented Electrical System including all workshown, specified or required for proper system operation including but not limited to the following:

A. Provide demolition and removal of existing circuits, devices, and fixtures, where shown, removal of alldebris from site and proper disposal of same.

B. Provide Basic Materials and Methods. (Section 26 05 00)

C. Provide Temporary Construction Electrical Services. (Section 26 05 15)

D. Provide Complete Grounding System. (Section 26 05 26)



E. Provide Electrical Equipment Identification. (Section 26 05 53)

F. Provide Lighting Control Devices. (Section 26 09 23)

G. Provide Electrical Panelboards. (Section 26 24 00)

H. Provide Motor Starters and Disconnects. (Section 26 29 13)

I. Provide Lighting. (Section 26 50 00)

J. Provide Firestopping and Smokestopping for Electrical System. (Section 26 84 00)

K. Provide Submittals and Shop Drawings.

L. Provide Equipment and Conductor Identification.

M. Provide Testing of Equipment and Conductors.

N. Provide work identified as assigned to Division 26 in the attached “Responsibility Matrix”.

O. Provide Submittals, Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. Provide Shop Drawings, at a minimum,for the following:

1. Lighting.2. Lighting Control Devices.3. Raceways/Conduit.4. Wiring Devices.5. Junction Boxes.6. Conductors.7. Fire Alarm and Detection Equipment.8. Others as required by individual specification sections.

P. Provide Owner’s Operation Instruction.

Q. Provide conduits, boxes, raceways and pathways for telecommunications systems. (Division 27 - Section27 00 01 to be included under Division 26 Contractor’s scope)

R. Provide fire alarm and detection system. (Division 28 to be included under Electrical Contractor’s scope)

S. Provide relocations of equipment and lighting fixtures where shown.

T. Provide certificate of compliance and fees for permits and inspections.

U. Provide openings in existing and new construction as required for the work of this Division.

V. Provide sleeves and inserts.

W. Provide maintenance of system in good condition until final acceptance.

X. Provide cooperation with Owner’s telecommunication, audio-visual, and integrated automation vendors.



Y. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals in the form of a single composite electronic PDF file.

Z. Provide warranty.

AA. Provide “As-Built” Drawings.


A. The Owner’s telecommunication vendor shall install cabling and faceplates for telephone, computer andtelevision. Final terminations shall be performed by Owner’s vendors.

B. The Owner’s integrated automation vendor shall install raceways, cabling and devices for temperaturecontrol. Final terminations shall be performed by Owner’s vendors.

C. Items of work listed for other divisions in the attached “Responsibility Matrix” are related to the work ofDivision 26 but not included in the work of Division 26.

1.07 RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX:

A. Appended to this section is a copy of the Syracuse University assigned “Responsibility Matrix”. Division 26 is responsible to perform the items listed in for Division 26 and 28.

1.08 SPECIAL CHARACTER OF SADLER HALL:

A. The highest degree of quality of materials and professionalism of workmanship is required for theElectrical System.

B. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain a worker instruction and quality monitoring campaignthroughout the duration of the project directed at enlisting each worker in maintaining the highest qualityof work and the maximum protection of the existing and proposed facilities from unintentional,neglectful or intentional damage and to provide the best possible electrical system for the building.

1.09 ALTERNATES/ALLOWANCES:

A. Refer to Division 1 for a description regarding alternates/allowances.


A. Division 26 shall be responsible to apply for, obtain and meet the requirements of all permits andinspections required by jurisdictions for the work of Division 26. Division 26 shall pay all fees associatedwith these permits and inspections.

1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS:

A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to thoroughly examine the complete project documentsincluding Plans and Specifications prior to bid and to notify the Engineer of any uncertainties or apparentomission, conflicts, or discrepancies between the Plans and Specifications. In any case of a conflictbetween the Plans and Specifications or between two Specification sections, it shall be assumed that thelarger capacity or quantity shall govern until a determination can be made by the Engineer.



B. Plans and Specifications are of abbreviated form. Omitted words or phrases shall be inferred.

C. Plans and Specifications are complementary. Provide all work which is either shown or specified or both.


A. Division 26 shall conform with all Federal, State, County, and Municipal Laws, Ordinances andRegulations. Comply with the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL:

A. See Applicable Division 26 Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL:

A. See Applicable Division 26 Sections.

3.02 SUBMITTAL LIST:

A. Within 10 days of receipt of award of subcontract, submit to the Architect, Engineer and Owner throughthe Construction Manager, a complete listing of proposed submittals, compiled by this DivisionContractor based on the requirements of the Specifications as well as the work shown and scheduled onthe Drawings.



DIVISION 26 SECTION 26 05 00 - ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS PAGE 1


SECTION 26 05 00 - ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The Contract Documents and the General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions ofthe Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1Specification Sections apply to the Work of this Section.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Provide Basic Materials and Methods as follows:

1. Conduit.2. Conduit Fittings.3. Sleeves, Inserts and Openings.4. Support Systems.5. Wireways/Wire Troughs.6. Outlet, Junction and Pull Boxes.7. Conductors.8. Conductor Splicing Materials.9. Wiring Devices.10. Conductor Pulling Lubricant.11. Miscellaneous Painting.12. Waterproofing, Caulking and Sealing.13. Protection and Storage of Materials and the Work.

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Provide submittals for the following:

1. Conductors.2. Conductor splicing materials.3. Conductor pulling lubricant.4. Conduit.5. Conduit fittings.6. Conduit support systems.7. Outlet, junction and pull boxes.8. Electrical and telecommunications flush floor boxes.9. Sleeves, inserts and openings.10. Wireways, wire trough and cable tray.11. Wiring devices.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUCTORS:

A. Conductors:

1. Conductors shall be annealed copper, 98 percent conductivity.2. Grounding conductor shall have green color coded insulation.3. Signal circuits shall be color coded using solid colors with contrasting tracer color lines.4. Panel feeders shall be copper conductors unless otherwise shown.5. Aluminum conductors shall not be acceptable.

B. Insulation:

1. 600 volts rating for building feeders and branch circuits.

2. 300 volts rating for signal systems operating at 50 volts or less.3. #12 through #8 AWG: dry locations, use type THWN/THHN.4. #6 and larger in normally dry locations type THWN/THHN.5. #12 AWG and larger: under buildings, slab on grade, steam tunnels, crawlspaces, boiler rooms,

pump house, kitchen, mechanical rooms, use type THWN/THHN.6. Wiring within removable partitions: use type UF where permitted by code.7. Wiring to street lighting systems, snow melting systems, exterior signs, etc., use THWN, RHW

or UF in conduit.8. For fire rated wiring systems, use type RHW cable.

C. Cables:

1. Power cables shall be allowed only as called out on Drawings.2. All cables shall be either a UL-listed 600V MC or AC.3. All conductors shall comply with Part A and Part B of this Section.4. Phase conductors within the cable shall be marked or colored for identification.5. Cable shall be constructed with a galvanized steel interlocking armor. Aluminum shall not be

allowed.6. Connectors shall be similar to Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC).7. Manufacturers: Southwire Duraclad or similar in General Cable.

D. Make: Anaconda, General Cable, Rome Cable, Circle, General Electric, Essex, Okonite, Brand-Rex.

2.02 CONDUCTOR SPLICING MATERIALS:

A. #10 AWG and Smaller (600V Class):

1. Pressure conductors shall be UL-listed for the wire combination being spliced.2. Ideal 344 Red Yellow, 3M Performance Plus R/Y+.

B. #8 AWG and Larger (600V Class):

1. Pre-insulated multi-tap connectors. Burndy Uni-tap, ILSCO Cleartaps, or approved equal.2. Non-reversible, crimped pressure connectors, taped. Burndy, Blackburn or approved equal.



C. Tape (600V Class):

1. U.L. listed for 600 volt minimum.2. Scotch 33 or 80, or Plymouth, or Bishop.

2.03 CONDUCTOR PULLING LUBRICANT:

A. The cable lubricant shall meet the following performance specifications:

1. When subjected to a 100 lbs./ft. Normal force, between (type) cable and (type) conduit, thelubricated cable system shall have a coefficient of kinetic friction less than 0.25 (pulling forcegreater than lbs./ft.)

2. The lubricant shall be U.L. (or CSA) listed.3. When used on high voltage cable, the lubricant shall not affect the volume resistivity of any

semi-conducting jacket or insulation shield present. The volume resistivity of thesemi-conducting material shall at no time increase more than 100% when tested via the ICEAT-25-425 method, 90 degrees centigrade exposure, 7 day test, readings made at 23 degreescentigrade daily.

4. The lubricant shall not affect the tensile/elongation properties of the cable jacket more thanexisting ICEA/NEMA aging specifications allow.

5. The lubricant shall contain no waxes, greases, silicones, or polyalkylene glycol oils or waxes.

B. Manufacturer: Polywater J. American Polywater Corporation, P.O. Box 53, Stillwater, Minnesota 55082.

2.04 CONDUIT:

A. Aluminum Rigid Conduit:

1. Aluminum Rigid Conduit shall require silicone treated interior, with all aluminum accessoriesand approved aluminum lubricant for threaded connections.

B. Flexible Metal Conduit:

1. Steel interlock type, galvanized, with galvanized steel fittings.2. Complies with NEC Article 348 and U.L. standards for flexible conduit.3. Make: Galflex or approved equal.

C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT):

1. EMT shall be low carbon steel, with set screw type, concrete tight fittings.2. Exterior shall be galvanized by electrolytic process and extra coat provided by bright dip in zinc

chromate solution.3. Interior shall be coated with baked planting process.4. Make: Cerro, Republic, Allied Tube, Youngstown, Wheatland or approved equal.

D. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit:

1. Heavy galvanized steel core type.2. Oil resistant thermoplastic cover, grey color.



3. Integral ground wire, sizes d" to 1¼".4. For high/low temperature applications, use type H.C.5. Use steel, gasketed, insulated throat, compression type liquidtight fittings.6. Make: Anaconda, O.Z. Gedney, Ultratite or approved equal.

E. Rigid Non Metallic Conduit (PVC):

1. Heavy wall, 90EC temperature rated, polyvinyl chloride schedule 40 conforming to NEMAStandards.

2. Approved standard manufacturer’s fittings and supports as required.3. Make: Carlon or approved equal.

F. Rigid Metallic Conduit (RGS):

1. Rigid galvanized steel, hot dipped threaded type.2. Galvanized threaded malleable iron fittings.3. Make: Cerro, Republic, Allied Tube, Youngstown, Wheatland or approved equal.

G. PVC Coated Rigid Metallic Conduit (PRGS):

1. Rigid galvanized steel, hot dipped, threaded with 40 mil min polyvinyl chloride exterior coating.2. UL-listed, conforming to NEMA RN-1-1998.3. Make: Korkap or approved equal.

H. Aluminum flexible conduit and cast or plotted metal conduit shall not be used.

2.05 CONDUIT FITTINGS:

A. EMT:

1. All fittings shall be U.L. listed steel or malleable iron.2. Branch circuit conduits larger than 1" diameter and conduits containing feeders serving

panelboards shall have grounding type bushings.3. Set screw type fittings, Concrete tight as manufactured by Neer, OZ Gedney, Bridgeport or

equal.4. Compression connectors, squeeze type Efcor or equal.

B. Flexible:

1. Fittings shall be UL listed steel or malleable iron.2. Fittings for flexible steel conduits shall be squeeze type as manufactured by Thomas and Betts,

Steel City or Appleton.

C. Liquidtight:

1. Fittings shall be malleable iron, tapered hub threads, with safe-edge ground cone and doublebevel sealing ring.

2. Fittings for liquid tight flexible conduits shall be screw-in type manufactured by Thomas andBetts Company or Pittsburgh Standard Conduit Company.



D. Rigid Conduit:

1. Bushings for metal conduit terminations shall be the nylon insulated type throat, with groundingtype locknut ahead of bushing.

2. Die cast zinc-alloy and pressure cast and indenter type fittings shall not be approved. Providesteel or malleable iron only.

3. Conduit hubs shall be as manufactured by Myers Electric Products, Inc., Raco, T&B, GeneralElectric Company or equal.

E. PVC Coated Rigid Metallic Conduit:

1. All ferrous fittings shall be PVC coated, UL-listed and approved by conduit manufacturer for usewith conduit.

2. A urethane coating shall be uniformly applied to the interior of all conduit fittings. All threadsshall have a uniform urethane coating applied.

F. Die cast, pressure cast, potted metal or similar type fittings shall not be used.

2.06 CONDUIT SUPPORT SYSTEMS:

A. Trapeze Type Hangers:

1. Steel horizontal members and threaded hanger rods.2. Rods shall not be less than ½" diameter.3. Make: Kindorf G-953 Series, or equal in Unistrut or B-line complete with all necessary bolts,

screws, angles, anchors, connection plates, straps, etc., as required to perform the necessaryfunctions.

B. Conduit Clamps and Supports:

1. Steel hangers and threaded hex nuts.2. Provide complete, with all necessary bolts, screws, angles, anchors, connections plates, straps,

etc. as required to perform the necessary functions.3. T&B Kindorf B-905 12 gauge channel with Galv-Krom finish or equal in Unistrut or Cooper B-

Line.

2.07 OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULLBOXES:

A. Type:

1. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, boxes shall be NEMA rated as follows:

a. Where installed indoors and intended primarily for protection against access tohazardous partes, boxes shall be NEMA 1 rated.

b. Where installed indoors or outdoors and intended for protection against access tohazardous parts, as well as protection against ingress of falling water (rain, sleet, snow),boxes shall be NEMA 3R rated.

c. Where installed indoors or outdoors and intended for protection against access tohazardous to hazardous parts, as well as protection against ingress of falling water anddirect spray, boxes shall be NEMA 4 rated.



d. Where the requirements of Item d. are met, as well as protection against corrosion, boxesshall be NEMA 4X rated.

B. Construction:

1. Galvanized, stamped steel shall be provided when recessed in construction or exposed on wallsand ceilings in dry areas.

2. Deep condulet style with hubs, or Myers hubs for exposed work in damp area or wet location orfor weatherproof type outlets.

3. Large pullboxes shall require 14 gauge galvanized steel, fold and weld construction; with 14gauge galvanized and gasketed steel cover secured in place by galvanized sheet metal screws onmaximum 10 inches centers. All cut edges to be free of burrs.

4. Provide cast iron, gasketed, watertight boxes where installed in earth, surface mounted outdoors,where threaded connection is needed.

C. Size: Provide as required for number and size of conduit and conductors. Coordinate depth to suit walldepth and construction. Use special forms and designs as required for outlet facilities.

D. Covers: Provide design and style to suit outlet box and electric facility. Provide for all unused ornon-designated boxes. NEMA 1, 12, 3R, rating for area environment and use watertight cover withgasket for exterior boxes.

E. Elevator pits shall be equipped with while-in-use NEMA 3R receptacle covers.

F. While-in-Use Covers:

1. Provide size, design, and alignment to suit outlet box.2. Provide for all boxes designated on prints and all other required locations as per NEC 406.8 (B).3. Provide with clear-polycarbonate shield.4. Make: P&S WIUC10 for single gang and WIUC20 for double gang. Equivalent in Hubbell is

acceptable.

G. Junction and pullboxes used for fire alarm shall be painted red. Covers shall be painted red.

H. Fixture Studs: Use d" studs and securely fastened to support fixtures.

I. Make: Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, O.Z. Gedney, National, Steel City, Raco, Pyle-National.

2.08 SLEEVES, INSERTS AND OPENINGS:

A. “Link-seal” assembly as manufactured by Thunderline (see Execution for locations).

B. Schedule 40 steel pipe, packed with fire barrier wool and caulk (see Execution for locations).

C. Fire barrier wool and caulk. No sleeve necessary (see Execution for locations).

D. Where 3 hour fire rating is required, use split collar fire seal with sleeve.

E. Where penetrating through a floor, the sleeve shall be waterproof, as well as fireproof. Submit throughfloor sleeve system.



2.09 WIREWAYS AND WIRE TROUGH:

A. Use hinged cover type wire way with provisions for full lay-in along the entire length of run.

B. Wireway shall be steel, enclosed with gray enamel finish.

C. Use JK sectional NEMA dust resistant, oil tight type where subjected to moisture, in pump rooms,mechanical, electric and fan rooms, exterior wall, shops, maintenance shop, and similar locations.

D. Knockouts along runs.

E. Provide all elbows, tees, pullboxes, fittings, hangers, reducers, supports, etc., to meet installationrequirements.

F. Size as shown on drawings or code size where not noted.

G. Make: Square D “Square Duct” or equal by Hoffman, General Electric, Meco, Wiremold.

2.10 WIRING DEVICES:

A. Receptacle, Surge Protection Device:

1. Copper-alloy contacts, thermal protection in three modes (L-G, L-N, N-G) absorbing 340 joulesper mode of energy absorption and 24,000 amp maximum surge capability, three thermal fusesand two overcurrent protection fuses, autoground clip.

2. High impact resistant thermoplastic for all exposed molded parts, wrap around face-lockingstrap, epoxy compound encapsulating the internal components.

3. UL-listed 1449 3rd Edition, Type 3 SPD, 20 amp circuit rating.4. Visual LED surge status indicator to alert user to surge suppression circuit condition. Visual

indicator will be illuminated (GREEN) when power is on and surge suppression circuit is fullyfunctional. Visual indicator will not be flashing red upon loss of surge suppression protection.Audible alarm will sound when there is a loss of surge suppression protection. Audible alarmable to be turned on/off.

5. Extra heavy duty use surge protection device receptacle, NEMA 5-20R.6. Make: Pass & Seymour #PT 5362SP with plugtail connector PTRA6STR.

B. Receptacle, GFCI:

1. Nickel-plated mounting strap and terminal screws.2. High impact resistant, thermoplastic construction for receptacle face and back body.3. UL-listed, 20 amp circuit rating, no feed through on plugtail.4. Trip indicator light (red lamp) and “safelock protection” which denies power if there is a ground

fault, if GFCI is miswired or if GFCI fails. Device to include self-test circuitry.5. Specification grade receptacle, NEMA Type 5-20R.6. Make: Pass & Seymour plugtail GFCI Receptacle PT2097 with plugtail connector PTRA6STR.

C. Receptacle, Duplex:

1. Grounding type with brass integral ground system and auto ground clip, brass line contacts, brassmounting strap and brass plugtail contacts.



2. High strength nylon construction for receptacle face and back body.3. UL-listed, 20 amp circuit rating, NEMA Type 5-20R.4. Extra heavy-duty use specification grade receptacles with stranded right angle plugtail connector.5. Make: Pass & Seymour Duplex Receptacle PT5362A with plugtail connector PTRA6STR.

D. Wall Plates:

1. Provide thermoplastic wall plates molded of rugged, practically indestructible, self-extinguishingnylon. Wall plates shall be preferred for use in high-abuse applications.

2. Standard colors available in ivory, white, brown, gray, black, red and light almond. Color to beselected by Architect, except where specifically shown.

3. Nominal thickness, 0.070".4. Make: Pass & Seymour Trademaster Thermoplastic Wall Plates “TP” Series.

E. Ceiling Plates:

1. Round ceiling plate, white finish, steel, to cover existing cast-in-place ceiling boxes.2. Mulberry Model 40430 or equal.


A. All equipment, materials and products furnished shall be new unless specifically shown to be reused. Allmaterials shall be new and of the best quality of their respective kinds. The work when completed will beaccepted in an undamaged and prefect condition only. Where equipment, materials and products are usedfor the same purpose, they shall be provided by the same manufacturer.


A. All equipment, materials and products shall conform to the applicable ANSI, ASA, NFPA, UL, AGAand/or ARI standard. All electrical equipment shall be UL or ETL Listed.

2.13 WARRANTY:

A. Provide one year manufacturer’s warranty on all equipment, materials and products. Where shown orspecified, provide manufacturer’s extended warranty.

2.14 SUBSTITUTIONS FOR SPECIFIED EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS:

A. Design Equipment - The design of this Project is based upon the use of the specified equipment materialsand products. The Plans are prepared on the basis of the arrangement, size, capacity and characteristics ofthe design equipment.

B. Specified Alternate Equipment - In the event the Contractor elects to use equipment named as analternate manufacturer herein, the Contractor shall verify that the equipment is of the same capacity,arrangement, size and characteristics as the design equipment and shall make all incidental changes in hiswork and coordinate and pay for any changes in work made necessary by deviations from the designcapacity, arrangement, size and characteristics of the alternate manufacturer’s equipment.



C. Substitutions of Unspecified Equipment, Products and Materials - Unspecified equipment, products andmaterials may be added to the List of Specified Alternate Equipment, Products and Materials at therequest of any bidder by written application at least five (5) days prior to the bid date.

D. Addition of an unspecified equipment product of material to the List of Alternate Manufacturers willoccur at the determination of the Engineer if there is sufficient time to review the proposed substitutionprior to bid date and to issue addenda to all Contractors. In no case will substitutions be approved toindividual bidders. Substitution requests will not be acted upon within the last five (5) days prior to biddate.

E. Addition of unspecified equipment, products and materials to the List of Alternate Manufacturers doesnot relieve the Contractor from his obligation described in subparagraph B to verify that the equipment isof the same arrangement, capacity, size and characteristics and to pay for any modifications required inhis and other Contractors’ work made necessary by the use of this equipment.

F. By submission of his bid for this Project, the Contractor acknowledges the authority and prerogative ofthe Engineer and Owner to evaluate proposed substitutions as to suitability for the Project and theContractor agrees to abide by the Engineer’s decision if unspecified equipment, products and material aredisallowed by the Engineer.

2.15 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION:



C. All materials shall be properly protected from weather, damage and theft. The Contractor shall beresponsible for the proper care and protection of all materials, equipment, etc., on site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS:

A. Provide equipment foundations for all floor mounted equipment, transformers, panels, etc., and/or wherecalled for on Plans. Submit detail sketches giving size and height for approval, if requested. Use 3000 psiconcrete. Chamfer edges, trowel smooth. Securely bond to floor by roughening and coating with cementgrout. Set anchor bolts in sleeves before pouring. After anchoring, fill equipment bases with thin groutaccording to manufacturer’s printed instructions. Carefully align shafts and set plumb before grouting.Re-align shafts after grout has set.

3.02 MISCELLANEOUS PAINTING:

A. Paint all hangers and exposed or unpainted or ungalvanized iron work with two brush coats of black rustpreventative paint. Touch up any damaged surfaces of factory painted equipment.



3.03 ADJUSTING AND INITIAL LUBRICATION:

A. Adjust each system to air quantities shown on drawings. Balance system according to the requirementscontained herein. Adjust all automatic control systems for proper operation. Adjust all temperaturecontrols for proper operation. Adjust all electrical systems. Adjust all motors for proper rotation. Adjustall dampers for tight closing. Adjust all electrical work free from grounds of phase or neutral conductors.

B. As soon as installed, lubricate and leave in good working order, all motors, bearings, etc., in accordancewith manufacturer’s instruction.

C. Lubrication Chart - Provide 8½" x 11" lubrication chart, typed in capital letters, mounted in wood frameunder clear plastic. Hang where directed. Mechanical Contractor shall provide chart listing all motors.Other Contractors supply information on motors furnished by them. List the following information:

1. Name and location of equipment.2. Type of lubrication recommended by manufacturer.3. Lubrication period recommended by manufacturer.

3.04 CONDUITS:

A. General:

1. Securely support conduit from building construction, separately from outlets and boxes whichare secured to the building. Supports shall be spaced at intervals of eight (8) feet maximum or asrequired by NEC Code.

2. Conduit runs shall be concealed unless otherwise specified. Do not expose in finished roomunless specifically permitted.

3. Conduit runs shall be exposed in electrical, mechanical and fan rooms.4. Conduit runs shall be installed neatly and parallel to ceilings, walls, and floors.5. All conduits and fittings on exposed work shall be secured by means of metal clips on back

plates.

6. Avoid installation adjacent to hot surfaces. Raceways shall be spaced from heat sources asfollows:

a. Steam: no conduit within 12 inches of outside surface of insulation.b. Hot water piping: 6 inches minimum from outside surface of insulation.

7. Provide one pull box or junction box per three 90E bends in any one conduit run.8. Plug openings until wire is installed and ream conduit joints and ends before installation. Wires

shall not be pulled until conduit system is completed in all details.

9. Conduits feeding panelboards; pull boxes:

a. Terminations at each pullbox, panelboard and switch board shall have double locknut(one inside and one outside).

b. Provide a minimum of two (2) 1" conduit stubs from each flush mounted panelboard toan accessible ceiling space above the panel, in an adjacent area or at the ceiling line.

10. Conduit terminating in gasketed enclosures shall be terminated with conduit hubs or Myers hubs.



11. Avoid installing conduits in water or where excessive moisture exists. For conduits terminatingto boxes in wet areas, use Myers hub fittings.

B. Aluminum Conduit:

1. Use in dry locations for concealed or exposed work.2. Do not install in direct contact with concrete or earth.3. Provide expansion joints in runs at maximum 120! intervals in the run.

C. EMT:

1. Use in dry locations for concealed or exposed work.

D. Liquidtight Conduit:

1. Use for terminating connection for motors, compressors, air conditioners, sound equipment anddry type transformers.

2. Provide proper fittings with insulated throats. Provide green wire ground.3. Use Liquidtight conduit and fittings in outdoor locations and in pump rooms, garages, elevator

pits and other locations subjected to moisture.4. Use for all motor transformer terminations and other equipment where vibration is present.

E. Flexible Metal Conduit:

1. Install as terminating connection for motors, compressors, air conditioners, sound equipment anddry type transformers in dry areas as shown or scheduled.

2. Install green wire ground in all flexible conduit.

F. RGS:

1. Use in dry locations for concealed or exposed work where shown.2. Use in or under concrete pours.3. Use where exposed to weather.

4. Where run in earth and below slab on grade, encase conduit in 1½" concrete envelope unlessotherwise noted.

5. Use where noted on Drawings.

G. PVC/PRGS:

1. Use for underground ductbank systems, street lighting, and where direct burial in earth (concreteencased) is noted unless modified elsewhere in these specifications.

2. Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall be permitted below slab of building under conditions of Engineerinspection of backfill materials and with RGS sweeps where rising out of slab.

3.05 CABLE LUBRICATION AND LUBRICANT:

A. The cable jacket and/or conduit walls shall be completely lubricated when cable is pulled into conduit.The lubricant shall be applied immediately before or during the pull.



B. Minimum quantities of lubricant are as follows:

1. 1 quart of lubricant per 100 feet of 1 inch conduit.2. 2 quarts of lubricant per 100 feet of 2 inch conduit.3. 3 quarts of lubricant per 100 feet of 3 inch conduit.4. 1 gallon of lubricant per 100 feet of 4 inch conduit.

C. This quantity shall be increased as needed for difficult pulling situations (high temperatures, multiplebends, poorly placed conduit, etc.).

D. Cable attachments for pulling shall be patent cable grips, or other devices subject to the Owner’sapproval. In using woven basket type grips on covered cable, care shall be taken to avoid damage to thecable and seal, which shall be marked up and maintained during cable installation. Difficult pulling is notanticipated; if unduly difficult pulling occurs, the Contractor shall check pull required and suspendfurther pulling until further procedure has been approved by the Owner. Maximum pull tension shall notexceed recommended value for the cable when measured by tension dynamometer.

E. Cable pulling during low temperatures is subject to review by the Owner and shall be discontinued when,in the Owner’s and Engineers opinion, the cable may be damaged.

F. The Contractor shall keep records of all cables pulled, meggered and terminated. Exact lengths of cablesinstalled shall be supplied to the Owner.

3.06 CONDUIT FITTINGS:

A. EMT:

1. Provide EMT connector and nylon bushing at all EMT plain end terminations for power, CATV,communications and computer.

2. Use set screw type, concrete tight indoors, dry locations.3. Use compression connectors, squeeze type in wet locations.

B. RGS:

1. Provide galvanized steel locknuts at each termination unless hubs are used.2. Use sealing locknuts for all wet/damp areas.3. Use grounding type locknuts for rigid terminations not equipped with grounding bushings.

3.07 CONDUIT HANGERS:

A. General:

1. Investigate thoroughly, Architectural and Shop Drawings related to work, to determine howequipment, fixtures, piping, ductwork, etc, are to be supported, mounted or suspended. Provideextra steel, bolts, inserts, pipe stand brackets, or any other items required for proper support.Provide supporting accessories where required, whether or not shown on the drawings. Wheredirected, furnish drawings showing supports, etc., for approval.

2. Conduit hanger rods in areas where hot dipped galvanized conduit is installed shall be galvanizedsteel, sprayed with one coat of Rustoleum paint.

3. Size support member within load rating of member section, and without visible deflection.



4. Mount conduit on top of support member unless space considerations prevent installation; useconduit clamps.

5. Provide channels for racking up conduit, trapeze, suspensions, cable racks, panel racks, etc., asshown and as required and provide poured-in-place inserts for supporting channels.

B. Conduit Clamps:

1. Single conduits shall be supported by means of one-hole pipe clamps in combination withone-screw back plates to raise conduits from the surface.

C. Trapeze Hangers:

1. Multiple runs of conduits shall be supported by means of trapeze hangers, keeping conduits ashigh as possible with minimal beads and offsets in height.

3.08 ACCESS DOORS:

A. Provide where indicated and where required for access to all equipment. Size 16" x 24" unless otherwisenoted. It is to be noted that various type frames are required for specific wall and ceiling finishes. Anydoor having an area exceeding 324 square inches shall have two (2) camlocks. Employ and pay GeneralContractors for installation. Milcor or approved equal.

3.09 WIREWAYS AND WIRE TROUGHS:

A. Install so all covers can be easily removed.

B. Install straight and level.

C. Use only hangers designed for equipment, support to meet NEC.

D. Punch openings where knockouts are not present.

E. Do not exceed code fill, increase conductor size as required by NEC.

F. Do not use for large conductor or primary voltage pull of splice boxes.

3.10 CONDUCTOR SPLICING MATERIALS:

A. Splices and connections for lighting and receptacles shall be made in accessible outlets, pullboxes orjunction boxes.

B. Insulate all splices, taps and connections for lighting and receptacles with U.L. labeled gauge plastic tapeor molded composition caps.



C. Splices shall not be made except where called for by the drawings, or where specifically permitted by theOwner. Where splices are permitted, they shall be made in a neat, workmanlike and approved manner bythose specialized in this class of work, close attention being paid to all splices with particular attention tosplices on higher voltages. Splices shall be made by the Contractor for each type of wire or cable inaccordance with instruction issued by Cable Manufacturers and the Owner. Before splicing, insulatedcables shall have conductor insulation stepped and bound or penciled for recommended distances backfrom splices to provide a long leakage path. After splicing, insulation equal to that on the splicedconductors shall be applied at each splice. In baring conductors for splices, care shall be taken to avoidnicking strands.

3.11 CONDUCTORS:

A. All wire and cable shall be installed in an approved raceway.

B. Provide wire and cable in conduit for all feeders, motor circuits, lighting circuits, receptacle circuits,equipment circuits, etc., as shown on drawings.

C. Coil slack wire at outlets, inside the outlet boxes and seal the outlet opening with cardboard or fiber plugto prevent entrance of concrete plaster or paint. Provide separate neutrals for all single phase circuits.

D. Tag all feeders, subfeeders, special system wiring and control wiring in each pullbox and gutter space,denoting points of origin and termination of wires.

E. Install a maximum of three (3) phase and one (1) neutral conductor in any one (1) feeder or branch circuitconduit unless otherwise directed by Engineer.

F. Provide supports for conductors in vertical raceways in accordance with NEC, Article 300-19.

G. Flexible conduit used as connection to any equipment shall contain separate green grounding wire runback to ground bus of serving panelboard.

H. Provide #12 AWG minimum size for branch circuit and emergency system wiring, #14 AWG minimumsize for signal circuits.

I. All wires #12 and larger and wiring to motor or other fixed equipment shall be stranded type.

J. Provide #10 minimum size for branch circuit run which exceed 100 feet; unless otherwise directed.

K. Panel feeders and Branch circuits for 3 phase motors and equipment rated for 3 phase, 120/208 volts,shall have color coded insulation; black-phase “A”, red-phase “B”, blue-phase “C” with white neutralconductor. Colored tape at each terminal of all power feeders (black insulation) will be accepted in lieuof colored insulation as described above.

L. Panel feeders and Branch circuits for 3 phase motors and equipment rated for 3 phase 277/480 volts shallhave color coded insulation; brown - phase “A”, orange - phase “B”, yellow - phase “C”, with grayneutral conductor. Colored tape at each terminal of all power feeders (black insulation) will be acceptedin lieu of colored insulation as described above.

M. The neutral wire shall be identified throughout the system. Feeders shall be identified at the source and atall boxes with panel make and phase (A,B,C).



N. Included in the work covered under this section is the cutting or drilling of entrance holes intoenclosures, equipment terminal boxes and outlet boxes for entrance of cable not in conduit, as well as thework of cutting and drilling of holes in miscellaneous plates located in the path of cable runs. Entranceholes for cable shall be installed around cable, as part of the work of installing cable, sealing bushings,Crouse-Hinds type: “CGB” or Owner approved equal, or conduit bushings where these alone arepermissible. The work shall also include the work of packing or sealing at conduit bushings after cablesare pulled, using unoiled Oakum and JM Dux-seal or Owner approved equal.

O. Cables shall be formed to avoid sharp bends or edges of conduit bushings upon entering or leavingconduit terminations, and insulated wiring to approximately six inch intervals between conduit andterminals. Where outlet box, cabinet, cubicle, switchgear or other terminal points for cable are equippedwith cable or wiring trays, troughs or gutters. Contractor shall pull sufficient length of each cable topermit neat arrangement of all entering cables, with leads formed and cabled or clamped as eachconductor is brought to its terminal connection. No tangle box work will be accepted.

P. Where reasonable practicable, the minimum radius to which an insulated conductor is bent, whetherpermanently or temporarily during installation, shall be ten times the diameter over the outer covering.

Q. Making terminal connections shall be included as part of the work, except as specifically noted. At pointswhere the conductor and cable insulation will be terminated, terminations shall be made in a neat,workmanlike and approved manner by men specialized in this class of work, particular attention beinggiven to higher voltage terminations, shielded conductor terminations and coaxial cable terminations.Terminations shall be made by the Contractor for each type of wire or cable in accordance withinstructions issued by the Owner. Spare cables shall be trimmed, taped and bundled neatly within thecabinet so their presence will not interfere with connected terminations. They shall be trimmed to alength such that they can be made up and connected to the farthest terminal block within the cabinet.

R. Before any cable terminal connections are made, conductors shall be rung out. Connections shall bemade according to wiring diagrams. Polarity or phasing shall be checked before final connections aremade, and corrections of polarity, phasing or rotation shall be made without additional cost to the Owner.

S. Control cable terminations shall be made in accordance with wiring diagrams, using wire numbersestablished by the Owner for the various control circuits. It is the intent that the Contractor shallterminate the cables which he installs, except as specifically noted.

T. When control cables are to be fanned out and cabled together with cord, Contractor shall makeconnections to terminal blocks, and test equipment for proper operation before cables are cordedtogether. If there is any question as to proper connection, the Contractor shall make temporaryconnection with sufficient length of cable so that cable can be switched to another terminal, withoutsplicing cable.

U. After pulling and splicing but before making cable terminal connections, the Contractor shall exposeends, clear each conductor, and make the required Megger test on all circuits except lighting circuits.Contractor shall test cables for motors, power, and control, with a Megger insulation testing instrument(Associated Research, Inc., Megohmmeter) before equipment is energized. In the event insulation isdeficient, repeat Megger testing shall be accomplished after corrective measures have been applied.Extreme care shall be exercised in meggering so as not to put excessive voltage on instrumentation andelectronic equipment and thereby damage such devices.



V. The Contractor shall megger all power feed cables for 10 to 15 sec., at 4000 volts on apparatus rated2500 volts, 1000 volts on apparatus rated 550 volts to 2500 volts and 500 volts on apparatus rated lessthan 500 volts. The cable shall be meggered first on the reel before pulling and then again on acable-by-cable basis after being cut and pulled.

W. A check shall be made of all external and internal wiring for loose connections, cable sizing and properterminations per the elementary and connection drawings listed and attached with specification.

X. All wiring systems shall be thoroughly checked before placing the system in service, for grounds, shortcircuits and conformity to wiring diagrams.

3.12 CONDUCTOR CIRCUITING:

A. Lighting, receptacles and special circuits:

1. Lighting circuits: Provide lighting arrangement as shown or 15 amperes maximum per circuitwhere not otherwise shown.

2. Receptacle circuits: Provide five (5) convenience outlets maximum per circuit unless otherwiseshown or specified.

3. Special receptacle circuits: Provide as indicated on Drawings and as specified under specialitems of equipment and provide separate green conductor for grounding receptacles to panelground bus.

4. Exits and emergency lighting circuits: Install in separate conduit system and circuit to emergencypanel, as shown on Drawings.

5. Fire alarm and detection circuits: Install in separate conduit system.

B. Communications:

1. Provide all conduit, wireway, wire terminations, etc., necessary to provide for functionsspecified:

a. All wiring shall be installed in conduit unless specified otherwise.b. Cross-sectional area of all telephone and television cabling installed in a conduit shall

not exceed percentage of the cross-sectional area of the conduit as scheduled.c. Cross-sectional area of all computer cabling installed in a conduit shall not exceed 20%

of the cross-sectional area of the conduit.d. Provide a separate circuit power supply for each system.e. Refer to Division 27 for additional requirements.

C. Power and Control Circuits:

1. General Requirements:

a. Provide all power wiring. Install in conduit and make all connections to disconnectswitches, motor controllers, motor and other items of electrical equipment shown onDrawing details and schedules.

b. Provide control wiring only as shown on electric equipment schedule and plan details.Install in conduit and make connections to motors, motor controllers, control devices,etc., including the mounting of all control devices furnished by others.



c. Verify exact location and rating of all motors, controllers, control devices, etc., withother contractors before roughing.

d. Power and control wiring may be combined in common conduit by increasing conductoror conduit sizes as required by code.

e. Provide minimum working clearances as required by NEC Article 110.26 and as shownon the Drawings.

2. Wiring Diagrams:

a. Any wiring diagrams shown on drawings for hookup of equipment furnished by others,are approximate and are for bidding purposes only.

b. Obtain wiring diagrams, certified correct for the job, from respective Contractor for allequipment and systems furnished by them.

c. Install all work in accordance with certified wiring diagrams.

3. Control Devices:

a. Do not accept control devices from other Contractors unless they are properly tagged andfurnished with circuiting information.

3.13 LIGHTING CIRCUIT CONTROL DEVICES AND RECEPTACLES:

A. All devices shall be mounted within a steel box.

B. All receptacles shall be mounted with box aligned in a vertical direction with ground slot at bottom ofreceptacle. In those areas where vertical space is not available such as under fin radiation, cabinets andabove backsplash, mount horizontally with ground slot at right.

3.14 WALL PLATES:

A. Submit samples as requested by Architect/Engineer.

B. Provide special plates fabricated for devices shown ganged together at one location and provide specialengraving for switch plates covering special utility switches as shown on Drawings.

C. Special finish plates will be required where so noted on drawings or included in specifications. Sample offinishes will be furnished to Architect/Engineer for approval when so requested.

D. Provide blank matching cover plates for outlets not used.

E. Cover plates for telephone, dimmer controls, etc., shall match device plates in each area.

3.15 OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULLBOXES:

A. Flush recessed wherever possible and securely supported from building construction.

B. Where outlet boxes are installed in exposed block walls, locate at corner of block. Locate conduit asrequired to meet block conditions. Coordinate with other Divisions.



C. Identify junction boxes for particular service such as power, lighting, fire alarm, etc. Label with suitabletags or use stencil lettering.

D. Locate where shown or required for outlet facilities and where shown or required for installing wire orcable. Make accessible after completion of construction; Electric Contractor shall be responsible forcoordination with other divisions. Junction and pullboxes shall not be located in finished room unlessspecifically permitted.

E. Mounting height of boxes shall be as scheduled.

3.16 PREVENTION OF CORROSION:

A. Protect all metallic materials against corrosion.

B. Aluminum shall not be used in contact earth nor embedded in concrete. Where connected to dissimilarmetal, protect by approved fittings and treatment.

C. Hot dip galvanize all ferrous metal materials such as bolts, braces, boxes, bodies, clamps, fittings, guards,nuts, pins, rods, shims, washers, and miscellaneous parts which are not made of corrosion-resistant steel.Use stainless steel fasteners in wet locations and out of doors.

D. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A-123 or A-153.

3.17 PAINTING:

A. General Requirements:

1. Painting shall be provided as outlined hereafter.2. Clean all surfaces of moisture, rust, plaster, dirt, dust, and foreign matter before painting.3. Apply full even coats as required to provide acceptable finish.4. Apply finish coat just before final acceptance.5. Protect all other surfaces with drop cloths, masking tape, etc.6. Protect equipment and internal parts with making tape.7. Factory enamel-finished equipment not to be painted, EXCEPT when rusted or otherwise

damaged; then paint as directed or if specifically called for hereinafter.8. Appearance to be approved; repaint if required.

B. Paint all work of this division in the following areas:

1. Boiler Room, Mechanical Equipment Rooms, Electrical Equipment Rooms, Penthouses, FanRooms, all work of this contract exposed to the weather and where specifically called for.

a. Bare pipes, conduit, supports, all supports, mounting boards/panels, metal jackets, etc.,also paint equipment not supplied with factory finished surface.

1) First Coat: Pratt and Lambert “Effecto” primer unless equipment supplied withfactory prime coat.

2) Second Coat: Pratt and Lambert “Effecto” enamel.3) Color as selected by Engineer/Architect.4) Additional coats as required.



3.18 WATERPROOFING, CAULKING AND SEALING:

A. Opening Through Roofs:

1. Provide with nonferrous flashing pieces, skirts, hoods and collars as required to make all ducts,pipes and conduit watertight, and installed as approved by Architect/Engineer.

2. Where curbs are required as part of this Division for rectangular openings in new roofs, flashingwill be done by others unless specifically indicated otherwise.

3. For existing roofs, provide all flashing for roof curbs, and all other roof openings.4. Caulked and waterproofed, with additional material as required, seal airtight.

B. Opening Through Fire/Smoke Walls and Floors:

1. Install work per NFPA.2. Provide sleeves for ducts and pipe anchor duct sleeves with angle iron.

3.19 TESTS:

A. General:

1. Perform all operations required for the complete testing of all systems, equipment and relatedwork as shown on drawings or specified herein and in accordance with all applicablerequirements of the specifications.

2. Before final acceptance, all specified tests shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Engineeror his representative, who shall be sole judge of the acceptability of such tests and who maydirect the performance of any such additional tests as he deems necessary in order to determinethe acceptability of the systems, equipment, material and workmanship. Any additional testsrequired by the Engineer will be made at no additional costs to Owner.

3. All protective equipment shall be actuated in a manner that clearly demonstrates their workability and operation.

4. Demonstrate the ability of each and every piece of equipment to meet the design and operatingrequirements indicated on the Drawings.

5. The inspection and test by the Owner or Engineer of any articles or lots thereof, or failure toinspect and accept or reject any article or lots thereof, shall not relieve the Contractor from anyresponsibility regarding defects or other failure to meet the Specification requirements whichmay be discovered prior to final acceptance. Except as otherwise provided in the specification,final acceptance shall be conclusive except as regards any latent defects, fraud, or such grossmistakes as amount to fraud.

6. Acceptance to the material and/or equipment and the waiving of test thereof, shall in no wayrelieve the Contractor of the responsibility for furnishing material and/or equipment meeting therequirements of these specifications.

B. Test Reports:

1. Written test reports shall be signed by an authorized representative of the equipmentmanufacturer and shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to final payment. Provide test reportsfor the following:

a. Fire alarm system. Refer to Section 28 31 00.



b. Feeder conductor. Load test (phase balance). Refer to Section 26 24 00, Part 3.4.c. Load test (phase balance).

2. Perform any and all other tests that may be required by local municipality, utility or othergoverning body, board or agency having jurisdiction.


A. All work shall be executed in accord with recognized standards of workmanship. All work shall beinstalled in a neat and orderly manner. If, in the judgment of the Engineer, the workmanship is notacceptable, the work in question is to be removed and reinstalled in a manner satisfactory to theEngineer.

B. Furnish at site during construction a competent and experienced foreman. He/she shall have completecharge of all field work of this Contract. He/she shall be authorized to act for the Contractor in his/herabsence, and to represent the Contractor with the Engineer or Owner. The Project foreman shall not bechanged during the Project except for single day occurrences for personal needs. It is essential that thesame foreman be provided for the duration of the Project to maintain continuity on the job site. SyracuseUniversity shall view any departure from this requirement by the Contractor as an indication of theContractor’s unwillingness to meet the needs of Syracuse University.

C. The project foreman shall be present at site whenever any Contractor or subcontractor employees areworking at the site. In the event of absence by the project foreman, the Prime Contractor shall designatean Assistant Foreman and advise the Owner and Engineer of the designated individual’s name. TheAssistant Foreman shall have been working on the site for a minimum of five (5) working days prior tobeing designated acting foreman and shall be designated at least two (2) working days prior to becomingacting foreman.

D. All personnel employed by or subcontracted by the Contractor shall at all times be suitably clothed andshall conduct themselves in a professional manner. Shirts shall be worn at all times. Any employee foundto have been making gestures or harassing remarks to the staff, students or general public shall bedisciplined by the Contractor and removed from the site.


3.21 PROTECTION:

A. The Contractor shall provide adequate protection to the work, his workmen, the General Public andprivate property.

B. The Contractor shall use all means and precautions necessary to insure on-site safety during construction.All OSHA construction requirements covering a project of this type shall be required of the Contractor.

C. All fencing and security measures must be implemented before work starts.

D. The Contractor shall use all means and precautions to insure the safety of the occupants of the buildingsduring construction. Occupied portions of the buildings shall have a minimum of two (2) exits availableat all times.



3.22 BARRIERS:

A. The Contractor shall furnish, erect and maintain barricades, fences, railings, enclosures, guard lights,danger signals, warnings, cribbing, shoring, and other such precautions necessary to protect allinstallations and structures in the area of the work to insure the safety of the public and to avoid damageor injury to any and all persons and property. Warning lights shall be of blinker type, battery orelectrically operated.

1. The Contractor shall be solely and without exception, responsible for safety on the project site.2. All barricade and security measures shall be implemented before work starts.

3.23 SAFETY & HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION:

A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for compliance with all applicable safety and healthregulations including, but not limited to, U.S. Department of Labor Safety and Health Regulations forConstruction. Construction employees are required to comply with the most stringent rule or standard inthe event of dual or concurrent State and Federal jurisdiction. Detailed information on this subject maybe obtained from the Office of Information Services, Occupational Safety and Health Administration,U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, D.C. 20210.

B. No obstructions are to be placed on or around fire hydrants or fire department connections that couldmake them inaccessible or inoperative for fire fighting purposes.

C. All temporary construction sheds, trailers, and flammable liquid storage areas belonging to Contractorsshall be so placed on the construction site to minimize any danger to Owner’s property and the public.Construction trailers and sheds shall require the pre-approval of the Owner.

D. Conduct of the work shall be such that pestilence does not occur. To prevent influx of rats, vermin andother pestilence, the Contractor shall retain an approved exterminating firm until such time that thedanger of pestilence has passed as approved by the Engineer. Contractor shall remove all garbage andtrash from the site daily.

3.24 FIRE SAFETY:

A. Fire Watch: Provide a fire watch wherever welding, brazing, cutting or other processes involving an openflame or potential for generating sparks is used. Fire watch shall consist of a person with a 10 poundcarbon dioxide fire extinguisher. While on fire watch, the person so assigned shall have no other dutiesor assignments.

B. Fire Blanket: In addition to providing a fire watch, have available an approved fire blanket to cover anycombustible materials in the immediate area.

3.25 INSPECTIONS:

A. The Engineer or Owner may visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction according tothe General Conditions. The periodic observation or inspection of the general project progress shall notbe construed as supervision of actual construction, nor make the Engineer or Owner responsible forproviding a safe place for performance of work by the Contractors or Contractor’s employees or those ofsuppliers of Contractors or for access, visits, use, work, travel or occupancy by any person.



3.26 LAYING OUT OF WORK:

A. The Plans are in part diagrammatic. Contractor shall verify rough-in dimensions with Shop Drawings andwith the Plans. Conform to dimensions shown on the Plans in preference to scaling from the drawings.Provide all fittings and appurtenances required for proper system operation.

B. Before commencing work, the Contractor shall carefully examine the Contract Drawings. If anydiscrepancies occur between the drawings and the specifications, he shall report such discrepancies to theEngineer in writing and obtain written instructions as to the manner in which to proceed. No departuresfrom the Contract Drawings shall be made without prior written approval of the Engineer.

3.27 SUBMITTALS/SHOP DRAWINGS:

A. Submission for Engineer Review: The Owner and Engineer will accept either hard copies or electroniccopies of submittals. Electronic copies are preferred.

1. Electronic Submittals:

a. Prime Contractor shall submit one (1) electronic copy of each submittal to Engineer forreview.

b. The Engineer shall review and return the submittal in an electronic format to the PrimeContractor. All markups by the Engineer shall be in red print.

c. The Prime Contractor shall be responsible to distribute the returned submittal tosubcontractors, suppliers, vendors, etc.

d. The Prime Contractor shall furnish color printouts of all electronic submittals forinclusion in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

2. Hard Copy Submittals:

a. Prime Contractor shall transmit a minimum of eight (8) copies of each submittal; submitadditional copies where required by the Prime Contractor.

b. The Engineer will retain two (2) copies and the Owner will retain one (1) copy. Theremaining balance will be returned to the Prime Contractor. Four (4) copies shall beretained by the Prime Contractor for inclusion in the Operation and MaintenanceManuals.

c. The Prime Contractor shall be responsible to distribute the returned submittals tosubcontractors, suppliers, vendors, etc.

B. Post copies of all submittals at temporary field office.

C. Quality and Legibility:

1. Electronic Submittals:

a. Electronic submittals shall be digitally produced directly from the manufacturer. Scansof catalogs, faxes, etc. will not be accepted.

b. Contractor markings to electronic submittals must be made electronically.c. Contractor cover sheets may be scanned and must meet the legibility requirements of

hard copy submissions.d. No exceptions shall be permitted.



2. Hard Copy Submittals:

a. Shop Drawings and catalog material shall be manufacturer’s original printed copies,photocopies or scans which are indistinguishable from the originals. Faxes orphotocopies of faxes shall not be reviewed by the Engineer. Photocopies of coloredbrochure material, wherein the content of the copy does not match the content of theoriginal, shall not be reviewed by the Engineer. The University has directed the Engineerin this regard. No exceptions shall be permitted.

D. Submittals shall contain:

1. The date of the submission and the dates of any previous submission.2. The project title and number.3. Contract identification.

4. The names of:

a. Contractor.b. Supplier.c. Manufacturer.

5. Identification of the product, with the specification section number.6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials.8. Applicable standard, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers.9. Safety Data Sheets (SDS).10. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents.11. Identification of revisions on resubmittals.12. A 5" x 3" blank space for Contractor and Engineer stamps.

E. Shop Drawings - Provide Shop Drawings for each product to be utilized on the project. Shop Drawingsfor equipment shall include detailed and dimensional literature and catalog data showing detailedcompliance with the Contract Documents. Shop Drawings shall include a copy of the manufacturer’sprinted installation instructions for the equipment proposed. Shop Drawings for electrically energizedequipment shall show all electrical characteristics and interconnection requirements.

F. Engineer’s Action:

1. The Engineer shall return copies of the Shop Drawings marked as follows:

a. “Reviewed for General Compliance Only - No Exception Taken” - Drawings bearing thiscomment have been found to be generally in conformance with the intent of the Plansand Specifications.

b. “Reviewed for General Compliance Only - Make Noted Corrections” - Drawings bearingthis comment have been found to be generally in conformance with the intent of thePlans and Specifications, with the exception of the noted items. A resubmittal to theEngineer is not required and it is understood the Contractor will make the notedcorrections.



c. “Reviewed for General Compliance Only - Revise and Resubmit” - Drawings bearingthis comment have been found to contain a substantial departure from the Plans andSpecifications. The Contractor must make a new corrected submittal.

d. “Reviewed for General Compliance Only - Rejected” - Drawings bearing this commentdepict materials, equipment or supplies which are not judged by the Engineer to meet therequirements of the Plans and Specifications. The Contractor shall provide a newsubmittal on alternative equipment.

e. “Reviewed for General Compliance Only - Not Reviewed; Returned” - Submittalsbearing this comment have not been reviewed and are returned to the Contractor.

f. “Reviewed for General Compliance Only - Additional Submittal Required” - Submittalsbearing this comment have been found to be generally in conformance with the intent ofthe Plans and Specifications; however, more information is required and a resubmittal isrequired.

G. Samples:

1. The Contractor shall, when required, submit to the Engineer for review, typical samples ofmaterials equipment and products. The Samples shall be properly identified by tag, and shall besubmitted sufficiently in advance of the time when they are to be incorporated into the work sothat rejection thereof will not cause delay.


A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements at the siteand shall be responsible for the contingencies which may be encountered. No extra compensation will beallowed on account of a difference between actual dimensions and measurements at the site and thoseindicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Engineer forconsideration before proceeding with the work.

B. Contractor shall work accurately to bench marks and to proper elevations and dimensions established bythe Contractor. Contractor shall check conditions and details of the work in relation to the progress of thework.

C. The Contractor shall lay out the work, establishing heights and grades for all piping work included inthese specifications in strict accordance with the intent of the drawings, the physical conditions of theProject and the finished site grades. He shall be responsible for the accuracy of the work and that thework meets all physical conditions of the Project and the requirements of these specifications.

D. Prefabrication of piping, conduit, etc. may be performed only at the risk of the Contractor. Changes toprefabricated piping required by actual site conditions shall be made by the Contractor without extracompensation from Syracuse University.

E. Due to the scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, etc.which may be required. Make all such changes in piping, location of equipment, etc., to accommodatework to obstacles encountered, at no increase in compensation. If requested, submit at least five (5)copies of drawings detailing all major deviations or changes. All changes must be approved beforeinstalling.

F. Plans show general arrangement of piping and connections. Install work substantially as indicated. Verifyexact locations and elevations on job.




H. Should either Engineer’s details, field conditions, a change in equipment or Shop Drawing informationnecessitate an important rearrangement, report same to Engineers and obtain approval before proceeding.

I. No compensation shall be awarded for extra work because above precautions have not been followed. Inevent of conflicts, Engineer’s decision is final. Contractor shall be fully responsible for unauthorizedchanges.


A. In the case where any manufactured article, material, or equipment is specified, then the Contractor mustinstall, apply, connect, erect, use, clean and condition it is strict accord with the manufacturer’sdirections.

3.30 SLEEVES, INSERTS AND OPENINGS:

A. Provide sleeves for all piping systems. Set all sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction.Cooperate with other trades. Contractor shall correct all omitted or improperly located sleeves withoutadditional compensation.

3.31 SUPPORTS AND HANGERS:

A. Supports: Investigate thoroughly, Plans and Shop Drawings related to work, to determine how equipmentand piping are to be supported, mounted or suspended. Provide extra steel, bolts, inserts, pipe standbrackets, or any other items required for proper support. Provide supporting accessories where required,whether or not shown on the drawings. Where directed, furnish drawings showing supports, etc., forapproval.

3.32 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION:

A. It is required of each equipment manufacturer, through the Contractor, to carefully check Plans andSpecifications as they affect their particular equipment. Report to Engineers, any discrepancies orcontradictions as applied to their particular equipment which prevents proper functioning, servicing, etc.before or at the time when Shop Drawings are submitted. Furnish manufacturer’s printed installationinstructions for each piece of equipment. Thoroughly instruct contractors’ personnel on job, exactly howtheir equipment shall be installed, connected, lubricated, started up, operated, etc., so that all factoryinstructions are rigidly followed. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall submit satisfactory evidencethat systems have been installed strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and havebeen properly aligned.


A. Install all equipment to be free of transmission of noise and vibration to occupied spaces. Arrangeisolated equipment so that it does not contact members of the building structure, ceiling grids, piping,conduits or ductwork.



B. Provide replacement at no cost to the Owner of any pump, motor, motor starter, or lighting fixture,transformer, UPS system, other equipment which in the opinion of the Engineers produces excessivevibration or noise.


A. Notify Engineer when installation(s) is/are ready for testing, as specified with ample time in advance.Provide all metered and unmetered services, tools, equipment and manpower necessary to perform tests.

B. Perform all equipment testing as specified and as recommended by manufacturer and directed by theEngineer. Demonstrate that all operating and safety devices are in proper working order.

3.35 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:

A. The contractor shall be required to prepare and submit a set of Division 26 “As-Built” Drawings as theportions of work are completed and prior to application for final payment.

B. The As-Built Drawings shall include a full set of the ‘as bid’ or ‘ conformed’ Contract Drawings forDivision 26, and Divisions assigned to Division 26 such as Divisions 27 and 28, plus all drawingsprepared by the Contractor, subcontractors, suppliers and vendors for those Divisions.

C. The submitted drawings shall be in the form of full size as-bid drawings first plus additional drawingsand attachments following. The drawings shall be clean, original paper copies of the Contract Drawings,marked up in red pencil or pen with the Contractor’s markups. For floor plans drawn at less than ¼"scale, the field drawings should be expanded to ¼" scale to provide room for markups.

D. The Contractor shall maintain a dedicated set of Construction Drawings at a protected location at the jobsite for the continuous documentation for these as-built’s. The Contractor shall record the actual installedlocations of devices, major conduit runs, wireway runs, cable tray and wire basket runs, junction boxes,equipment, panels, lighting, fire alarm devices, fire alarm panels, booster panels, fire alarm eol resistors,fire alarm control relays and monitor modules. Record any and all variations from the originalConstruction Drawings in neat, legible, hand drawn lines and text. Attach copies of Contractor’s fieldsketches and note where they pertain.

E. Confirm that all information provided to the Contractor in the form of Request for Information (RFI)responses, accepted Requests for Proposal (RFPs), Change Orders and Supplemental Instructions (SIs) isproperly conveyed on the drawings. Show the actual changes made, do not just paste a copy of the RFI,RFP, ASI, CO unless that document includes a full scale drawing which accurately represents the workactually installed.

F. Confirm that the room names and numbers shown on the as-built’s are the actual room numbers andnames posted on the rooms at the time of turn over.

G. Confirm that the panel directories shown, match the actual panel directories installed in the panels in thefield, and that those panel directories actually depict the correct circuit connections installed. Confirmthat the room numbers shown in the panel directories, match the room numbers on the rooms, and on theAs-Built Drawings.



H. Confirm that the electrical equipment circuiting schedule accurately depicts any changes made duringconstruction.

I. For work which becomes concealed as part of the project, keep an accurate record and show on As-BuiltDrawings the actual installed location of any concealed work such as underground services, piping andductwork, junction boxes, etc. Provide location on Record Drawings for outside services by indicatingactual dimensions from fixed reference points which will be available after completion of construction.“Tie two (2) dimensions from different reference points to confirm locations of concealed work.

J. For projects extending more than three months, provide the original “As-Built” to the Engineer as thework is completed on sections of the project and obtain a receipt from the Engineer. The Contractor shallbe responsible to the safe keeping and maintenance of the As-Built Drawings throughout construction,and for maintenance of one (1) photocopy at the Contractor’s office for a period of not less than three (3)years following final acceptance.

K. Provide the original copies of the As-Built Drawings to the Architect or Engineer in accordance with theprovisions of the General Conditions and Division 1. Unless reproducible As-Built Drawings arerequired under the General Condition and Division 1, provide the original paper copy of As-BuiltDrawings to the Engineer.






















3.37 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER’S DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE:

A. After submission and acceptance of the Operating and Maintenance information and prior to finalacceptance of the Project, provide a scheduled instruction period for the Owner’s designatedrepresentative. Instruction period shall be sufficient to cover the contents of the Operating andMaintenance portfolio, a walk through of the Project and a review of all systems.

B. At the conclusion of the instruction period, provide approved copies of the accepted Operation andMaintenance Manual to the Owner’s representative and obtain a signed receipt.

3.38 GUARANTEE:

A. Prior to application for final payment, the Contractor shall provide a written guarantee covering allportions of the work of this Division. The guarantee shall include all work and materials for a period ofone (1) year from the date of final acceptance. The guarantee shall provide for the repair or replacementof any defective equipment, materials, products or work at no cost the Owner.



B. Items or work which are repaired or replaced under this guarantee shall be covered under an extendedguarantee by the Contractor so that the replaced products or work shall have performed satisfactorilywithout repair or replacement for a period of one (1) year.

C. The failure of any manufacturer to provide a one (1) year warranty, or the failure of any manufacturer orvendor to honor a warranty shall not relieve the Contractor from his obligation to provide a completeparts and labor guarantee on all work provided under his Contract for a period of one (1) year.

D. Supplemental Guarantees - Supplemental Guarantees and extended warranties may be included underthis Contract as part of specific specification sections.

3.39 GUARANTEE PERIOD:

A. During the guarantee periods, the Owner may respond to emergency situations. Emergency situations forthe purposes of this section are those situations determined to be potentially harmful to the surroundingpersonnel, equipment or environment. In cases where work is performed by the Owner’s employees, theContractor will be charged for all labor and material needed to complete emergency repairs, if the repairsare determined to be the result of faulty material or workmanship. The performance of these repairs bythe Owner shall not void any Contractor guarantee.

B. The act of the Owner in responding to any emergency situation shall not relieve the Contractor from theobligation of responding to the emergency and from correcting any problems as part of the originalProject cost.

C. The Owner shall begin preventive maintenance programs immediately following final inspections.Preventive maintenance activities will not relieve Contractor from any equipment warranties.



O&M Manual Checklist Date (Include completed copy of this Checklist in O&M Manual when submitted)

Project Trade

Project Name

Submitted as an electronic file per Section 01 78 23 YES / NO

Composite electronic PDF file YES / NO

Minimum readable text size YES / NO

Title page “Recognize Text” turned on for all scanned documents YES / NO.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O&M Manual:

Cover Sheet listing:

Building Name

O&M Manual Table of Contents: Hyperlinked book-marked information with links to each CSI Master FormatSpecification Section in manual YES / NO

O&M Manual Contact List: Contractor Each Major Subcontractor Contractor Name Contractor Name Contractor’s Address Contractor’s Address Contact person Contact person Tel. & Fax #’s Tel. & Fax #’s Project Manager Name Engineer Architect Name Name Company Name Company Name Contact person Contact person .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O&M Manual Project Guarantee & Warranties:

Typed guarantee from Contractor with 1 year guarantee stated as commencing on the date of final acceptance by the University. Date must be identified

Hyperlinks to any special warranties included in Equipment Specifications YES / NO



O&M Manual - Remaining Pages: Checklist Page 2

1. Organized by CSI Specification Section number. YES / NO2. Each CSI Specification Section included. YES / NO3. Includes final submittal, updated to contain A/E remarks. YES / NO4. Includes any special Contractor or manufacturer warranty. YES / NO5. Includes the Installation, Operation and Maintenance (IOM) manuals for each piece of equipment, up to date for the

version of equipment supplied. YES / NO6. Includes IOM data for accessory data. YES / NO7. Includes test reports for each piece of equipment. YES / NO

Scan of spare parts list. Scan of all test reports (i.e. fire alarm). Scan of all inspections (i.e. plumbing, electrical). Scan of all certification data. Scan of facility lubrication chart. Scan of facility valve chart. Scan copy of complete temperature control and operating instructions. Completed copy of checklist last page of O&M Manual.



DIVISION 26 SECTION 26 05 15 - TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION ELECTRICAL SERVICES PAGE 1


SECTION 26 05 15 - TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION ELECTRICAL SERVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. The Work of Section 26 05 00 - Electrical Basic Materials and Methods applies to the Work of thisSection.

C. The Work of Section 28 31 00 - Fire Alarm System Improvements applies to the Work of this Section.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Provide temporary power for elevators.


A. Other Division 26, 27 or 28 requirements may be requested by the General Contractor and are notcovered by this Section.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Provide detailed Plan for:

1. Electrical outages for panel and feeder replacements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ELECTRICAL SERVICE:

A. Provide products conforming to Specification Section 26 05 00.

2.02 FIRE ALARM:

A. Provide products conforming to Specification Section 28 31 00.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE:

A. Conform installation to all requirements of the NEC.



DIVISION 26 SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING PAGE 1


SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. The Work of Section 26 05 00 Electrical Basic Materials and Methods applies to the Work of thisSection.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Provide a complete, operating, tested, functioning, documented grounding system including all workshown, specified, or required for proper system operation.

B. All grounding and grounding circuitry shall equal or exceed the requirements of NEC, latest issue,Article 250.

C. The raceway system which includes all metal conduit, wireways, pullboxes, junction boxes, bus ducts,built-up enclosures, enclosures, motor frames, etc., shall be made to form a continuous, conductingpermanent ground circuit of the lowest practical impedance to enhance the safe conduction of groundfault currents and to prevent objectionable differences in voltage between metal non-load currentcarrying parts of the electrical system.

D. In addition to the raceway system ground, an additional green wire ground shall be run in each raceway,sized for the largest circuit in the raceway.

1.03 DEFINITIONS:

A. Earth: Interpreted as absolute ground, a theoretical location of zero electrical potential.

B. Ground: Interpreted as a made conducting connection to earth by employing such devices as a drivenmetal rod, a buried metal plate, a metallic water pipe, etc., or any multiple or combination of thesedevices, and the conductors which may interconnect any of the foregoing.

C. System ground: Interpreted as a low impedance made conducting ground plane or system, with aconducting connection to ground, established for the benefit of a particular electrical system or relatedsystems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUCTORS:

A. All exposed grounding conductors such as bars, straps, cables, flexible jumpers, braids, shunts, etc., shallbe bare copper unless specifically noted or approved otherwise.



B. Cable size shall be as required by NEC Code, Section 250, stranded, soft drawn or soft annealed, unlessotherwise shown on plans or specified.

C. Cable insulation type and color shall be as shown or as specified.

D. Manufacturer to be same as specified in Section 26 05 00 - Basic Materials and Methods.

2.02 GROUND RODS:

A. Rods shall be solid cylindrical, sectionalized as required and ¾" minimum diameter, minimum 10 feetlong.

B. Material shall be solid copper or copperclad steel approved for use intended.

C. Copperweld or approved equal.

2.03 CONNECTORS, CLAMPS, TERMINALS:

A. Mechanical connectors and clamps shall be silicon bronze.

B. Solderless compression terminals shall be copper, long-barrel, two-bolt.

C. Make: Anderson, Burndy, Penn-Union, T&B, approved for use intended.

2.04 SOLDER:

A. Solder shall be prohibited for connections, except for high voltage cable metallic tape shields.

2.05 MOLDED FUSION WELDS:

A. Process shall be “Cadweld”, “Metalweld”, or “Thermoweld”.

2.06 HARDWARE:

A. All hardware shall be silicon bronze alloy.

1. Make: “Durium” or “Everdur”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Bare copper bars, cables, fittings, etc., shall not be installed in cinder fill nor shall be covered with soilcontaining cinders or other corrosive material.

B. Cables shall be installed with enough slack to prevent breaking stresses.



C. All grounding conductors subject to mechanical damage shall be protected by rigid steel conduit or othersuitable steel guards and in all cases where so protected shall be permanently and effectively grounded tosaid enclosure at each end of its length.

D. Where grounding conductors pass through floor slabs, walls, etc., and are not encased in metal conduit,they shall be sleeved in fiber, or approved non-metallic conduit.

E. The length, number, spacing, and location of ground rods shall be as shown on the drawings and asspecified hereinafter.

F. The depth to which ground rods are driven shall be as shown on the drawings, or as specified, or torefusal.

G. Connections to water pipes, including water meter or other similar device bypass connections, shall bemade only after the surface of the pipe at the point of connection has been thoroughly cleaned andbrightened and immediately prior to actually making the connection the contact surfaces are to be coatedwith Vaseline or “NO-OX-ID-A Special.”

H. All equipment ground bus, ground pads, frames, enclosures, etc., shall have surfaces at point ofconnection thoroughly cleaned and brightened just prior to actually making the connection. Touch-updamaged painted surfaces.

I. Splices in wire or cable grounding conductors are prohibited.

J. Where connections between ground rods and conductors are intended to be buried, the connectionbetween shall be a molded exothermic fusion weld.

3.02 INSTALLATION, RACEWAY SYSTEMS:

A. All metal supports, cable trays, messenger cables, frames, brackets, races, etc., for any part of theraceway system, panels, switches, boxes, starters, controls, etc., which are not rigidly secured to and incontact with the raceway system, or which are subject to vibration and loosening, shall be bonded to theraceway system, the size of the bonding conductor in accordance with NEC Table 250.66.

B. Termination of rigid conduit at all boxes, cabinets and enclosures shall be made up tightly with a doublelocknut arrangement and a bushing, bushings being of the insulated type where required by NEC.

C. Conduit which runs to or from all boxes, cabinets, or enclosures having concentric or eccentric knockoutswhich partially perforate the metal around the conduit and hence impair the continuity of system groundcircuits, shall be provided with bonding jumpers sized in accordance with NEC Table 250.122 connectedbetween a grounding type bushing/locknut on the conduit and a ground bus or stud inside the box,cabinet, or enclosure and attached thereto.

D. Conduit expansion joints and telescoping sections of metal raceways shall be provided with bondingjumpers sized in accordance with NEC Table 250.122.

E. Where flexible metallic conduit or liquid tight conduit is used, a bonding jumper shall be provided, sizedin accordance with NEC Table 250.122.



F. All non-metallic runs of conduit or raceway shall be provided with a system ground conductor sizedaccording to Table 250.122.

G. Where conduit enters or leaves any electrical enclosure with removable coverplates, provide conduitgrounding bushings and bonding jumpers sized in accordance with NEC Table 250.122 between thegrounding bushings and the enclosure rigid frame or ground bus.

H. The ground conductors contained in the interstices of interlocked armor cable shall be connected toground at every splice and termination point.

3.03 INSTALLATION, ATTACHMENT TO STRUCTURAL STEEL:

A. Location of attachment bonds of ground conductors shall be at points not subject to mechanical damage,but if possible where accessible for inspection.

B. Attach preferably by molded fusion welding process.

C. Where welding is prohibited, attach by bolting, 7/16" hole in steel, d" silicon bronze bolt, bolt endpeened, steel surface bright and flat prior to bolting, just prior to bolting contact surfaces lightly coatedwith Vaseline or “NO-OX-ID-A Special.”

3.04 GROUND ROD CONNECTION:

A. Unless otherwise shown on drawings or specified, all below grade connections shall be by molded fusionwelding process, all molds shall be new and unused at start of work and shall be replaced when worn orbroken, and the use of crossover molds is prohibited.

3.05 INSTALLATION, SECONDARY ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:

A. The neutral conductor of each and every low voltage, single or polyphase, system or distribution system,except special isolated double insulated systems, shall be solidly connected at one point only; at the mainsecondary switchgear; to system ground and shall be sized for current carrying capacity, not to be lessthan the following, which are listed in preferential order:

1. As shown or specified.2. As required by NEC, latest issue, Table 250.122.3. Not less than 25 percent of the transformer full load current or main protective device rating,

whichever is greater, based on NEMA standard bus size.

B. Provide equipment grounding conductor, green colored insulation, with phase conductors, to primaryside of all transformers rated 600 volts or less circuited to case and secondary neutral bushing, to motors,to motor control equipment, to Kitchen equipment, to heating equipment, and to all convenience outlets,insulation shall be same type as phase conductors.

C. Transformer secondary neutral bushings shall also to be circuited to nearest metallic water pipe, buildingsteel or ground rod.



DIVISION 26 SECTION 26 05 53 - ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PAGE 1


SECTION 26 05 53 - ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Provide a complete, operating, tested, functioning, documented Electrical Equipment IdentificationSystem including all work shown, specified, or required for proper system operation.

B. Under this Section provide equipment and circuit identification as follows:

1. Typewritten panel directories with duplicates on As-Built Drawings.2. Panelboard nameplates.3. Panelboard breaker identification tags.4. Wiring color code.5. Wiring labeling.6. Junction box marking.7. Fire alarm detection junction box color coding.8. Motor starter/disconnect/VFD nameplates.9. Conduit marking.10. Panelboard voltage marking.11. Receptacle marking.12. Fire alarm device labeling.

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Provide submittals, shop drawings and coordination drawings. Provide for the following:

1. Panel.2. Switchgear.3. Motor starters.4. Disconnect.5. VFD nameplates.

1.04 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

A. Factory produced panelboard nameplates included in Specification Section 26 24 00.

B. Color code for conductors provided in Specification Section 26 05 00.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS:

A. Legend Plates:

1. Two ply, 1/16" thick flexible plastic legend plates, front etched with minimum 3/16" Gothicletters. Provide adhesive backing and a minimum of two 5/32" diameter screw holes. Plate sizeshall be minimum 1" x 3". Multi-layer, non-conductive material, machine-engraved with properdesignation.

2. C & M Name Shop, Syracuse, or equal.3. Stick on computer printed labels shall not be accepted.

B. Stencils:

1. Die cut, capital letters.2. Letters d" minimum height.

C. Wire Markers:

1. Adhesive backed mylar or fabric material with printed markings.2. Brady or equivalent.

D. Voltage Markers:

1. Voltage markers shall be bright orange with black letters. Brady Style B (1" by 4½") or equal.Examples:

Three Phase Single Phase Three Phase 208 volts 240 volts 480 volts 120 volts 120 volts 277 volts

E. Receptacle Source Marker:

1. 12 point black text on white or clear background, computer printed stick-on labels.

2.02 PANEL SCHEDULE:

A. All panel schedules shall be type written. Hand writing in any form will not be accepted.

B. Panel schedules shall identify voltage of operation, rating of buss or MCB and upstream overcurrentprotection device.

C. Breakers shall be identified with their pole space, current rating and load serviced.

D. Contractor shall provide their company name and date of substantial completion on the schedule.



2.03 FIRE ALARM DEVICE ADDRESS LABELING:

A. Provide computer-printed adhesive labels for each fire alarm device. Label shall indicate the deviceaddress number for initiating devices and the loop/zone number for notification devices.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 IDENTIFICATION, GENERAL:

A. Equipment name and number as shown on drawings to be used for equipment identification.

B. Disconnect switches, starters, control, etc., serving utilized equipment shall be labeled on front cover.

C. Step-down transformers shall be labeled with primary/secondary voltages.

D. Utilized equipment which does not have service voltage clearly indicated shall also be labeled by theContractor, as directed by the Engineer.

E. Starters or control panels with interlock shall be provided with a warning sign to indicate separate controlvoltage and may be energized. Warning sign shall be mounted inside enclosure.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS:

A. Securely fastened to equipment to be identified with adhesive material and plated screws.

B. Locate on front of equipment to be identified in neat manner, plumb and true.

C. All power supply equipment; i.e., branch circuit breakers, equipment disconnect switches, motor starters,etc. to be labeled to identify function and/or load served.

3.03 STENCILED LABELS:

A. To be used only on equipment in unfinished areas.

B. Obtain Engineer’s approval.

C. Locate on front of equipment to be identified in neat manner, plumb and true.

3.04 WIRE MARKERS:

A. Install approximately 2" from wire ends.

B. All wiring to be identified via labeling at all ends, in junction and pull boxes, in panelboards, atequipment terminations, at terminal boards and/or cabinets. Wiring to be identified for continuity.

3.05 PANEL DIRECTORIES:

A. Install in a manner to be legible but protected from physical damage under conditions of normal use.

B. Room names and numbers to be referenced on directory along with load supplied.



3.06 MATERIALS TO BE LABELED:

A. Directories: Update existing panelboards to include new load served.

3.07 CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION:

A. Neat ½" high black hand written with permanent marker, block letters at 6" from entrance to panelboards,junction boxes, starters and equipment.

B. Use a consistent numbering scheme, separate from circuit or load numbers, start with A1 and continuethrough Z99, omitting the Letters D, I, L and O. Conduits shall be marked in all spaces where exposed oraccessible. Mark conduit numbers inside junction boxes where conduit is not exposed or accessible.

C. Identify conduit layout and conduit numbers on As-Built Drawings.

3.08 FIRE ALARM/DETECTION:

A. Paint junction box covers red and mark zone and function in black permanent marker on outside ofjunction box cover.

B. Omit red paint on junction box covers in finished areas. Mark zone and function on inside of junctionbox in finished areas.

3.09 RECEPTACLE IDENTIFICATION:

A. Each receptacle shall be marked with source panel and breaker number.



DIVISION 26 SECTION 26 09 23 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PAGE 1


SECTION 26 09 23 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Provide a complete, operating, tested, functioning, documented Lighting Control System including allwork shown, specified, or required for proper system operation.

B. Contractor’s work to include all labor, materials, tools, appliances, control hardware, sensor, wire,junction boxes and equipment necessary for and incidental to the delivery, installation and furnishing of acompletely operational lighting control system, as described herein.

C. Contractor/Supplier shall examine all general specification provisions and drawings for related electricalwork required as work under Division 26.

1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes toggle switches for the control of local lighting.

B. Related sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section 26 05 00 - Electrical Basic Materials and Methods.

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Include dimensions and data on features, components and ratings for lighting controldevices.

1. Switches.

B. Samples: Occupancy sensors for color selection and evaluation of technical features.

C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

D. Maintenance Data: For lighting control devices to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain lighting control devices from a single source with total responsibility forcompatibility of lighting control system components specified in this Section and throughout Division 26.

B. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,for their indicated use and installation conditions by a testing agency acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.

C. Comply with 47 CFR 15, Subparts A and B for Class ‘A’ digital devices.



D. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.05 COORDINATION:

A. Coordinate features of devices specified in this Section with systems and components specified in otherSections to form an integrated system of compatible components. Match components andinterconnections for optimum performance of specified functions. Include coordination with thefollowing:

1. Division 26 Section “Basic Materials and Methods”.2. Division 26 Section “Panelboards”.

B. Where a light control device is selected as part of a system, all components of the system must be fromthe same manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICE REQUIREMENTS:

A. Line-Voltage Surge Protection Device: Include in all 120- and 277-V solid-state equipment. Comply withUL 1449, 3rd Edition and with ANSI C62.41 for Category ‘A’ locations.

2.02 TOGGLE SWITCHES:

A. Switches, Local:

1. Toggle operated A.C. type.2. Color selected by Architect.3. Specification grade, slow make, slow break.4. 20 amperes at 120V rating.5. Make: P&S PT20AC1 single pole, PT20AC3 three way.6. Provide with plugtail connector PTS6STR3&4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION:

A. Install equipment level and plumb and according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Mount lighting control devices according to manufacturer’s written instructions and requirements inDivision 26 Section 26 05 00 - Electrical Basic Materials and Methods.

C. Mounting heights indicated are to bottom of unit for suspended devices and to center of unit for wall-mounting devices.

3.02 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION:

A. Install wiring between sensing and control devices according to manufacturer’s written instructions andas specified in Division 26.



B. Wiring Method: Install all wiring in raceway as specified in Section 26 05 00 - Electrical Basic Materialsand Methods.

C. Bundle, train and support wiring in enclosures.

D. Ground equipment.

E. Connections: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. In manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION:

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26.


A. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least seven (7) working daysadvance notice.

B. Inspect control components for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory labeling, and nameplatecompliance with the Contract Documents.

C. Check tightness of electrical connections with torque wrench calibrated within previous six months. Usemanufacturer’s recommend torque values.

D. Verify settings of photoelectric devices with photometer calibrated within previous six months.

E. Electrical Tests: Use particular caution when testing devices containing solid-state components. Performthe following according to manufacturer’s written instructions:

1. Continuity tests of circuits.

2. Operational Tests: Set and operate devices to demonstrate their functions and capabilities in amethodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating functions.

a. Include testing of devices under conditions that simulate actual operational conditions.Record control settings, operations, cues and functional observations.

F. Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments and retest. Verify that specified requirements are met.

G. Test Labeling: After satisfactory completion of tests and inspections, apply a label to tested componentsindicating test results, date and responsible agency and representative.

H. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and workmanship andunsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.

3.05 CLEANING:

A. Cleaning: Clean equipment and devices internally and externally using methods and materialsrecommended by manufacturers and repair damaged finishes.



3.06 DEMONSTRATION:

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel as specifiedbelow:

1. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel on troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and preventativemaintenance. Provide a minimum of three hours training.

2. Training Aid: Use the approved final version of maintenance manuals as a training aid.3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven (7) days advance notice.

3.07 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE:

A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up to three (3)project site visits, when requested, to adjust light levels, make program changes and adjust sensors andcontrols to suit actual conditions.

3.08 FACTORY COMMISSIONING:

A. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be completely commissioned by the manufacturer’sfactory authorized technician who will verify all adjustments and device placements to ensure a trouble-free lighting control system. This service will be provided at no cost to the Owner.

B. The electrical contractor shall provide both the manufacturer and the Engineer with ten (10) workingdays written notice of the scheduled commissioning date. Upon completion of the system fine tuning thefactory authorized technician shall provide the proper training to the Owner’s personnel in the adjustmentand maintenance of the sensors.



DIVISION 26 SECTION 26 24 00 - PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS PAGE 1


SECTION 26 24 00 - PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Provide panelboards and load centers including all work shown, specified, or required for proper systemoperation.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS:

A. The panel board(s) and circuit breaker(s) referenced herein are designed and manufactured according tothe latest revision of the following specifications:

1. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards2. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards

Rated 600 Volts or less.3. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.4. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts

Maximum).5. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.6. UL 67 - Panelboards.7. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-front Switches.8. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures.9. CSA Standard C22.2 No. 29-M (Latest Issue) - Panelboards and Enclosed Panelboards.10. CSA Standard C22.2 No. 5-M91 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.11. Federal Specification W-P-115C - Type I Class 1.12. Federal Specification W-P-115C-Type II Class 1.13. Federal Specification W-C-375B/Gen - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch Circuit and

Service.14. Federal Specification W-C-856C-Fusible Switches.15. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).16. ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submittal documents shall include:

1. Drawings Displaying:



a. Overall panelboard dimensions.b. Interior mounting dimensions.c. Wiring gutter dimensions.d. Location of the main, branches and solid neutral. e. One line diagrams with applicable voltage systems.

2. Provide submittals on each breaker type submitted.3. Provide any series rating combination where applicable.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS:

A. Company specializing in manufacturing of panelboard products with a minimum of fifty (50) yearsdocumented experience. General Electric, Square D Company and Eaton Cutler-Hammer are Ownerstandard, no other manufacturers shall be accepted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 LIGHTING AND POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELS:

A. Ratings:

1. Lighting panelboards shall be rated 208Y/120V, 3 phase, 4 wire, main lugs only or main circuitbreaker as shown. Panelboards shall contain 42 circuits unless shown otherwise.

2. Power panelboards shall be rated 208Y/120V, 3 phase, or 3 phase, 4 wire as shown and mainlugs only or main circuit breaker as shown.

3. Power and appliance panelboards shall be rated 208Y/120V, 3 phase, 4 wire, main lugs only ormain circuit breaker as shown. Panelboards shall contain 42 circuits unless shown otherwise.

4. Maximum current ratings for mains shall be 225 amperes unless noted otherwise.5. Panels shall be fully rated for a minimum 22,000 AIC, unless specifically shown otherwise.

Series ratings will not be accepted. 6. All panelboards shall be bolt-on breaker type.

B. Enclosure:

1. Boxes shall be 20" wide or 24O wide as shown and 6" deep with wire bending space per NationalElectric Code. NEMA Type 1 unless shown otherwise.

2. Fronts shall be reinforced steel with concealed hinges and concealed trim adjusting screws. Trimclamps are unacceptable. Fronts shall allow for work to be performed on panelboards withoutbeing removed (hinged trim). The style of hinged trim shall be the type with a continuous pianohinge on one side, allowing the cover to hinge away from the panel without fully removing thecover. The traditional “door in-door” style is not desired; it is desired that the hinged cover beretained in place by screws rather than latches. Provide flush or surface mount cover as shown ondrawings. Please note: Panel cover trim design known as “E-Z Trim” by Cutler Hammer, orsimilar models, shall not be acceptable as a substitute for specified panel cover.

3. All door locks shall be corrosion proof Valox (or equal) with retractable latches. All door locksshall be keyed for a single key.

4. Clear Lexan (or equal) directory card holders shall be permanently mounted on front door.Identification strips shall be displayed adjacent to each breaker to identify number.

5. All panelboared series ratings shall be prominently displayed on dead front shield.



6. Interiors shall permit top or bottom incoming cables.7. Furnish engraved nameplate for panel to match Engineer designation. Install in panel as directed

by Engineer.

C. Bus Bars:

1. Bus bars shall be phase sequenced, fully insulated and supported by high impact Noryl (or equal)interior base assemblies.

2. Bus bars shall be mechanically supported by zinc finished galvanneal steel frames to preventvibration and damage from short circuits.

3. Terminations shall be UL tested and listed and suitable for UL copper wire.4. Provide one (1) continuous bus bar per phase. Each bus bar shall have sequentially phased

branch circuit connectors for plug-in or bolt-on branch circuit breakers. Bus bars shall be fullyrated copper.

5. Split solid neutral bus shall be plated and located in main compartment for all incoming neutralcables to be same length.

6. Lugs shall be rated for 75EC terminations.7. Lugs for copper conductors on main lug only, connections shall be bolted lugs. Lugs for

aluminum conductors shall be compression lugs.8. Lug bodies shall bolt in place.

D. Circuit Breakers:

1. Molded case circuit breakers shall be bolt on devices.2. All circuit breakers less than 100 amps shall have thermal and magnetic trip elements in each

pole with interrupting rating as scheduled. All circuit breakers 100 amps and larger shall beelectronic trip.

3. 2 and 3 pole breakers shall have internal common trip crossbars for simultaneous tripping of eachpole.

4. Circuit breakers shall not be restricted to any mounting location due to physical size.5. All branch breakers 15 to 100 amperes shall be able to be mounted in any panel position for twin

or double mounting without space penalty. Sum of ratings for two (2) such mounted devices shallnot exceed 180 amperes.

6. Main and sub-feed circuit breakers shall be vertically mounted.7. Branch breaker panelboard connections shall be copper to copper.8. All panelboard terminations shall be rated as indicated on drawings.9. All breakers shall have an over center mechanism and be quick make and quick break.10. All breakers shall have handle trip indication and a trip indicator in window of circuit breaker

housing.11. Breaker handle and faceplate shall indicate rated ampacity.12. Circuit breaker escutcheon shall have International I/O markings, in addition to standard

ON/OFF markings.13. Provide breakers for all circuits shown on the plans plus spares as scheduled.14. Where shown or otherwise required, provide combination type Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter

(AFCI) circuit breakers.15. Breakers shown or specified for installation into existing panels shall be compatible with the

panel to which they are installed, and shall carry an interrupting rating of not less than 22,000AIC.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION:

A. Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, NEMA PB 1.1 and NECStandards.

B. Anchor panelboards to structure and make branch circuit connections.

C. Coordinate the panelboard bus ratings and circuit breaker coordination rating with the available faultcurrent.

D. Install permanent ID strips adjacent breakers so that breaker numbers are clearly visible.


A. Inspect complete installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage and grounding.

B. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard tobalance the phase loads to within 20% of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branchcircuits.

C. Check tightness of bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using calibrated torque wrench ortorque screwdriver per manufacturer’s written specifications.

3.03 CLEANING:

A. Clean interiors of panels to remove construction debris, dirt, shipping materials.

B. Repaint scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original finish.

3.04 LOAD TEST:

A. Conduct load test on panelboards and loadcenters prior to request for final payment. Written test reportsshall be signed by an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer, submitted to the Engineerand shall comply with the following procedure:

1. Energize maximum normal light and power load for a period of two (2) hours scheduled with theOwner and Engineer.

2. Record voltage at service and at each panel.3. Measure current in each phase of all feeders.4. Reconnect circuits as required or directed to provide balance load on all feeders.5. Provide and install all necessary metering equipment.6. Arrange to have Engineer witness the test.7. Owner shall assume cost of energy.



DIVISION 26 SECTION 26 29 13 - MOTOR STARTERS & DISCONNECTS PAGE 1


SECTION 26 29 13 - MOTOR STARTERS & DISCONNECTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Provide motor starters and disconnects, including all work shown, specified, or required for propersystem operation.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS:

A. The combination starters and protection devices in this specification shall be designed and manufacturedaccording to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted):

1. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code - Latest issue.2. CSA C22.2 No. 14 - Industrial Control Equipment - Latest issue.3. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays,

Rated Not More than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC - Latest issue.4. UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment - Latest issue.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Provide submittals on all products covered under this division. Submittals shall include:

1. Dimensions.2. Fuses.3. Accessories.4. All ratings.5. Auxiliary contacts.6. Overloads.7. Magnetic contactor specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS:

A. All products in this section shall be by General Electric Company, Square D or Eaton Cutler-Hammer.These manufacturers are Owner Standard, no other manufacturers shall be accepted.



2.02 CLASSIFICATION/ASSEMBLY:

A. All products to be heavy duty grade classification, NEMA type as scheduled on drawings. General dutyproducts not accepted.

B. All products shall be factory assembled and wired and shall be UL approved. Assemblies fabricated byContractor shall not be accepted.

C. Units shall be horsepower rated for load served, current rating and poles as shown on Plans.

2.03 DISCONNECT SWITCHES (NON-FUSIBLE):

A. Visible blade with dual color, red/black position indicator. Unit shall be padlockable in “off” position.

B. Unit shall be the heavy-duty version.

C. Where shown provide auxiliary interlock kits. Auxiliary interlocks are required on all disconnectswitches serving VFD equipment.

D. Rating: 600 Volts for all loads served.

E. Make: Square D Class 3110 or equal in GE or Eaton Cutler-Hammer.

2.04 DISCONNECT SWITCHES (FUSIBLE):

A. Visible blade with dual color, red/black position indicator. Unit shall be padlockable in “off” position.

B. Unit shall be the heavy-duty version.

C. Provide motor overload elements and fuse clips for Class ‘R’ fuses.

D. Where shown provide auxiliary interlock. Auxiliary interlocks are required on all disconnect switchesserving VFD equipment.

E. Rating:

1. 240 Volts for 208 and 240 Volt loads.2. 600 Volts for loads above 240 Volts.

F. Make: Square D Class 3110 or equal in GE or Eaton Cutler-Hammer.

2.05 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS:

A. Motor control switch and motor overload element in single enclosure.

B. Make: Square D class 2510 or equal in GE or Eaton Cutler-Hammer.

2.06 COMBINATION MAGNETIC MOTOR STATER/FUSIBLE DISCONNECT SWITCH:

A. Provide motor overload elements and fuse clips for Class ‘R’ fuses.



B. Visible blade with dual color, red/black position indicator. Unit shall be padlockable in “off” position.

C. Parts subject to wear or arcing shall be removable and replaceable.

D. Where shown provide auxiliary interlock kits. Auxiliary interlocks are required on all disconnectswitches serving VFD equipment.

E. Provide 24 or 120 volt control transformer as shown and 24 or 120 volt contactor coil, provide fuses fortransformer.

F. Provide cover mounted HOA switch.

G. Make: Square D Class 8538 or equal in GE or Eaton Cutler-Hammer.

2.07 FUSES:

A. Dual Element, time delay.

B. Type and size as required.

C. Make: Buss Fustron, Shawmut Gould or Brush Reliance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION:

A. Mount manual motor starters, magnetic motor starters and disconnects on substantial mount framesprovided by the Electrical Contractor, with clearances according to the NEC.

B. Circuit according to the NEC.

C. For variable speed application, provide auxiliary interlock wiring for disconnects to disable variablefrequency drive unit which feeds the disconnect.



DIVISION 26 SECTION 26 50 00 - LIGHTING PAGE 1


SECTION 26 50 00 - LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The Contract Drawings and the General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions ofthe Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1Specification Sections apply to the Work of this Division.

B. The applicable provisions of Sections 23 05 00 - HVAC Basic Materials and Methods and 26 05 00 -Electrical Basic Materials and Methods apply to the Work of this Section.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Provide lighting fixtures, lenses, globes, hangers, supports, LED light engines and lamps andappurtenances to provide a complete lighting system.

B. Provide means of disconnect at ballasted luminaires for the purpose of servicing.

C. Provide spare lamps and ballasts as identified in Part 3.

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit shop drawings as described in Section 26 05 00. Luminaire shop drawings shall includephotometric data for each luminaire utilizing the specified lens/louver type, lamp(s) and ballast(s). Allluminaire types for the project shall be submitted in a single complete package which shall be in the formof a soft cover binder with each luminaire separated by an identified index tab. Information on eachluminaire shall include:

1. Manufacturer and Catalog Number. 2. Dimensioned Construction Drawing(s). 3. Complete Catalog “Cut” Sheet.4. Photometrics (space to mounting height ratio, coefficient of utilization complete values, IES

distribution hard and electronic copy, candlepower distribution by angle and luminaireefficiency).

5. Lens/Louver Type. 6. Reflector information (type, material, reflectance, etc). 7. LED driver or fluorescent ballast with each type luminaire as applicable (type, sound rating,

overload protection, voltage, input/fixture wattage, ballast factor, power factor, etc.). 8. Materials for all components. 9. Socket Type (as applicable). 10. Lamp or LED light engine (L70 lumen maintenance calculations, initial delivered lumen output,

color temperature in degrees kelvin, LED chip binning accuracy, color rendering index,dimensions, wattage, and mercury content [for fluorescent lamps]).

11. Certification of IES LM-79 and IES LM-80 testing for LED luminaires. 12. IES TM-21 life cycle testing results for LED luminaires.



13. Proof that the lamps and ballasts to be provided are on the Consortium for Energy Efficiency’s(CEE) list of approved equipment.

14. Means of service disconnect.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Luminaires and equipment shall be delivered with NRTL and manufacturer’s labels intact and legible.Broken, cracked and damaged materials and equipment shall be removed from the site immediately andbe replaced with new materials and equipment. Luminaires and accessories shall be stored in protecteddry locations in their original unbroken package or container. Luminaires shall be protected from dustand dampness both before and after installation. Luminaires shall be protected from paint and cleaningsolvents during all phases of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.01 GENERAL:

A. All fixtures of the same type shall be by the same manufacturer.

B. All lamps of the same type shall be by the same manufacturer. Lamps shall be appropriate for the actualballast furnished and shall be tested and certified for operation by the ballast manufacturer.

2.02 FIXTURES:

A. Schedule (See Drawings). Schedule can be provided to the Contractor in electronic spreadsheet formatupon request.

2.03 LED LUMINAIRES:

A. LED luminaires shall be identical in construction features, options and appearance to the luminairesspecified in the Luminaire Schedule. LED luminaires include white and RGB systems respectively.

1. LED luminaires shall be provided with all cables, controllers, power supplies, connectors,terminators and accessories required for a complete installation. LED system shall utilize pulsewidth modulation, non-linear scaling techniques and reverse polarity protection forhigh-resolution output.

2. RGB LED systems shall be capable of at least 8-bit control of red, green and blue module. RGBLED system shall be capable of setting each module with a unique and individual address. Eachaddress shall be controlled independently by DMX or alternate method protocol. All RGB LEDfixtures shall undergo a minimum of eight-hour burn-in testing during manufacturing.

3. LED luminaires shall be high brightness and binned for forward voltage, luminous flux andwavelength.

4. LED luminaires shall be tested in accordance with IESNA LM-79 (luminous output, power input,luminaire efficacy (lumens/watt), color temperature and color rendering index) and IESNALM-80 (output luminous maintenance, 6,000 hour minimum test). Luminaire output efficacyshall be a minimum of 89 lumens/watt. Rated life as calculated according to IES Standard TM-21shall be a minimum of 50,000 hours at 90% output. Testing shall be performed by a USDepartment of Energy (DOE) accredited laboratory.

5. The luminaire (to include LED lamps, LED chips, LED boards and LED drivers) shall have a fullfive (5) year minimum warranty for replacement and labor of any failed component or diode.



a. Acceptable LED Diode Manufacturers:

1) Philips.2) Osram.3) Cree. 4) Nichea.5) Lumiled.

2.04 LED POWER SUPPLIES & DRIVERS:

A. Power supplies shall meet or exceed the technical and performance standard all power supplies shallmeet or exceed the following basis:

1. The LED power supply shall accept an input voltage range of 120-277VAC ±10%. 2. The LED power supply shall have a power factor of 0.9 or higher.3. The LED power supply shall have a maximum THD of 20% at full load (@ 120V or 277V).4. The minimum efficiency of the LED power supply shall be 85% at full load.

5. Control Input:

a. Power supplies with dimmable outputs shall indicate whether the output is Pulse WidthModulated (PWM), Constant Current Reduction (CCR), or a combination. For PWMdimming, the frequency shall be >1000hz to minimize risks of strobe effect.

b. Phase Control:

1) Dimming of the input power source down to 1% of the power supply output. Itshall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate phase controldimming technology with the lighting control devices.

6. Phase-controlled power supply shall indicate the preferred method of phase-controlled input(forward or reverse):

a. 4-Wire (0-10V DC Voltage Controlled) Dimming Drivers:

1) Compatible with Passive or solid state current sink devices down to 1% of thepower supply output.

2) The 0-10VDC dimming circuit shall not exceed 15V DC in an unloaded orloaded condition.

3) Must meet IEC 60929 Annex E for General White Lighting LED drivers.4) Connect to devices compatible with 0 to 10V Analog Control Protocol, Class 2,

capable of sinking 0.6 mA per driver at a low end of 0.3V. Limit the number ofdrivers on each 0-10V control output based on voltage drop and control capacity.

5) Must meet ESTA E1.3 for RGBW LED drivers.6) Interface with 0-10 dimming driver shall be completely isolated from AC power

to prevent AC voltage on the 0-10V wires. 7) The available sink current from each driver on the 0-10V interface shall not

exceed 1 mA.



b. Digital (DALI Low Voltage Controlled) Dimming Drivers:

1) Must meet IEC 62386.

c. Digital Multiplex (DMX Low Voltage Controlled) Dimming Drivers:

1) Must meet DMX / RDM: USITT DMX512A and ANSI E1.20 (Explore &Address).

2) Capable of signal interpolation and smoothing of color and intensity transitions.

7. The LED power supply shall comply with FCC Part 15 (Class A or Class B).8. The LED power supply shall have a Class A sound rating. 9. The LED power supply shall have two cycle inrush current when power is applied that does not

exceed 20 times steady state current per power supply. 10. Total Harmonic Distortion less than 20% percent and meet ANSI C82.11 maximum allowable

THD requirements at full output. THD shall at no point in the dimming curve allow imbalancecurrent to exceed full output THD.

11. The LED power supply shall have transient protection – ANSI C62.41 Category A.12. The LED power supply shall be UL 8750 Class 2 Recognized or Listed, Damp rated. 13. The LED power supply output voltage should not exceed 60V (Complies with Class 2 for US).14. Driver should be UL Recognized under the component program and shall be modular for simple

field replacement. Drivers that are not UL Recognized or not suited for field replacement will notbe considered.

15. The LED Power supply shall have a minimum of 50,000 hours of rated lifetime at maximumoperating conditions.

16. The LED Power supply shall have a minimum of 5-year warranty Tc of 75C or higher point.

2.05 FLUORESCENT LAMPS:

A. All fluorescent lamps shall be low Mercury, energy saving type and color temperature as scheduled.

B. T8 lamps shall be 89 lumens per watt or greater.

2.06 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS:

A. All ballasts shall be of the PCB free type.

B. Ballast shall meet performance Specifications scheduled on Drawings. Ballast factor is critical to meetingCode required lighting power budget.

C. All ballasts shall be of the energy saving type. As scheduled.

D. Make: Advanced, Lutron or Universal as scheduled.

2.07 LUMINAIRES DISCONNECT:

A. All ballasted lighting fixtures shall be provided with luminaire disconnect to allow for the simultaneousdisconnect of hot and neutral conductors to the ballast.

B. Make: Ideal “PowerPlug” luminaire disconnect or equal.



2.08 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT BALLASTS & LED DRIVERS:

A. All emergency ballasts and drivers shall be inverter type with the following minimum requirements:

1. Shall operate indicated lamps at nearly full illumination for a minimum of 90 minutes. 2. Upon loss of normal power, luminaire shall automatically switch to inverter ballast / driver with

battery. 3. Upon restoration of normal, luminaire shall return to normal power and ballast /driver shall

return to charging mode. 4. Battery shall be maintenance free, nickel-cadmium type, and be an integral part of ballast

assembly. Life expectancy of battery shall be a minimum of seven years. 5. Assembly shall be UL listed and approved under UL924 - “Emergency Lighting and Power

Equipment”. 6. Shall include an emergency test switch with LED indicator mounted in a common

utility/mechanical room. 7. Manufacturer: Bodine or approved equal.

2.09 REFLECTORS:

A. Reflectors and reflecting cones or baffles shall be as follows:

1. Absolutely free of any tooling marks including spinning lines, indentations caused by riveting orother assembly techniques.

2. No rivets, springs, or other hardware visible after installation. 3. First quality polished, buffed and anodized finish, “Alzak” or approved equal. 4. Specular finish color as selected by the Architect or as specified in the fixture schedule.

B. Other aluminum reflectors shall be as follows:

1. Formed and finished as noted on the Drawings and elsewhere in the Specification.2. Reflectors free from blemishes, scratches, or indentations which would distort their reflective

function. 3. Finished by means of the “Alzak” process or approved equal unless otherwise noted.

C. Reflector and housing shall comply completely enclose the fixture’s fluorescent lamp in downlights in aplenum ceiling and provide the full rated output of the lamp. Fixtures that vent through the downlightreflector into the plenum are not acceptable.

2.10 LENSES:

A. All lenses secured by positive means with neoprene or silicone gasketing or washers as required to holdthe lens tight within a frame or attach to housing.

B. All glass lenses shall be heat treated (tempered) or sealed with a clear acrylic laminate layer to provide a“safety glass” rating. All lenses which require removal for relamping or normal maintenance shall beattached to the fixture housing by a minimal length of safety chain to prohibit the lens from falling andstriking surrounding surfaces.



C. Acrylic lenses shall be 100 percent virgin acrylic polymer and colorless. For lenses with pattern ofpyramids or cones, specified minimum thickness refers to distance from flat surface to base of pyramids(cones), or thickness of undisturbed material. All lenses shall be a minimum 0.156" thick.

D. The quality of the raw acrylic material must exceed IES, SPI, and NEMA Specifications by at least 100percent which, as a minimum standard, shall not exceed yellowness factor of 3 after 2,000 hours ofexposure in the Fade-o-meter or as tested by an independent test laboratory. Acrylic plastic lenses anddiffusers shall be properly cast, molded or extruded as specified, and shall remain free of anydimensional instability, discoloration, embrittlement, or loss of light transmittance for at least 15 years.

2.11 LOUVERS:

A. All louvers shall be fabricated of the specified material.

B. All fluorescent light fixture louvers shall be parabolic and shall be rated at 90 percent or over on the VCPindex.

C. Louver finishes shall be provided as specified.

D. All plastic parabolic louvers shall be destaticized before and after fabrication to insure minimummaintenance.

E. All metal louvers shall be coated with anti-rust material and electrostatically painted.

F. All louvers shall be heat tested to withstand lamp operating temperatures with no deformation of shape,paint blistering or discoloration.

2.12 FIXTURE TRIMS:

A. Fixtures shall have finish trim designed for the following types of ceiling systems: Ceiling Type TrimType:

1. Recessed Incandescent, Fluorescent, LED, or Metal Halide Fixtures

a. Plaster - Overlap Trim. b. Concrete - Overlap Trim. c. Tile - Overlap Trim. d. Gypsum - Overlap Trim. e. Metal Pan, Concealed M - Modular, Fit-in Support. f. Lay-in - Modular, Tile with Flush Fit-in.

B. Provide trim details as shown on the Drawings or as specified, which are indicative of appearance anddimensional requirements. The trim finish and dimensions subject to the approval of the Architect.

C. Trimless fixtures shall be installed per manufacture’s guidelines and shall be installed and coordinatedwith other trades as required.

D. Mitered corners shall be continuously welded and smoothed before shop finish is applied. No lapping oftrim metal for all flush mounted ceiling trims for rectangular or square recessed fixtures.



E. Provide a mounting frame or ring with lock recessed or semi-recessed light fixture to secure the mountingframe to the ceiling and support any reflectors, trims, or lenses. Ring shall be compatible with the ceilingand of sufficient strength to rigidly support the fixture and any stress applied in relamping.

F. Catalog numbers are included in the Lighting Fixture Schedule for reference. Provide all accessories anddesign features described herein regardless of whether such features are included in catalog referenceincluding, mounting hardware, louvers, lenses, filters, transformers, etc.

2.13 WIRING:

A. Wiring within lighting fixture for connection to branch circuit shall be:

1. NEC Type AF for 120 volt, minimum No. 18 AWG. 2. NEC Type SF-2 for 277 volt, minimum No. 18 AWG.

B. Stranded wire within lighting fixture shall be lead dipped.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FIXTURES:

A. Securely support all fixtures in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and U.L. or ETLlisting information.

B. Location:

1. Evenly proportioned in room, except adjusted to conform with ceiling pattern as described belowand except where otherwise shown or dimensioned.

2. Edges of fixtures parallel with walls.

C. Plaster Frames:

1. Provide for all recessed fixtures in wet type ceilings.2. Install in cooperation with other trades.

D. Mounting:

1. All fixtures must hang true to vertical, free from finger marks, flaws, scratches, dents or otherimperfections.

2. Take care when hanging fixtures not to deface in any way, ceilings or walls.3. Install continuous rows of fixtures in straight line; all fixtures at same level. Fixtures must not be

rotated about longitudinal axis with respect to one another.4. Mount surface fixtures tight to surface without distorting it.5. Provide proper mounting equipment and trim for recessed fixtures to adapt them to the ceiling or

wall construction and to prevent light leaks around trim.6. Provide special means for supporting fixtures as hereinafter specified, as shown on plans, or as

required.7. All stem mounted fixtures shall be hung level from self-aligning hangers in canopies; all stems

shall be constructed of formed and stamped sheet metal, no cast or “pot metal” parts shall beaccepted.



8. Securely support all ceiling fixtures, hangers, and outlet boxes from structural members, not fromceiling members. In addition the fixtures must be securely fastened to framing members of theceiling in order to meet NEC, Article 410.36. Lock clip, wirelashing or leveling supports shall beacceptable means.

9. Plastic inserts not permitted.10. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by conduit.11. Supports for each fixture shall be capable of supporting four (4) times fixture weight. Use ¼"

threaded rod, fender washer and double nuts.12. Exterior fixtures shall be installed with non-ferrous metal screws finished to match the fixture.

13. Fixtures shall be supported from building structure and using supports as follows (minimumrequirements):

a. Ceiling Surface Mounted:

1) 1!x 4! - two supports.2) All boxes (canopies) supported from structure.

14. Provide special extra wide toggle bolt support, 10" wide toggle, Paine Company #400, mountedabove existing plaster ceilings where approved by Engineer and noted on Plans.

E. Surface Ceiling Mounting:

1. Mount surface luminaires tight to surface in a manner such that mounting surface does not distortfixture.

2. Luminaires installed in continuous rows may be fed by a single outlet if fixtures are UL approvedand suitable for through wiring in luminaire raceway.

3. Luminaire fasteners or hangers shall be capable of supporting four times luminaire weight. 4. Luminaires shall be supported independent from ceiling system or other building services.

F. Recessed Mounting:

1. The Electrical Contractor shall verify ceiling type, construction, and material prior to placing anorder for recessed luminaires.

2. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish fixtures with an IC rating for all recessed incandescentfixtures installed in direct contact with insulation.

3. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install plaster frames for plaster ceilings and flangedframes for drywall ceilings.

4. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all required mounting hardware andaccessories to adapt fixtures to ceiling construction.

5. Lay-in type luminaires shall be supported independent of the ceiling system at each end of theluminaire with galvanized support wire.

6. Provide and install seismic hold-down clips for all lay-in type lighting fixtures.

G. Pendant Mounting:

1. Mount pendant mounted luminaires from ¼" threaded rods of required length. 2. Sleeve threaded rods with ½ " EMT painted with color as directed by Architect/Engineer.3. Luminaires installed in continuous rows may be fed by a single outlet if they are UL approved

and suitable for through wiring in luminaire raceway.



H. Remote Fluorescent Ballasts & LED Drivers:

1. Remote ballasts and LED drivers shall be mounted in an approved NEMA 1 enclosure. Remoteballasts shall be located in areas easily accessible to maintenance personnel.

2. Wiring from luminaire to remote ballasts and LED drivers shall not exceed the manufacturer’srecommendations for distance.

3. Remote ballasts and LED drivers shall be clearly labeled indicating fixture served, voltage,panelboard and circuit number served from.

I. Aircraft Cable Suspension:

1. Cables shall be 1/16" aircraft cable with end safety fittings. Cable shall be provided with 2"diameter mini-canopy and threaded coupler for attachment to a ¼" 20 threaded stud extending ¾"below ceiling.

2. Cable assembly shall include a spring-loaded adjustment device mounted in the fixture. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing required supports for cable attachment.4. For cord feed to the luminaire provide continuous cord clip of matching color to attach the cord

to the cable. 5. Support per manufacturer’s recommendations.

J. Cove Lighting:

1. Fluorescent cove lighting shall be installed so as to produce a continuous and unbroken band oflight with no shadows or light gaps.

2. A combination of 2 ft., 3 ft. and 4 ft. lamp fixtures may be required to accomplish a continuousband of light.

K. Mechanical Coordination:

1. Coordinate location of all hangers in rooms without ceilings with ductwork, plumbing piping,sprinkler piping, etc.

2. Make all necessary offsets and extensions so that stems and fixtures avoid beams, pipes, ducts,etc.

3. Where fixtures are located below heating, ventilation and air conditioning units, or ductwork andpiping, provide trapeze hangers around obstruction and suspend fixture from trapeze hanger. Donot suspend from duct.

L. Architectural Coordination:

1. Locate all hangers at intersections of joints or at center of blocks in rooms with acoustical tile orother patterned type of ceiling materials.

2. Space continuous row fixtures to conform to corresponding joint intersections.3. Coordinate all ceiling layouts and obtain Engineer’s approval before proceeding.4. Heights of fixtures not scheduled will be furnished on application to Engineer.5. Contractor is specifically required to verify ceiling construction and report in writing any

discrepancies between the ceiling type and the fixture type before releasing fixtures formanufacture.

6. Coordinate all under cabinet lights with Engineer before roughing.



M. Care of Fixtures:

1. Remove and replace with new, all broken glassware, plastic or fixtures damaged before finalacceptance at no additional expense to Owner.

2. No allowance made for breakage or theft before final acceptance.3. Immediately prior to occupancy, damp-clean all diffusers, glassware, fixture trims, reflectors,

lamps and replace burned-out lamps.

N. Wiring:

1. Fixture shall not be used as a raceway except as allowed in NEC, Article 410-31.2. Wiring to fixture shall be 90ECentigrade minimum.3. Provide servicing luminaire disconnect at fixture prior to the ballast.

3.02 GROUNDING:

A. Ground all non-current carrying parts of all lighting fixtures.

B. All grounding shall be accomplished with NRTL tested grounding connectors suitable for this purpose.

3.03 RETROFITTING EXISTING LUMINAIRES:

A. Retrofit existing luminaires where called for. Perform the following work for each retrofit luminaire:

1. Replace lamps. 2. Replace ballast(s). 3. Replace sockets. 4. Replace any cracked, discolored, or otherwise damaged lenses. Replacement lenses shall match

existing. 5. Clean lens and reflector surface with detergent solution and rinse with clear water. Assure no

streaks remain on surfaces.

3.04 LAMPS:

A. All lamps for new fixtures shall be installed new. Provide spare lamps as required to allow replacementof flickering or bad lamps. Provide labor and material to replace any failed lamp during the one (1) yearwarranty period. In the event that more than 10% of the lamps in a particular room or lot fail withintwelve (12) months of Project completion or earlier, the Contractor shall replace all lamps which wereprovided for that room or lot. Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for this work at no cost tothe Owner, and shall compensate the Owner for his personnel who provide access for the Contractor.

B. Clean all fixtures and lamps prior to requesting punch list.

C. Supply in O&M Manuals a list of lamps installed in light fixtures. Include manufacturer model number,lamp voltage and color temperature for each fixture type supplied.

3.05 SPARE LAMPS:

A. Provide the following spare lamps:



1. The greater of two percent or two (2) lamps of each size and manufacturer furnished.

3.06 BALLASTS:

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction. Provide labor and material to replace any failedballast during one (1) year warrantee period. In the event that more than 10% of the ballasts in anyparticular room, lot or type of fixture fail within twelve (12) months of Project completion or earlier, theContractor shall replace all ballasts which were provided for that room or lot or type of fixture. TheContractor shall provide all labor and materials for this work at no cost to the Owner, and shallcompensate the Owner for his personnel who provide access for the Contractor.

B. Supply in O&M Manual a list of ballasts installed in light fixture. Include manufacturer model numberfor each fixture type supplied.

3.07 SPARE BALLASTS:

A. Provide the following spare ballasts:

1. The greater of 2% or two (2) ballasts of each size and manufacturer furnished.

3.08 SPARE LED BOARDS & LED DRIVERS:

A. Provide the following spare LED boards or LED light engines:

1. The greater of 2% or two LED boards or LED light engines for each type of fixture.

B. Provide the following spare LED drivers:

1. The greater of 2% or two LED drivers for each type of driver employed on the project.

C. Spare parts are to be provided with first fixture shipment to allow for field replacement of any failedcomponents during construction in a timely manner.

D. Turn over all spare parts to the Owner as attic stock at completion of Project. Provide careful labelingand inventory control of each type of part with information on where it was installed, what fixture type,manufacturer, date and other related information. If any spare parts are utilized during construction toreplace any failed components, such parts shall be replenished prior to turn over.

E. If any single component (LED board, LED light engine or LED driver) demonstrates a failure rate acrossthe entire project in excess of 2% of the quantity provided within the first year, quantity of spare parts forthat particular component to be turned over to the Owner, shall be increased from 2% to 5%, as identifiedin Parts A. and B. above.

3.09 QUALITY CONTROL:

A. To ensure uniformity of product installed, provide the following steps to remediate recognizablevariations in light color and intensity:

1. Replace bulbs.2. Replace ballasts.



3. Replace fixture.


A. Immediately prior to acceptance, damp clean diffusers, glassware, luminaire trim, reflectors, lamps,louvers, lens and similar objects of all luminaires. Remove all dirt, corrosion, foreign material, fingermarks, and blemishes. Replace all burned out lamps and failed components.

3.11 REMOVAL OF BALLASTS IN EXISTING LUMINAIRES:

A. Assume ballasts contain PCB material unless labeled otherwise or test samples show materials are notPCB; submit a test report. Remove all ballasts from existing luminaires indicated on contract documents.Dispose of all ballasts which do not have non PCB labels in PCB containers and turn over to Owner fordisposal.

3.12 REMOVAL OF LAMPS IN EXISTING LUMINAIRES:

A. The Contractor shall provide containers and labels for the disposal of all fluorescent and HID laps. Turncontainers over to Owner for disposal.

3.13 AIMING AND ADJUSTMENT:

A. All adjustable lighting units shall be aimed, focused, locked, etc., by the Contractor under observation ofthe Architect, Engineer and/or Lighting Designer. It is the responsibility of the Contractor that all fixturesscheduled for aiming shall be operational prior to the aim work session. All aiming and adjusting shall becarried out after the entire installation is complete. All ladders, scaffolds, etc., required shall be furnishedby the Contractor. As aiming and adjusting is completed, locking setscrews and bolts and nuts shall betightened securely. The aiming and adjustment of luminaires must take place after the projects amenitieshave been completely installed. These amenities shall include but are not limited to plantings, furniture,artwork, graphics and signage.

B. Where possible, units shall be focused during the normal working day. However, where daylightinterferes with seeing, aiming shall be accomplished at night.



DIVISION 26 SECTION 26 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING AND PAGE 1SMOKESTOPPING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


SECTION 26 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Specification 07 84 13 - Penetration Firestopping applies to the work of this Section.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Provide firestopping and smokestopping for Electrical Systems to comply with the IBC 714.



1.03 SUBMITTALS:








a. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM).




1) ASTM E 119 Method of Fire Tests of Building Construction Materials.2) ASTM E 814 Test Method for Fire Tests of Through Penetration

Firestops.3) ASTM C 665 (Corrosion & Microbial Resistance Portions) Standard

Specification for Mineral-Fiber Thermal Insulation for Light FrameConstruction and Manufactured Housing.

4) ASTM E 90 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound TransmissionLoss of Building Partitions.

2. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and/or Factory Mutual Research Corporation for eachspecific intended application:


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL:

A. Firestopping and Smokestopping materials shall allow normal expansion and contraction (intumescent)of the penetrating item without failure of the penetrations seal, and shall be heat absorbing(endothermic). Products may not emit hazardous, combustible or irritating by-products during installationor curing. Products shall not require special tools for installation.


A. The Contractor shall note IBC 714.3.1 Exemption, which states:



b. The material used to fill the annular space shall prevent the passage of flame and hotgases sufficient to ignite cotton waste when subjected to ASTM E119 or UL 263time-temperature fire conditions under a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01inch (2.49 Pa) of water at the location of the penetration for the time period equivalent tothe fire-resistance rating of the construction penetrated.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturers: Provide products complying with requirements of the contract documents and made byone of the following:

1. Rectorseal.



2. Hilti, Inc.3. 3M Fire Protection Products.4. Specified Technologies Inc.5. U.S. Gypsum Company.6. Johns Manville.7. BlazeMaster.


A. Provide firestopping products which:

1. Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according torequirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases and maintain fire resistancerating of assembly.


B. Firestopping Flame Spread Performance Requirements:




D. FM approval in lieu of UL shall be accepted by the Owner.E. Where a specific firestopping product is identified on the drawings, either that product or a similar

product which has been tested in the exact application shown on the drawings shall be employed, afterreview by the Engineer.





2. Maintain at least the smoke resistance of the barrier penetrated.3. Firestop caulk shall be Johns Manville Firetemp Cl or approved equal.



PART 3 - EXECUTION





D. Inspection: The Authority Having Jurisdiction shall have final inspection review of all work performed.Contractor shall make modifications to completed and uncompleted work as directed by the AHJ at theContractor’s expense.


3.02 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE STOPPING ITEMS:



1. Conduits and raceways provided by Division 26.2. Other equipment or work provided by Division 26 which penetrates rated walls.

ATTACHMENT(S): Example Detail Sheet



EXAMPLE

DIVISION 27 SECTION 27 00 01 - AUDIO-VISUAL AND PAGE 1COMMUNICATIONS RACEWAY SYSTEM

DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS

SECTION 27 00 01 - AUDIO-VISUAL AND COMMUNICATIONS RACEWAY SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. The Work of Section 26 05 00 - Electrical Basic Materials and Methods and Section 26 05 01 - ElectricalCoordination Drawing Requirements apply to the Work of this Section.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Provide a complete, operating, tested, functioning, documented communication system including allwork shown, specified, or required for proper system operation.

B. Provide raceways, boxes, and pull strings for telephone, computer, cable TV and audio-visual systems.

C. Provide blank covers to match building standard for all unused boxes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL:

A. Provide products for raceways, boxes and pull strings for telephone, computer, and cable TV as detailedon Plans and Section 26 05 00 - Electrical Basic Materials and Methods.

B. Conduit sizing shall be coordinated with the telecommunications cabling/conduit fill schedule on Plans.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 RACEWAYS:

A. Provide raceways, boxes and fittings for telephone, computer, cable TV and audio-visual systems asshown.

B. Terminate open ended conduits or raceways with throat type nylon bushing.

3.02 PULL STRINGS:

A. Provide pull strings in each raceway.



DIVISION 28 SECTION 28 05 28 - FIRE ALARM RACEWAY SYSTEM AND CONDUCTORS PAGE 1

DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

SECTION 28 05 28 - FIRE ALARM RACEWAY SYSTEMS AND CONDUCTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The Contract Documents and the General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions ofthe Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1Specification Sections, apply to the Work of this Section.

B. The applicable provisions of Section 23 05 00 - HVAC Basic Materials and Methods and Work ofSection 26 05 00 - Electrical Basic Materials and Methods apply to the Work of this Section.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Provide raceways and conductors to support the modifications to the fire alarm and detection system.

B. The work of fire alarm raceways and conductors shall be performed by a single Contractor who shall alsobe responsible to provide the remainder of the Division 28 work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCTS:

A. Provide materials in conformance with Section 26 05 00.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL:

A. Provide raceway systems and conductors to support Division 28.

B. All raceways shall conform to the provisions of Section 26 05 00.

3.02 RACEWAY METHODS:

A. All Fire Alarm work shall be placed in raceway of one of the following types:

1. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Above ceiling as well as in concealed spaces and in mechanical andunfinished back of house spaces, and dry crawlspaces.

2. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit: Outdoors and in wet crawlspaces.3. Wiremold 700 Series or 2000 Series Raceway: Where specifically approved by the Engineer for

use on existing masonry walls.4. Type MC listed Fire Alarm Cable: Where fished into existing walls (walls not constructed as part

of this Project) or existing non-accessible ceilings.5. “Greenfield” Flexible Metallic Conduit: Where fished into newly installed or existing walls.6. Free Air Wire: Only for lengths not more than 18" where jumping from raceway to wire basket.


DIVISION 28 SECTION 28 05 28 - FIRE ALARM RACEWAY SYSTEM AND CONDUCTORS PAGE 2

7. In wire basket or wire trough together with other low voltage communications, security and firealarm conductors.

3.03 BOXES:

A. Provide boxes at all wiring, terminations and devices.

3.04 CONDUCTORS:

A. Conductors shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. Contractor shall provide all stranded conductors only.Contractor shall provide shielded conductors if required by the fire alarm equipment manufacturer.

3.05 WIRE MARKINGS:

A. Permanent conductor wire markings for all conductors; coordinated and recorded on As-Builts.

3.06 COLOR CODE:

A. Construction wire color code utilized throughout the project submitted for review by the Engineer.



DIVISION 28 SECTION 28 08 00 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM STARTUP & WITNESSED TESTING PAGE 1

DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

SECTION 28 08 00 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM STARTUP & WITNESSED TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1.02 DEFINITIONS:

A. Operational Acceptance Test:

1. Upon any changes to the system, operational acceptance testing shall apply as follows:

a. 100% of all safety functions known to have been modified shall be tested.b. 100% of all revised devices shall be tested.c. 10% of each type of initiating device shall be tested.

2. Provide all requirements of the operational acceptance test in the scheduled presence of the AHJ.3. Provide copies of the inspection and testing form and the record of completion form to the AHJ.

1.03 WORK INCLUDED:

A. On existing systems to be modified, provide baseline printout of fire alarm program.

B. Provide system startup.

C. Provide system troubleshooting.

D. Provide operational acceptance testing.

E. Provide completion of Fire Alarm Inspection and Testing Form. (Attached)

F. Provide completion of Fire Alarm Record of Completion Form. (Attached)

G. Provide submittals.

H. Provide testing methods per NFPA 72, 2007 - Section 10.4.2 Testing Methods.



1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Provide cut sheet of instruments to be used during testing including test gases and testing apparatus.

B. Provide printout of existing system programming prior to any changes by the project.

C. Provide testing technicians NICET Level II Certification or better.

1.05 SPECIFIC APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS:

A. The fire alarm system shall comply with the applicable provisions of the following referenced codes andstandards:

1. NFPA 13, 2013.2. 2017 New York State Uniform Code Supplement.3. Elevator Code, ASME A17.1-2013.4. NFPA 72, 2014.5. NFPA 720, 2015.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 TESTING:

A. Sensitivity Testing Smoke Detector Apparatus:

1. SDi Trutest, calibrated.2. Approved comparable apparatus.

B. Heat Detector Tester:

1. Solo 461.2. Approved comparable tester.

C. Functional Smoke Detector Tester:

1. Solo 330.2. Approved comparable tester.

D. Test Gases:

1. Smoke aerosol: Solo A4.2. Carbon monoxide: Solo C3.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 COORDINATION OF TESTING:

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating tests between the Owner’s representative and thefire alarm manufacturers.



B. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the operational acceptance test with the AuthorityHaving Jurisdiction (AHJ).

ATTACHMENT(S):

NFPA 72, Fire Alarm and Emergency Communication System Inspection and Testing Form NFPA 72, Fire Alarm and Emergency Communication System Record of Completion Form



DIVISION 28 SECTION 28 31 00 - FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEM PAGE 1

SECTION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

SECTION 28 31 00 - FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The Contract Documents and the General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions ofthe Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1Specification Sections, apply to the Work of this Section.

B. The Work of Section 26 05 00 - Electrical Basic Materials and Methods, Section 26 05 26 - Grounding,and Section 26 05 23 - Electrical Equipment Identification apply to the Work of this Section.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED:

The work of this Section shall include providing all materials, labor, services, permits and related work tofurnish a complete, operating, tested, functioning, documented Fire Alarm Detection System, includingall work shown, specified or required for proper system operation including but not limited to thefollowing:

A. Prior to construction start, check all loops and circuits for grounds and mapfaults. Identify circuit numberand location of any defects and provide a written report to the Engineer as a submittal. Provide a dirtydevice report for all devices $20% dirty.

B. Removal and protection of existing devices to be reused.

C. Demolition and removal of existing circuits, devices, and fixtures, where shown, removal of all debrisfrom site and proper disposal of same.

D. Protect existing system devices from entrance of construction dust, debris. Pay special attention to firealarm signal devices.

E. Maintain fire alarm, signaling and central reporting at all times.

F. Maintain reporting of tamper and flow events for active existing sprinkler system.

G. Disconnect and remove existing detection and signaling devices as shown.

H. Provide new addressable system detection devices as shown.

I. Provide new notification devices as shown.

J. Provide and install new conduit pathways and boxes for new fire alarm circuiting as shown on Drawings.

K. Install speaker notification devices provided by Engineer. Relocate existing CC-1 modules in ElevatorMachine Room.

L. Provide equipment and conductor identifications as per Division 26.



M. Provide testing of equipment and conductors as per Division 26.

N. Provide fire alarm system testing per Section 28 08 00.

O. Provide a clear “green” system with no troubles, grounds, mapfaults or devices $ 20% dirty.

P. Provide Certificate of Compliance and fees for permits and inspections.

Q. Provide openings in existing construction as required for the work of this Division.

R. Provide maintenance of system in good condition until final acceptance.

S. Provide Submittals, Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings as per Division 26.

T. Provide programming with designators approved by Owner.

U. Provide startup, testing and troubleshooting services as required.

V. Provide one (1) year warranty from date of final acceptance.

W. Provide Owner training.

X. Provide Operational and Maintenance Manuals in the form of a single composite electronic PDF file.

Y. Provide “As-Built” Drawings.

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTORS:

A. The Electrical Contractor proposing to perform the installation of the fire alarm and detection work shallhave experience in the installation, start-up and testing of power, network and data conductors andraceways for fire alarm systems and in the installation and start-up of addressable fire alarm anddetection systems similar to those specified.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR WORKFORCE:

A. The workforce of the Electrical Contractor proposing to perform the installation of the fire alarm anddetection work shall include, as a minimum, one foreperson (male or female), who has been forepersonon the installation of at least three addressable fire alarm and detection projects containing two hundredaddressable devices or more. The workforce shall also include a minimum of two workers of experienceequivalent to journeyman (male or female) qualifications, who are each experienced in the installationand start-up of cabling, raceway devices and equipment for addressable fire alarm systems in a conduitsystem with a minimum of two hundred addressable devices.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS OF FIRE ALARM SYSTEM VENDOR:

A. Fire alarm system vendor shall be approved by the equipment manufacturer to provide the sale,installation and maintenance of EST brand fire alarm systems by EST/GE Security.



B. Fire alarm system vendor shall provide a fire alarm technician responsible for programming, start-up,testing and other tasks as required to provide a complete, tested and fully operating fire alarm system.Technician shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in programming and installation of ESTBrand fire alarm systems, and/or a minimum of two (2) years experience in programming and installationof EST Brand fire alarm systems at the Syracuse University campus. Technician shall be manufacturerqualified and have a minimum of two (2) years experience on the EST-3 fire alarm control panel.

C. Fire alarm system vendor shall identify the name and relevant experience of the primary fire alarmtechnician in the submittal package for review. The Owner/Engineer reserves the right to reject any andall fire alarm technicians and request that alternate technicians be provided as required to ensure that acomplete, operational and tested fire alarm system is provided in a timely manner.

D. Fire alarm field technicians in charge of testing and commissioning shall have a NICET certification infire alarm systems, minimum of Level II.

E. Fire alarm project managers in charge of system design and submittal creation shall have a NICETcertification in fire alarm systems, minimum of Level IV.

1.06 AGENCY APPROVALS:

A. All equipment shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or approved by Factory Mutual or asaccepted by the authority having jurisdiction.

B. The fire alarm system in its entirety shall be in compliance with all applicable fire and electrical codesand comply with the requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction over said systems.

C. Accessory components as required shall be catalogued by the manufacturer and UL listed to operate withthe manufacturer’s control panel.

1.07 SPECIFIC U.L. PROVISIONS:

A. The system shall comply with the applicable provisions of the following U.L. Standards andClassifications:

1. #864, Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling System.2. UOJZ, Control Units, System.3. UOXX, Control Unit Accessories, System.

1.08 SPECIFIC NFPA STANDARDS:

A. The system shall comply with the applicable provision of the following current National Fire ProtectionAssociation (NFPA) standards:

1. NFPA 70 National Electric Code.2. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code.3. NFPA 90 A.4. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code.



1.09 SUBMITTALS:

A. General Requirements:

1. The installing Contractor shall be licensed by the State of New York to engage in the business ofinstalling fire alarm systems. Provide copy of valid license.

2. Delivery dates of the equipment to be supplied shall be furnished.3. Installation and final test/acceptance dates of the equipment installed shall be coordinated with

the inspector and shall be prior to the date of project substantial completion.4. Substituted equipment shall not be allowed.5. Provide copy of technician’s NICET certificate.6. Provide copy of Project Manager’s NICET certificate.

B. Fire Alarm System:

1. Contractor shall supply cut sheets for all proposed fire alarm system equipment, including butnot limited to:

a. Fire alarm conductors.

2. For projects expanding onto an existing fire alarm control system, it shall be the Contractorsresponsibility to supply product that can integrate under normal operation with the existingsystem.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Fire alarm shop drawings shall include, at a minium:

a. Title sheet with Project location, Owner, Engineer, installing Contractor’s address andcontact, along with a list of drawings in the package.

b. Device legend and symbols.c. Floor plans with all devices that make up the modifications to the system shown.d. Riser diagram with wire sizes and type.e. Control unit diagrams (i.e. fan shutdown).f. All pertinent wiring diagrams.g. Input/output matrix.h. Notification appliance circuit voltage drop calculations.

D. Satisfying the Entire Intent of these Specifications:

1. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to meet the entire intent of these Specifications. Deviationsfrom the specified items shall be at the risk of the Contractor until the date of final acceptance bythe Architect and Engineer.

2. All costs for removal, relocation, or replacement of a substituted item shall be at the risk of theElectrical Contractor.

1.10 CODES AND STANDARDS:

A. The Fire Alarm and Detection System shall comply with all local and state codes with no exception.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT MATERIAL AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. All equipment furnished for this project shall be new and unused. All components and systems shall bedesigned for uninterrupted duty. All equipment, materials, accessories, devices and other facilitiescovered by this specification or noted on contract drawings and installation specifications shall be thebest suited for the intended use and shall be provided by a single manufacturer. If any of the equipmentprovided under this Specification is provided by different manufactures, then that equipment shall berecognized as compatible by both manufacturers, and “Listed” as such by Underwriters’ Laboratories.

B. System installation and operations shall be verified by the manufacturer’s representative and averification certificate presented upon completion. The manufacturer’s representative shall beresponsible for an on-site demonstration of the operation of the system and initial staff training asrequired by the Consulting Engineer.

C. The system shall be capable of detecting the electrical location of each intelligent device.

2.02 SIGNAL MODULE:

A. Intelligent signal module shall provide one (1) signal power riser selector output, operating at either 25VRMS or 70V RMS.

B. EST Model SIGA-CC1 (individual mount) or SIGA-MCC1 (group-mounted on SIGA-U106 motherboardin MFC-A enclosure).

C. Provide group-mounted devices where shown or where local quantity of individually mounted deviceswould exceed three (3) devices of any type.

2.03 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE - VANDAL-RESISTANT SPEAKER FOR INSTALLATION INELEVATOR CARS:

A. Vandal-resistant, recess mount speaker suitable for 70V operation.

B. ¼ watt power output with red housing.

C. EST Model VTF-17UCR.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL:

A. Conform to Division 26 Specifications for installation and execution of work.

3.02 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM:

A. Coordinate closely with the Electronic Shop for routing of conduits and locating junction boxes in thebuilding trash rooms and recycle closets as shown.

B. Coordinate core drilling with building structure, avoid drilling next to columns and structural steel.



C. Allow a minimum 8 hours support for one electrician for start up after testing and troubleshooting of firealarm devices and modules during tie in of new system.

D. Coordinate fire alarm test period with the Electronic Shop for testing all functions of the fire alarmsystem.

3.03 SYSTEM OPERATION:

A. Operation of any alarm initiating device shall automatically:

1. Display on the control panel and identify any off normal condition and log each condition intothe system database as an event.

2. Sound all audible speaker appliances with a prerecorded message. Audible devices shall have theability to be silenced.

3. Activate all strobe appliances throughout the building. All strobe appliances throughout thebuilding shall be synchronized with each other, regardless of location or fire doors. Visualdevices shall be non-silenced unless the system is successfully reset.

4. Operate control relay contacts to shutdown all HVAC units serving the floor of alarm initiation.5. Operate control relay contacts to release all magnetically held smoke doors throughout the

building.6. Visually annunciate the individual point of alarm on all remote annunciator panels. The visual

indication shall remain on until the alarm condition is rest to normal.7. Transmit an alarm condition, via the integral central station communicator, to the public safety

office station/Local Fire Department (as required by the AHJ).8. Operation of any detection device located in spaces covered by preaction sprinkler systems shall

release waterflow to the piping in the space.

B. Programming:

1. The FACP messages must be approved by the Owner and AHJ. Custom messages shall beprovided as directed. Refer to the included labeling template on the following page for aguideline indicating the initial panel programming configuration.

2. FACP descriptors shall utilize room/space designations and numbers to be used by the facilityafter occupancy.

3. The Contractor shall allow for three (3) reprogrammings of the system as directed by the Owner.

C. SU Standard Device Descriptions:

1. Provide device descriptions and labels per Syracuse University Standard. Provide submittal ofproposed device labeling prior to final testing to the Engineer for review.

3.04 WIRING:

A. For fire alarm use, wire and cable shall be UL listed and a minimum of 18 AWG as required by localcodes and authority having jurisdiction. Provide stranded, twisted wire for communication circuits. Allfire alarm and detection circuits shall be in conduit, unless shown otherwise.

B. Provide wiring between main control panel devices as required for specified operation.



C. Raceways containing conductors identified as “Fire Protective Alarm System”. Conduit shall not containany other conductors and no AC current carrying conductors shall be allowed in the same raceway withthe D.C. fire alarm detection and signaling conductors.

D. All network and power wiring from panel to panel and from panel to annunciator shall utilize Class ‘A’wiring and shall be circuited with 2-hour rated Circuit Integrity Cabling in separate raceways.

E. Provide low voltage line surge protection on any circuit leaving the building (i.e. PIV tamper).

3.05 INSTALLER’S RESPONSIBILITIES:

A. The installer shall coordinate the installation of the fire alarm equipment with the manufacturer or hisauthorized distributor.

B. All conductors and wiring shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. It shall be the installer’s responsibility to coordinate with the supplier, regarding the correct wiringprocedures before installing any conduits or conductors.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS:

A. System components shall be installed in accordance with the latest revisions of the appropriate NFPApamphlets, the requirements contained herein, National Electrical Code, local and state regulations, therequirements of the fire department and other applicable authorities that have jurisdiction.

B. Low energy UL listed fire protective signaling circuit cable with 105EC insulation may be used whenallowed by the local authority having jurisdiction, however, all conductors shall be in conduit, unlessshown otherwise.

C. Installer shall verify that smoke detectors are mounted not less than three (3) feet from air supplydiffusers.

3.07 GUARANTEE AND FINAL TEST:

A. General:

1. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and wiring free from inherent mechanical andelectrical defects for one year (365 days) from the date of final acceptance.

B. Final Test: Before the installation shall be considered completed and acceptable by the Owner, a test onthe system shall be performed as follows:

1. The Contractor’s job foreman, in the presence of a representative of the manufacturer, arepresentative of the Owner and the fire department, shall operate each modified, moved,changed, etc. building fire alarm device to ensure proper operation of the device, and correctannunciation at the control panel, the remote annunciator and building alarms. 10% of un-modified fire alarm devices shall also be tested.

2. One half of all tests shall be performed on battery stand-by power.3. The signaling circuits shall be opened in at least two (2) locations per zone to check for the

presence of correct supervisory circuitry.



4. When the testing has been completed to the satisfaction of both the Contractor’s job foreman andthe representatives of the manufacturer and Owner, a notarized letter co-signed by each attestingto the satisfactory completion of said testing shall be forwarded to the Engineer and the firedepartment.

5. The Contractor shall leave the fire alarm system in proper working order, and without additionalexpense to the Owner, shall replace any defective materials or equipment provided by him underthis Contract, within one year (365 days) from the date of final acceptance by the Owner.

6. Prior to final test the fire department must be notified in accordance with local requirements.7. Final test shall only be allowed after all program changes have been made and input into the

system.

3.08 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS, TESTING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS:

A. As-Built Drawings:

1. A complete set of reproducible “As-Built” Drawings showing installed wiring, color coding andwire tag notations for exact locations of all installed equipment, shall be delivered to theEngineer upon completion of system.

B. Operating and Instruction Manuals:

1. Operating and instruction manuals shall be submitted prior to testing of the system. Providemanuals in the form of a single composite electronic PDF file to the Engineer prior to request forpunch list.

2. Testing Frequency Instructions: Complete, accurate, step-by-step testing instructions givingrecommended and required testing frequency of all equipment, methods for testing eachindividual piece of equipment and a complete trouble-shooting manual explaining how to test theprimary internal parts of each piece of equipment, shall be included in the operation andinstruction manuals.

3. Maintenance instructions shall be complete, easy to read, understandable, and shall provide thefollowing information:

a. Instruction on replacing any components for the system, including internal parts.b. Instructions on periodic cleaning and adjustment of equipment with a schedule of these

functions.c. A complete list of all equipment and components with information as to the address and

phone number of both the manufacturer and local supplier of each item.

C. User operating instructions shall be provided prominently displayed on a separate sheet located next tothe control unit in accordance with UL Standard #864.



DIVISION 28 SECTION 28 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING PAGE 1FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEMS

DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEMS

SECTION 28 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Provide firestopping and smokestopping for Electronic Safety and Security Systems to comply with IBC714.



1.02 SUBMITTALS:








a. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM).


1) ASTM E 119 Method of Fire Tests of Building Construction Materials.2) ASTM E 814 Test Method for Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops.



3) ASTM C 665 (Corrosion & Microbial Resistance Portions) StandardSpecification for Mineral-Fiber Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Constructionand Manufactured Housing.


2. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and/or Factory Mutual Research Corporation for eachspecific intended application.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL:

A. Firestopping and smokestopping materials shall allow normal expansion and contraction (intumescent) ofthe penetrating item without failure of the penetrations seal, and shall be heat absorbing (endothermic).Products may not emit hazardous, combustible or irritating by-products during installation or curing.Products shall not require special tools for installation.


A. The Contractor shall note IBC 714.3.1 Exemption, which states:



b. The material used to fill the annular space shall prevent the passage of flame and hotgases sufficient to ignite cotton waste when subjected to ASTM E119 or UL 263time-temperature fire conditions under a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01inch (2.49 Pa) of water at the location of the penetration for the time period equivalent tothe fire-resistance rating of the construction penetrated.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturers: Provide products complying with requirements of the Contract Documents and made byone of the following:

1. Rectorseal.2. Hilti, Inc.3. 3M Fire Protection Products.4. Specified Technologies Inc.



5. U.S. Gypsum Company.6. Johns Manville.7. BlazeMaster.


A. Provide Firestopping Products which:

1. Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according torequirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases and maintain fire resistancerating of assembly.


B. Firestopping Flamespread Performance Requirements:





E. Where a specific firestopping product is identified on the drawings, either that product or a similarproduct which has been tested in the exact application shown on the drawings shall be employed, afterreview by the Engineer.






PART 3 - EXECUTION







D. Inspection: The Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) shall have final inspection review of all workperformed. Contractor shall make modifications to completed and uncompleted work as directed by theAHJ at the Contractor’s expense.


3.02 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING ITEMS:



1. Raceways provided by Division 28.2. Conduits provided by Division 28.3. Other equipment provided by Division 28.

ATTACHMENT(S): Example Detail Sheet



EXAMPLE